B1864 90011_HP UX_Installing_Peripherials_Aug92 90011 HP UX Installing Peripherials Aug92

B1864-90011_HP-UX_Installing_Peripherials_Aug92 B1864-90011_HP-UX_Installing_Peripherials_Aug92

User Manual: B1864-90011_HP-UX_Installing_Peripherials_Aug92

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 760

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

HP-UX

Installing Peripherals
HP 9000 Series 300/400

Fli1l

':a11

HEWLETT

PACKARD

HP Part No. B 1864-900 11
Printed in USA August 1992
First Edition

Legal Notices
The information in this document is subject to change without notice.
Hewlett-Packard makes no warranty of any kind with regard to this manual,
including, but not limited to, the implied warranties of merchantability and
fitness for a particular purpose. Hewlett-Packard shall not be held liable for
errors contained herein or direct, indirect, special, incidental or consequential
damages in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this
material.
Warranty. A copy of the specific warranty terms applicable to your
Hewlett-Packard product and replacement parts can be obtained from your
local Sales and Service Office.

©copyright 1983-92 Hewlett-Packard Company
This document contains information which is protected by copyright. All rights
are reserved. Reproduction, adaptation, or translation without prior written
permission is prohibited, except as allowed under the copyright laws.
Restricted Rights Legend. Use, duplication or disclosure by the U.S.
Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph (c) (1) (ii)
of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS
252.227-7013 for DOD agencies, and subparagraphs (c) (1) and (c) (2) of the
Commercial Computer Software Restricted Rights clause at FAR 52.227-19 for
other agencies.

HEWLETT-PACKARD COMPANY
3000 Hanover Street
Palo Alto, California 94304 U.S.A.

Use of this manual and flexible disk( s) or tape cartridge( s) supplied for this
pack is restricted to this product only. Additional copies of the programs may
be made for security and back-up purposes only. Resale of the programs in
their present form or with alterations, is expressly prohibited.
©copyright 1980, 1984, 1986 AT&T Technologies, Inc.
UNIX is a registered trademark of Unix System Laboratories Inc. in the USA
and other countries.

©copyright 1979, 1980, 1983, 1985-90 Regents of the University of California
This software is based in part on the Fourth Berkeley Software Distribution
under license from the Regents of the University of California.
©copyright 1979 Regents of the University of Colorado, A Body Corporate.
This document has been reproduced and modified with the permission of the
regents of the University of Colorado, a body corporate.
©copyright 1986, 1987, 1988 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
©copyright 1986 Digital Equipment Corporation.
©copyright 1985-86, 1988 Massachusetts Institute of Technology.
X Window System is a trademark of the Massachusetts Institute of Technology.
MS-DOS and Microsoft are U.S. registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation.
OSF /Motif is a trademark of the Open Software Foundation, Inc. in the
U.S. and other countries. Certification for conformance with OSF /Motif user
environment pending.
All rights reserved.

Printing History
The manual printing date and part number indicate its current edition. The
printing date will change when a new edition is printed. Minor changes may be
made at reprint without changing the printing date. The manual part number
will change when extensive changes are made.
Manual updates may be issued between editions to correct errors or document
product changes. To ensure that you receive the updated or new editions, you
should subscribe to the appropriate product support service. See your HP sales
representative for details.
August 1992 ... Edition 1.

Contents
1.

Introd uction
Overview
..... .
Manual Organization
How to Use this Manual
Other References . . . .
Overview of Adding a Peripheral
Device Files . . . . . . . . .
Miscellaneous Device Files . .
The System Administration Manager (SAM)
Starting SAM . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Control Buttons. . . . . . . . . .
Using Softkeys in the Text-Terminal Interface
Getting Help in SAM . . .
Exiting SAM . . . . . . .
Entering a Functional Area .
The Object List
Using the Menubar
Menus . . . . .
Opening a Menu
Choosing a Menu Item
Using Buttons and Checkboxes .
Menu Buttons
Radio Buttons . . . . . .
Checkboxes . . . . . . .
Navigating with Keys and Key Combinations in the
Text-Terminal Interface .
HP-IB Device Guidelines. . .
HP -IB Cabling Information
SCSI Device Guidelines . . .
Calculating SCSI Cable Length Example.

1-1
1-2
1-3
1-4
1-5
1-7
1-8
1-10
1-10
1-10
1-11
1-13
1-13
1-14
1-15
1-15
1-16
1-16
1-17
1-18
1-18
1-19
1-20
1-21
1-23
1-26
1-27
1-31
Contents-1

RS-232-C Cabling Guidelines . .
Terminology and Background.
Pin Counts . . . .
Connector Gender
2.

Installing Interface and Accessory Cards
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP 98546A Display Compatibility Interface
Before Installing This Device . . . . . .
Installing the HP 98546A Display Compatibility Interface
HP 98622A GPIO (General Purpose I/O) Interface
Before Installing This Device . . . . . .
Installing the HP 98622A GPIO Interface
HP 98624A Standard-Speed HP-IB Interface
Before Installing This Device . . . . . .
Installing the HP 98624A HP-IB Interface
HP 98265A Small Computer Systems Interface (SCSI)
Before Installing This Device . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the HP 98265A Small Computer Systems Interface
(SCSI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP 98625A High-Speed HP-IB Disk Interface. .
Before Installing This Device . . . . . . . .
Installing the HP 98625A HP -IB Disk Interface
HP 98625B High-Speed HP-IB Disk Interface. .
Before Installing This Device . . . . . . . .
Installing the HP 98625B HP -IB Disk Interface
HP 98626A RS-232-C Interface . . . . . . .
Before Installing This Device . . . . . . .
Installing the HP 98626A RS-232-C Interface
HP 98628A Datacomm Interface . . . . . .
Before Installing This Device . . . . . . .
Installing the HP 98628A Datacomm Interface
HP 98629A/50961A SRM Interfaces . . . . . .
Before Installing This Device . . . . . . . .
Installing the HP 98629A (or 50961A) SRM Interface
HP 98642A 4-Channel Multiplexer Interface . . . . .
Before Installing This Device . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the HP 98642A 4-Channel Multiplexer Interface

Contents-2

1-33
1-33
1-34
1-34

2-1
2-4
2-5
2-6
2-9
2-9
2-11
2-14
2-14
2-16
2-19
2-19
2-20
2-23
2-24
2-26
2-29
2-29
2-31
2-35
2-35
2-37
2-41
2-41
2-43
2-46
2-46
2-47
2-50
2-50
2-52

HP 98638A 8-Channel Multiplexer Interface
Before Installing This Device . . . . . .
Supported Modems . . . . . . . . . .
Supported Plotters, Printers, and Terminals
Installing the HP 98638A 8-Channel Multiplexer Interface
HP 98643A Local Area Network (LAN) Interface . . . . .
Before Installing This Device . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the HP 98643A Local Area Network (LAN) Interface
HP 98644A Asynchronous Serial Interface . . . . . . .
Before Installing This Device . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the HP 98644A Asynchronous Serial Interface
HP 98562-66530 Human (System) Interface Board
Before Installing This Device . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the HP 98562-66530 Human (System) Interface
Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP 98248A Floating-Point Accelerator Accessory Card
Before Installing This Device . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the HP 98248A Floating-Point Accelerator
With a System Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Without a System Bus. . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP 98248B Floating-Point Accelerator Accessory Card
Before Installing This Device . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the HP 98248B Floating-Point Accelerator
In Models 330 and 360. . . . . . . . . .
In Model 370 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP 98635A Floating Point Math Accessory Card
Before Installing This Device . . . . . . . .
Installing the HP 98635A Floating Point Math Card
HP 98620B DMA Controller Accessory Card . . .
Before Installing This Device . . . . . . . . .
Installing the HP 98620B DMA Controller Card

2-55
2-56
2-58
2-59
2-60
2-64
2-64
2-65
2-68
2-68
2- 70
2- 74
2-74
2-76
2-84
2-84
2-85
2-86
2-87
2-88
2-88
2-89
2-90
2-91
2-93
2-93
2-94
2-96
2-96
2-97

Contents-3

Setting Up HP-UX for Interface and Accessory Cards
Adding Interface and Accessory Drivers . . . . . .

3-1

Installing Memory
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding Memory to Your System . . . . . . . . . .
Installing Memory Boards in a Model 320 Computer
Help with the Memory Configuration Wheel . . . .
Some Common Mistakes . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing Memory Boards in a Model 330 Computer
Optimizing Model 330 Performance . . . . . . . .
Installing Memory Boards in a Model 350 Computer
Identifying Existing RAM Boards .
Assigning the Addresses .
An Example . . . . . . . .
Installing the RAM Board . . .
Configuration Restraints on Computers with a System Bus
The Procedure .
In Case of Trouble . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Expanders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP 98568A and 98570A Backplane Expanders
HP 98577A VMEbus Expander . . . . . . . .

4-1
4-1
4-4
4-5
4- 7
4-8
4-10
4-12
4-13
4-15
4-17
4-18
4-18
4-19
4-23
4- 24
4-25
4-25

Installing Terminals and Modems
Introduction . . . . . . . . .
HP Terminals . . . . . . . . .
Before Connecting This Device
What You're Going To Do . . .
Connecting the Terminal to an RS-232-C Interface
What To Do Next. . . . . . .
HP Modems . . . . . . . . . .
Before Connecting This Device
What You're Going To Do . . .
Connecting the Modem to an RS-232-C Interface
What To Do Next. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-1
5-2
5-2
5-3
5-5
5-7
5-12
5-12
5-13
5-15
5-18

Contents-4

Setting Up HP-UX for Terminals and Modems Using SAM
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding a Terminal or Modem to Your System . . . . . . . .

6-1
6-1

Installing Disk and Tape Drives
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP C1707 A Series 6100 Model 600/ A HP-IB CD-ROM Drive.
Before Installing This Device . . . . . . . . . . .
What You're Going To Do . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting the Model 600/ A HP-IB CD-ROM Drive
HP A1999A Series 6100 Model 700/S SCSI CD-ROM Drive
Before Installing This Device . . . . . . . . . . . . .
What You're Going To Do . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting the HP Series 6100 Model 700/S CD-ROM Drive
Optical Disk Library Systems.
Before Installing This Device . . . . . . . .
What You're Going To Do . . . . . . . . .
Connecting the Optical Disk Library Systems.
HP C1701A/C Model 650GB Optical Disk Drives
Before Installing This Device . . . . . . . .
What You're Going To Do . . . . . . . . .
Connecting the Models 650 Optical Disk Drives.
HP 7907 A Disk Drive . . . .
Before Installing This Device . . . .
What You're Going To Do . . . . .
Connecting the HP 7907 A Disk Drive
HP 7911P /R, 7912P /R, and 7914P /R/CT Disk and Tape Drives
Before Installing This Device . . . . . . . . . . .
What You're Going To Do . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting the HP 7911/7912/7914 Disk/Tape Drives
HP 7933H/35H/36H/37H Disk Drives
Before Installing This Device . . . . . . . . .
What You're Going To Do . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting the HP 7933/35/36/37H Disk Drives
HP 7941A, 7942A, 7945A, 7946A Disk and Disk/Tape Drives.
Before Installing This Device
What You're Going To Do . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7-1
7-2
7-3
7-4
7-5
7-8
7-8
7-9
7-10
7-13
7-14
7-15
7-16
7-17
7-17
7-18
7-19
7-22
7-22
7-23
7-24
7-27
7-28
7-29
7-31
7-35
7-35
7-36
7-37
7-40
7-41
7-42

Contents-5

Connecting the HP 7941A/ 42A/ 45A/ 46A Disk and Disk/Tape
Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP 7957 A/57B/58A/58B and 7959B/62B/63B Disk Drives.
Before Installing This Device . . . . . . . . . . . . .
What You're Going To Do . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting the HP 7957A/57B/58A/58B and 7959B/62B/63B
Disk Drives . . . . . . . .
HP 7957/58/59S SCSI Disk Drives
Before Installing This Device . .
What You're Going To Do . . .
Connecting the HP 7957/58/59S SCSI Disk Drives
Flexible Disk Drives . . . . . . . . .
HP 9121D /S Flexible Disk Drives . .
HP 9122D/S/C Flexible Disk Drives.
HP 9125S Flexible Disk Drive
HP 9127A Flexible Disk Drive
Before Installing This Device .
What You're Going To Do . .
Connecting the Flexible Disk Drives .
HP 9133D /H/L and 9134D /H/L Disk Drives
Before Installing This Device . . . . . .
What You're Going To Do . . . . . . .
Connecting the HP 9133D /H/L and 9134D /H/L Disk Drives
HP 9153A/B and 9154A/B Disk Drives
Before Installing This Device . . . . . . . . . .
What You're Going To Do . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting the HP 9153 and 9154A/B Disk Drives
HPC220A/03A HP-IB Disk Drives
Before Installing This Device . . . . .
What You're Going To Do . . . . . . .
Connecting the C220A/03A Disk Drives
Mass Storage Systems . . . . . . . . .
C2213A and C2216T Mass Storage Systems
HP C2214B and C2217T Mass Storage Systems.
Before Installing This Device . . . .
What You're Going To Do . . . . .
Connecting the Mass Storage Systems .
HP 9144A/45A Tape Drive. . . . . .
Contents-6

7-43
7-46
7-46
7-47
7-48
7-51
7-51
7-52
7-53
7-56
7-56
7-56
7-56
7-56
7-57
7-58
7-60
7-63
7-63
7-64
7-68
7-71
7-72
7-73
7-76
7-79
7-79
7-80
7-82
7-85
7-85
7-85
7-86
7-87
7-89
7-92

Before Installing This Device . . . . . . .
What You're Going To Do . . . . . . . .
Connecting the HP 9144A/45A Tape Drive.
HP 7974A Tape Drive . . . .
Before Installing This Device . . . .
What You're Going To Do . . . . .
Connecting the HP 7974A Tape Drive
HP 7978A/B Tape Drives . .
Before Installing This Device . . . .
What You're Going To Do . . . . .
Connecting the HP 7978A/B Tape Drives
HP 7979A/7980A/7980XC Tape Drives
Before Installing This Device . . . . . .
What You're Going To Do . . . . . . .
Connecting the HP 7979A/7980A/7980XC Tape Drives
HP C1511A Series 6400 Model 1300H HP-IB DDS-Format Drive
Before Installing This Device . . . . .
What You're Going To Do . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting the HP C1511A Tape Drive . . . . . . . .
HP C1512A HP Series 6400 Model 1300S SCSI DDS-Format
Drive. . . . . . . . . .
Before Installing This Device . . . . . . . . . . . . .
What You're Going To Do . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting the HP C1512A SCSI DDS-Format Tape Drive.
HP C1520B/C1521B HP Series 6400 SCSI DDS-Format Tape
Drives . . . . . . . . .
Before Installing This Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
What You're Going To Do . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting the HP C1520A/C1521A SCSI DDS-Format Tape
Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.

Setting Up HP-UX for Disk and Tape Drives Using SAM
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Up HP- UX for a Disk Drive .
Setting Up HP- UX for a Tape Drive.

7-92
7-93
7-94
7-97
7-97
7-98
7-100
7-103
7-103
7-104
7-106
7-109
7-109
7-110
7-115
7-118
7-118
7-119
7-120
7-123
7-123
7-124
7-125
7-128
7-129
7-130
7-132

8-1
8-2
8-4

Contents-7

Installing Printers
Introduction . . . . . . . .
HP 2225A ThinkJet Printer
Before Installing This Device
What You're Going To Do .
Connecting the Printer
HP 2227 A/B QuietJet Plus and HP 2228A/B QuietJet Printers
Before Installing This Device
What You're Going To Do . . . .
Connecting the Printer . . . . .
HP 2563B, 2564B, and 2566B Printers
Before Installing This Device
What You're Going To Do . . . .
Connecting the Printer . . . . .
HP 2684A/D/P LaserJet 2000 Printer
Before Installing This Device
What You're Going To Do . . . .
Connecting the Printer . . . . .
HP 2686A/D LaserJet, HP 33440A LaserJet-II, and HP 33447A
LaserJet-IID Printer . . .
Before Installing This Device
What You're Going To Do .
Connecting the Printer
HP 33449A LaserJet III, HP 33459A LaserJet IIID, and HP
33491A LaserJet IIIsi Printers
Before Installing This Device
What You're Going To Do . .
Connecting the Printer
HP 2932A and HP 2934A Printers
Before Installing This Device
What You're Going To Do
Connecting the Printer
HP 3630A PaintJet Printer. .
Before Installing This Device
What You're Going To Do .
Connecting the Printer
HP C1602A PaintJet XL Printer
Before Installing This Device

Contents-8

9-1
9-2
9-2
9-3
9-4
9-7
9- 7
9-8
9-10
9-14
9-15
9-16
9-18
9-21
9-21
9-22
9-25
9-28
9- 28
9-29
9-31
9-34
9-35
9-36
9-38
9-41
9-41
9-42
9-43
9-46
9-46
9-47
9-49
9-52
9-53

10.

11.

What You're Going To Do . . . .
Connecting the Printer . . . . .
HP 2563/64/66/67C Impact Printers
Before Installing This Device
What You're Going To Do
Connecting the Printer

9-54
9-57
9-60
9-61
9-62
9-65

Setting Up HP-UX for Printers Using SAM
Adding a Local Printer . . . . . . . . .
Adding a Network-Based Printer Using SAM

10-2
10-3

Installing Plotters and Graphic Devices
Introduction . . . . . .
HP Plotters . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP 7550B Plus Plotter . . . . . .
HP C1600A/01A 7600 Series Models 240D and 240E Plotters.
HP C1620A Series 7600 Model 355 Electrostatic Plotter .
HP C1625A/27 A Series 7600 Models 250 and 255 Plotters
HP 7575/76A DraftPro DXL/EXL Plotters
What You're Going To Do . . .
Installing Your Plotter. . . . . . . . . .
Before you Install This Device . . . . .
Connecting Your Plotter to an HP-IB Interface
Connecting Your Plotter to a Parallel Interface .
Connecting Your Plotter to an RS-232 Interface
HP 9111A Graphics Tablet . .
Before Installing This Device . . . . . .
What You're Going To Do . . . . . . .
Connecting the HP 9111A Graphics Tablet
HP 45911A/C Graphics Tablet . . . . . .
HP 46087/88A Digitizers and HP 46089A Cursor .
HP 98627 A Color Video Output Interface
Before Installing This Device . . . . . . . .
What You're Going To Do . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the HP 98627 A Color Output Interface
HP 13279B Color Monitor . . .
Before Installing This Device
HP -UX Set Up Information

11-1
11-2
11-3
11-4
11-5
11-6
11-6
11-7
11-9
11-9
11-10
11-13
11-15
11-18
11-18
11-19
11-20
11-23
11-24
11-25
11-26
11-27
11-28
11-31
11-31
11-32

Contents-9

Connecting the HP 13279B Color Monitor . . . .
HP 98548/49/50A High Resolution Graphics Interface
Before Installing This Device . . . . . . . . . .
What You're Going To Do . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting the HP 98548/49/50A High Resolution Graphic
Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Select Code Settings and Minor Numbers . . . . . . . .
HP 98556A 2D Integer Based Graphics Accelerator Accessory
Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the HP 98556A 2D Graphics Accelerator
HP A1416A High Resolution Color Graphics Interface
Before Installing This Device . . . . . . . . . .
What You're Going To Do . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the HP A1416A High Resolution Color Graphics
Interface Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Select Code Settings and Minor Numbers . . . . . . .
HP 98700 CX Graphics Display Controller and The HP 98287 A
Graphics Display Controller Interface
Before Installing This Device . . . . . . . . . . .
What You're Going To Do . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the HP 98700 Graphics Display Controller
HP 98724A/25A Local Graphics Bus Interface . . . .
Before Installing This Device . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the HP 98724A/98725A Local Graphics Bus Interface
HP 98720A SRX Graphics Display Controller.
Before Installing This Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
What You're Going To Do . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the HP 98720A SRX Graphics Display Controller
HP 98726A Local Graphics Bus Interface . . . . . . .
Before Installing This Device . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the HP 98726A Local Graphics Bus Interface
HP 98730A TurboSRX Graphics Display Controller
Before Installing This Device . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP -UX Set Up Information . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting the HP 98730A TurboSRX Graphics Display
Controller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP 98702A Graphics Address and Data Bus Interface
Before Installing This Device . . . . . . . . . .
Contents-10

11-32
11-33
11-34
11-35
11-36
11-39
11-42
11-44
11-46
11-46
11-47
11-48
11-50
11-52
11-52
11-53
11-54
11-59
11-59
11-60
11-65
11-65
11-66
11-68
11-70
11-70
11-71
11-74
11-74
11-75
11-77
11-79
11-79

Installing the HP 98702A Graphics Address and Data Bus
Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP 98705A/B/C Graphics Display Controllers
Before Installing This Device . . . . . . .
HP-UX Set Up Information . . . . . . .
Installing the HP 98705A/B /C Graphics Display Controllers
HP 98735-66580 Physical DMA Interface. . . . . . . .
Before Installing This Device . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the HP 98735-66580 Physical DMA Interface
HP 98735-66581 Virtual DMA Interface . . . . . . .
Before Installing This Device . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the HP 98735-66581 Virtual DMA Interface
HP 98735A/36A/36B Graphics Display Controllers
Before Installing This Device . . . . . . . . . . .
HP -UX Set Up Information . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the HP 98735A/36A/36B Graphics Display
Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.

Setting Up HP-UX for Plotters Using SAM

13.

Installing HP-HIL Accessories
Introduction . . . . . . .
HP-HIL Device Constraints
Hard ware Overview . . . .
Software Installation
Summary of HP-HIL Devices
HP 35723A HP -HIL Touch Bezel
HP 45911A/C HP-HIL Graphics Tablet
HP 46020/21 HP-HIL Keyboard
HP 46060A/B HP-HIL Two/Three-Button Mouse.
HP 46080A HP-HIL Extension Module . . . . .
HP 46081A HP-HIL Extension/Speaker Module
HP 46082A/B HP-HIL Remote Extension Module
HP 46083A HP-HIL Rotary Control Knob
HP 46084A HP-HIL ID Module . . . . .
HP 46085A HP-HIL Control Dials Module
HP 46086A HP-HIL Button Box . . . .
HP 46087 A/88A Digitizer and HP 46089A Cursor .

11-80
11-84
11-85
11-86
11-87
11-90
11-91
11-92
11-96
11-97
11-97
11-102
11-102
11-103
11-105

13-2
13-3
13-4
13-5
13-7
13-7
13-7
13-8
13-8
13-8
13-8
13-8
13-8
13-9
13-9
13-9
13-9
Contents-11

HP 46094A HP-HIL Quadrature Port
HP 92916A HP-HIL Bar Code Reader
14.

Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX Commands
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ensuring the Device Driver is Part of the Kernel . . . . . . .
Adding Device Drivers to the Kernel Using HP- UX Commands
Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Booting the Standalone or Cluster Server Backup Kernel Using
the Boot ROM. . . . . . . . . . .
Restoring the Cluster Client Backup Kernel
Creating Device Files . . . .
Permissions for Device Files . . . . . .
Using the mknod Command . . . . .
Viewing the Device File Characteristics
Disk Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Device File Naming Conventions for Disk Drives
Minor Number Format for Disk Drives.
mknod Examples for Disk Drives
CS80-type Hard Disk Drive
Amigo-type Hard Disk Drive
SCSI-type Hard Disk Drive.
650/ A Optical Drive
Optical Library System
Tape Drives . . . . . . .
Device File Naming Conventions and Minor Number Format
for Tape Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-Track Magnetic Tape Drive Device File Naming
Convention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-Track Magnetic Tape Drive Minor Number Format
Cartridge Tape Drive Device File Naming Convention
Cartridge Tape Drive Minor Number Format . . . .
DDS-Format Tape Drive (DAT) Device File Naming
Convention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DDS-Format Tape Drive (DAT) Minor Number Format
Terminals and Modems . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Summary of Steps to Set Up a Terminal or Modem

Contents-12

13-10
13-10

14-1
14-2
14-4
14-4
14-5
14-10
14-11
14-12
14-13
14-14
14-15
14-16
14-18
14-19
14-19
14-19
14-20
14-20
14-20
14-21
14-22
14-25
14-25
14-26
14-29
14-29
14-31
14-32
14-35
14-36

Device File Naming Conventions . . . . . . . .
Minor Number Format for Terminals and Modems
Adding an Entry to the letc/ttytype File
Adding an Entry to the letc/inittab File.
Removing A Terminal
Pseudo Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . .
Plotters and Digitizers . . . . . . . . . .
Device File Naming Convention for Plotters and Digitizers
Minor Number Format for HP-IB Plotters and Digitizers.
Minor Number Format for RS-232-C Plotters.
Printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Device File Naming Conventions for Printers .
Minor Number Format for HP-IB Printers . .
Minor Number Format for RS-232-C Printers.
Graphics Display Devices
HP-HIL Devices
GPIO Devices
A.

ElISA Configuration
Introduction to ElISA Board Configuration
How to Use this Appendix
Introduction .
ISA Boards
EISA Boards
cfg Files . .
How eisa_config Works
Automatic Mode . .
Interactive Mode . .
Adding Device Drivers to the Kernel
Adding HP Drivers to the Kernel Using SAM .
Adding HP Drivers to the Kernel Using HP -UX Commands
Adding Non-HP Drivers to the Kernel Using HP-UX
Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring EISA Boards Using Automatic Mode . . .
Using eisa_config in Automatic Mode . . . . . . .
Setting Switches and Jumpers Using Automatic Mode
Adding an EISA Board Using SAM and Automatic Mode

14-36
14-38
14-41
14-42
14-44
14-45
14-47
14-47
14-49
14-50
14-52
14-52
14-54
14-56
14-58
14-60
14-61

A-1
A-1
A-3
A-3
A-3
A-4
A-6
A-6
A-7
A-8
A-8
A-12
A-13
A-15
A-15
A-17
A-18

Contents-13

Adding an EISA Board Using HP- UX Commands and
Automatic Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-19
Adding an HP EISA Board Using HP-UX Commands and
Automatic Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-19
Adding a Non-HP EISA Board Using HP-UX Commands
and Automatic Mode. . . . . . . . . . .
A-21
Moving an EISA Board Using Automatic Mode. .
A-23
Removing an EISA Board Using Automatic Mode.
A-24
Configuring ElISA Boards Using Interactive Mode
A-25
Using eisa_config in Interactive Mode . . . .
A-26
Starting in Interactive Mode . . . . . . . .
A-26
Getting Online Help Using Interactive Mode .
A-29
Viewing Board Information Using Interactive Mode
A-29
Displaying Board Configuration Using Interactive Mode
A-30
Initializing the Configuration Using Interactive Mode.
A-32
Saving the Configuration and Exiting Using Interactive Mode A-32
Setting Switches and Jumpers Using Interactive Mode
A-34
Adding an ElISA Board Using Interactive Mode
A-35
Moving an ElISA Board Using Interactive Mode . . .
A-38
Removing an ElISA Board Using Interactive Mode . .
A-40
Changing Choices for Board Functions Using Interactive Mode
A-41
Sample Interactive Session
A-43
Starting eisa_config
A-43
Displaying cfg Files . .
A -44
Adding a Board
A-44
Displaying Board Information
A-45
Exiting eisa_config . . . . .
A-46
Displaying Switch and Jumper Settings
A-47
Troubleshooting ElISA Board Configuration
A-48
Added Board Does Not Work.
A-48
Moved Board Does Not Work
A-50
Board Stops Working . . . .
A-51
Board Configuration Conflicts
A-51
No NVM Driver . . . . . .
A-51
Two cfg Files Have the Same Name
A-52
ElISA Board Power Up Messages . .
A-53

Contents-14

Series 400 Support Matrix
Introduction . . . . . .
Series 400 System Processors
Series 400 Disk Drives . . .
Series 400 Magnetic Tape Drives
Series 400 Consoles and Terminals
Series 400 Human Interface
Series 400 Text Printers . . .
Series 400 Graphics Devices
Series 400 Datacomm Devices
Series 400 Interfaces . . .
Support Status Glossary

B-1
B-2
B-11
B-20
B-24
B-30
B-33
B-39
B-53
B-57
B-65

Index

Contents-15

Figures
1-1.
1-2.
1-3.
1-4.
2-1.
2-2.
2-3.
2-4.
2-5.
2-6.
2-7.
2-8.
2-9.
2-10.
2-11.
2-12.
4-1.
4-2.
4-3.
4-4.
4-5.
4-6.
4-7.
4-8.
11-1.
11-2.
11-3.
11-4.
11-5.
11-6.

Daisy-Chained HP-IB Devices
Piggy-Backed HP-IB Connectors
SCSI Connections . . . . . . .
SCSI Connectors . . . . . . .
Display Compatibility Interface switches
HP 98622A GPIO Switches and Jumpers
HP 98624A HP-IB Interface Switches
HP 98625A Disk Interface switches . . .
HP 98625B Disk Interface Switches . . .
HP 98626A RS-232-C Serial Interface Switches
98628A Datacomm Interface Switches . . . .
HP 98642A 4-Channel Multiplexer Interface Switches
HP 98638A 8-Channel Multiplexer Interface Assemblies
HP 98638A 8-Channel Multiplexer Interface Switches
HP 98644A Asynchronous Serial Interface Switches .
....
Human (System) Interface Board Switches
Setting Switches on the New HP 98258A RAM board
Display Showing Amount of RAM Installed
Built-in RAM Switch Settings
Address Worksheet . . . . . . . .
Completed Address Worksheet . . .
RAM Board Address Switch Location
16-Mbyte Address Setting .
Power-up Display . . . . . . . . .
HP 45911C Graphics Tablet . . . .
HP 98627A Color Video Output Interface Switches
Graphics Interface Placement. . . . . . . .
Graphics Interface and HP 98556A Accelerator
Graphics Display Controller Interface switches
HP 98724A LGB Interface Switches
....

Contents-16

1-23
1-24
1-27
1-28
2- 7
2-10
2-15
2-25
2-30
2-36
2-42
2-51
2-57
2-61
2-69
2-75
4-8
4-9
4-10
4-16
4-17
4-20
4-20
4-22
11-23
11-25
11-38
11-43
11-55
11-60

11-7.
11-8.
11-9.
11-10.
11-11.
11-12.
11-13.
11-14.
14-1.
A-I.

HP 98725A LGB Interface Switches
...... .
HP 98702A Interface Default Address Switch Setting
HP 98705A/B/C Inventory. . . . . . . . . . . .
Display Showing Boot Up Sequence with HP 98705B as
Console . . . . . .
Physical DMA Interface . . . .
Virtural DMA Interface . . . .
HP 98735A/36A/36B Inventory.
Display Showing Boot Up Sequence with HP 98735B as
Console . . . . . . . . . . .
Terminal and Modem Connections
eisa_config Display . . . . . . .

11-61
11-81
11-84
11-89
11-90
11-96
11-104
11-107
14-35
A-27

Contents-17

Tables
1-1.
1-2.
1-3.
1-4.
1-5.
1-6.
1-7.
1-8.
1-9.
2-1.
2-2.
2-3.
4-1.
4-2.
4-3.
4-4.
4-5.
4-6.
4- 7.
5-1.
5-2.
5-3.
5-4.
7-1.
7-2.
7-3.

Default Device Files
Function Keys for SAM's Text-Terminal Interface
Help in SAM . . . . . .
Menus and Menu Items . . . . . . . . .
Meanings of Selected Keys . . . . . . . .
Example of SCSI Cable Length Calculation
RS-232-C Interconnections . . .
RS-232-C Host Connector Types . . . . .
Peripheral Types . . . . . . . . . . . .
Device Drivers for Interface and Accessory Cards
HP 98638A Supported Modems . . . . . . . .
HP 98638A Supported Plotters, Printers, and Terminals
Maximum Installable RAM . . . . . . . .
Series 300/400 RAM Card Support on HP-UX
RAM Board Inventory Table
RAM Board Identification .
RAM Board Identification .
RAM Board Inventory Table
Expanders Available. . . .
HP Terminals Connected to RS- 232- C Interfaces
Recommended Terminal Characteristics
HP Modems . . . . . . . .
. ................ .
HP C1707A Setup Information . . . .
HP A1999A Model 700/S CD-ROM Drive Setup Information
HP Optical Disk Library Autochanger Configuration
Information . . . . . . . .
7-4. HP C1701A/C Setup Information .
7-5. HP 7907 A Setup Information. . .
7-6. HP 7911/12/14 Setup Information

Contents-18

1-9
1-12
1-13
1-16
1-21
1-31
1-35
1-36
1-37
2-2
2-58
2-59
4-2
4-3
4-13
4-14
4-14
4-15
4-24
5-4
5-8
5-14
5-17
7-4
7-9
7-15
7-18
7-23
7-30

7-7. HP 7933/35/36/37H Setup Information . . . . . . . . .
7-8. HP 7941A/42A/45A/46A Disk and Disk/Tape Drive Setup
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-9. HP 7957 A/57B/58A/58B and HP 7959B/62B/63B Setup
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-10. HP 7957S/58S/59S Setup Information . . .
7-11. HP 9121 and HP 9121D Setup Information.
7-12. HP 9122 and HP 9122D Setup Information.
7-13. HP 9125S Setup Information . . . . . . .
7-14. HP 9127 A Setup Information . . . . . . .
7-15. HP 9133/34 (select code 14) Setup Information
7-16. HP 9133/34 (select code 7) Setup Information
7-17. HP 9133/34 (select code 8) Setup Information
7-18. HP 9153 and 9154A/B/ (select code 14) Setup Information.
7-19. HP 9153A/54A (select code 7) Setup Information
7-20. HP 2200/03 Setup Information . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-21. HP Mass Storage Systems Setup Information . . . . . . .
7-22. Examples of SCSI Devices Used with Mass Storage Systems
7-23. HP 9144A/45A Setup Information . . . . . . . . .
7-24. HP 7974 Setup Information . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-25. HP 7978A/B Tape Drive Connected to Built-in HP-IB
Interface (Select Code 7) . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-26. HP 7979/80A Tape Drive Connected to HP 98625 Disk
Interface (Select Code 14). . . . . . . . . . . .
7-27. HP 7979/80A Tape Drive Connected to Built-in HP-IB
Interface (Select Code 7) . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-28. HP 7980XC Tape Drive Connected to HP 98625 Disk Interface
(Select Code 14) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-29. HP 7980XC Tape Drive Connected to Built-in HP-IB Interface
(Select Code 7) . . . . . . . . .
7-30. HP C1511A HP-IB DDS-Format Drive
7-31. C1512A SCSI DDS-Format Drive
7-32. C1520B SCSI DDS-Format Drive
7-33. C1521B SCSI DDS-Format Drive
7-34. C1520/21B Switch Settings
9-1. HP 2225A ThinkJet Connected to an HP-IB Interface
9-2. HP 2227 A/28A Connected to RS-232-C Interfaces.
9-3. HP 2227B/28B Connected to HP-IB Interfaces . . .

7-36
7-42
7-47
7-52
7-58
7-59
7-59
7-60
7-65
7-66
7-67
7-74
7-75
7-81
7-87
7-88
7-93
7-99
7-105
7-111
7-112
7-113
7-114
7-119
7-124
7-130
7-131
7-133
9-3
9-9
9-10

Contents-19

9-4. Interface Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-5. HP 2563/64/66B Connected to Built-in HP-IB Interface (Select
Code 7). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-6. HP 2563/64/66B Connected to HP 98624 HP-IB Interface
(Select Code 8) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9- 7. Interface Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-8. HP 2684A/D Connected to RS-232-C Interfaces.
9-9. HP 2684A/D Connected to a Parallel Interface .
9-10. Interface Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-11. HP 2686A/D, 33440A, or 33447A Connected to RS-232-C
Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-12. Interface Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-13. HP LaserJet III, IIID or Illsi Printer Connected to a Parallel
Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-14. HP LaserJet III, IIID or IIIsi Printer Connected to RS-232-C
Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-15. Interface Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-16. HP 2932/34A Connected to HP-IB Interfaces. . .
9-17. HP 3630A PaintJet Connected to HP-IB Interfaces
9-18. HP 3630A PaintJet Printer Connected to RS-232-C Interfaces
9-19. Interface Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-20. HP C1602A PaintJet XL Printer Connected to HP-IB
Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-21. HP C1602A PaintJet XL Printer Connected to a Parallel
Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-22. HP C1602A PaintJet XL Printer Connected to RS-232-C
Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-23. Interface Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-24. HP 2563/64/66/67C Impact Printers Connected to HP-IB
Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-25. HP 2563/64/66/67C Impact Printers Connected to a Parallel
Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-26. HP 2563/64/66/67C Impact Printers Connected to RS-232-C
Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-27. Interface Options . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-1. Plotter Models and Supported Interface Types
11-2. HP Plotters Connected to HP-IB Interfaces
11-3. HP Plotters Connected to a Parallel Interface
Contents-20

9-11
9-16
9-17
9-19
9-23
9-24
9-26
9-30
9-32
9-36
9-37
9-39
9-42
9-47
9-48
9-50
9-54
9-55
9-55
9-58
9-62
9-63
9-64
9-66
11-2
11-7
11-8

11-4.
11-5.
11-6.
11-7.
11-8.
11-9.
11-10.
11-11.
11-12.
11-13.
11-14.
11-15.
11-16.
11-17.
11-18.
11-19.
11-20.
11-21.
11-22.
13-1.
14-1.
14-2.
14-3.
14-4.
14-5.
14-6.
14-7.
14-8.
A-I.
A-2.

HP
HP
HP
HP
HP

Plotters Connected to an RS-232-C Interface . . .
11-8
9111A Connected to Built-in HP-IB Interface . . .
11-19
98627 Color Output Interface HP-UX Set Up Values.
11-27
13279B Color Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-32
98548/49/50A High Resolution Graphic Interface HP-UX
Set Up Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-35
HP 98548/49/50A High Resolution Graphic Interface HP-UX
Setup Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-40
HP A1416A High Resolution Color Graphics Interface HP- UX
Setup Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-47
HP 1416A High Resolution Color Graphics Interface HP- UX
Setup Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-50
98700 Graphics Display Controller Set to External Addressing
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-53
98700 Graphics Display Controller Set to Internal Addressing
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-53
HP 98720A Set to Internal Addressing Mode . . . . . .
11-66
HP 98720A Set to External Addressing Mode (Select Code
26-27, 28-29, 30-31) . . . . .
11-67
HP 98726A/98730A DIO-I Settings . . . . . . .
11-75
HP 98726/98730A DIO-II Settings . . . . . . .
11-76
HP 98702 Graphics Interface HP- UX Setup Values
11-82
HP 98702 Graphics Interface HP- UX Setup Values
11-86
HP 98735-66580 Physical DMA Interface HP- UX Setup Values 11-93
HP 98735-66581 Virtual DMA Interface HP- UX Setup Values
11-99
HP 98735-66580 Physical and Virtual DMA Interface HP- UX
Setup Values . . . . . .
11-103
HP -HIL Device Requirements . . . . . . . .
13-6
Device Drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14-3
Kernel Driver & Major Numbers for Disk Drives
14-17
Kernel Driver and Major Numbers for Tape Drive.
14-24
Tape Density and Unit Number Bit Settings
14-27
Magnetic Tape Operation Bit Settings
14-27
DDS Tape Operation Bits 0 - 3 .
14-33
EXAMPLES of Possible Settings
14-33
General Template for Ports
14-39
Basic Commands
A-28
Help Commands . . . . .
A-29
Contents-21

A-3. Comment Commands
A-4. Display Commands
A-5. efg File Commands .

Contents-22

A-30
A-31
A-32

1
Introduction
Overview
This manual is intended for System Administrators. It supplies the information
you will need to enable peripheral devices to communicate with the HP- UX
operating system. It does not provide information on built-in devices. Refer to
the Owner's Guide for the specific computer model you own for configuration
information on built-in devices.
Peripheral installation on your S300 / 400 system is comprised of two parts:
• Connecting the device to your computer, and
• Configuring your HP- UX operating system to communicate with the device.

Note

The information in this manual was accurate at time of
printing. However, support status for peripheral devices
changes rapidly. For up-to-date support status on peripheral
devices, contact your customer support engineer or HP sales
and service representative.

Introduction

1-1

Manual Organization
The Installing Peripherals manual has a "paired" chapter organization. For
each family of devices you will find:
An "Installing ... "chapter

containing hardware installation guidelines
and configuration values,

followed by:
A "Setting-Up ... "chapter

containing HP- UX configuration instructions.

For example, Chapter 7, "Installing Disk and Tape Drives", is followed by
Chapter 8, "Setting Up HP- UX for Disk and Tape Drives Using SAM".
The "Setting-Up ... " chapters give the necessary procedures to set up
your device using SAM (the System Administration Manager). SAM is a
menu-driven system administration tool discussed later in this chapter. If
SAM is not available, use Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX
Commands" to learn how to set up HP- UX for devices using commands.
The manual's organization is:
• Chapter 1 "Introduction"
• Chapters 2-13 Device-specific chapters in pairs
• Chapter 14 "Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX Commands"
• Appendix A "ElISA Configuration"
• Appendix B "Series 400 Support Matrix"
• Index

1-2

Introduction

How to Use this Manual
Before you install a new peripheral device, be sure you are familiar with the
information presented in this Introduction.
This chapter:
• Summarizes the steps to follow to install most peripheral devices.
• Introduces the System Administration Manager (SAM), a menu-driven
program that can help you install and configure new peripherals.
• Provides generic installation guidelines that apply to specific types of device
interfaces.
When you are ready to install your new peripheral, turn to the chapter
that discusses the type of device you are installing. For example, if you are
installing a disk drive, turn to Chapter 7, "Installing Disk and Tape Drives"
and find the specific disk drive you are installing. Follow the installation
instructions given for your particular disk drive. Then go to the following
chapter for instructions on finishing the installation using SAM.
If you are not using SAM to install your new peripheral device, turn to
Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices Using HP- UX Commands" to finish the
installation. Chapter 14 covers the information you will need to set up a device
using HP-UX commands.

Introduction

1-3

Other References
The following documents will help you when you install and manage peripheral
devices.
• The installation manual for your new device
• System Administration Tasks manual, HP part number B1864-90010
• HP- UX Reference, HP part number B2355-90033
• Managing Clusters of HP 9000 Computers, HP part number B1864-90015, if
your system is part of an HP -UX cluster
• How HP-UX Works: Concepts for the System Administrator, HP part
number B2355-90029, for conceptual information

1·4 Introduction

Overview of Adding a Peripheral
Nine basic steps are required to add peripheral devices to your system. The
following generic procedure highlights these steps. Consult the appropriate
chapter in this manual for specific information on the peripheral you are
connecting.
1. Verify that the device drivers required for this device are included in your

currently running kernel configuration file (usually the I etel eonf I dfile).
If you are adding a device that utilizes an interface type that is new on your
system, you may have to add the necessary device drivers to the kernel
configuration file. To verify that the necessary drivers, are part of your
current kernel configuration file, you can:

• Use SAM for the whole procedure. SAM will check your dfile for the
necessary device drivers, add any that are missing, and reconfigure the
kernel for you at this time.
or
• Look in your dfile for the drivers. If the drivers are in your kernel
configuration file, go on to step 2 now.
If the drivers are not in the lete/eonf/dfile, or are commented out with
a comment symbol (such as the * sign), edit the dfile to either add the
drivers or remove the comment marks. You must reconfigure the kernel if
you edit the dfile for any reason.

2. Play it safe.
a. Shut down and halt the system using the lete/shutdown -h command.
If you are operating in a diskless cluster, see Managing Clusters of HP
9000 Computers for additional information on shutting down the system.

b. TURN OFF the computer and unplug the power cord.
This step is highly recommended for all devices; for SCSI devices and
interface cards, it is required.

Introduction

1-5

3. Determine the hardware address or location of the peripheral. The best
location to connect your peripheral depends on the shared sets of I/O
resources and the expected usage. For example, you would not want to
connect a plotter to the same HP-IB interface as your root disk. This would
substantially degrade your disk performance. A better location for the
plotter would be on a separate HP-IB interface with other, slower devices.
4. Ensure that all power switches on the device and on the computer are in the
OFF position.
5. Install the peripheral. This can involve two steps:
a. Installing an interface card (however, the interface card will most often
already be installed)
b. connecting the peripheral to the interface card
6. Connect the power cord and power on the device.
7. Reconnect the power cord to your computer and turn it on. This will cause
your system to reboot.
8. Determine how the peripheral is to be accessed: block or character (raw)
mode. A device file must exist for each type of access to the peripheral.
9. Create the necessary device files to communicate with the peripheral.
Device files are located in the / dev directory. If you are using SAM to add
your device, SAM will create the device file. If you are not using SAM, use
the mknod command to create the device file.

Caution

1-6

If your system is a cluster, you must be logged into the cluster
node to which the device is physically connected when you use
SAM or HP -UX commands to add the device.

Introduction

Device Files
The HP- UX operating system requires special files, called device files, to
perform I/O to peripheral devices. Each peripheral on your system needs a
device file associated with it for HP- UX to communicate with the peripheral.
Device files are created using the mknod(lM) command. If you use SAM, SAM
will automatically create device files for you when you add the peripheral to
your system. If you do not use SAM, you must create device files by executing
the mknod command. Adding your peripheral using the mknod(1M) command
is described in Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices Using HP- UX Commands".
Device files contain the code for the following peripheral attributes:
Select Code

All peripherals connect to an interface card, either built-in
or added onto your computer. The interface card has
switch settings on it that identify the interface card on the
DIO bus. These switch settings are referred to as the select
code. Each interface card must have a unique select code.
Select codes zero through seven are reserved.

Bus Address or
Port Number

There are interfaces to which more than one device can
connect. For these interfaces (HP-IB, SCSI, RS-232C
multiplexers, etc.) the device is assigned a number. This
number is the bus address for HP-IB and SCSI interfaces
and the port number for RS-232C interfaces that, like
multiplexers, have more than one port.

Device Type

Each device can be classified as a block device or a
character device depending on the method used to transfer
data to and from the device.

Device Driver

Each device has a software module, called a device
driver, that arbitrates communication between HP- UX
and the device. The device drivers are listed in the
/ etc/master file. The driver must be included in the
kernel configuration file, usually the / etc/ conf / df ile.

Device
Information

Additional information that is device specific is contained
in the device file. For example, a tape drive can be
instructed to rewind or not rewind after an access.

Introduction

1-7

There are four parameters to the mknod(lM) command:
•
•
•
•

device filename (absolute or relative)
file type
major number
minor number

Naming conventions for device filenames are given in Chapter 14, "Setting
Up Devices Using HP- UX Commands". These naming conventions are
recommended for consistency.
The file type parameter specifies a block or character device type.
The major number specifies the driver in numeric form. The driver needed
for each specific peripheral is listed in a table in the section covering that
peripheral in this book. Another way to find out which drivers are needed for a
particular peripheral is to look in the / etc/master file for a list of drivers and
a product number/driver alias table. Look up your product number in the alias
table; you will see the associated driver number. For example, if you look up
9122, you will see that you need a es80 driver.
The minor number parameter contains the select code, bus address or
port number, and the additional device information encoded in a six-digit
hexadecimal number, for example OxOe020 1. The minor number format
varies from device type to device type. The minor number format for each
device type is described in Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX
Commands".

Miscellaneous Device Files
The miscellaneous device class includes the device files that the system
needs to run properly. Each HP- UX installation must have the device files
/dev/null, /dev/eonsole, /dev/mem, /dev/kmem, /dev/swap /dev/root,
dev/rroot and /dev/tty. The device file /dev/null is a null file (a "bit
bucket") used by many HP-UX commands. The device file /dev/eonsole
identifies the system console and the device file / dev /tty is a synonym for the
control terminal associated with a process group.
These miscellaneous device files are copied to your system when HP- UX
is installed. Do not change or modify them. If one or more of these files is
accidentally deleted or otherwise destroyed, you can recreate it with the mknod

1-8

Introduction

command using the character jblocked designation, major, and minor numbers
given in Table 1-l.
Although there are additional device files created when HP- UX is installed,
only the ones listed in Table 1-1 are vital to booting and running HP- UX.
Table 1·1. Default Device Files

File
Type

Major
Numbel

Minor
Number

/dev/console

OxOOOOOO

System message port

/dev/syscon

OxOOOOOO

System console (linked to
console)

/dev/systty

OxOOOOOO

System tty (linked to console)

/dev/tty

OxOOOOOO

Process group control terminal

/dev/null

OxOOOOO2

Null file ("bit bucket")

/dev/rnern

OxOOOOOO

Physical memory image

/dev/krnern

OxOOOOO1

Kernel virtual memory image

/dev/swap

OxOOOOOO

Swap device

/dev/root

255

Oxffffff

Root device

/dev/rroot

255

Oxffffff

Root device

Device
File

Device
Description

The / dev /root device file is the block device file that always refers to the
current root device. The / dev /rroot file is the character device file referring to
the root device. The major and minor number for these devices does not refer
to a physical device address. However, there will also need to be an entry in
the /dev/dsk and /dev/rdsk directories for the root device that incorporates
the bus address of the device.
The /dev/systty (which is linked to /dev/console), and a /dev/syscon
(which is linked to some terminal-usually the console) are required. This is
explained in init(lM).

Introduction

1·9

The System Administration Manager (SAM)
SAM is an acronym for System Administration Manager. It is a tool that
allows you to perform many system administration tasks without having to
know the specific HP- UX commands that are associated with the task. SAM
can also save you time and keystrokes.
You can use SAM to add peripherals. Read this section to learn how to use the
SAM interface.

Starting SAM
To start SAM, logged in as superuser, type:

/usr/bin/sam
In a few moments, SAM's main window will appear. The appearance of this
window depends on whether you are running SAM from an X Window System
display server or from a text terminal.
Navigation in the two interfaces is different. The X Window
System interface makes use of the mouse pointing device, while
the text-terminal interface uses special keys. Both types of
interaction are described in this section.

Note

Inside the window is a box containing a list of functional areas. The first of
these is highlighted.

Using Control Buttons
In the window you will see control buttons with these labels:

Open
Exit
Options ...
Help
Activate these buttons to make SAM carry out different actions.
To activate a control button in the X Window System interface, use the mouse
to place the cursor over it and press the left mouse button once.
1-10

Introduction

To activate a control button in the text terminal interface, do one of the
following:
• Highlight the button by pressing the (Tab) key one or more times. When a
button is highlighted, that indicates that is ready for activation.
Activate the highlighted control button by pressing
keyboard .

(Spacebar)

(Return)

on the

• Activate a control button immediately by pressing a mnemonic key. For
example, notice that the letter H on the (Help) control button is underlined.
(On some terminals, it may be highlighted or displayed in an alternate color.
Press the
key on the keyboard, and the (Help) control button will be
highlighted and activated immediately.

Use the (Tab) key to return to "cycle through" all of the control buttons. To
cycle through the control buttons in reverse order, hold down the (Shift) key
while you press (Tab ). Eventually you will return to the list of functional areas.

Using Softkeys in the Text-Terminal Interface
Note

This section does not apply to the X Window System interface.
It applies only to the text-terminal interface.

Hewlett-Packard terminals (and some others) display eight softkey labels below
the window area. The keyboard keys to which these labels correspond are in a
row across the top of the terminal's keyboard, and they are usually labeled @)
through (ill.
The labels may change when a new window appears. Table 1-2 lists the labels
which you will see most often.

Note

VT-100 (and other ANSI-standard) terminals will not display
these function-key labels. However, the keys (PFl) through (PF4)
will provide the functions listed in Table 1-2.

Introduction

1-11

Table 1-2 lists the keys or key combinations that give the equivalent result for
these terminals.
Table 1-2. Function Keys for SAM's Text-Terminal Interface

Label

Meaning

HP or Wyse

VT-IOO or ANSI
or (fIll

Get help in understanding an
element displayed on the screen

Type alternate character

(EI)

@Jor

(Spacebar ]

Highlight an item or open a menu

(Help]

(Spacebar]

Move cursor to menubar

(EI), (Spacebar ]
or (EI), 0

Open the highlighted functional
area or subarea

(ill

(Return]

Return to the previous level of
SAM

(none)

"Escape" (temporarily) to a shell

(none)

Exit the current window

(none)

Exit SAM entirely

(none)

1 Keys are specified by the symbols which appear on their keycaps. The presence of a comma (",")
between two keycaps means that the keys should be pressed in sequence.

1-12

Introduction

Getting Help in SAM
SAM provides several different kinds of assistance. Table 1-3 describes the
different kinds of help you can get from within SAM and how to request each
kind of help.
Table 1-3. Help in SAM
Type of
Help

Context
Help

What the Help covers

How to get it

Information about elements within
any window

Move the cursor to the element you
then
want to know more
press the
soft key.

Functional • the current functional area
Choose an item from the "Help"
Help
• keyboard navigation within SAM menu on the menu bar. (For
instructions on using the menu bar ,
• using the SAM help system
see "Using the Menubar" .)
• displaying the version of SAM
you are currently running
Box help

Information about the attributes
and tasks presented in the message
box or dialog box currently being
displayed

Activate the ctE!EJ button in the
message/ dialog box.

Exiting SAM
To exit SAM:
• Activate any control button labeled

(Exit SAM),

• On a text terminal, press the softkey labeled
The main window (and any other windows that may be open) will close, and
the shell prompt will return.

Introduction

1-13

Entering a Functional Area
To use SAM you must first enter a functional area. A list of functional areas
appears in the large box in the main window. Notice that one of the items is
highlighted. This highlighted item is ready to be acted upon by SAM. If you
want to enter a functional area other than the one that is highlighted, use the
(!) and (!) arrow keys to highlight another area.
To enter the functional area:
• If you are using the X Window System interface, move the mouse cursor over
the (Open) control button to the right of the list and press the left mouse
button once.

• On a text terminal, press

(Return ).

SAM replaces the main window with one of the following:
• A subarea window containing a list of particular work areas which apply the
functional area. Highlight and activate one of these to enter the functional
area.
The presence of "->" at the end of the functional area name indicates that
you will choose a functional area from a list in a subarea window.
• A functional area window.

Functional area list items that do not end in
functional area window.

1-14

Introduction

"->"

lead directly to a

The Object List

When the functional area window appears, it will contain a list within a large
box. This is the object list of computer system elements (objects) you can
control by using SAM. Different kinds of things can appear in an object list:
files, peripheral devices, user accounts, and so forth.
If the box is empty, it means that there are no objects defined for that
functional area. As you add objects to (or delete them from) the system, they
will appear on (or disappear from) the object list of the appropriate functional
areas.

To modify an object, first select it:
• In the X Window System interface, move the mouse cursor over the line that
describes the object and press the left mouse button once to highlight it.
• On a text terminal, move the cursor to the line, using the (!) and (!) keys,
and press (Spacebar) to highlight it.
Then choose an operation from the menubar "Actions" list, described in the
next section.

Using the Menubar
In each functional area window there is a menubar near the top of the screen.
It contains the titles "List" , "View" , "Options" , "Actions"
, and (at the far
right of the screen) "Help."
To move the cursor to the menu bar:
• If you are using the X Window System interface, place the mouse cursor over
the title in the menu item.

• On a text terminal:

@ (the

Press

Press (f[D, then

softkey) on HP or Wyse terminals
(Spacebar)

on VT100 or ANSI terminals.

Introduction

1-15

Menus

The menubar always contains the same five menus. Table 1-4 lists the kinds of
items you can expect to see within each menu.
Table 1-4. Menus and Menu Items

Types of Menu Items

List

• Alternate views of the functional area (chosen by means of radio
buttons). See "Radio Buttons" .
• Exit

View

Menu items for changing the content and appearance of the object list:
•
•
•
•

Arranging columns
Filtering to display only certain objects
Sorting objects to change the order of the list
Saving a particular "view" for future use

Options

Special actions (like refreshing the display) that apply to the entire
window.

Actions

Menu items for adding, modifying, or deleting objects.

Help

Assistance for using SAM.

Opening a Menu

To see the menu items within a particular menu:
• If you are using the X Window System interface, place the mouse cursor over
the menu. Press down and hold the left mouse button .

• On a text terminal, make sure that the cursor is on the menubar, then do
one of the following:
o Use the

mand CB keys to highlight the menu you wish to see, then press

( Spacebar ],

o Type the mnemonic (the underlined character) for the menu.

1-16

Introduction

Choosing a Menu Item

To choose a menu item:
• If you are using the X Window System interface, drag the mouse cursor
through the menu until it highlights the desired item. Then release the
mouse button .

• On a text terminal, do either of the following:
o Highlight the menu item of your choice by using the (!) and (!) keys.
The highlight moves in response. When a menu item is highlighted, that
indicates that is ready for choosing. Notice that if you press either of the
arrow keys many times, the highlight "cycles through" the menu over and
over again.
Choose the highlighted menu item by pressing the
keyboard.

(Spacebar)

on the

o If the menu item contains an underlined character, you can choose it
immediately by pressing~~~emonic key. For eX(l,J:P::ple, the last item
in every "List" menu islS~~I. The "E" on the • ~• ~.~• • • menu item is
underlined. (On some terminals, it may be highlighted or display~d in an
alternate color.) Press the ® key on the keyboard, and the~~ffiiI menu
item will be highlighted and activated immediately.

Introduction

1-17

Using Buttons and Checkboxes
There are several features in SAM that have a special appearance and which
exhibit special behavior.
Menu Buttons

Some screen buttons present a range of settings from which you must choose.
These menu buttons differ in appearance from ordinary buttons by the
presence of "->" after the button label. Menu buttons look like this in the
text- terminal interface:

[label

-> ]

To "open" a menu button:

• In the X Window System interface, move the mouse cursor over it and hold
down the left mouse button.
• On a text terminal, highlight the button and press

(Spacebar ).

When "opened", a menu button expands into a small menu. To select one of
the menu items:

• In the X Window System interface, drag the cursor to highlight the item you
wish, them release the mouse button.
• On a text terminal, press the
choice, then press (Spacebar ).

and (!) keys to move the highlight to your

The choice will be displayed on the menu button.

1·18

Introduction

Radio Buttons

Within the "List" menu, you may find two or more views of a functional area.
Access to these alternate views is controlled by a radio button which may be
turned "on" or "off". Radio buttons differ in appearance from ordinary buttons
by the presence of a diamond shape to the left of the button label. On a text
terminal, a radio button looks like this when it is turned "on":

On a text terminal, a radio button looks like this when it is turned "off":

< > view_name
In the X Window System interface, the diamond shape appears "down" when
the button is on and "up" when the button is off.
To turn a radio button on or off:
• In the X Window System interface, place the mouse cursor over the diamond
shape and press the left mouse button .
• On a text terminal, highlight the radio button with the (!) or (!) arrow keys
and press (Spacebar ). The screen will change to another functional area.
Radio buttons are mutually exclusive: within a "List" menu, only one button
at a time may be turned on.

Introduction

1·19

Checkboxes

A checkbox is an object which can be turned "on" or "off." Checkboxes differ
in appearance from ordinary buttons by the presence of a square shape to the
left of the button label. On a text terminal, a checkbox looks like this when it
is turned "on":
[x] label

On a text terminal, a checkbox looks like this when it is turned "off":

[ ] label
In the X Window System interface, the square shape appears "down" when the
button is on and "up" when the button is off.
To turn a checkbox "on" or "off":
• In the X Window System interface, place the mouse cursor over the square
shape and press the left mouse button .
• On a text terminal, use the @) to move the highlight over the checkbox,
then press (Spacebar). If it was "on," the x in the checkbox disappears. If it
was "off," an x appears in the checkbox.
Checkboxes are not mutually exclusive. You may turn "on" or "off" as many
as you need.

1-20

Introduction

Navigating with Keys and Key Combinations
in the Text-Terminal Interface
Note

This section does not apply to the X Window System interface.
It applies only to the text-terminal interface.

You must use particular keys and combinations of keys to navigate and perform
particular tasks in SAM. Table 1-5 lists the special meanings of the keys you
must use to navigate within the windows in SAM's text-terminal interface.
Table 1-5. Meanings of Selected Keys
Keysl
Action

HP or Wyse

VT-IOO or ANSI

Move the cursor one space to the
right

Move the cursor one space to the
left

Move the cursor up one line

Move the cursor down one line

C!)

(!)

Move the cursor to the next field

(Tab]

Move the cursor to the menubar

CEfJ)

1 Keys are specified by the symbols which appear on their keycaps. The presence of a comma (",")
between two keycaps means that the keys should be pressed in sequence. The presence of a hyphen
("-") between two keycaps indicates that the keys should be pressed simultaneously.

Introduction

1-21

Table 1·5. Meanings of Selected Keys (continued)
Keysl
Action

HP or Wyse

VT-IOO or ANSI

Scroll a list up one page

(Shift}-0

(none)

Scroll a list down one page

(Shift}C!)

(none)

Scroll a list up one line

@,0

(PF1],0

Scroll a list down one line

@,C!)

(PFl ], C!)

Scroll a list left one page

(Prev]

(none)

Scroll a list right one page

(Next]

(none)

Scroll a list left one character

@,ffi

(none)

Scroll a list right one character

@,(!)

(none)

@ or (Spacebar)

(Spacebar)

Highlight all items in a list

@,0

(ETI,0

Highlight a range of items

1. @, @) on first item
2. Move cursor
3. @, @) on last item

1. (ETI,
on first item
2. Move cursor
3. (ETI,
on last item

Highlight one item

or
1. (Find) on first item
2. Move cursor
3. (Find) on last item
Dehighlight one item
Dehighlight all items in a list
Open a menu on the menubar by
using a nmemonic (first letter of
menu)
Close a menu

1·22

Introduction

@) or

(S~acebar)

@,(D
@, mnemonic key

@ or

(S~acebar)

(Spacebar)
(ETI,

(ETI, mnemonic key

CEI:D or (Spacebar)

HP-IB Device Guidelines
Devices using an HP-IB interface can be connected directly to an interface
adapter on the back of your computer, or they can be connected to other
HP-IB devices in a daisy-chained arrangement.
If the HP-IB interface on your computer already has one or more devices
connected to it, connect the cable from your new peripheral device to the last
device on the chain as shown in Figure 1-1. A close-up of the piggy-backed
HP-IB connectors on the last device on the chain is provided in Figure 1-2.

~--...,./

Figure 1·1. Daisy·Chained Hp·IB Devices

CD
®
®

First peripheral device.

Last peripheral device in chain.

Computer system.

Second peripheral device.

Introduction

1-23

Figure 1-2. Piggy-Backed HP-IB Connectors

Cable to the interface or previous device.
Cable to the new peripheral device.
Thumb screws to be tightened.
The following list provides some guidelines for using HP-IB devices .

• DO NOT connect or disconnect an HP-IB device while the system is
running, or turn power on or off to an HP-IB device while it is connected to
a powered-up system. This could result in bad data on the HP-IB bus.

1-24

Introduction

• If you should need to change the bus address switch settings on an HP-IB
device, be sure to perform the task in the following sequence:
1. Shut down and halt the system using the fete/shutdown -h command.

2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

If you are operating in a diskless cluster, see Managing Clusters of HP
9000 Computers for additional information on shutting down the system.
TURN OFF the computer and unplug the power cord.
Turn off and unplug the device.
Change the switch settings on the device.
Plug in and turn on the device.
Plug in and turn on your system.

• The system root device (hard disk) is usually located at select code 14, bus
address 0 on a (high-speed) HP 98625A, HP 98625B, HP 98262A high-speed
disk interface card, or SCSI interface card (HP 98265A).
• The built-in (internal) HP-IB is always at select code 7.

Note

With a 98625A high-speed HP-IB disk interface case or the
"optional" secondary high-speed HP-IB interface, be sure that
no SCSI bus interface is installed.

• The system printer must not be on the same interface as the system root
device. This is not a supported configuration. Place the system printer on
a low-speed, HP-IB interface, separate from the system root device. A bus
address of 1 is typical.
• An HP 7971 9-track tape must be placed on a low speed HP -lB. A bus
address of 3 is typical.
• An HP 7974 or 7978 9-track tape drive should be placed on a high-speed disk
HP-IB, if possible. A bus address of 3 is typical.
• Avoid putting flexible disk drives, cartridge tape drives, or 9-track tape
drives on the same interface as the root device.
• Plotters and the HP 9111 graphics tablet should be placed on separate
low-speed HP-IB interfaces when possible. Typical bus addresses are 5 and 6
for plotters and graphics tablets, respectively.

Introduction

1-25

• When only standard speed devices are used, the total HP-IB cabling on a
standard speed interface is limited to two meters per standard device load or
20 meters total, whichever is less.
• When only high speed devices are used, the total HP -IB cabling on a
standard high interface is limited to one meter per standard device load or 10
meters total, whichever is less.
• Do not hook up your HP-IB devices in a star configuration. The
recommended configuration for HP-IB cabling is a single run of multi-drop
(daisy-chained) segments.
• The HP 37204A or HP 37201A HP-IB extenders can be used to exceed the
total cable limit on standard speed HP-IB connections. These units translate
all local bus traffic and, with high data integrity, exchange it with one or
more remote busses served by another extender. Each adds one external
device load to the local bus.

HP-IB Cabling Information
If you need to replace you HP-IB cable for any reason, consult the following list
of available HP-IB cables and their lengths:
HP
HP
HP
HP

1·26

10833A
10833B
10833C
10833D

1.0
2.0
4.0
0.5

meter
meter
meter
meter

Introduction

HP-IB
HP-IB
HP-IB
HP-IB

cable
cable
cable
cable

SCSI Device Guidelines
A device using the Small Computer System Interface (SCSI) bus can
be connected directly to your computer, or to another SCSI device in a
daisy-chained arrangement.

Figure 1-3. SCSI Connections

Introduction

1-27

If the SCSI interface on your computer already has a device connected to it,
you can connect the cable from your new peripheral device to the last device
on the chain as in Figure 1-4.

It .. _ .....

,'
,

........

..... "

...

....

:. :. :. ~-~:~ -, '~, ' '

,' ,' "

,,", ' ~?,:.~~~'.>~. ~
........

" ,__ ,,-: __

...........

,~) , :
,

, .l ,

,",:. '-. ":, ~ ~
"

Figure 1-4. SCSI Connectors

Cable to the interface or previous device.
Cable to the new peripheral device.
The following list provides some guidelines for SCSI devices .
• The last SCSI device in the chain, even if it is the only one, must have
a terminator installed to its second connector. This terminator provides
matching impedance on the bus circuits. Without the terminator, the bus
will not work.

1-28

Introduction

' ,

• Make sure there are no unterminated cables (that is, make sure that all
cables are attached to a device at both ends). Both the 400S and 400T must
have a high-density terminator installed on the back panel if no external
devices are in use.

Caution

Only the two ends of a SCSI bus should be terminated.
Excessive or improper termination may overload the SCSI
port's termination power ("TERMPWR") circuitry. This may
result in blowing the TERMPWR fuse on the adapter, or
damaging transceivers on any attached device (including the
adapter).
Refer to device manuals to ensure they operate properly on the
SCSI bus.

• Use of non-Hewlett-Packard peripherals is at user's risk, and is unsupported
by Hewlett-Packard's standard support process.
• Because SCSI cable impedance and construction can have a significant effect
on signal quality, only HP cables are recommended.

• Do not connect or disconnect any SCSI device while the system is running,
or turn power on or off to any SCSI device while it is connected to a
powered-up system. Doing so could result in data corruption or a system
panic, which in turn could lead to corruption of the file system.
• Keep all devices powered on during and after system boot-up.

• Do not add or remove SCSI devices while the system is powered on.

Introduction

1-29

• If you should need to change the bus ID on a SCSI device, perform the task
in the following sequence:
1. Shut down and halt the system using the fete/shutdown -h command.

If you are operating in a diskless cluster, see Managing Clusters of HP
9000 Computers for additional information on shutting down the system.

2. TURN OFF the computer and unplug the power cord.
3. Turn off the device.
4. Change the bus ID on the device.
5. Turn on the device.
Power on all SCSI peripherals and make sure they have time to complete
their selftest before powering on the SPU (System Processor Unit).
6. Turn on your system.
• The first SCSI interface is usually located at select code 14. Multiple SCSI
interfaces can be added, using select codes 15, 16, and so on.
• The SCSI interface can support multiple SCSI disks, optical devices and
DAT tape drives simultaneously.
• All devices should have a unique bus address between 0 and 6. Note that
some devices require more than one bus address. For example, the C1700A,
Magneto Optical Disk Autochanger, requires 3 (three) SCSI addresses (one
for the autochanger and one for each of its two drives).
• The Series 300 BootROM searches from bus address 0 to 6. Your root disk
should have a lower bus address than any other device on the bus. It is
recommended that SCSI bus address 0 contain your root/system disk.

Note

The SCSI DAT DDS Format Drive must be at a higher address
than the root/system disk on the Series 300.

• The Series 400 BootROM searches from bus address 6 to O. Your root disk
should have a higher bus address than any other device on the bus. It is
recommended that SCSI bus address 6 contain your root/system disk.

1-30

Introduction

• The interrupt level for SCSI devices must be 4.
• SCSI bus address 7 is reserved for the SCSI interface.
• Ensure that the total cable length (including external and internal cables)
does not exceed six meters. The length of the SCSI bus should be kept as
short as possible. However, do not use cables less than 0.5 meters in length.
Refer to the documentation that came with your device for internal cable
lengths.

Calculating SCSI Cable Length Example
Table 1-6 demonstrates how to calculate SCSI bus cable lengths for a typical
installation. The SCSI 0.5 m cable (HP 92222A) used in the example is
available through your HP Sales and Support Office. Other lengths are also
available.
Table 1-6. Example of SCSI Cable Length Calculation

Starting Point Device Cable to Next Device Internal Cumulative
Cable Cable Length
SCSI host adapter

5062-3383

1.0m

O.lm

l.lm

HP device #1

HP 92222A

0.5m

0.2m

l.8m

HP device #2

HP 92222A

0.5m

O.4m

2.7m

HP device #3

HP 92222A

0.5m

0.3m

3.5m

HP device #4

none

O.4m

3.9m

l.4m

3.9m

Total

2.5m

Introduction

1-31

• Because SCSI cable impedance and construction can have a significant effect
on signal quality, only HP cables are recommended. The following cables can
be used with either a single-ended or differential SCSI bus:
o K2296 cable with 0.9 meter length
o K2297 cable with 1.5 meter length
If you are connecting SCSI devices together in a daisy-chain, use the
following cables:

o 92222A cable with 0.5 meter length
o 92222B cable with 1.0 meter length
o 92222C cable with 2.0 meter length
• Terminator resistors are always installed in the host adapter. This
terminator provides matching impedance on the bus circuits. Without the
terminator, the bus will not work. HP SCSI host adapter is shipped with the
proper terminator.
• All devices should be powered by the same electrical circuit. The system
ground must be isolated from other electrical devices such as copying
machines, arc welders and air conditioners. HP-supplied cables have correct
grounding.

1-32

Introduction

RS-232-C Cabling Guidelines
Terminology and Background
The type of connect that a device (SPU or peripheral) provides is usually one
of, or a variant of:
DCE

Data Communications Equipment

DTE

Data Terminal Equipment

DQE

Nominally wired DCE, but with DTE hidden on pins unused
by EIA.

Historically, DCEs were modems, and DTEs were whatever "terminated"
the data path, typically an actual terminal at one end, and the computer at
the other. A pair of DCEs were always assumed to be in the link, and they
used something other than RS-232-C to communicate with each other. The
generalized circuit was:

Computer[DTE]---{

DCE~~phone lines~~DCE

}---[DTE] terminal

The connectors and pin-outs at the DCE ("-{" above) are specified. The cable
termination at the DTE itself is not, and in the early days, the cable was
hard-wired right into the device (typically an ASR-33 TTY).
When the EIA created RS-232-C, it failed to adequately describe the case of
direct computer-peripheral connection. This is the now-common configuration
of DTEs connecting directly to other DTEs, with no DCEs in sight. This may
be what you are trying to do, and why you are reading this document. Today's
devices, and their serial connectors, often do not clearly fall under DTE or
DCE, and they provide an assortment of connector genders, styles and pin
counts.
Although nominally a 25- pin connection, HP systems typically provide a
maximum of nine pins, sometimes seven, and all that is really required for a
device-device direct connection is three pins.
Despite this potential confusion, the terms DTE and DCE still have their uses.

Introduction

1-33

For our purposes, when normalized to 25 pins:
DeE:
Transmits on pin 3
Receives on pin 2
Monitors pins 4 (RTS), 20 (DTR), if present
Asserts pins 5 (CTS), 6 (DSR), 8 (CD), 22 (RI), if present

DTE:
Transmits on pin 2
Receives on pin 3
Asserts pins 4 (RTS), 20 (DTR), if present
Monitors pins 5 (CTS), 6 (DSR), 8 (CD), 22 (RI), if present
DQE: Wired for DCE-25F, but convert able to DTE-25M with 92219Q cable.
Pin 7 is signal ground for both DCE and DTE.

Pin Counts
When there are fewer than 25 pins (especially 9-pin), the actual pin numbers
vary. The type of connector implied by the counts are:
50

Amp "blue ribbon" D-style

DB-25 subminiature D-style

DB-9 subminiature D-style

USOC RJ-IIC (same as on contemporary consumer
telephones)

Connector Gender
Actual DCEs, such as modems, are still usually 25-pin female. No particular
connector gender is common to DTEs. The abbreviations used in this guide
are:

Male

Female

1·34

Introduction

The following tables are intended to be a quick-reference to the selection of
RS-232-C cables for connecting serial devices directly to an HP 9000 Series
300/400 workstation. They do not cover RS-422. They do not cover the
case of direct CPU-CPU connections, as LAN has replaced RS-232-C in this
application.
Table 1-7. RS-232-C Interconnections
Cable Suggested

Host
Type

Device
Type

TE-4F

DCE-25F

Not recommended for actual DCEs. Use 92219T

TE-4F

DTE-25F

92219T

TE-4F

DTE-25M 92219T plus 92224F adaptor

TE-9F

DCE-25F

92221M, or 98561-61604 plus 40242M

TE-9F

DTE-25F

92221P, or 98561-61604 plus 40242G

TE-9F

DTE-25M 98561-61604 plus 40242C

TE-9M

DCE-25F

TE-9M

DTE-25F

TE-9M

DTE-25M

+ 17255=D otherwise.

+ 98561-61604 + 40242M
24542G, or 98574-61606 plus 92221P, or 98574-61606 + 98561-61604 + 40242G
24542H, or 98574-61606 + 98561-61604 + 40242C
24542M, or 98574-61606 plus 92221M, or 98574-61606

CE-25F DCE-25F

40242G

CE-25F DTE-25F

40242M, or 92224M adaptor, if cables present

CE-25F DTE-25M 40242C, or simply directly interconnect, if cables present
~E-25F

DCE-25F

rE-25F DCE-25F

92219Q
40242M, or 92224M adaptor, if cables present

rE-25F DTE-25F

40242G
rE-25F DTE-25M 17255D
rE-50F DCE-25F

5061-4215

rE-50F DTE-25F

5061-4216 plus 92224M

rE-50F DTE-25M 5061-4216

Introduction

1-35

Table 1-8. RS-232-C Host Connector Types
Host

Model 310 built-in
Model 318 built-in
built-in
built-in
built-in
built-in

DTE-25F
DTE-25F

none
none

Model R/332 built-in
Model 340 built-in
Model 345 built-in

DTE-25F
DTE-25F

none
none

Model 350 built-in
Model 360 built-in
Model V /360 built-in

see 98562-6653x
see 98562-6653x
DTE-9F

see 98562-6653x
Model 370 built-in
Model 375, 380 built-in
without 98574-61606
DTE-9M
DTE-9F
with 98574-61606
w/98574-61606 + 98561-61604 DTE-25F
Model 400 built-in
without K2292
with K2292
98561-6653x
without 98561-61604
with 98561-61604
98562-6653x
without 98561-61604
with 98561-61604

1-36

Cable
Included

DTE-25F
see 98561-6653x
see 98562-6653x
DTE-25F
DTE-25F

Model
Model
Model
Model

319
320
330
332

Type of
Connector

Introduction

none
-

none
none

none
-

0.3m
0.3m

DTE-25F
3x DTE-25F

none
0.3m

DTE-9F
DTE-25F

0.3m

Table 1-8. RS-232-C Host Connector Types (continued)

Host

Type of
Connector

Cable
Included

98626A
with #001 (5061-4215)
with #002 (5061-4216)

DTE-50F
DTE-25M
DCE-25F

none
4.9m
4.9m

98628A
with #001 (5061-4215)
with #002 (5061-4216)

DTE-50F
DTE-25M
DCE-25F

none
4.9m
4.9m

98638A (standard)
or may be considered

8x DCE-25F
8x DQE-25F

none
none

98642A, port 0
with 92219S cable
98642A, port 1
with 92219T cable

DTE-25F
DTE-25M
DTE-4F
DCE-25M

none
15m
none
15m

Table 1-9. Peripheral Types

Type

HP Peripheral Products

DCE-25F

These devices are all modems, and require that the host provide at least a
9-pin DTE connection: 37212A/B, 39301A, 50759A, 92203A, 92205A/B
K1489, K1492, K1494, K1498,

DTE-25F

2225D, 2227 A, 2228A, 2235, 2276A, 2277 A, 2382A, 2390-series, 2560-series
(#049), 2601A, 2602A, 2603A, 2620-series (port 2), 2631B, 2684A
(w /26843A), 2686, 2687 A, 2930-series, 3082A/B, 33440A, 33447A,
33449A, 33459A, 33471A, 3630A#001, 41063A, 45810, 45850, 7440A#001,
7475A#001, 7570A, 7575A, 7576A, 7580, 7585, 7586B, 7595, 7596A,
7599A, 9666A 9807 C1001, C1002, C1003, C1006, CI010, C1200A,
C1202A#lA9, C1600A, C1601A, C1602A#lAX, C1620A, C1625A,
C1627 A, C1629A, C1631A, C2106A, HP150,

DTE-25M C1004, C1007, C1017, 7510A, 7550A
unknown

7550B

Introduction

1-37

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

2
Installing Interface and Accessory Cards
Introduction
This chapter contains installation guidelines and configuration information for
the following interface and accessory cards:

HP
HP
HP
HP
HP
HP
HP
HP
HP
HP
HP
HP
HP
HP
HP
HP
HP
HP

98546A Display Compatibility Interface
98622A GPIO (General Purpose I/O) Interface
98624A Standard-Speed HP-IB Interface
98265A Small Computer Systems Interface (SCSI)
98625A High-Speed HP-IB Disk Interface
98625B High-Speed HP-IB Disk Interface
98626A RS- 232- C Interface
98628A Datacomm Interface
98629A/50961A SRM Interfaces
98642A 4-Channel Multiplexer Interface
98638A 8-Channel Multiplexer Interface
98643A Local Area Network (LAN) Interface
98644A Asynchronous Serial Interface
98562-66530 Human (System) Interface Board
98248A Floating-Point Accelerator Accessory Card
98248B Floating-Point Accelerator Accessory Card
98635A Floating Point Math Accessory Card
98620B DMA Controller Accessory Card

Refer to Appendix B, "Series 400 Support Matrix", for hardware and software
support information.

Installing Interface and Accessory Cards

2-1

2
These cards require the following device drivers.
Table 2-1. Device Drivers for Interface and Accessory Cards
Interface or
Accessory Card
98546A
98622A
98624A
98265A
98625A
98625B
98626A
98628A
98629A
98638A
98642A
98643A
98644A
98562-66530
98248A
98248B
98635A
98620B

Driver
Name

ite
gpio
98624
98265
98625
98625
98626
98628

srm
98642
98642

lla
98626

not
not
not
not
not

needed
needed
needed
needed
needed

The i te driver for the HP 98546 Display Compatibility Interface is part of the
HP- UX kernel by default.
The HP 98265A SCSI interface driver 98265, is automatically added when you
add your first SCSI device using SAM.

2-2

Installing Interface and Accessory Cards

Note

The installation instructions for the following graphic device
interface cards are documented in Chapter 11, "Installing
Plotters and Graphics Devices":
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

HP
HP
HP
HP
HP
HP
HP
HP
HP
HP

98627 A Color Output Interface
98556A 2D Graphics Accelerator Accessory Card
98548/49/50A High Resolution Graphics Interfaces
A1416A High Resolution Color Graphics Interface
98287 A Graphics Display Controller Interface
98724A/98725A Local Graphics Bus Interface
98726A Local Graphics Bus Interface
98702A Graphics Address and Data Bus Interface
98735-66580 Physical DMA Interface
98735-66581 Virtual DMA Interface

Installing Interface and Accessory Cards

2-3

HP 98546A Display Compatibility Interface
The HP 98546A Display Compatibility Interface converts digital display data
from Series 300 computers into a composite video signal which is compatible
with HP 35721, HP 35731, and HP 35741 monitors. It requires two adjacent
slots in the backplane and the lower slot must be an I/O card (that is,
even-numbered) slot.
The interface consists of two cards: a video card with an attached front panel
and a graphics card that connects to the video card through a short ribbon
cable.

Note

The display connected to the HP 98546 Interface must be the
only display in the system.

Refer to Appendix B, "Series 400 Support Matrix", for hardware and software
support information.

2·4

Installing Interface and Accessory Cards

HP 98546A Display Compatibility Interface

• Plan ahead. Installing interface cards on your system requires that you shut
down and power off the system. On a multiuser or clustered system you will
want to warn users and cluster clients in advance that the system (server)
will be coming down. Use the wall or cwall command to do this.

Caution

If you are adding this device to a cluster-node, you must be
logged into that node to do HP- UX configuration tasks.

For more information about adding devices to a system
configured as an HP- UX cluster, refer to Managing Clusters of
HP 9000 Computers, Chapter 12, "Adding Peripherals to a
Cluster" .

Installing Interface and Accessory Cards

2·5

HP 98546A Display Compatibility Interface

Installing the HP 98546A Display Compatibility Interface
The following summary supplements the procedures outlined in your
installation documentation for this device. Read through this summary before
pro ceding with the installation.
1. Verify that the driver required for this interface card, and any peripheral
device you intend to install at this time, is included in your current kernel
configuration file, usually the / etc/ conf / dfile file.

To verify that the necessary driver(s), listed in Table 2-1, is (are) part of
your current kernel configuration, you can:
• Use SAM to check your dfile for the necessary drivers, add any that are
missing, and reconfigure the kernel for you at this time. See Chapter 3,
"Adding Drivers for Interface and Accessory Cards Using SAM" , and then
go on to step 2.
or
• Look in your dfile for the driver( s). If the drivers are in your kernel
configuration file, go on to step 2 now.
If the driver(s) is (are) not in the /etc/conf/dfile, or is (are)
commented out with a comment symbol (such as the * sign), edit the
dfile to either add the driver or remove the comment marks. You
must reconfigure the kernel if you edit the dfile for any reason. You
can use the /etc/config program to do this. See Chapter 14, "Setting
Up Devices Using HP-UX Commands" for detailed information on this
procedure.

2-6

Installing Interface and Accessory Cards

HP 98546A Display Compatibility Interface

2. Play it safe.

a. Shut down and halt the system using the fete/shutdown -h command.
If you are operating in a diskless cluster, see Managing Clusters of HP
9000 Computers for additional information on shutting down the system.

b. TURN OFF the computer and unplug the power cord.
c. Remove the Display Compatibility Interface from its envelope, being
careful to handle the card only by its edges and front panel. The card
can be easily damaged by electrostatic discharge (static zap).
d. Place the card on the envelope.

50Hz

Char 1

Select

60Hz

Video Card

Graphics

Card

~.L----~---\

ASCII/
Roman8

Figure 2-1.
Display Compatibility Interface switches

Installing Interface and Accessory Cards

2-7

HP 98546A Display Compatibility Interface

3. Set the following values according to the instructions provided in the
documentation that came with your interface card.
a. The power frequency.

Note

This switch is preset to 60 Hz. If your power frequency is 60
Hz, or if you don't know your power frequency, you can skip
this step. If you later notice a problem with your screen, come
back and change the Hz setting.

b. Set the character select switch.

Note

The character select switch is preset to ASCII/Roman 8; skip
to step 4 if this the desired character set.

4. Insert the interface.
Follow the instructions given in the documentation that came with the
interface card to insert this interface card.
Installation complete! Proceed with the installation and configuration of the
new peripheral device that requires this new interface card.

2·8

Installing Interface and Accessory Cards

HP 98622A GPIO (General Purpose I/O) Interface
The HP 98622A General Purpose Input/Output (GPIO) Interface card is used
for a wide variety of peripheral requirements. It supports 16-bit bi-directional
data exchange. Extended control and status lines are available for applications
that require more than one signal from the computer. Several handshake
modes are also available to permit interfacing to a variety of equipment.
Refer to Appendix B, "Series 400 Support Matrix", for hardware and software
support information.

Caution

If you are adding this device to a cluster-node, you must be
logged into that node to do HP- UX configuration tasks.

For more information about adding devices to a system
configured as an HP- UX cluster, refer to Managing Clusters of
HP 9000 Computers, Chapter 12, "Adding Peripherals to a
Cluster" .

Installing Interface and Accessory Cards

2-9

HP 98622A GPIO Interface
2

Option

~ ~-o

{cx

[i]

DOUT

CL~R

c::::JI

c:::::JI
-=:::J

•
•

-=:J
c::::JI

4•

CODE

1 c::::JI 0 0

---jl-------

• c:::::JI

Select Switch

•

)Cl

R1 (R x)

u'[I]
[1]=
U2

JUMPER.

Shown

Select

Code 12 Position

Data in

Clock Source Switch

1U~8 0

[i]
=

='
~:
= 4

/"'I:~ 16

Interrupt Level

• +5V,4A

U~9
Switch

Burst enabled if
jumper IS removed

BU~TI

Figure 2-2.
HP 98622A GPIO Switches and Jumpers

2-10

Installing Interface and Accessory Cards

PCTL[IJ
c::::.
PFLG

-=:::J

PSTS

HSHK
DIN

-=:::J

DO UT

c::::=-

-=:J

HP 98622A GPIO Interface

Installing the HP 98622A GPIO Interface
The GPIO Interface can be configured in any number of ways, depending on
the requirements of your application. Abbreviated instructions are provided
here. Refer to the installation manual that came with the interface for more
detailed information.
The following summary supplements the procedures outlined in your
installation documentation for this device. Read through this summary before
proceding with the installation.
1. Verify that the driver required for this interface card, and any peripheral

device you intend to install at this time, is included in your current kernel
configuration file, usually the / etc/ conf / dfile file.

To verify that the necessary dri ver( s ), listed in Table 2-1, is (are) p art of
your current kernel configuration, you can:
• Use SAM to check your dfile for the necessary drivers, add any that are
missing, and reconfigure the kernel for you at this time. See Chapter 3,
"Adding Drivers for Interface and Accessory Cards Using SAM", and then
go on to step 2.
or
• Look in your dfile for the driver(s). If the drivers are in your kernel
configuration file, go on to step 2 now.
If the driver(s) is (are) not in the /etc/conf/dfile, or is (are)
commented out with a comment symbol (such as the * sign), edit the
dfile to either add the driver or remove the comment marks. You
must reconfigure the kernel if you edit the dfile for any reason. You
can use the / etc/ config program to do this. See Chapter 14, "Setting
Up Devices Using HP-UX Commands" for detailed information on this
procedure.

Installing Interface and Accessory Cards

2-11

HP 98622A GPIO Interface
2

2. Play it safe.

b. TURN OFF the computer and unplug the power cord.
c. Remove the GPIO Interface from its envelope, being careful to handle the
card only by its edges and front panel. The card can be easily damaged
by electrostatic discharge (static zap).
d. Place the card on the envelope.
3. Set the following values according to the instructions provided in the
documentation that came with your interface card.

a. Set the select code of the interface card to a unique value and make a
note of it.
If you need to change the select code of this card from its preset value of
12, do so by setting the select code switches. Check the documentation
that came with the card for specific procedures.

Note

Select codes zero through seven (0-7) are reserved for built-in
interface cards and cannot be used.
If you need to change the select code of a built-in interface
card, you might be able to do so by entering Configuration
Mode during the Boot ROM sequence. For more information
about interacting with the Boot ROM Configuration sequence
on a model 362 or 382 computer, consult the Hardware
Configuration Guide for your computer model. For information
about interacting with the Boot ROM Configuration sequence
of any other S300 or S400 computer, refer to the Service
Manual for the specific model computer.

b. Set the interrupt level switch.
c. Set the data-in clock source switches.
d. Set the option Select switches.
2-12

Installing Interface and Accessory Cards

HP 98622A GPIO Interface
2

4. Install or remove the jumpers on your HP 98622A card(s) as required by
your peripheral.
5. Insert the interface according to the instructions provided in the
documentation that came with the card.
6. Verify installation.

a. Plug in the power cord and turn on your computer. Watch for the word
"Keyboard" to appear, then press the space bar once.
b. Check the list of components displayed on the left-hand side of the
screen. If the message:
HP98622 at 12

appears in the list, you have correctly installed the GPIO Interface.
If the message above does not appear, repeat the installation procedure,
making sure there are no select code conflicts and that the card is firmly
seated in an even-numbered slot. If the message still does not appear,
call your HP Service Representative for assistance.

Installation complete! Proceed with the installation and configuration of the
new peripheral device that requires this new interface card.

Installing Interface and Accessory Cards

2-13

HP 98624A Standard-Speed HP-IB Interface
The HP 98624A HP-IB Interface card implements the IEEE 488-1978 Standard
Digital Interface for Programmable Instrumentation. The interface can
communicate with as many as 14 HP-IB compatible instruments, connected
with a maximum of 20 meters (65.6 ft.) of cable between them. It has
interrupt capabilities and can carry out DMA transfers via the optional DMA
Controller card.
Refer to Appendix B, "Series 400 Support Matrix", for hardware and software
support information.

Caution

If you are adding this device to a cluster-node, you must be
logged into that node to do HP- UX configuration tasks.

For more information about adding devices to a system
configured as an HP- UX cluster, refer to Managing Clusters of
HP 9000 Computers, Chapter 12, "Adding Peripherals to a
Cluster".

2-14

Installing Interface and Accessory Cards

HP 98624A HP-IB Interface

SEC
CODE
8

I!=1
~

0
:U1

c::D

~1'~16U2
Interrupt

L~vel

Switch

lSBl' =
~ - '-AD"'-'
HP-IB

=
=

c::D

lAse

•

S'fS CTL

U17

System Controller

Non-system

controller

- ..............
_

Fl
+5V.+A

Figure 2-3.
HP 98624A HP-IB Interface Switches

Installing Interface and Accessory Cards

2-15

HP 98624A Hp·IB Interface
2

Installing the HP 98624A Hp·IB Interface
The following summary supplements the procedures outlined in your
installation documentation for this device. Read through this summary before
pro ceding with the installation.

1. Verif'!/. that the driver required for this interface card, and any peripheral
device you intend to install at this time, is included in your current kernel
configuration file, usually the / etc/ conf / dfile file.
To verify that the necessary dri ver( s ), listed in Table 2-1, is (are) part of
your current kernel configuration, you can:
• Use SAM to check your dfile for the necessary drivers, add any that are
missing, and reconfigure the kernel for you at this time. See Chapter 3,
"Adding Drivers for Interface and Accessory Cards Using SAM" , and then
go on to step 2.
or
• Look in your df ile for the dri ver( s ). If the drivers are in your kernel
configuration file, go on to step 2 now.

If the driver(s) is (are) not in the /etc/conf/dfile, or is (are)

commented out with a comment symbol (such as the * sign), edit the
dfile to either add the driver or remove the comment marks. You
must reconfigure the kernel if you edit the dfile for any reason. You
can use the /etc/config program to do this. See Chapter 14, "Setting
Up Devices Using HP-UX Commands" for detailed information on this
procedure.

2·16

Installing Interface and Accessory Cards

HP 98624A HP-IB Interface

2. Play it safe.

a. Shut down and halt the system using the fete/shutdown -h command.

If you are operating in a diskless cluster, see Managing Clusters of HP
9000 Computers for additional information on shutting down the system.
b. TURN OFF the computer and unplug the power cord.
c. Remove the HP-IB Interface from its envelope, being careful to handle
the card only by its edges and front panel. The card can be easily
damaged by electrostatic discharge (static zap).
d. Place the card on the envelope.
3. Set the following values according to the instructions provided in the
documentation that came with your interface card.

a. Set the select code of the interface card to a unique value and make note
of it.

If you need to change the select code of this card from its preset value of
8, do so by setting the select code switches. Check the documentation
that came with the card for specific procedures.

Note

Select codes zero through seven (0- 7) are reserved for built-in
interface cards and cannot be used.

Installing Interface and Accessory Cards

2-17

HP 98624A HP-IB Interface

b. Set the interrupt level.
The interface is preset to interrupt level 3. Unless you are certain that
interrupt level 3 is inappropriate for your application, do not adjust the
interrupt level and skip to step 4.
c. Set the address and system controller switches .
• If you do not intend to connect two computers together with this
interface, skip to step 4. The interface is configured to be system
controller at address 21 and need not be changed .
• If you will be connecting a disk drive, printer, plotter or other
peripheral to this interface, and you will be using an HP Series
200/300 operating system, do not set this switch to non-system
controller.

4. Insert the interface according to the instructions provided in the
documentation that came with the card.
5. Verify installation.
a. Plug in the power cord and turn on your computer. Watch for the word
"Keyboard" to appear, then press the space bar once.
b. Check the list of components displayed on the left-hand side of the
screen. If the message:
HP98624 at 8

appears in the list, you have correctly installed the HP-IB Interface.

If the message above does not appear, repeat the installation procedure,
making sure there are no select code conflicts and that the card is firmly
seated in an even-numbered slot. If the message still does not appear,
call your HP Service Representative for assistance.

Installation complete! Proceed with the installation and configuration of the
new peripheral device that requires this new interface card.

2-18

Installing Interface and Accessory Cards

HP 98265A Small Computer Systems Interface (SCSI)
The HP 98265A SCSI Interface is a daughter board which allows you to
connect SCSI devices (normally disk and/or tape drives) to your system.
Daughter boards are boards that connect to a DIO System card or a DIO-II
card to provide additional RAM on a processor or RAM board, an additional
interface on the system interface board, an accelerator on a video board, or
other augmentation of system capabilities.

Caution

The HP 98265A SCSI Interface is not supported on the same
system containing an HP 98625A HP -IB Interface. Only one
of these interfaces is supported per system. If your system
contains an HP 98625A HP -IB interface card, you must remove
it before installing your HP 98265A SCSI Interface card.

Caution

If you are adding this device to a cluster-node, you must be
logged into that node to do HP- UX configuration tasks.

For more information about adding devices to a system
configured as an HP- UX cluster, refer to Managing Clusters of
HP 9000 Computers, Chapter 12, "Adding Peripherals to a
Cluster" .

Installing Interface and Accessory Cards

2-19

HP 98265A Small Computer Systems Interface (SCSI)

Installing the HP 98265A Small Computer Systems Interface (SCSI)
The following summary supplements the procedures outlined in your
installation documentation for this device. Read through this summary before
pro ceding with the installation.
1. Verify that the driver required for this interface card, and any peripheral
device you intend to install at this time, is included in your current kernel
configuration file, usually the /etc/conf/dfile file.
To verify that the necessary driver(s), listed in Table 2-1, is (are) part of
your current kernel configuration, you can:
• Use SAM to check your dfile for the necessary drivers, add any that are
missing, and reconfigure the kernel for you at this time. See Chapter 3,
"Adding Drivers for Interface and Accessory Cards Using SAM", and then
go on to step 2.
or
• Look in your df il e for the dri ver( s ). If the drivers are in your kernel
configuration file, go on to step 2 now.
If the driver(s) is (are) not in the /etc/conf/dfile, or is (are)
commented out with a comment symbol (such as the * sign), edit the
dfile to either add the driver or remove the comment marks. You
must reconfigure the kernel if you edit the dfile for any reason. You
can use the /etc/config program to do this. See Chapter 14, "Setting
Up Devices Using HP - UX Commands" for detailed information on this
procedure.

2-20

Installing Interface and Accessory Cards

HP 98265A Small Computer Systems Interface (SCSI)

2
2. Play it safe.

b. TURN OFF the computer and unplug the power cord.
c. Remove the SCSI Interface from its envelope, being careful to handle the
card only by its edges and front panel. The card can be easily damaged
by electrostatic discharge (static zap).
d. Place the card on its envelope.
3. Set the select code of the interface card to a unique value and make note of it.
If you need to change the select code setting of your SCSI interface card
from its preset value of 14, do so by setting the select code switches found
on the Human (System) Interface Board; see Figure 2-12.

Note

Both the SCSI and the HP 98625B interface are preset to select
code 14. If you have both SCSI and HP 98625B interfaces,
change the select code of the HP 98625B Interface to an unused
value.

Note

Select codes zero through seven (0- 7) are reserved for built-in
interface cards and cannot be used.
If you need to change the select code of a built-in interface
card, you might be able to do so by entering Configuration
Mode during the Boot ROM sequence. For more information
about interacting with the Boot ROM Configuration sequence
on a model 362 or 382 computer, consult the Hardware
Configuration Guide for your computer model. For information
about interacting with the Boot ROM Configuration sequence
of any other S300 or S400 computer, refer to the Service
Manual for the specific model computer.

Installing Interface and Accessory Cards

2·21

HP 98265A Small Computer Systems Interface (SCSI)

4. Install the SCSI interface card according to the instructions provided in the
documentation that came with the card.
This will require:
a. Locating the Human (System) Interface Board (HP part number
98562- 66530).
b. Loosening the screws on the Human (System) Interface Board and sliding
it out far enough to expose the large connector.
c. Removing any existing interface card.

Note

If the Human (System) Interface Board does not have an
interface currently mounted on it, skip to step 6.

Wrap the interface card in static-free material and set it and the cable
aside. The envelope that interface cards are shipped in is made of
static-free material.
d. Inserting the SCSI card and attaching the cable.
e. Sliding the Human (System) Interface Board into the computer and
tightening the two screws.
Installation complete! Proceed with the installation and configuration of the
new peripheral device that requires this new interface card.

2-22

Installing Interface and Accessory Cards

HP 98625A High-Speed HP-IB Disk Interface
Note

There is a difference between the HP 98625A and the HP
98625B disk interfaces. If you have an HP 98625A Disk
Interface you are in the correct section. If you have an HP
98625B Disk Interface, you need refer to HP 98625B Disk
Interface section of this chapter.

The HP 98625A HP-IB Disk Interface provides a high-speed HP-IB interface to
Command Set 80 (CS/80) disks. The Disk Interface is capable of handling up
to four disks on one interface card.
Only one HP 98625A HP-IB Disk Interface is supported per system. If an HP
98625A HP-IB Disk Interface is used in a system with one or more HP 98625B
HP-IB Disk Interfaces, an interrupt level adjustment must be made.

Caution

The HP 98625A HP-IB Interface is not supported on the same
system containing an HP 98265A SCSI Interface. Only one
of these interfaces is supported per system. If your system
contains an HP 98265A SCSI Interface card, you must remove
it before installing your HP 98625A HP-IB Interface card.

Refer to Appendix B, "Series 400 Support Matrix", for hardware and software
support information.

Installing Interface and Accessory Cards

2-23

HP 98625A Hp·IB Disk Interface

Caution

If you are adding this device to a cluster-node, you must be
logged into that node to do HP- UX configuration tasks.

For more information about adding devices to a system
configured as an HP-UX cluster, refer to Managing Clusters of
HP 9000 Computers, Chapter 12, "Adding Peripherals to a
Cluster" .

2·24

Installing Interface and Accessory Cards

HP 98625A HP-IB Disk Interface

III

INTERRUPT
LEVEL=4

INTERRUPT

LEVEL

SELECT
CODE=14

Inl
Figure 2-4.
HP 98625A Disk Interface switches

Installing Interface and Accessory Cards

2-25

HP 98625A HP-IB Disk Interface
2

Installing the HP 98625A HP-IB Disk Interface
The HP 98625A Disk Interface cannot be installed in the HP
9888A bus expander. However, it can be installed in the HP
98568A Backplane Expander.

Note

To verify that the necessary driver(s), listed in Table 2-1, is (are) part of
your current kernel configuration, you can:
• Use SAM to check your dfile for the necessary drivers, add any that are
missing, and reconfigure the kernel for you at this time. See Chapter 3,
"Adding Drivers for Interface and Accessory Cards Using SAM", and then
go on to step 2.
or
• Look in your dfile for the driver(s). If the drivers are in your kernel
configuration file, go on to step 2 now.
If the driver(s) is (are) not in the /etc/conf/dfile, or is (are)
commented out with a comment symbol (such as the * sign), edit the
dfile to either add the driver or remove the comment marks. You
must reconfigure the kernel if you edit the dfile for any reason. You
can use the /etc/config program to do this. See Chapter 14, "Setting
Up Devices Using HP-UX Commands" for detailed information on this
procedure.

2-26

Installing Interface and Accessory Cards

HP 98625A Hp·IB Disk Interface

2. Play it safe.

b. TURN OFF the computer and unplug the power cord.
c. Remove the Disk Interface from its envelope, being careful to handle the
card only by its edges and front panel. The card can be easily damaged
by electrostatic discharge (static zap).
d. Place the card on the envelope.
3. Set the select code of the interface card to a unique value and make note of it.
If you need to change the select code setting of your HP -IB interface card
from its preset value of 14, do so by setting the select code switches. Refer
to the documentation that came with the card for instructions on changing
the preset select code value.

Note

Select codes zero through seven (0- 7) are reserved for built-in
interface cards and cannot be used.
If you need to change the select code of a built-in interface
card, you might be able to do so by entering Configuration
Mode during the Boot ROM sequence. For more information
about interacting with the Boot ROM Configuration sequence
on a model 362 or 382 computer, consult the Hardware
Configuration Guide for your computer model. For information
about interacting with the Boot ROM Configuration sequence
of any other S300 or S400 computer, refer to the Service
Manual for the specific model computer.

Installing Interface and Accessory Cards

2·27

HP 98625A HP-IB Disk Interface
2

4. Set the interrupt level.
If an HP 98625A HP-IB Disk Interface is used in a system with one or more
HP 98625B HP-IB Disk Interfaces, the HP 98625A must be set to interrupt
level 4 and the HP 98625B HP-IB Disk Interface(s) must be set to interrupt
level 3.

Note

Do not set any other interface to interrupt level 4.

5. Insert the interface according to the instructions provided in the
documentation that came with the card.
6. Verify installation.
a. Plug in the power cord and turn on your computer. Watch for the word
"Keyboard" to appear, then press the space bar once.
b. Check the list of components displayed on the left-hand side of the
screen. If the message:
HP98625 at 14

appears in the list, you have correctly installed the Disk Interface.
This message should also appear when verifying the installation of the
98562-66530 Human (System) Interface Board.
If the message above does not appear, repeat the installation procedure,
making sure there are no select code conflicts and that the card is firmly
seated in an even-numbered slot. If the message still does not appear,
call your HP Service Representative for assistance.
Installation complete! Proceed with the installation and configuration of the
new peripheral device that requires this new interface card.

2-28

Installing Interface and Accessory Cards

HP 98625B High-Speed HP-IB Disk Interface
Note

There is a difference between the HP 98625A and the HP
98625B disk interfaces. If you have an HP 98625B Disk
Interface, you are in the correct section. If you have an HP
98625A Disk Interface, you need to refer to the proper section
in this chapter.

The HP 98625B HP-IB Disk Interface provides a high-speed HP-IB interface to
Command Set 80 (CS/80) disks. The Disk Interface is capable of handling up
to four disks on one interface card. A DMA Controller card is required for the
Disk Interface to achieve optimum performance.
Refer to Appendix B, "Series 400 Support Matrix", for hardware and software
support information.

Caution

If you are adding this device to a cluster-node, you must be
logged into that node to do HP -UX configuration tasks.

For more information about adding devices to a system
configured as an HP- UX cluster, refer to Managing Clusters of
HP 9000 Computers, Chapter 12, "Adding Peripherals to a
Cluster" .

Installing Interface and Accessory Cards

2-29

HP 986258 HP-IB Disk Interface

III

Inl

LOW/HIGH
SPEED=HIGH

Figure 2-5.
HP 98625B Disk Interface Switches

2-30

Installing Interface and Accessory Cards

HP 986258 HP-IB Disk Interface

Installing the HP 98625B HP-IB Disk Interface
Note

The HP 98625B Disk Interface cannot be installed in the HP
9888A bus expander. However, it can be installed in the HP
98568A Backplane Expander.

The following summary supplements the procedures outlined in your
installation documentation for this device. Read through this summary before
pro ceding with the installation.
1. Verify that the driver required for this interface card, and any peripheral
device you intend to install at this time, is included in your current kernel
configuration file, usually the / etc/ conf / dfile file.
To verify that the necessary dri ver( s ), listed in Table 2-1, is (are) part of
your current kernel configuration, you can:
• Use SAM to check your dfile for the necessary drivers, add any that are
missing, and reconfigure the kernel for you at this time. See Chapter 3,
"Adding Drivers for Interface and Accessory Cards Using SAM", and then
go on to step 2.
or
• Look in your df il e for the dri ver( s ). If the drivers are in your kernel
configuration file, go on to step 2 now.
If the driver(s) is (are) not in the /etc/conf/dfile, or is (are)
commented out with a comment symbol (such as the * sign), edit the
dfile to either add the driver or remove the comment marks. You
must reconfigure the kernel if you edit the dfile for any reason. You
can use the /etc/config program to do this. See Chapter 14, "Setting
Up Devices Using HP-UX Commands" for detailed information on this
procedure.

Installing Interface and Accessory Cards

2-31

HP 986258 HP-IB Disk Interface

2
2. Play it safe.
a. Shut down and halt the system using the fete/shutdown -h command.
If you are operating in a diskless cluster, see Managing Clusters of HP
9000 Computers for additional information on shutting down the system.
b. TURN OFF the computer and unplug the power cord.
c. Remove the Disk Interface from its envelope, being careful to handle the
card only by its edges and front panel. The card can be easily damaged
by electrostatic discharge (static zap).
d. Place the card on the envelope.
3. Set the following values according to the instructions provided in the
documentation that came with your interface card.
a. Set the select code of the interface card to a unique value and make note
of it.
If you need to change the select code of this card from its preset value of
14, do so by setting the select code switches. Check the documentation
that came with the card for specific procedures.

Note

The HP 98265A SCSI card is also preset to Select Code 14. If
your system has both of these cards, you will need to change
the select code on your HP 98625B Interface.

Note

Select codes zero through seven (0- 7) are reserved for built-in
interface cards and cannot be used.
If you need to change the select code of a built-in interface
card, you might be able to do so by entering Configuration
Mode during the Boot ROM sequence. For more information
about interacting with the Boot ROM Configuration sequence
on a model 362 or 382 computer, consult the Hardware
Configuration Guide for your computer model. For information
about interacting with the Boot ROM Configuration sequence
of any other S300 or S400 computer, refer to the Service
Manual for the specific model computer.

2-32

Installing Interface and Accessory Cards

HP 986258 HP-IB Disk Interface

b. Set the interrupt level. Default interrupt level set at 4.
If an HP 98625A HP-IB Disk Interface is used in a system with one or
more HP 98625B HP-IB Disk Interfaces, the HP 98625A must be set to
interrupt level 4 and the HP 98625B HP-IB Disk Interface(s) must be set
to interrupt level 3.

Note

Do not set any other interface (except for the HP 98629A SRM
Interface) to interrupt level 4.

c. Set the system controller switch.
The interface is configured to be system controller and may not need to
be changed. If you are connecting two computers together via HP-IB,
only one of them can be set to system controller. Therefore, you will
need to change this setting on one of the computers.
d. Set the low jhigh speed switch.
The Low jHigh Speed switch is preset to 0, "high speed". This setting is
appropriate for most applications.
4. Insert the interface according to the instructions provided in the
documentation that came with the card.

Installing Interface and Accessory Cards

2-33

HP 986258 Hp·IB Disk Interface
2

5. Verify installation.
a. Plug in the power cord and turn on your computer. Watch for the word
"Keyboard" to appear, then press the space bar once.
b. Check the list of components displayed on the left-hand side of the
screen. If the message:

HP98625 at 14
appears in the list, you have correctly installed the Disk Interface.
If the message above does not appear, repeat the installation procedure,
making sure there are no select code conflicts and that the card is firmly
seated in an even-numbered slot. If the message still does not appear,
call your HP Service Representative for assistance.

Installation complete! Proceed with the installation and configuration of the
new peripheral device that requires this new interface card.

2·34

Installing Interface and Accessory Cards

HP 98626A RS-232-C Interface
The HP 98626A RS-232-C Interface is connected to a terminal, modem, serial
peripheral, or computer and supports the RS-232-C standard. One interface is
required for each device, and each interface must be set to a unique select code.
Refer to Appendix B, "Series 400 Support Matrix", for hardware and software
support information.

Caution

If you are adding this device to a cluster-node, you must be
logged into that node to do HP- UX configuration tasks.

For more information about adding devices to a system
configured as an HP-UX cluster, refer to Managing Clusters of
HP 9000 Computers, Chapter 12, "Adding Peripherals to a
Cluster" .

Installing Interface and Accessory Cards

2-35

HP 98626A RS-232-C Interface

2
U24

SELECT CODE

U20

INTERRUPT LEVEL

III
o

MODEM LINE

BAUD RATE

LINE CONTROL

Figure 2-6.
HP 98626A RS-232-C Serial Interface Switches

2-36

Installing Interface and Accessory Cards

HP 98626A RS·232·C Interface

Installing the HP 98626A RS-232-C Interface
The following summary supplements the procedures outlined in your
installation documentation for this device. Read through this summary before
proceding with the installation.
1. Verify that the driver required for this interface card, and any peripheral
device you intend to install at this time, is included in your current kernel
configuration file, usually the / etc/ conf / dfile file.

To verify that the necessary dri ver( s ), listed in Table 2-1, is (are) part of
your current kernel configuration, you can:
• Use SAM to check your dfile for the necessary drivers, add any that are
missing, and reconfigure the kernel for you at this time. See Chapter 3,
"Adding Drivers for Interface and Accessory Cards Using SAM", and then
go on to step 2.
or
• Look in your dfile for the driver(s). If the drivers are in your kernel
configuration file, go on to step 2 now.
If the driver(s) is (are) not in the /etc/conf/dfile, or is (are)
commented out with a comment symbol (such as the * sign), edit the
dfile to either add the driver or remove the comment marks. You
must reconfigure the kernel if you edit the dfile for any reason. You
can use the / etc/ config program to do this. See Chapter 14, "Setting
Up Devices Using HP-UX Commands" for detailed information on this
procedure.

Installing Interface and Accessory Cards

2·37

HP 98626A RS·232·C Interface
2

2. Play it safe.
a. Shut down and halt the system using the fete/shutdown -h command.
If you are operating in a diskless cluster, see Managing Clusters of HP
9000 Computers for additional information on shutting down the system.

b. TURN OFF the computer and unplug the power cord.
c. Remove the RS-232-C Interface from its envelope, being careful to handle
the card only by its edges and front panel. The card can be easily
damaged by electrostatic discharge (static zap).
d. Place the card on the envelope.
3. Set the following values according to the instructions provided in the
documentation that came with your interface card.
a. Set the select code of the interface card to a unique value and make note
of it.
If you need to change the select code of this card from its preset value of
9, do so by setting the select code switches. Check the documentation
that came with the card for specific procedures.
If select code 9 is being used by the RS-232-C interface on the HP
98562-66530 Human Interface Board, choose a select code that is not
already assigned.

Note

Select codes zero through seven (0- 7) are reserved for built-in
interface cards and cannot be used.
If you need to change the select code of a built-in interface
card, you might be able to do so by entering Configuration
Mode during the Boot ROM sequence. For more information
about interacting with the Boot ROM Configuration sequence
on a model 362 or 382 computer, consult the Hardware
Configuration Guide for your computer model. For information
about interacting with the Boot ROM Configuration sequence
of any other S300 or S400 computer, refer to the Service
Manual for the specific model computer.

2·38

Installing Interface and Accessory Cards

HP 98626A RS-232-C Interface

2
b. Set the character length.
The interface's character length is preset to 8 bits/character. If you are
certain that this character length is inappropriate for your application,
change this setting.
c. Set the number of stop bits.

Note

The interface is preset to 1 stop bit. If you are certain that
1 stop bit is inappropriate for your application, change this
setting.

d. Set the parity enable switch.
Set the parity enable switch as follows:
• If connecting a terminal or an HP 2686 LaserJet printer to this
interface, set this switch to "parity disabled."
• If connecting an HP 39800/01A bar code reader or an HP 92205A/C
Hayes Smartmodem 1200 to this interface, set this switch to "parity
enabled."
• If connecting any other device to this interface, set this switch to
match that of the connected device.

e. Set the parity type.
Set the parity type switches as follows:
• If you are connecting a terminal, an HP 2601A printer or an HP 2686
LaserJet printer to this interface, the parity type does not matter since
parity was disabled in step 7.
• If you are connecting an HP 39800/01A bar code reader to this
interface, set this switch to "parity is 0."
• If connecting an HP 92205A/C Hayes Smartmodem 1200 to this
interface, set the parity type to match the setting on the computer or
terminal you are communicating with.

Installing Interface and Accessory Cards

2-39

HP 98626A RS-232-C Interface

2
f. Set the handshake type.
Set the handshake type switches to XON/XOFF.
g. Set the modem line switches.
Set these switches as follows:
• If connecting a modem, HP 2686A LaserJet printer, or uucp to this
interface, set these switches to the "Connected" position .
• If connecting a terminal or bar code reader, set these switches to the
"Always on" position.

h. Set the remote jumper if you want to connect your system console
terminal to this interface.

appears in the list, you have correctly installed the HP 98626A RS-232-C
Interface.
If the message above does not appear, repeat the installation procedure,
making sure there are no select code conflicts and that the card is firmly
seated in an even-numbered slot. If the message still does not appear,
call your HP Service Representative for assistance.

Installation complete! Proceed with the installation and configuration of the
new peripheral device that requires this new interface card.

2-40

Installing Interface and Accessory Cards

HP 98628A Datacomm Interface
The HP 98628A Datacomm Interface connects to a serial peripheral, terminal,
modem or computer and supports the RS-232-C datacomm standard. One
interface is required for each terminal, and each interface must be set to a
unique select code.
Refer to Appendix B, "Series 400 Support Matrix", for hardware and software
support information.

Caution

If you are adding this device to a cluster-node, you must be
logged into that node to do HP- UX configuration tasks.

For more information about adding devices to a system
configured as an HP- UX cluster, refer to Managing Clusters of
HP 9000 Computers, Chapter 12, "Adding Peripherals to a
Cluster" .

Installing Interface and Accessory Cards

2·41

HP 98628A Datacomm Interface
2

Select Code
and Interrupt
Level Switches

Default Switches

Select Code
Select Code 20 shown
(see table for settings)

Figure 2·7. 98628A Datacomm Interface Switches

2·42

Installing Interface and Accessory Cards

HP 98628A Datacomm Interface

Installing the HP 98628A Datacomm Interface
The following summary supplements the procedures outlined in your
installation documentation for this device. Read through this summary before
pro ceding with the installation.
1. Verify that the driver required for this interface card, and any peripheral

device you intend to install at this time, is included in your current kernel
configuration file, usually the /etc/conf/dfile file.

To verify that the necessary driver( s), listed in Table 2-1, is (are) part of
your current kernel configuration, you can:
• Use SAM to check your dfile for the necessary drivers, add any that are
missing, and reconfigure the kernel for you at this time. See Chapter 3,
"Adding Drivers for Interface and Accessory Cards Using SAM", and then
go on to step 2.
or
• Look in your dfile for the driver(s). If the drivers are in your kernel
configuration file, go on to step 2 now.
If the driver(s) is (are) not in the /etc/conf/dfile, or is (are)
commented out with a comment symbol (such as the * sign), edit the
dfile to either add the driver or remove the comment marks. You
must reconfigure the kernel if you edit the dfile for any reason. You
can use the / etc/ config program to do this. See Chapter 14, "Setting
Up Devices Using HP -UX Commands" for detailed information on this
procedure.

Installing Interface and Accessory Cards 2-43

HP 98628A Datacomm Interface

b. TURN OFF the computer and unplug the power cord.
c. Remove the Datacomm Interface from its envelope, being careful to
handle the card only by its edges and front panel. The card can be easily
damaged by electrostatic discharge (static zap).
d. Place the card on the envelope.
3. Set the following values according to the instructions provided in the
documentation that came with your interface card.
a. Set the select code of the interface card to a unique value and make note
of it.
If you need to change the select code of this card from its preset value of
20, do so by setting the select code switches. Check the documentation
that came with the card for specific procedures.

Note

Select codes zero through seven (0-7) are reserved for built-in
interface cards and cannot be used.
If you need to change the select code of a built-in interface
card, you might be able to do so by entering Configuration
Mode during the Boot ROM sequence. For more information
about interacting with the Boot ROM Configuration sequence
on a model 362 or 382 computer, consult the Hardware
Configuration Guide for your computer model. For information
about interacting with the Boot ROM Configuration sequence
of any other S300 or 8400 computer, refer to the Service
Manual for the specific model computer.

b. Set the interrupt level.
The interface is preset to interrupt level 3. If you are certain that
interrupt level 3 is inappropriate for your application, change this value.

2-44

Installing Interface and Accessory Cards

HP 98628A Datacomm Interface

c. Set the remote switch.
The Remote switch is preset to "OFF," which does not configure the
interface to be the system console. If you are connecting your system
console to this interface, you must change this value.

If you are connecting a terminal to this interface and want the terminal
to be the system console, set the Remote switch to 0 (remote).

Caution

The boot RO M will not recognize this terminal as the system
console, even though HP -UX will. No boot RO M messages will
appear on the associated terminal; therefore, do not use the HP
98628A for a system console until after HP- UX is installed.

4. Insert the interface according to the instructions provided in the
documentation that came 'With the card.
5. Verify installation
a. Plug in the power cord and turn on your computer. Watch for the word
"Keyboard" to appear, then press the space bar once.
b. Check the list of components displayed on the left-hand side of the
screen. If the message:
HP98628 at 20
appears in the list, you have correctly installed the Datacomm Interface.

Installation complete! Proceed with the installation and configuration of the
new peripheral device that requires this new interface card.

Installing Interface and Accessory Cards

2-45

HP 98629A/50961A SRM Interfaces
The HP 98629A Shared Resource Management (SRM) Interface and the HP
50961A SRM Coax Interface provide both protocol management and electrical
levels for communication between the computer and the Shared Resource
Management (SRM) system. The SRM system allows the computer to share
common disks, printers and plotters.
Refer to Appendix B, "Series 400 Support Matrix", for hardware and software
support information.

Caution

If you are adding this device to a cluster-node, you must be
logged into that node to do HP- UX configuration tasks.

For more information about adding devices to a system
configured as an HP- UX cluster, refer to Managing Clusters of
HP 9000 Computers, Chapter 12, "Adding Peripherals to a
Cluster".

2-46

Installing Interface and Accessory Cards

HP 98629Aj50961A SRM Interfaces

Installing the HP 98629A (or 50961A) SRM Interface
The following summary supplements the procedures outlined in your
installation documentation for this device. Read through this summary before
proceding with the installation.
1. Verify that the driver required for this interface card, and any peripheral
device you intend to install at this time, is included in your current kernel
configuration file, usually the / etc/ conf / dfile file.

To verify that the necessary driver( s), listed in Table 2-1, is (are) part of
your current kernel configuration, you can:
• Use SAM to check your dfile for the necessary drivers, add any that are
missing, and reconfigure the kernel for you at this time. See Chapter 3,
"Adding Drivers for Interface and Accessory Cards Using SAM", and then
go on to step 2.
or
• Look in your df il e for the dri ver( s ). If the drivers are in your kernel
configuration file, go on to step 2 now.
If the driver(s) is (are) not in the /etc/conf/dfile, or is (are)
commented out with a comment symbol (such as the * sign), edit the
dfile to either add the driver or remove the comment marks. You
must reconfigure the kernel if you edit the dfile for any reason. You
can use the / etc/ config program to do this. See Chapter 14, "Setting
Up Devices Using HP -UX Commands" for detailed information on this
procedure.

2. Play it safe.

a. Shut down and halt the system using the /etc/shutdoTNn -h command.
If you are operating in a diskless cluster, see Managing Clusters of HP
9000 Computers for additional information on shutting down the system.

b. TURN OFF the computer and unplug the power cord.
3. Refer to the documentation shipped with your SRM system for information
about installation.

Installing Interface and Accessory Cards

2-47

HP 98629A/50961A SRM Interfaces

4. Set the select code of the interface card to a unique value and make note of it.

If you need to change the select code of this card from its preset value of 21,
do so by setting the select code switches. Check the documentation that
came with the card for specific procedures.

Note

Both the SRM and LAN interfaces are preset to select code 2l.
If you have both SRM and LAN interfaces, change the setting
of the SRM Interface select code.

Note

Select codes zero through seven (0- 7) are reserved for built-in
interface cards and cannot be used.
If you need to change the select code of a built-in interface
card, you might be able to do so by entering Configuration
Mode during the Boot ROM sequence. For more information
about interacting with the Boot ROM Configuration sequence
on a model 362 or 382 computer, consult the Hardware
Configuration Guide for your computer model. For information
about interacting with the Boot ROM Configuration sequence
of any other S300 or S400 computer, refer to the Service
Manual for the specific model computer.

2-48

Installing Interface and Accessory Cards

HP 98629A/50961A SRM Interfaces

appears in the list, you have correctly installed the HP 98629 SRM
Interface.
If the message above does not appear, repeat the installation procedure,
making sure there are no select code conflicts and that the card is firmly
seated in an even-numbered slot. If the message still does not appear,
call your HP Service Representative for assistance.

Installation complete! Proceed with the installation and configuration of the
new peripheral device that requires this new interface card.

Installing Interface and Accessory Cards

2-49

HP 98642A 4-Channel Multiplexer Interface
The HP 98642A 4-Channel Multiplexer Interface has three direct-connect ports
and one port with full modem control. The buffering of this interface makes it
suitable for nearly all applications, including graphics terminals.
Refer to Appendix B, "Series 400 Support Matrix", for hardware and software
support information.

Caution

If you are adding this device to a cluster-node, you must be
logged into that node to do HP- UX configuration tasks.

For more information about adding devices to a system
configured as an HP- UX cluster, refer to Managing Clusters of
HP 9000 Computers, Chapter 12, "Adding Peripherals to a
Cluster" .

2-50

Installing Interface and Accessory Cards

HP 98642A 4-Channel Multiplexer Interface

-o

REMOTE

INTERRUPT

LEVEL

0--

Figure 2-8.
HP 98642A 4-Channel Multiplexer Interface Switches

Installing Interface and Accessory Cards

2-51

HP 98642A 4-Channel Multiplexer Interface
2

Installing the HP 98642A 4-Channel Multiplexer Interface
The following summary supplements the procedures outlined in your
installation documentation for this device. Read through this summary before
proceding with the installation.
1. Verify that the driver required for this interface card, and any peripheral
device you intend to install at this time, is included in your current kernel
configuration file, usually the /etc/conf/dfile file.

To verify that the necessary driver(s), listed in Table 2-1, is (are) part of
your current kernel configuration, you can:
• Use SAM to check your dfile for the necessary drivers, add any that are
missing, and reconfigure the kernel for you at this time. See Chapter 3,
"Adding Drivers for Interface and Accessory Cards Using SAM", and then
go on to step 2.
or
• Look in your df il e for the dri ver( s ). If the drivers are in your kernel
configuration file, go on to step 2 now.
If the driver(s) is (are) not in the /etc/conf/dfile, or is (are)
commented out with a comment symbol (such as the * sign), edit the
dfile to either add the driver or remove the comment marks. You
must reconfigure the kernel if you edit the dfile for any reason. You
can use the /etc/config program to do this. See Chapter 14, "Setting
Up Devices Using HP - UX Commands" for detailed information on this
procedure.

2-52

Installing Interface and Accessory Cards

HP 98642A 4·Channel Multiplexer Interface
2

2. Play it safe.
a. Shut down and halt the system using the /etc/shutdown -h command.
If you are operating in a diskless cluster, see Managing Clusters of HP
9000 Computers for additional information on shutting down the system.

b. TURN OFF the computer and unplug the power cord.
c. Remove the 4-Channel Multiplexer Interface from its envelope, being
careful to handle the card only by its edges and front panel. The card
can be easily damaged by electrostatic discharge (static zap). Do NOT
touch any of the card's components or exposed solder pins.
d. Place the card on the envelope.
3. Set the following values according to the instructions provided in the
documentation that came with your interface card.
a. Set the select code of the interface card to a unique value and make note
of it.
If you need to change the select code of this card from its preset value of
13, do so by setting the select code switches. Check the documentation
that came with the card for specific procedures.

Note

Installing Interface and Accessory Cards

2·53

HP 98642A 4-Channel Multiplexer Interface
2

b. Set the interrupt level.
The interface is preset to interrupt level 3. If interrupt level 3 is
inappropriate for your application, change this value.
c. Set the remote switch. The Remote switch is preset to "local," which
does not configure port 1 to be the system console. If you are connecting
your system console to port 1 of this interface, set switch 1 to 1 (remote).

4. Insert the interface according to the instructions provided in the
documentation that came with the card.
5. Verify installation
a. Plug in the power cord and turn on your computer. Watch for the word
"Keyboard" to appear, then press the space bar once.
b. Check the list of components displayed on the left-hand side of the
screen. If the message:
HP98642 at 13

appears in the list, you have correctly installed the HP 98642A 4-Channel
Multiplexer Interface.
If the message does not appear, repeat the installation procedure, making
sure there are no select code conflicts and that the card is firmly seated
in an even-numbered slot. If the message still does not appear, call your
HP Service Representative for assistance.

Installation complete! Proceed with the installation and configuration of the
new peripheral device that requires this new interface card.

2-54

Installing Interface and Accessory Cards

HP 98638A 8-Channel Multiplexer Interface
The HP 98638A 8-Channel Multiplexer Interface provides a means of
connecting up to eight asynchronous devices such as terminals, printers,
plotters and modems to the HP 9000 computers. This interface is a DIO
System card and fits into the DIO System slot or a DIO II slot. There are two
versions of the HP 96838A available:
1. The HP 96838A supports devices that use the RS-232 interface standard.
2. The HP 96838A Option lC8 supports devices that use the RS-422 interface
standard.
The RS-232-C ADP (Active Distribution Panel) supports both modem and
direct connects to terminals, printers, and plotters. The RS-422 supports direct
connections only.
For product description and detailed specifications, refer to the HP 98638A
Eight Port Asynchronous Multiplexer Installation and Reference Manual HP
part number 98638-90001.
Refer to Appendix B, "Series 400 Support Matrix", for hardware and software
support information. Figure 2-9 provides a diagram of the HP 98638A product.

Installing Interface and Accessory Cards

2-55

HP 98638A 8·Channel Multiplexer Interface

Caution

If you are adding this device to a cluster-node, you must be
logged into that node to do HP- UX configuration tasks.

For more information about adding devices to a system
configured as an HP- UX cluster, refer to Managing Clusters of
HP 9000 Computers, Chapter 12, "Adding Peripherals to a
Cluster" .

2·56

Installing Interface and Accessory Cards

HP 98638A 8-Channel Multiplexer Interface

Active Distribution Panel (ADP)
9-pin sub D connector

MUX Card to ADP Cable
(Multiplexed Serial Link)
RS-232C

-HP part number
-40299-60002

RS-422 - HP part number
-5062-3085

Figure 2-9. HP 98638A 8-Channel Multiplexer Interface Assemblies

Installing Interface and Accessory Cards

2-57

HP 98638A 8-Channel Multiplexer Interface

Supported Modems
Table 2-2 contains modems supported from an RS-232-C modem port to
another terminal or serial printer. A pair of modems is needed for each
connection: one to connect the modem port of the telecommunications line,
and the other to connect the terminal or serial printer to the other end of the
telecommunications line. Asynchronous modem connections on the HP 98638A
can support full duplex modems only.
Table 2-2. HP 98638A Supported Modems

Modem

Baud Rate

Bell 212A

300, 1200

RacalMilog MPS 1222

300, 1200

Hayes Smart Modem

1200

HP 37212B

300, 1200, 2400-V.22

HP 50759A

300, 1200, 2400

Telebit Trailblazer Plus 1200, 2400, fast (9600, 19200, 38400)

Note

2-58

Only modems which have BS 6301 approval are recommended
by Hewlett-Packard.

Installing Interface and Accessory Cards

HP 98638A 8-Channel Multiplexer Interface

Supported Plotters, Printers, and Terminals
Table 2-3 contains the plotters, printers, and terminals that are supported on
the HP 98638A 8-Channel Multiplexer.
Table 2-3.
HP 98638A Supported Plotters, Printers, and Terminals

Plotters Printers Terminals
7550A
2993A
2392
2934A
2393
2562A
2394
2563B
2397
2686D
700/43
33447A
700/22
2684D/P 700/32
700/92
700/94
2625A
2627A
2628A

Installing Interface and Accessory Cards

2-59

HP 98638A 8-Channel Multiplexer Interface
2

Installing the HP 98638A 8-Channel Multiplexer Interface
The following summary supplements the procedures outlined in your
installation documentation for this device. Read through this summary before
proceding with the installation.
1. Verify that the driver required for this interface card, and any peripheral
device you intend to install at this time, is included in your current kernel
configuration file, usually the / etc/ conf / dfile file.

To verify that the necessary driver(s), listed in Table 2-1, is (are) part of
your current kernel configuration, you can:
• Use SAM to check your dfile for the necessary drivers, add any that are
missing, and reconfigure the kernel for you at this time. See Chapter 3,
"Adding Drivers for Interface and Accessory Cards Using SAM", and then
go on to step 2.
or
• Look in your dfile for the driver(s). If the drivers are in your kernel
configuration file, go on to step 2 now.
If the driver(s) is (are) not in the /etc/conf/dfile, or is (are)
commented out with a comment symbol (such as the * sign), edit the
dfile to either add the driver or remove the comment marks. You
must reconfigure the kernel if you edit the dfile for any reason. You
can use the / etc/ config program to do this. See Chapter 14, "Setting
Up Devices Using HP- UX Commands" for detailed information on this
procedure.

2-60

Installing Interface and Accessory Cards

HP 98638A 8-Channel Multiplexer Interface

2. Play it safe.

a. Shut down and halt the system using the Jete/shutdown -h command.
If you are operating in a diskless cluster, see Managing Clusters of HP
9000 Computers for additional information on shutting down the system.
b. TURN OFF the computer and unplug the power cord.
c. Remove the 4-Channel Multiplexer Interface from its envelope, being
careful to handle the card only by its edges and front panel. The card
can be easily damaged by electrostatic discharge (static zap). Do NOT
touch any of the card's components or exposed solder pins.
d. Place the card on the envelope.

~------------~------~O

Remote/Local
Interrupt

Select Code
Note: Switch 8 is hardwired. It can be set ON or OFF.

Figure 2-10.
HP 98638A 8-Channel Multiplexer Interface Switches

Installing Interface and Accessory Cards

2-61

HP 98638A 8-Channel Multiplexer Interface

2
3. Set the following values according to the instructions provided in the
documentation that came with your interface card.
a. Set the select code of the interface card to a unique value and make note
of it.
If you need to change the select codes on this card from the preset
values of 28 and 29, do so by setting the select code switches. Check the
documentation that came with the card for specific procedures.

Note

Two consecutive select codes, starting on an even number, are
needed for the HP 98638A because two identical four-channel
multiplexers are implemented on the card.

Note

b. Set the interrupt level.
The interface is preset to interrupt level 3. If you are certain that
interrupt level 3 is inappropriate for your application, change this value.
c. Set the remote switch.
The Remote switch is preset to "local," which does not configure port 1
to be the system console. If you are connecting your system console to
port 1 of this interface, set switch 1 to 1 (remote).

2-62

Installing Interface and Accessory Cards

HP 98638A 8-Channel Multiplexer Interface

HP98642A (RS-232-C MUX) at 28
HP98642A (RS-232-C MUX) at 29
appears in the list, you have correctly installed the HP 98638A 8-Channel
Multiplexer Interface. This will be the display even if an RS-422 ADP
can be connected to the interface card.
If the message does not appear, repeat the installation procedure, making
sure there are no select code conflicts and that the card is firmly seated
in an even-numbered slot. If the message still does not appear, call your
HP Service Representative for assistance.
Installation complete! Proceed with the installation and configuration of the
new peripheral device that requires this new interface card.

Installing Interface and Accessory Cards

2-63

HP 98643A Local Area Network (LAN) Interface
The HP 98643A Local Area Network (LAN) Interface is used to connect a
computer to a local area network.
Refer to Appendix B, "Series 400 Support Matrix", for hardware and software
support information.

Before Installing This Device
Before you install this interface card:
• Have the documentation that came with the interface card handy. You will
need to refer to it during this procedure.

• If you have not added this type of device before, read the material in
Chapter 1, "Introduction". It provides interface and cabling guidelines to
follow when adding devices to your system.
• Plan ahead. Installing interface cards on your system requires that you shut
down and power off the system. On a multiuser or clustered system you will
want to warn users and cluster clients in advance that the system (server)
will be coming down. Use the wall or cwall command to do this.

Caution

If you are adding this device to a cluster-node, you must be
logged into that node to do HP- UX configuration tasks.

For more information about adding devices to a system
configured as an HP- UX cluster, refer to Managing Clusters of
HP 9000 Computers, Chapter 12, "Adding Peripherals to a
Cluster" .

2-64

Installing Interface and Accessory Cards

HP 98643A Local Area Network (LAN) Interface

Installing the HP 98643A Local Area Network (LAN) Interface
The following summary supplements the procedures outlined in your
installation documentation for this device. Read through this summary before
proceding with the installation.
1. Verify that the driver required for this interface card, and any peripheral

device you intend to install at this time, is included in your current kernel
configuration file, usually the / ete/ eonf / dfile file.

To verify that the necessary driver(s), listed in Table 2-1, is (are) part of
your current kernel configuration, you can:
• Use SAM to check your dfile for the necessary drivers, add any that are
missing, and reconfigure the kernel for you at this time. See Chapter 3,
"Adding Drivers for Interface and Accessory Cards Using SAM", and then
go on to step 2.
or
• Look in your dfile for the driver(s). If the drivers are in your kernel
configuration file, go on to step 2 now.
If the driver(s) is (are) not in the /ete/eonf/dfile, or is (are)
commented out with a comment symbol (such as the * sign), edit the
dfile to either add the driver or remove the comment marks. You
must reconfigure the kernel if you edit the dfile for any reason. You
can use the / ete/ eonfig program to do this. See Chapter 14, "Setting
Up Devices Using HP-UX Commands" for detailed information on this
procedure.

2. Play it safe.

b. TURN OFF the computer and unplug the power cord.

Installing Interface and Accessory Cards

2·65

HP 98643A Local Area Network (LAN) Interface
2

3. Set the following values according to the instructions provided in your LAN
system documentation.
a. Set the select code of the interface card to a unique value and make note
of it.
If you need to change the select code of this card from its preset value of
21, do so by setting the select code switches. Check the documentation
that came with the card for specific procedures.

Note

Both the LAN and SRM interfaces are preset to select code 21.
If you have both LAN and SRM interfaces, change this setting.
Also, the HP 98562-66530 Human (System) Interface Board
contains a LAN interface that is preset to select code 2l.
Change the select code of the HP 98643A card if you have an
HP 98562-66530 Human (System) Interface Board.

Note

Select codes zero through seven (0- 7) are reserved for built-in
interface cards and cannot be used.
If you need to change the select code of a built-in interface
card, you might be able to do so by entering Configuration
Mode during the Boot ROM sequence. For more information
about interacting with the Boot ROM Configuration sequence
on a model 362 or 382 computer, consult the Hardware
Configuration Guide for your computer model. For information
about interacting with the Boot ROM Configuration sequence
of any other S300 or S400 computer, refer to the Service
Manual for the specific model computer.

b. Set the interrupt level.
The interrupt priority level must be set to five. The LAN card is shipped
from the factory with interrupt level 5.

2·66

Installing Interface and Accessory Cards

HP 98643A Local Area Network (LAN) Interface

2
4. Insert the interface according to the instructions provided in the
documentation that came with the card.
5. Verify installation.
a. Plug in the power cord and turn on your computer. Watch for the word
"Keyboard" to appear, then press the space bar once.
b. Check the list of components displayed on the left-hand side of the
screen. If the message:
HP98643 at 21
appears in the list, you have correctly installed the HP 98643A LAN
Interface.
The message "HP98643 at 21" is also generated by the internal LAN
circuit on the 98562-66530 Human (System) Interface Board.
If the message does not appear, repeat the installation procedure, making
sure there are no select code conflicts and that the card is firmly seated
in an even-numbered slot. If the message still does not appear, call your
HP Service Representative for assistance.

Installation complete! Proceed with the installation and configuration of the
new peripheral device that requires this new interface card.

Installing Interface and Accessory Cards

2-67

HP 98644A Asynchronous Serial Interface
The HP 98644A Asynchronous Serial Interface connects to a terminal, modem,
serial peripheral, or computer and supports the RS-232-C standard. One
interface is required for each device, and each interface must be set to a unique
select code.
Refer to Appendix B, "Series 400 Support Matrix", for hardware and software
support information.

- Before Installing This Device
Before you install this interface card:
• Have the documentation that came with the interface card handy. You will
need to refer to it during this procedure.
• If you have not added this type of device before, read the material in
Chapter 1, "Introduction". It provides interface and cabling guidelines to
follow when adding devices to your system.
• Plan ahead. Installing interface cards on your system requires that you shut
down and power off the system. On a multiuser or clustered system you will
want to warn users and cluster clients in advance that the system (server)
will be coming down. Use the wall or cwall command to do this.

Caution

If you are adding this device to a cluster-node, you must be
logged into that node to do HP- UX configuration tasks.
For more information about adding devices to a system
configured as an HP -UX cluster, refer to Managing Clusters of
HP 9000 Computers, Chapter 12, "Adding Peripherals to a
Cluster" .

2·68

Installing Interface and Accessory Cards

HP 98644A Asynchronous Serial Interface
2

SW1

c=:J
o

III

III
Figure 2-11.
HP 98644A Asynchronous Serial Interface Switches

Installing Interface and Accessory Cards

2-69

HP 98644A Asynchronous Serial Interface

Installing the HP 98644A Asynchronous Serial Interface
The following summary supplements the procedures outlined in your
installation documentation for this device. Read through this summary before
proceding with the installation.
1. Verify that the driver required for this interface card, and any peripheral
device you intend to install at this time, is included in your current kernel
configuration file, usually the / etc/ conf / dfile file.

To verify that the necessary driver(s), listed in Table 2-1, is (are) part of
your current kernel configuration, you can:
• Use SAM to check your dfile for the necessary drivers, add any that are
missing, and reconfigure the kernel for you at this time. See Chapter 3,
"Adding Drivers for Interface and Accessory Cards Using SAM", and then
go on to step 2.
or
• Look in your df il e for the dri ver( s ). If the drivers are in your kernel
configuration file, go on to step 2 now.
If the driver(s) is (are) not in the /etc/conf/dfile, or is (are)
commented out with a comment symbol (such as the * sign), edit the
dfile to either add the driver or remove the comment marks. You
must reconfigure the kernel if you edit the dfile for any reason. You
can use the / etc/ config program to do this. See Chapter 14, "Setting
Up Devices Using HP-UX Commands" for detailed information on this
procedure.

2-70

Installing Interface and Accessory Cards

HP 98644A Asynchronous Serial Interface

2. Play it safe.
a. Shut down and halt the system using the jete/shutdown -h command.
If you are operating in a diskless cluster, see Managing Clusters of HP
9000 Computers for additional information on shutting down the system.
b. TURN OFF the computer and unplug the power cord.
c. Remove the Asynchronous Serial Interface from its envelope, being
careful to handle the card only by its edges and front panel. The card
can be easily damaged by electrostatic discharge (static zap).
d. Place the card on the envelope.
3. Set the following values according to the instructions provided in the
documentation that came with your interface card.
a. Set the select code of the interface card to a unique value and make note
of it.
If you need to change the select code from its preset value of 9, do so by
setting the select code switches. Check the documentation that came
with the card for specific procedures.

Note

Both the Asynchronous Serial Interface and the RS- 232- C
Interface are preset to select code 9. If you have both
Asynchronous Serial Interface and the RS- 232- C Interface,
change the setting of the Asynchronous Serial Interface select
code.

Installing Interface and Accessory Cards

2· 71

HP 98644A Asynchronous Serial Interface
2

Note

Select codes zero through seven (0- 7) are reserved for built-in
interface cards and cannot be used.

If you need to change the select code of a built-in interface
card, you might be able to do so by entering Configuration
Mode during the Boot ROM sequence. For more information
about interacting with the Boot ROM Configuration sequence
on a model 362 or 382 computer, consult the Hardware
Configuration Guide for your computer model. For information
about interacting with the Boot ROM Configuration sequence
of any other S300 or S400 computer, refer to the Service
Manual for the specific model computer.
b. Set the interrupt level.
The interface is preset to interrupt level 3. If you are certain that
interrupt level 3 is inappropriate for your application, change this value.
c. Set the MODEM ENable switch.
Set the MODEM ENable switch as follows:

• If you intend to connect an HP 2686A LaserJet printer, an HP
92205A/C Hayes Smartmodem, or a uucp, set this switch to 1.
• If you intend to connect a terminal or the HP 39800/01A bar code
reader, set this switch to O.
d. Set the 626 switch to 1.
e. Set the REMOTE switch.
Set the Remote switch as follows:

• If you are connecting a terminal to this interface and want this
terminal to be the system console, set this switch to 1.
• If you are connecting a terminal to this interface but do not want this
terminal to be the system console, or if you are connecting any other
device, set this switch to O.

2-72

Installing Interface and Accessory Cards

HP 98644A Asynchronous Serial Interface

should appear in the list. If it does, you have correctly installed the HP
98644A Asynchronous Serial Interface.
This message should also appear when verifying the installation of the
98562-66530 Human (System) Interface Board.

Note

If you have boot ROM 3.0, no message will appear, as boot
ROM 3.0 does not identify the HP 98644A Asynchronous Serial
Interface. Assume installation is correct.
If no message appears (and you do not have Boot ROM Rev 3.0), repeat
the installation procedure, making sure there are no select code conflicts
and that the card is firmly seated in an even-numbered slot. If the
message still does not appear, call your HP Service Representative for
assistance.

Installation complete! Proceed with the installation and configuration of the
new peripheral device that requires this new interface card.

Installing Interface and Accessory Cards

2· 73

HP 98562-66530 Human (System) Interface Board
The HP 98562-66530 Human Interface board (also called the System Interface
board) includes an RS-232-C Serial interface, an HP-HIL interface, a
standard-speed HP-IB interface, a DMA controller, and a Local Area Network
(LAN) interface. You can also get an optional interface (such as an optional
disk interface or SCSI) in addition to those mentioned above.
Refer to Appendix B, "Series 400 Support Matrix", for hardware and software
support information.

Caution

2-74

Installing Interface and Accessory Cards

HP 98562-66530 Human (System) Interface Board

2
HPIB RS232

Figure 2-12.
Human (System) Interface Board Switches

Installing Interface and Accessory Cards

2-75

HP 98562-66530 Human (System) Interface Board

Installing the HP 98562-66530 Human (System) Interface Board
The following summary supplements the procedures outlined in your
installation documentation for this device. Read through this summary before
proceding with the installation.
1. No device driver is required for this interface card. However, verify that the
necessary drivers are in place for any peripheral device you intend to install
at this time. These should be included in your current kernel configuration
file, usually the /etc/conf/dfile file.
To verify that the necessary driver( s), listed in pertinent peripheral device
section, is (are) part of your current kernel configuration, you can:
• Use SAM to check your dfile for the necessary drivers, add any that are
missing, and reconfigure the kernel for you at this time. See Chapter 3,
"Adding Drivers for Interface and Accessory Cards Using SAM", and then
go on to step 2.
or
• Look in your dfile for the driver(s). If the drivers are in your kernel
configuration file, go on to step 2 now.
If the driver(s) is (are) not in the /etc/conf/dfile, or is (are)
commented out with a comment symbol (such as the * sign), edit the
dfile to either add the driver or remove the comment marks. You
must reconfigure the kernel if you edit the dfile for any reason. You
can use the /etc/config program to do this. See Chapter 14, "Setting
Up Devices Using HP- UX Commands" for detailed information on this
procedure.

2· 76

Installing Interface and Accessory Cards

HP 98562-66530 Human (System) Interface Board

2. Play it safe.
a. Shut down and halt the system using the letelshutdown -h command.
If you are operating in a diskless cluster, see Managing Clusters of HP
9000 Computers for additional information on shutting down the system.

b. TURN OFF the computer and unplug the power cord.
c. Remove the Human (System) Interface board from the back of your
computer by loosening the two thumb screws and pulling on the handle.
Be careful to handle the card only by its edges and front panel, as the
card can be easily damaged by electrostatic discharge (static zap).
d. Place the card on a static-free surface.
e. Do not disconnect the option card or its cable.
3. Set the following values according to the instructions provided in the
documentation that came with your interface card.
a. Set the HP-IB system controller switch.
The interface is configured to be system controller and may not need
changing.
If you are connecting two computers together via HP-IB, only one
of them can be set to system controller. To change this interface to
non-system controller, move the System Controller switch to the 0
position.

Alternatively, you can set the HP-IB system controller switch during the
HP- UX boot sequence. Refer to the Hardware Configuration Guide for
the specific computer model if your computer is a Model 362 or 382.
For information about interacting with the Boot ROM Configuration
sequence of any other S300 or S400 computer, refer to the Service Manual
for the specific model computer.

Note

If you will be connecting a disk drive, printer, plotter or other
device to this interface, do not set this switch to 0 non-system
controller.

Installing Interface and Accessory Cards

2-77

HP 98562·66530 Human (System) Interface Board

b. Set the RS-232-C disable switch.
The interface is shipped from the factory with the RS-232-C Serial
interface enabled (meaning you can use the interface). If you intend to .
disable this interface (meaning you do not want to use the interface),
change this setting. If you do not intend to use this RS-232-C interface,
you can use select code 9 for another interface. Once disabled, this
interface will not be recognized by the boot ROM and will not occupy
select code 9.
To disable the RS-232-C Serial interface, move the DIS switch to the 1
position.
If you later want to enable the RS-232-C Serial interface, move the switch
back to the 0 position.

c. Set the RS-232-C remote terminal enable switch.
The interface is shipped from the factory with the remote terminal enable
switch set to local mode. If you intend to connect a terminal to the
RS-232-C interface, and want this terminal to be the system console, you
will need to change this setting.
You can set the RS-232-C remote terminal enable switch during the
HP- UX boot sequence. Refer to the Hardware Configuration Guide
specific to your model computer for an explanation of the boot ROM
configuration mode on a model 362 or 382 computer. Refer to the Service
Manual for your specific model computer for an explanation of the boot
ROM configuration mode for any other S300 or S400 computers.
Find the group of four switches labeled "HPIBjRS232". The switch
labeled "REM" in this group is the Remote Terminal Enable switch.
Set the "REM" switch as follows:
• If you are connecting a terminal to this interface and want this
terminal to be the system console, set this switch to l.
• If you are connecting a terminal to this interface but do not want this
terminal to be the system console, or if you are connecting any other
device, set this switch to o.

2· 78

Installing Interface and Accessory Cards

HP 98562-66530 Human (System) Interface Board

d. Set the modem lines enable switch.
You can set the modem lines enable switch during the HP- UX boot
sequence. Refer to the Hardware Configuration Guide specific to your
model computer for an explanation of the boot ROM configuration
mode on a model 362 or 382 computer. Refer to the Service Manual
for your specific model computer for an explanation of the boot ROM
configuration mode for any other S300 or S400 computers.
Find the group of four switches labeled "HPIB jRS232". The switch
labeled "MEN" in this group is the Modem Lines Enable switch.
Set the "MEN" switch as follows:
• If you intend to connect an HP 2601A printer, an HP 2686A LaserJet
printer, an HP 92205AjC Hayes SmartModem, or a uucp, set this
switch to 1.
• If you intend to connect a terminal or the HP 39800j01A bar code
reader, set this switch to o.

e. Set the select code and make note of it.
The LAN select code is preset to 21. If you also have an SRM interface
installed in your computer (at select code 21), you must change the select
code of the LAN interface to an unused value.
You can set the LAN select code during the HP- UX boot sequence. Refer
to the Hardware Configuration Guide specific to your model computer for
an explanation of the boot RO M configuration mode on a model 362
or 382 computer. Refer to the Service Manual for your specific model
computer for an explanation of the boot ROM configuration mode for
any other S300 or S400 computers.

Installing Interface and Accessory Cards

2-79

HP 98562-66530 Human (System) Interface Board

2
f. Set the interrupt level.
The LAN interface is preset to interrupt level 5, the setting required by
HP- UX. If you are certain that interrupt level 5 is inappropriate for your
application, you will need to change this value.
You can set the LAN interrupt level during the HP- UX boot sequence.
Refer to the Hardware Configuration Guide specific to your model
computer for an explanation of the boot ROM configuration mode on a
model 362 or 382 computer. Refer to the Service Manual for your specific
model computer for an explanation of the boot ROM configuration mode
for any other S300 or S400 computers.
g. Set the local/remote switch.
The interface is shipped from the factory with the remote/local switch
set to local mode (0). We recommend that you do not alter this value.
h. Set the optional interface select code.
Both the Optional interface and the HP 98625A/B disk interfaces
are preset to select code 14. If you have both the Optional and HP
98625A/B interfaces, change the select code of Optional interface.
If select code 14 is already assigned, choose an unassigned select code.

Note

Select codes zero through seven (0- 7) are reserved for built-in
interface cards and cannot be used.
If you need to change the select code of a built-in interface
card, you might be able to do so by entering Configuration
Mode during the Boot ROM sequence. For more information
about interacting with the Boot ROM Configuration sequence
on a model 362 or 382 computer, consult the Hardware
Configuration Guide for your computer model. For information
about interacting with the Boot ROM Configuration sequence
of any other S300 or S400 computer, refer to the Service
Manual for the specific model computer.

2-80

Installing Interface and Accessory Cards

HP 98562·66530 Human (System) Interface Board

2
1.

Set the optional interface interrupt level.
The interrupt level is preset to 4. Do not set any other interface (except
for the HP 98629A SRM interface) to interrupt level 4.

j. Set the optional interface system controller switch.

The interface is configured to be system controller and need not be
changed. If you intend to connect two computers, only one of them
can be set to system controller. To change this interface to non-system
controller, change the System Controller switch to O.

Note

If you will be connecting a disk drive or other device to this
interface, do not set this switch to non-system controller.

k. Set the optional interface low jhigh speed switch.
The Low jHigh Speed switch is preset to 0, "high speed". This setting is
appropriate for most applications.
To change the low jhigh speed switch setting, find the set of nine switches
labeled "OPTION CARD". The switch labeled "LOW" in this group is
the Low jHigh Speed switch. Set this switch as follows:
• To set this switch to low speed, set the "LOW" switch to 1.
• To set this switch to high speed, set the "LOW" switch to 0.

4. Insert the interface according to the instructions provided in the
documentation that came with the card.
Re-insert the Human (System) Interface board into the slot you removed it,
and tighten the thumb screws to secure it.

Installing Interface and Accessory Cards

2·81

HP 98562-66530 Human (System) Interface Board
2

5. Record the select codes.

The following list assumes the default select code settings were retained.
7

The built-in, standard-speed HP-IB interface

The built-in RS-232-C Serial interface (unless you disabled
the interface)

The optional interface (unless you changed the select code
or did not purchase this option)

The built-in LAN interface (unless you changed the select
code

Note

Select codes zero through seven (0- 7) are reserved for built-in
interface cards and cannot be used.
If you need to change the select code of a built-in interface
card, you might be able to do so by entering Configuration
Mode during the Boot ROM sequence. For more information
about interacting with the Boot ROM Configuration sequence
on a model 362 or 382 computer, consult the Hardware
Configuration Guide for your computer model. For information
about interacting with the Boot ROM Configuration sequence
of any other S300 or S400 computer, refer to the Service
Manual for the specific model computer .

Note

• If you entered the configuration mode during the boot
sequence and altered the select codes, record the newly
assigned select codes instead of the above listed default select
codes.

• Do not record the RS- 232- C Serial Interface select code if it
is disabled. Do not record the Optional interface if you did
not purchase it.

2-82

Installing Interface and Accessory Cards

HP 98562·66530 Human (System) Interface Board

2
6. Verify installation.
a. Plug in the power cord and turn on your computer. Watch for the word
"Keyboard" to appear, then press the space bar once.
b. Check the list of components displayed on the left-hand side of the
screen. If the messages:

HPIB
HP98644 at 9
HP98643 at 21
HP98625 at 14
appear you have correctly installed the built-in standard-speed HP-IB
interface, the built-in RS-232-C Serial interface, the built-in LAN
interface, and the Optional interface respectively.

Note

Select codes for the HP98643 and 98625 can be different from
the default setting if you changed the select codes to avoid a
conflict.

If any of these messages do not appear, make sure there are no select code
conflicts and that the board is firmly seated in the slot. If you still have
problems, call your HP Service Representative for assistance.
Installation complete! Proceed with the installation and configuration of the
new peripheral device that requires this new interface card.

Installing Interface and Accessory Cards

2·83

HP 98248A Floating-Point Accelerator Accessory Card
The HP 98248A Floating-Point Math board set provides HP Series 300 DIO-II
32-bit computers with high-speed floating-point hardware.
There is a difference between the HP 98248A and the HP
98248B Floating-Point accessory cards. If you have an HP
98248A Floating-Point Accelerator you are in the correct
section. If you have an HP 98248B Floating-Point Accelerator,
you need to refer to the HP 98248B Floating-Point Accelerator
section in this chapter.

Note

Refer to Appendix B, "Series 400 Support Matrix", for hardware and software
support information.

Before Installing This Device
Before you install this interface card:
• Have the documentation that came with the interface card handy. You will
need to refer to it during this procedure.
• If you have not added this type of device before, read the material in
Chapter 1, "Introduction". It provides interface and cabling guidelines to
follow when adding devices to your system.
• Plan ahead. Installing interface cards on your system requires that you shut
down and power off the system. On a multiuser or clustered system you will
want to warn users and cluster clients in advance that the system (server)
will be coming down. Use the wall or cwall command to do this.

Caution

If you are adding this device to a cluster-node, you must be
logged into that node to do HP- UX configuration tasks.
For more information about adding devices to a system
configured as an HP- UX cluster, refer to Managing Clusters of
HP 9000 Computers, Chapter 12, "Adding Peripherals to a
Cluster" .

2-84

Installing Interface and Accessory Cards

HP 98248A Floating-Point Accelerator

Installing the HP 98248A Floating-Point Accelerator
Note

Installing the Floating-Point Accelerator involves two tasks:
• preparing the operating system for the new hardware
• physically installing the hardware
This procedure describes how to install the hardware only.
For instructions on preparing the operating system to use the
hardware, refer to the installation note that came with the
Floating-Point Accelerator.

You will need an expander if either of these statements is true:
1. You have no empty system slots in your computer.

2. Your video output board consists of two printed circuit boards.
If either of these conditions is true, you will need an expander, and the video
board must be placed in it. If you do not know whether your video board
contains two printed-circuit boards, check it by loosening the two screws
securing it and sliding it out of the computer.

The hardware installation process can take either of two paths, depending upon
whether your computer has a system bus. An installation procedure for each is
presented here. Go to the correct procedure. For example, the Model 350 has a
system bus, the Model 330 does not.
If you do not know whether your computer has a System Bus, look at the rear
panel of the computer. The System Bus is a metal plate covering two or more
slots. If your computer has such a plate, refer to the procedure titled, "With
a System Bus". Otherwise, refer to the procedure titled, "Without a System
Bus" .

Installing Interface and Accessory Cards

2-85

HP 98248A Floating-Point Accelerator

2
With a System Bus

1. Make sure that the computer and expander are turned off and the power
cords removed.

Caution

In the following steps, handle the circuit boards as little as
possible. Handle them by the edges or backplate only.

2. Locate an empty system slot in the computer, either by moving the video
board to the expander or by removing the cover plate from an empty slot.
3. Check that the empty slot is next to the System Bus. If it is not, rearrange
the boards so that it is.
4. Remove the Floating-Point Accelerator board set from the packaging
material and slide it into the empty slot. Slide the two-connector end in
first, with the board with the connectors on the bottom.
5. Loosen the screws holding the System Bus and remove it.
6. Locate the new, larger System Bus packaged with the Floating-Point
Accelerator and install it onto the Accelerator, processor board and RAM
board(s).

Note

You must reinstall the System Bus to ensure system
performance, provide needed air cooling, and meet statutory
requirements for fire safety and radiated emissions.

7. Reinstall the power cords and turn the computer and expander on.

Installation complete! Proceed with the installation and configuration of the
new peripheral device that requires this new interface card.
Refer to the installation note that came with the HP 98248A Floating Point
Accelerator for software configuration instructions.

2-86

Installing Interface and Accessory Cards

HP 98248A Floating-Point Accelerator

2
Without a System Bus

1. Make sure that the computer and expander are turned off and the power
cords removed.

Caution

In the following steps, handle the circuit boards as little as
possible. Handle them by the edges or backplate only.

2. Locate an empty system slot in the computer, either by moving the video
board to the expander or by removing the cover plate from an empty slot.
3. Remove the Floating-Point Accelerator board set from the packaging
material and slide it into the empty slot. Slide the two-connector end in
first, with the board with the connectors on the bottom.
4. Reinstall the slot cover plate removed in step 2.

Note

You must install the slot cover plate to provide needed air
cooling and meet statutory requirements for fire safety and
radiated emissions.

5. Reinstall the power cords and turn the computer and expander on.
Installation complete! Proceed with the installation and configuration of the
new peripheral device that requires this new interface card.

Refer to the installation note that came with the HP 98248A Floating Point
Accelerator for software configuration instructions.

Installing Interface and Accessory Cards

2-87

HP 982488 Floating-Point Accelerator Accessory Card
The HP 98248B Floating-Point Math board set provides HP Series 300 32-bit
computers with high-speed floating-point hardware.
There is a difference between the HP 98248A and the HP
98248B Floating-Point accessory cards. If you have an HP
98248B Floating-Point Accelerator you are in the correct
section. If you have an HP 98248A Floating-Point Accelerator
you need to refer to the proper section in this chapter.

Note

Refer to Appendix B, "Series 400 Support Matrix", for hardware and software
support information.

Caution

If you are adding this device to a cluster-node, you must be
logged into that node to do HP- UX configuration tasks.
For more information about adding devices to a system
configured as an HP- UX cluster, refer to Managing Clusters of
HP 9000 Computers, Chapter 12, "Adding Peripherals to a
Cluster" .

2-88

Installing Interface and Accessory Cards

HP 982488 Floating-Point Accelerator

Installing the HP 982488 Floating-Point Accelerator
Note

Installing the Floating-Point Accelerator involves two tasks:
• preparing the operating system for the new hardware
• physically installing the hardware.
This procedure describes how to install the hardware only.
For instructions on preparing the operating system to use the
hardware, refer to the installation note that carne with the
Floating- Point Accelerator.

You will need an expander if either of these statements is true:
1. You have no empty system slots in your computer.

The hardware installation process can take either of two paths, depending
upon which computer you are installing the Accelerator in. An installation
procedure is presented here for the Models 330, 360, and 370. The HP 98248B
Accelerator is not supported in the Model 350.

Installing Interface and Accessory Cards

2-89

HP 982488 Floating-Point Accelerator

2
In Models 330 and 360

1. Play it safe.

b. TURN OFF the computer and unplug the power cord.
c. TURN OFF the expander and unplug the power cord.
d. In the following steps, handle the circuit boards as little as possible.
Handle them by the edges or backplate only.
e. Remove the Floating-Point Accelerator board set from the packaging
material and place it on the envelope it was shipped in.

Note

If you need to install an expander, do so at this point.

2. Insert the Floating-Point Accelerator.
a. Check to see whether the bottom slot in the computer is empty. If it is,
remove the slot cover plate. If it is occupied, remove the board and place
it elsewhere in the computer or expander.
b. With the two-connector end in first, slide the Floating-Point Accelerator
board into the bottom slot.
c. Reinstall a slot cover plate over the Floating- Point Accelerator board.

3. Ensure that all power switches are in the OFF position.
4. Reconnect the power cords.
5. Turn on the expander.
6. Turn on the computer.
Installation complete! Proceed with the installation and configuration of the
new peripheral device that requires this new interface card.

2-90

Installing Interface and Accessory Cards

HP 982488 Floating-Point Accelerator

2
In Model 370

1. Play it safe.
a. Shut down and halt the system using the fete/shutdown -h command.
If you are operating in a diskless cluster, see Managing Clusters of HP
9000 Computers for additional information on shutting down the system.

2. Remove the System Bus.
Loosen the screws holding the system bus and remove it.

3. Check the bottom slot of the computer.
Check to see whether the bottom slot in the computer is empty. If it is,
remove the slot cover plate. It it is occupied, remove the board and place it
elsewhere in the computer or expander. If it is the processor board, place it
in the slot next to the bottom.
Rearrange the other boards in the backplane so that the processor board is
directly above the Accelerator and the RAM board( s) are directly above the
processor board.

4. Insert the Floating-Point Accelerator. Refer to the installation
documentation that came with the Floating-Point Accelerator for specific
instructions on how to do the following:
a. Connect the Floating-Point Accelerator Bus Cable.

Note

The cable may already be installed on the Accelerator. If so,
skip to the next step.

Installing Interface and Accessory Cards

2-91

HP 982488 Floating-Point Accelerator
2

b. Insert the Floating-Point Accelerator.
c. Connect the Floating-Point Accelerator Bus Cable to the processor board.

d. Insert the new System Bus.

Note

You must install the system bus to ensure system performance,
provide needed air cooling and meet statutory requirements for
fire safety and radiated emissions.

5. Ensure that all power switches are in the OFF position.
6. Reconnect the power cords.
7. Turn on the expander.
8. Turn on the computer.
Installation Complete!

2-92

Installing Interface and Accessory Cards

HP 98635A Floating Point Math Accessory Card
The HP 98635A Floating Point Math Card enhances the performance of your
computer and supports the proposed IEEE standard for binary floating point
numbers. With this card, computational performance can be increased up
to three times. Actual performance is highly dependent on the application,
language, and operating system.

Note

Use this Math card only with the model 320.

Refer to Appendix B, "Series 400 Support Matrix", for hardware and software
support information.

Caution

If you are adding this device to a cluster-node, you must be
logged into that node to do HP- UX configuration tasks.
For more information about adding devices to a system
configured as an HP- UX cluster, refer to Managing Clusters of
HP 9000 Computers, Chapter 12, "Adding Peripherals to a
Cluster" .

Installing Interface and Accessory Cards

2·93

HP 98635A Floating Point Math Card

Installing the HP 98635A Floating Point Math Card
The Floating Point Math Card can be installed in the
HP 9888A Bus Expander, but with reduced performance.
Installation in an HP 98568A Backplane Expander will not
reduce performance.

Note

1. Play it safe.
a. Shut down and halt the system using the fete/shutdown -h command.

If you are operating in a diskless cluster, see Managing Clusters of HP
9000 Computers for additional information on shutting down the system.
b. TURN OFF the computer and unplug the power cord.
2. Find a slot for the Floating Point Math Card.
a. Remove the painted cover plates from the back of your computer until
you find an empty slot. Do not remove the silver cover plates on the
bottom of a Series 300 computer.
b. If one is available, select an empty, odd-numbered slot for the Floating
Point Math card; otherwise, use an even-numbered slot. (Slots are
numbered from the top down, so the top-most slot is number 1, the next
slot down is number 2, etc.)
3. Insert the Floating Point Math Card.
Insert the Floating Point Math Card into the slot with the component side
up. Using your thumbs, push on the extractor levers until the card is firmly
seated in the backplane.

Note

If you have additional cards to install in the backplane, leave
the cover plates off; otherwise, replace the cover plates.

2-94

Installing Interface and Accessory Cards

HP 98635A Floating Point Math Card

2
4. Verify installation.

appears in the list, you have correctly installed the Floating Point Math
Card.
If the message above does not appear, repeat the installation procedure.
If the message still does not appear, call your HP Service Representative
for assistance.

Installation complete! Proceed with the installation and configuration of the
new peripheral device that requires this new interface card.

Installing Interface and Accessory Cards

2-95

HP 986208 DMA Controller Accessory Card
The HP 98620B Direct Memory Access (DMA) Controller Card provides two
DMA channels for I/O transfer. This high speed I/O capability works with
GPIO, HP-IB and Disk interfaces to increase the maximum data exchange rate
between the computer and its peripherals.
Do not use this DMA card with models other than the 320.
Another DMA card, the 98620C, is built into 32-bit models like
the 330, 350, and 360.

Note

Refer to Appendix B, "Series 400 Support Matrix", for hardware and software
support information.

Caution

If you are adding this device to a cluster-node, you must be
logged into that node to do HP- UX configuration tasks.

For more information about adding devices to a system
configured as an HP- UX cluster, refer to Managing Clusters of
HP 9000 Computers, Chapter 12, "Adding Peripherals to a
Cluster" .

2-96

Installing Interface and Accessory Cards

Installing the HP 986208 DMA Controller Card
The DMA Controller Card cannot be installed in an HP 9888A
Backplane Expander. It can be installed in an HP 98568A
Backplane Expander.

Note

1. Play it safe.

a. Shut down and halt the system using the fete/shutdown -h command.

a. Remove the painted cover plates from the back of your computer until
you find an empty slot. Do not remove the silver cover plates on the
bottom of a Series 300 computer.
b. If one is available, select an empty, odd-numbered slot for the DMA
Controller Card; otherwise, use an even-numbered slot. (Slots are
numbered from the top down, so the top-most slot is number 1, the next
slot down is number 2, etc.)
3. Insert the DMA Controller Card.

Insert the DMA Controller Card into the slot with the component side up.
Using your thumbs, push on the extractor levers until the card is firmly
seated in the backplane.

Note

If you have additional cards to install in the backplane, leave
the cover plates off; otherwise, replace the cover plates.

Installing Interface and Accessory Cards

2·97

4. Verify installation.
a. Plug in the power cord and turn on your computer. Watch for the word
"Keyboard" to appear, then press the space bar once.
b. Check the list of components displayed on the left-hand side of the
screen. If the message, HP98620B, appears in the list, you have correctly
installed the DMA Controller Card.
If the message above does not appear, repeat the installation procedure.
If the message still does not appear, call your HP Service Representative
for assistance.

Installation complete! Proceed with the installation and configuration of the
new peripheral device that requires this new interface card.

2·98

Installing Interface and Accessory Cards

3
Setting Up HP-UX for Interface and Accessory
Cards
Adding Interface and Accessory Drivers
When you start your computer, HP-UX automatically detects any new I/O
cards which may have been added when it was turned off. However, the
software drivers necessary to operate any new cards may not be loaded and
configured into the kernel.
SAM can help you determine the presence or absence of these drivers. If a
needed driver is absent, SAM can help you add it.
To check the drivers that are in your kernel:

1. Log on as root.

2. Run SAM:

/usr/bin/sam
3. Highlight
4. Highligh t

and activate
and activate

(Open ).

5. If you are presented with a window entitled "Kernel Configuration," go on
to the next step.

If you are presented with a window entitled "Select New Template File,"
activate (Template path name ... ). A window entitled "Template Files on the
System" appears. Choose /hp-ux from the list in this window and activate
(OK).

Setting Up HP-UX for Interface and Accessory Cards

3-1

Adding Interface and Accessory Drivers

6. Look in the upper-left corner of the "Kernel Configuration" window. If
you see a line that reads T. ...... ~~e file: /hp-ux, continue. If not, choose
... from the "Actions" menu and go to the
previous step.
3

Examine the list of drivers in the "Kernel Configuration" window. (You may
have to scroll through the list to see them all.) When you find the driver
your card needs (the drivers are listed in Chapter 2, Table 2-1) examine its
entry in the column labeled Current State. If it is Out, add it with the
next procedure. If it is In, exit the "Kernel Configuration" window, then
exit SAM.
To configure HP-UX to include a driver for your interface card:
1. If you are not currently logged onto the system, log on as root.

2. Run SAM:
/usr/bin/sam

3 . Highlight
4. Highlight

. and activate
and activate

(Open ).

5. Highlight the driver you wish to add. (You may have to scroll through the
list to find it.)

Note

If you wish to add more than one driver, you may do so by
highlighting several of them.

6. From the "Actions" menu, choose

Note

You may receive a message that the driver cannot be added
because certain software is not loaded on you system. If so, exit
SAM and use the update program to load the needed software
before trying again.

If your selection is successful, the entry under the column labeled Pending
State will change from Out to In.
3-2

Setting Up HP-UX for Interface and Accessory Cards

7. From the "Actions" menu, choose

Note

Creation of a new kernel requires that the system be rebooted.

3
8. You will be presented with a confirmation message. Take one of the
following actions:

• If you want to create a new kernel now, activate (Yes). After the new
kernel is built the system will reboot. You will be given an opportunity to
take one of three actions:
o Move the new kernel into place and reboot the system.
o Move the new kernel into place without rebooting the system.
o Exit without moving the new kernel into place.
Turn on the radio button for the action you wish to take and activate
(OK ). If you chose the option to reboot, the system will reboot itself.

• If you do not want to create a new kernel now, activate~. You may
create the new kernel at any time. Exit the "Kernel Configuration"
window. You will be given an opportunity to take one of three actions:
o Create a new kernel.
o Defer creation of a new kernel.
o Cancel the kernel modifications you have specified.
Turn on the radio button for the action you wish to take and activate
(OK).
9. Exit SAM by returning to the "System Administration Manager" window
and activating (Exit SAM ).

Setting Up HP-UX for Interface and Accessory Cards

3-3

4
Installing Memory
Introduction

This chapter contains information on adding memory and backplane expanders
to your system.

Adding Memory to Your System
RAM cards add additional program memory to your computer. Table 4-1 and
Table 4-2 show you the possible combinations of computer model, maximum
RAM, and HP-UX supported RAM cards.
If all of the backplane slots in your computer are full, and your system does not
already include a backplane expander, you will need to install and configure
one before adding memory to your system. See section "Expanders".
If you have a Model 350 computer, you will need an expander if either of the
following statements is true:

• Your video output board consists of two printed-circuit boards
• You have a total of more than four large boards.

Installing Memory 4-1

Adding Memory to Your System

If you do not know whether your video board contains two printed-circuit
boards, (make sure that your operating system is shut down and the computer
turned off, first) check it by loosening the two screws securing it and sliding it
out of the computer.

Refer to Appendix B, "Series 400 Support Matrix" for support information on
your Series 400 computer.
Table 4·1. Maximum Installable RAM

Model

Mbytes RAM

320

7 1/2

330

350

32 1
48 2
48 3

370

375/380/385

32 (1M Bit Parts)
128 (4M Bit Parts)

1 Parity RAM
2 ECC RAM
3 Combined ECC and parity RAM

4·2

Installing Memory

Adding Memory to Your System
Table 4-2. Series 300/400 RAM Card Support on HP-UX
RAM Card

Model

HP 98256A
HP 98257A

320

HP98258A

330
350

HP 98258B/C

350

HP 98264A/B

350
370

HP 98229A

345

HP 98229B

375
380
385
425T
425S

HP 98229C

400T
425T

HP 98229D

425T
425S

HP 98229E

375
400S
425S

Installing Memory

4-3

Adding Memory to Your System

Installing Memory Boards in a Model 320 Computer
This procedure describes how to install RAM cards in your model 320
computer. If you have a model 330 or 350 computer, refer to the sections that
follow this one.
In this procedure, you will set the switches on each of your RAM cards to a
unique setting. No two RAM cards may have their switches set the same way.
1. Follow the directions on the Series 300 Memory Configuration Wheel to set

the switches on your RAM cards. If you need help, refer to the "Help with
the Memory Configuration Wheel" section of this chapter.
2. Once you have completed all instructions on the Memory Configuration
Wheel, turn the computer on and check the number of bytes displayed on
the screen. This number should be approximately equal to the total number
of bytes of RAM you have installed in your computer. Count:
• 1 048 000 bytes for each 1-Mbyte card you installed
• 256 000 bytes for each 256- Kbyte card you installed
• 64 000 bytes for each 64- Kbyte card you installed
3. If the number of bytes shown on the screen is:
• More than you expected: Do not be concerned-your computer probably
contains some built-in RAM.
• Slightly less than you expected: Do not be concerned-your computer
consumes a few hundred bytes of RAM as overhead.
• Significantly less than you expected: Repeat this procedure, and check for
an increase in bytes after each card is installed.

4. Replace all cover plates on the back of your computer.
Hardware Installation Complete!

4-4

Installing Memory

Adding Memory to Your System

Help with the Memory Configuration Wheel
This section provides help in using the Memory Configuration Wheel. If you
have trouble following a step, look up the step in this section and read the
explanation.
Step 2-b

Unscrew and remove the cover plates from the back of your
computer. If your computer also has an interface card installed
(that is, a painted cover plate with a circuit board attached),
remove this also-it may be covering a RAM card. Do not
unscrew the unpainted, silver cover plates at the bottom of a
Series 300 computer.
Once the cover plates are off, you may see some cards inside.
Decide which of these cards are RAM cards by looking at the
colors of their plastic extractor levers:
Green and violet extractor levers identify a 1-Mbyte RAM
card.
Red and yellow extractor lever identify a 256- Kbyte RAM
card.
Two red extractor levers identify a 64- Kbyte RAM card.

Remove all 1-Mbyte, 256- Kbyte and 64- Kbyte RAM cards by
pulling their extractor levers toward you and sliding them out.
RAM cards may be damaged by static discharge, so be careful
not to touch the electrical components on the cards, and don't
place them on a charged surface such as a carpet or cloth.
Step 2-d

If your screen remains blank, write down 0 and go on to Step

3.
Step 2-e

The Bytes window is immediately below Step 2 on the wheel.
Turn the wheel until the number shown in the Bytes window
approximates the number you wrote down in Step 2-d.

Step 3

Repeat this step for each 1-Mbyte RAM card you have. Do not
go on to Step 4 until you have set the switches on all of your
1-Mbyte RAM cards.

Installing Memory

4-5

Adding Memory to Your System

Step 3-c

Turn the wheel until the next set of switches comes into view.
Whenever you are told to turn the wheel, always turn the wheel
to the next set of switches; never use a set of switches that is
already in view.

For example, if you come to this step and a set of switches
already appears in the window, you should turn the wheel past
this set of switches and on to the next one. If you come to this
step and an arrow appears in the window or the window is
blank, you should turn the wheel until a set of switches comes
into view.

Step 3-d

Set the switches on the RAM card to match those shown in the
window.

Step 3-e

If you have additionall-Mbyte RAM cards, begin again at
Step 3-b to set the switches on the next l-Mbyte RAM card.
Remember to turn the wheel to the next set of switches when
you repeat Step 3-c.
If you have set the switches on all of your l-Mbyte RAM
cards, make sure your computer is turned off and re-insert all
l-Mbyte RAM cards into your computer. You may insert them
into any slot, but be sure you do not use a slot which was
previously occupied by an interface card (if you have one).

Step 4-b

Check that the number of bytes now shown on the screen has
increased over the number you wrote down in Step 2-d.

Step 4-c

Turn the wheel clockwise until the number in the Bytes
window approximates the number of bytes you see on the
screen. If the number in the Bytes window is already set
correctly, you do not have to turn the wheel.

Step 5-c
(Series 300)

See the advice for Step 3-c. Be sure you turn the wheel counter
clockwise as indicated by the arrows on the edge of the wheel.

4-6

Installing Memory

Adding Memory to Your System

Some Common Mistakes
If something goes wrong, watch out for these common mistakes:

• Whenever you are told to turn the wheel, be sure to turn it, even if a set of
switches already appears in the window. Never use a set of switches unless
you have just turned the wheel to bring it into view. Remember, no two
RAM cards can have the same switch setting .
• When you use the back side of the wheel, don't forget to turn it counter
clockwise, rather than clockwise.

Installing Memory

4· 7

Adding Memory to Your System

Installing Memory Boards in a Model 330 Computer
This procedure describes how to install an HP 98258A RAM board in your
model 330 computer. If you have a model 320 computer, refer to the preceding
section. If you have a model 350 computer, see the next section.

Caution

RAM boards can be easily damaged by static electricity. Be
careful to handle them only by their edges and make sure you
place them on the anti-static envelope they were shipped in.

4
1. Carefully unpack your new RAM board.
2. Place your new RAM board, component-side up, on the static-free envelope
it was shipped in.
3. Set the switches on your new RAM board as shown in Figure 4-1.

Figure 4·1. Setting Switches on the New HP 98258A RAM board

4. Remove the cover plates on the back of your computer until you find a
vacant slot.
5. Insert the new RAM board, component side up, into the vacant slot. Place
the grey and green extractor levers against the board and push firmly until
the board is securely seated in the backplane.

4·8

Installing Memory

Adding Memory to Your System

6. Replace the cover plates on the back of your computer.
7. Turn your computer on and hold down the space bar a few seconds.
Check the display to make sure the amount of RAM in your computer has
increased to approximately 8 Mbytes (8 338 608 bytes). See Figure 4-2. If
the memory reported is significantly less, check that the switches for your
built-in RAM are set as shown in Figure 4-3. Then double-check that your
new RAM board's switches are set as shown in Figure 4-1.
4

Copyright 1985,
Hewlett-Packard Company.
All Rights Reserved.
BOOTROM Rev. A2
MC68020 Processor
MC68881 Coprocessor
Bit Mapped Display
Keyboard
HP-IB
DMA-CO
HP98644 at 9
HP98625 at 14
HP98643 at 20
8338633 Bytes
Figure 4·2. Display Showing Amount of RAM Installed

Installing Memory

4·9

Adding Memory to Your System

Figure 4-3. Built-in RAM Switch Settings

Optimizing Model 330 Performance

The BASIC, Pascal and HP- UX operating systems occupy different areas of
memory. Because programs occupying built-in RAM run faster than programs
occupying add-on RAM, you may want to rearrange memory so that your most
important programs occupy the fast, built-in RAM.
Here's what to do:
1. Select a program to use as a benchmark, or choose a commonly-used

operating system function.
2. Run and time the benchmark program several times to determine its average
execution time under the current RAM configuration.

3. Turn your computer off.

4-10

Installing Memory

Adding Memory to Your System

4. Remove the HP 98258A add-on RAM board. Reverse the switch settings of
your add-on RAM board and your built-in RAM. When done, your built-in
RAM should be set to:

and your add-on RAM board should be set to:

5. Re-insert your add-on RAM board into the computer.
6. Turn your computer on and hold down the space bar a few seconds. Verify
that you still have 8 Mbytes of RAM installed by looking at the amount of
RAM shown on the display.
7. Run your benchmark program several times to determine its average execute
time.
8. Compare the program's performance under each RAM configuration and
choose the fastest one.
Hardware Installation Complete!

Installing Memory

4·11

Adding Memory to Your System

Installing Memory Boards in a Model 350 Computer
This procedure describes how to install HP 98258A/B/C and 98264A/B boards
in your model 350 computer. If you have a model 310, 320, or 330, refer to the
preceeding sections.
Play it safe.

• Shut down and halt the system using the /etc/shutdown -h command.
4

If you are operating in a diskless cluster, see Managing Clusters of HP 9000
Computers for additional information on shutting down the system.

• TURN OFF the computer.
• TURN ON the computer.

Copyright 1985,
Hewlett-Packard Company.
All Rights Reserved.
BOOTROM Rev. A2
Bit Mapped Display
MC68020 Processor
MC68881 Coprocessor
Keyboard
HP-IB
HP98620 DMA-CO
HP98644 at 9
HP98625 at 14
HP98643 at 21
XXXXXXX Bytes
Power-up Display

Write down the amount of RAM listed: ________________ bytes. You will use
this figure later to check that the new RAM board is correctly installed.

4-12

Installing Memory

Adding Memory to Your System

Now, shut down the operating system following normal HP- UX procedures
(refer to your System Administrator Manual if you need more information).
Although installing RAM boards in the Model 350 is an easy task, it is broken
down into three short pieces for your convenience:
1. Identifying which RAM boards are already in the computer.

2. Assigning the RAM board addresses.
3. Physically installing the new RAM board in the computer.
4

If you already know which RAM boards your computer contains, skip the
section on "Identifying Existing RAM Boards" and go to the section on
"Assigning the Addresses".
If you know that your computer contains about 16 Mbytes of RAM (from
the power-up display), go directly to the section titled, "Installing the RAM
Board". It includes all the information you will need to add the RAM board.

Identifying Existing RAM Boards
In order to properly address a new board, you need to know the sizes of the
boards already in the computer. If you already know what size boards are in
the computer, put their quantities in Table 4-3 and skip down to the section
titled, "Assigning the Addresses".
Table 4-3. RAM Board Inventory Table
Board Size

Quantity

16-Mbyte boards
8-Mbyte boards
4-Mbyte boards

If you do not know what sizes the RAM boards in your computer are, the
easiest way to determine this information is to look at the amount of RAM in
the power-up display (the figure you wrote down near the beginning of this
section) and compare it to the number of boards in the backplane.

Installing Memory

4-13

Adding Memory to Your System

Now remove the system bus interface board and look for boards fitting the
descriptions in Table 4-4:
Table 4-4. RAM Board Identification

Extractor Colors
(Left-Right)

Configuration

Memory Size

Grey-Green

Single board
Two-board pair

4 Mbytes
8 or 16 Mbytes

Blue-Yellow

Two-board pair

8 or 16 Mbytes

If you have a large number of boards and cannot determine what board sizes
you have, match the part numbers of the boards to the memory size shown in
Table 4-5.
Carefully remove each board from the computer and locate the part number.
It is located on the underside of the top board, immediately above the address
switches on the bottom board.
Table 4-5. RAM Board Identification

Extractor Colors
Left-Right

Part Number

Memory Size

Grey-Green

none (Single board)
98258-66521
98258-66522

4 Mbytes
8 Mbytes
16 Mbytes

Blue-Yellow

98264-66521
98264-66522

8 Mbytes
16 Mbytes

When you put boards back into the computer, you may want to label them
with their size.
You are now ready to assign addresses to the boards. If your system contains
approximately 16 Mbytes in any combination, go directly to the section titled,
"Installing the RAM Board". Otherwise, continue with the next section.
4-14

Installing Memory

Adding Memory to Your System

Assigning the Addresses
The general rule to follow when addressing RAM is:
• A board with higher capacity must be assigned a higher address than any
board with less capacity.
• A board with less capacity must be assigned a lower address than any board
with greater capacity.
• Address a new RAM board lower than any existing RAM of the same size.
In this way you can avoid having to readdress existing RAM boards of the
same or larger size. You will have to readdress any smaller RAM boards.

Note

An exception to the addressing rules above is when you have
a 16-Mbyte system, made up of 4- and 8-Mbyte boards, they
can be treated as one 16-Mbyte board. The board being added
can be addressed as if it were being placed below an existing
16-Mbyte board.

1. Copy the numbers from the RAM Board Inventory Table (Table 4-3) to

Table 4-6.
Table 4-6. RAM Board Inventory Table
Board Size

Quantity

16-Mbyte boards
8-Mbyte boards
4-Mbyte boards

2. For each 16-Mbyte board already installed in the computer, cross off four of
the 4-Mbyte blocks in Figure 4-4. Start with the first block and work down.

Installing Memory

4-15

Adding Memory to Your System

4- Mbyte Block

5th

4 Mbyte Block

9th

i.!!l

4 Mbyte Block

1oth

4- Mbyte Block

~
2nd

4 Mbyte

Block

3rd

4- Mbyte Block

7th

4 Mbyte Block

11th 4 Mbyte Block

4th 4 Mbyte Block

8th

4 Mbyte Block

12th 4

4- Mbyte Block

Mbyte

Block

Figure 4-4. Address Worksheet

3. If you are installing a 16-Mbyte RAM board, write the word "NEW" beside
the next UNUSED block, and cross off the following three blocks.
4. For each 8-Mbyte board in the computer, write the number "8" beside the
next UNUSED block and cross off the following one block.
5. If you are installing an 8-Mbyte RAM board, write the word "NEW" beside
the next UNUSED block, and cross off the following one block.
6. For each 4-Mbyte board in the computer, write the number "4" beside the
next UNUSED block.
7. If you are installing a 4- Mbyte RAM board, write the word "NEW" beside
the next UNUSED block.

4-16

Installing Memory

Adding Memory to Your System
An Example

If you would like to tryout the addressing procedure before actually tackling
your situation, run through the following example.

The Situation: You are adding a 16-Mbyte board to a computer already
containing a 16-Mbyte board, an 8-Mbyte board and a 4-Mbyte
board.
Figure 4-5 shows how the 4-Mbyte block chart in Step 2 will look when you are
finished:
4

12th 4 Mbyte Block

Figure 4-5. Completed Address Worksheet

• In Step 2, blocks 1 through 4 were crossed out.

Installing Memory

4-17

Adding Memory to Your System

• In Step 3, the word "NEW" was written by block 5 and blocks 6 through 8
were crossed out.
• In Step 4, the number "8" was written by block 9 and block 10 was crossed
out.
• In Step 6, the number "4" was written by block 11.

Installing the RAM Board
4

If you will be installing an expander, go ahead and do so, using the instructions
packaged with the expander.
Configuration Restraints on Computers with a System Bus

Both parity and ECC RAM are normally installed in the computer chassis,
on computers containing a system bus. This is because it is recommended
that RAM boards be connected to the processor board by the system bus for
maximum performance. However, both RAM types may be installed in the
expander if the resulting performance loss is acceptable to you.
The 4-Mbyte parity RAM board may be installed in any slot. Do not install
the other RAM boards in any of these slots:
• The top slot of either the computer or expander.
• If your computer or expander contains DID accessory slots (these are narrow
slots toward the top of the chassis), they cannot go in the slot immediately
under the DID slots.

Note

You may have to temporarily loosen or remove the board or
slot cover immediately above the empty slot in order to install
the new RAM board. Make sure to retighten this board after
installing the new board.

The processor board, the RAM boards and the Floating-Point Accelerator (if
installed) should be clustered together in the computer to take advantage of
the faster speed of the system bus.
Your video output board should go in the expander if it consists of two printed
circuit boards. If your computer is full, a good general rule is to move the
video board to the expander.
4-18

Installing Memory

Adding Memory to Your System
The Procedure

Follow these procedures

w~en

installing a new RAM board in your computer:

1. Have the documentation that came with the RAM board handy. You will

need to refer to it during this procedure.
2. Plan ahead.
Installing additional RAM on your computer requires that you shut down
and power off the system. On a multiuser or clustered system you will
want to warn users and cluster clients in advance that the system (server)
will be coming down. Use the wall or ewall command to do this.
3. Play it safe.
a. Shut down and halt the system using the fete/shutdown -h command.
If you are operating in a diskless cluster, see Managing Clusters of
HP 9000 Computers for additional information on shutting down the
system.

b. TURN OFF the computer and unplug the power cord.
c. TURN OFF the expander and unplug the power cord.

Caution

When installing the RAM board, handle the circuit boards as
little as possible. Handle them by the edges or backplate only.

4. Locate an empty system slot in the computer (or in the expander if you
have chosen to put the new RAM there) and remove the cover plate from
it.

5. If the empty slot is in the computer, check that it is immediately above or
below the system bus connector board. If not, rearrange the boards so that
it is.
6. Remove the new RAM board from its packaging material and place it on a
static-free surface, such as the bag it was shipped in.
7. Locate the RAM address switches.

Installing Memory

4-19

Adding Memory to Your System

address
switches

left
extractor

right
extractor

Figure 4·6. RAM Board Address Switch Location

8. If your system contains 16-Mbytes in any combination, set the address
switches on the new board according to Figure 4-7 and then skip down to
step 10:

Figure 4·7. 16·Mbyte Address Setting

9. If your system contains other than 16 Mbytes, set the address switches on
the new RAM board to match the block labeled "NEW".
10. Now change the address switches on all SMALLER boards to the ones
numbered in the chart. "Smaller" refers to memory size rather than
physical size. Note that boards the same size as, or larger than, the new
board need not be changed.

4·20

Installing Memory

Adding Memory to Your System

11. Pick up the new RAM board by the edges and slide it into the empty slot.
Slide the two-connector end in first, with the board with the connectors on
the bottom.
12. If you installed the new RAM board in the expander, reinstall the cover
plate over the slot and reinstall the system bus connector board removed in
step 2. Then skip down to step 13.
13. Locate the new, larger system bus connector board packaged with the new
RAM board and carefully install it onto the processor board and RAM
board(s), and Floating-point Accelerator if installed.

Note

You MUST reinstall the system bus connector board to ensure
system performance, provide needed air cooling and meet
statutory requirements for fire safety and radiated emissions.

14. Reinstall the power cords and turn the computer and expander on.

Installing Memory

4-21

Adding Memory to Your System

15. Now check the power-up display for the amount of RAM installed.

Figure 4-8. Power-up Display

Write the amount here: ________________ bytes.
16. If the amount of RAM in step 14 has not increased by approximately the
amount of RAM you added, go to the section titled "In Case of Trouble".
17. Boot your HP - UX operating system as usual.

Installation Complete!

4-22

Installing Memory

Adding Memory to Your System

In Case of Trouble
If you do not obtain the correct amount of available memory, first turn the
computer off and verify that the cards are plugged in correctly. Then turn it
back on and see if the amount of memory is correct. If it still is not, turn the
computer off and check the card addressing. If it is correct, set a card aside
and continue the process with the remaining cards.
If you still have trouble, verify that you have assigned the addresses correctly.
If you have, and no arrangement of cards will increase the amount of memory,
put the computer into use with the maximum amount of memory you can
obtain. Then replace all the unused cards in their anti-static bags and call your
HP Sales and Service office for assistance.

Installing Memory 4·23

Expanders
The following expanders are available for your HP Series 300 computer.
Table 4-7. Expanders Available

Product
Numbers

Additional Slots

HP 98568A

Adds eight additional I/O and Accessory
slots.

HP 98570A

Adds two wide system slots and four
narrow I/O slots (except option 004 which
adds four wide system slots and no I/O
slots)

HP 98577A
VMEbus
Expander1

Holds any four of about 3000 types of
VME boards.

1 The HP 98577 A requires that the VME driver is installed on your
system.

4-24

Installing Memory

HP 98568A and 98570A Backplane Expanders
The HP 98568A Backplane Expander adds eight additional I/O and Accessory
slots to your Series 300 computer.
The HP 98570A Backplane Expander adds two wide system slots and four
narrow I/O slots (except option 004 which adds four wide system slots and no
I/O slots) to your Series 300 computer.
Follow standard computer safety procedures and "shut down" and power
off your system prior to installing either of these expanders. Consult the
documentation that came with your expander for specific installation
instructions.

HP 98577A VMEbus Expander
The HP 98577 A Series 300 VMEbus Expander is a VME backplane which
conforms to the VITA C.l specifications for bus protocol and physical format.
It consists of a chassis plus some code segments in HP- UX and a Driver
Development Manual so you can write a custom driver for your application. It
holds any four of about 3000 types of VME boards.
Follow standard computer safety procedures and "shut down" and power off
your system prior to installing of this expander. Consult the documentation
that came with your expander for specific installation instructions.
The VMEbus Expander adheres to the specifications established by the
VMEbus International Trade Association (VITA), revision C.l. VMEbus
accessories which do not adhere to the VITA C.l specification are not
guaranteed to operate properly, if at all, in the VMEbus Expander.
Refer to the installation information that came with your VMEbus cards to
properly install them in the VMEbus Expander.

Installing Memory 4·25

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

5
Installing Terminals and Modems
Introduction
This chapter contains the installation instructions for the following terminals:
HP
HP
HP
HP
HP
HP
HP
HP
HP
HP
HP
HP
HP
HP
HP

2392A, 2393A and 2397 A Terminals
45610A/B HP Touchscreen PC (HP 150)
45850A/B HP Touchscreen-II PC (HP 150-II)
45710A HP The Portable PC (HP 110)
45711A HP The Portable Plus PC (HP 110-Plus)
9807 A Integral PC (HP 9807)
13279B Color Monitor
CI004A/G/W 700/22 ANSI DEC VT220 Compatible Terminal
CI003A/G 700/41 Display Entry-Level Terminal
C1006A/G/W 700/43 ASCII Terminal
C1007 A 700/44 Display Terminal
C1001A/G/W 700/92 Block-Mode Display Terminal
C1002A/G/W 700/94 Alphanumeric Display Terminal
37212B 1200/2400 Baud Modem
92205A/ C Hayes Smartmodem 1200

Installing Terminals and Modems

5-1

HP Terminals
This section describes the generic installation procedures for all HP terminals.
HP Terminals connect to any supported RS-232C interface.
The HP 98628A Datacomm, the HP 98642A 4-Channel Multiplexer, or the HP
98638A 8-Channel Mulitplexer interfaces are required for graphics terminals,
unless their graphics capability will not be used.

Before Connecting This Device
Before you install this device:
• Have the documentation shipped with your terminal handy. You will need to
refer to it during this procedure.
5

• If you have not added this type of device to your system before, read
the material in Chapter 1, "Introduction". It gives interface and cabling
guidelines to follow when adding devices to your system .
• Plan ahead. Installing new peripherals on your system requires that you shut
down and power off the system. On a multiuser or clustered system you will
want to warn users and cluster clients in advance that the system (server)
will be coming down. Use the wall or cwall command to do this.

Caution

If you are adding this device to a cluster-node, you must be
logged into that node to do HP- UX configuration tasks.

For more information about adding devices to a system
configured as an HP- UX cluster, refer to Managing Clusters of
HP 9000 Computers, Chapter 12, "Adding Peripherals to a
Cluster" .

5-2

Installing Terminals and Modems

HP Terminals

What You're Going To Do
The following table contains detailed HP- UX software set up information.
If you use SAM to install this device, you will not need all this detailed
information. Complete the hardware installation as outlined in the following
section, then refer to Chapter 6, "Setting Up HP- UX for Terminals and
Modems Using SAM" for set up instructions.
If you use commands to set up HP- UX to communicate with your device,
complete the hardware installation as outlined in the following section. Once
the hardware installation is complete, use the information provided in this
table to complete the software set up as outlined in Chapter 14, "Setting Up
Devices Using HP- UX Commands".

Note

The HP 98642A or the HP 98628A serial interface card is
recommended if you use an application that sends data faster
than 2400 baud (average). Such applications include graphics
from graphics terminals, softkeys, and reading terminal status.

Installing Terminals and Modems

5·3

HP Terminals
Table 5-1. HP Terminals Connected to RS-232-C Interfaces

Device Name

Path
Name l

Major Driver Select
File
Type Number Name Code

HP Terminal /dev/tty02

Minor
Number

98626

Ox09OOO4
Ox140004

98628

20 3

98642

13 4

OxOdOOO4

/dev/tty02

98642

13 4

OxOd0104

/dev/tty02

98642

13 4

OxOd0204

/dev/tty02

98642

13 4

OxOd0304

/dev/tty02

98642

28 5

Ox1cOOO4

HP Terminal /dev/tty02
port 1

98642

28 5

Ox1c0104

HP Terminal
port 2
HP Terminal
port 3
HP Terminal
port 4
HP Terminal
port 5
HP Terminal
port 6
HP Terminal
port 7

/dev/tty02

98642

28 5

Ox1c0204

/dev/tty02

98642

28 5

Ox1c0304

/dev/tty02

98642

28 5

Ox1c0404

/dev/tty02

98642

28 5

Ox1c0504

/dev/tty02

98642

28 5

Ox1c0604

/dev/tty02

98642

28 5

Ox1c0704

HP Terminal /dev/tty02
HP Terminal /dev/tty02
port 0

HP Terminal
port 1
HP Terminal
port 2
HP Terminal
port 3
HP Terminal
port 0

1 The path name given here assumes this is the second terminal you are
connecting (tty02). IT not, change the path name accordingly (for example,
/dev/tty03 for the third terminal).
2 Built-in RS-232-C Interface and HP 98626A RS-232-C Interface.
3 HP 98628A Datacomm Interface.
4 HP 98642A 4-Channel Multiplexer Interface
5 HP 98638A 8-Channel Multiplexer Interface

5-4

Installing Terminals and Modems

HP Terminals

Connecting the Terminal to an RS-232-C Interface
The following summary supplements the procedures outlined in your hardware
installation documentation for this device. Read through this summary before
proceding with the installation.
1. Verify that the driver(s) required for this device is (are) included in your
current kernel configuration file, usually I etcl conf Idfile.

If you are adding a device that utilizes an interface type that is new on your
system, you may have to add the necessary device driver( s) to the kernel
configuration file. To verify that the necessary driver ( s), listed in the tables
in the previous section, is (are) part of your current kernel configuration file,
you can:

• Use SAM for the whole procedure. SAM will check your dfile for the
necessary device drivers, add any that are missing, and reconfigure the
kernel for you at this time. See the chapter on Setting Up HP- UX using
SAM that follows this chapter; then go on to step two.
or
• Look in your dfile for the driver(s). If the drivers are in your kernel
configuration file, go on to step 2 now.
If the driver(s) is (are) not in the letc/conf/dfile, or is (are)
commented out with a comment symbol (such as the * sign), edit the
dfile to either add the driver or remove the comment marks. You must
reconfigure the kernel if you edit the dfile for any reason. Use the
letc/config program to do this. See Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices
Using HP-UX Commands" for detailed information on this procedure.
2. Play it safe.

a. Shut down and halt the system using the letc/shutdown -h command.
If you are operating in a diskless cluster, see Managing Clusters of HP
9000 Computers for additional information on shutting down the system.

b. TURN OFF the computer and unplug the power cord.

Installing Terminals and Modems

5-5

HP Terminals

3. Determine your interface.
The following RS-232-C interfaces can be used:
•
•
•
•
•
•

The built-in RS-232-C interface.
HP 98626A RS-232-C Interface.
HP 98628A Datacomm Interface.
HP 98642A 4- Channel Multiplexer Interface
HP 98638A 8-Channel Multiplexer Interface
HP 98644A RS-232-C Serial Interface.

Note

If you have more than one serial port, you need to know
the address of your port for testing communications and for
configuring your software.

Caution

Many computer systems have both parallel and RS-232-C
ports. These ports frequently appear identical. The built-in
parallel interface should be labeled PARALLEL. Make sure you
plug your cable into the RS-232-C port or you could damage
your device.

4. Ensure all power switches on the device and on the computer are in the OFF
position.

5·6

Installing Terminals and Modems

HP Terminals

5. Connect the terminal to your computer.
Connect the terminal to your computer following the instructions provided
in the hardware installation manual for the device.

6. Connect the terminal's power cord.
7. Plug in and power on the computer.
8. Turn on the terminal.
9. Configure the terminal.
Set up the terminal's communication's protocols by entering the datacomm
configuration menu on the terminal. Refer to the manuals that came with
the terminal for specific instructions on setting these values.
Table 5-2 shows recommended values for configuring your terminal. Not all
of the characteristics listed in the table will apply to your terminal.

What To Do Next
If you are using SAM to complete the software set up portion of this procedure,
refer to Chapter 6, "Setting Up HP-UX for Terminals and Modems Using
SAM". If you are using the commands method to install this device, refer to
Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX Commands".

Installing Terminals and Modems

5-7

HP Terminals
Table 5-2. Recommended Terminal Characteristics
Characteristic

Alternate Set

Line(B)

ASCII 8 Bits

YES required for NLS support

Asterisk

Off

Suggested

AUTO LF

Off

Required

Auto Terminator

Suggested

Baud Rate

Conunents

Setting

9600

Suggested

HP-UX Std.

Bell

Suggested

BLOCK MODE

Off

Required

Block Terminator

Suggested

200ms

Suggested

BufSiz

128

Suggested

Caps Lock

Off

May change after login

Break Time

Carrier Detect

Open

Suggested

Check Parity

Required

Circuit Assurance

Closed

Clear Terminator

Suggested

Clock

INT

Required

CPU Break

Open

Suggested

CS(CB)Xmit

Cursor Type

Line

5-8

Installing Terminals and Modems

Cabling may require

Cabling may require
Your choice

HP Terminals
Table 5-2. Recommended Terminal Characteristics (continued)

Characteristic

Setting

Conunents

Data Bits

Required for NLS support

Data Bits

If no NLS support required

Data Speed Select
Datacomm
Handshake
DISPLAY
FUNCTIONS
Display Off After

Open

Suggested

XonXoff

Required

Off

Suggested

15 min.

Your choice

DM(CC)Xmit

Cabling may require

EnqAck

EnqAck not supported

Esc Xfer

Yes

Suggested

Closed

Suggested

Fast Binary Read
Field Separator
GraphCompat

Your choice

Inh DC2

Yes

Required

InhDcTest

Yes

Suggested

InhEolWrp

No (Closed)

Required

InhHndShk

Yes

Required

InhSkITst

Suggested

Closed

Suggested

Insert & delete
sense
Inverse Background

Your choice

Installing Terminals and Modems

5-9

HP Terminals
Table 5-2. Recommended Terminal Characteristics (continued)

Characteristic

Setting

Keyboard

Should match your keyboard

LINE MODIFY

Off

Suggested

Line/Page

Line

Required

Local Echo

Off

Suggested

Main Channel

Comments

Closed

Should have no effect

MEMORY LOCK

Off

Suggested

MODIFY ALL

Off

Suggested

Parity

None (Open)

Required for NLS support

Parity

If no NLS support required

Power On

Terminal

Suggested

Printer Code 4

Your choice

Printer Nulls

Your choice

RecvPace

XonXoff (Open)

Required

Remote/Serial Dev

PORTl/PORT2

If using terminal's port 1

PORT2/PORTl

If using terminal's port 2

Remote

Required

512x390

Required

RETURN Def

Required

RETURN=ENTER

Required

RR(CF)Recv

Cabling may require

Resolution

5-10

Installing Terminals and Modems

HP Terminals
Table 5-2. Recommended Terminal Characteristics (continued)

Charac teris tic

COlmnents

Setting

Strongly suggested

SPOW

No (Closed)

SR(CH)

Modem use may require

SRRlnvert

Cabling may require

SRRXmit

Cabling may require

Start Column

Suggested

Stop Bits

HP-UX

STOP Function

XonXoff

Suggested

StripNulDel

Suggested

Tab=Spaces

Required

Terminalld

2622A

Suggested for 2392A

2623A

Required for DGL on HP150 and 2393A

Terminal Mode
Transmit
Transmit indicator
TR(CD)

Required by default terminfo

All Fields

Suggested

Closed

Suggested

XmitFnctn

No (Closed)

XmitPace

XonXoff

Modem use may require
vi changes as needed
Suggested

Installing Terminals and Modems

5-11

HP Modems
This section describes the generic installation procedures for all HP modems.
HP modems connect to any supported RS-232C interface.

Before Connecting This Device
Before you install this modem:
• Refer to the documentation that shipped with your modem for information
on unpacking and preparing your modem for installation. Keep this
documentation handy. You will need to refer to it during this procedure.

• Plan ahead. Installing new peripherals on your system requires that you shut
down and power off the system. On a multiuser or clustered system you will
want to warn users and cluster clients in advance that the system (server)
will be coming down. Use the wall or cwall command to do this.

Caution

If you are adding this device to a cluster-node, you must be
logged into that node to do HP- UX configuration tasks.

For more information about adding devices to a system
configured as an HP-UX cluster, refer to Managing Clusters of
HP 9000 Computers, Chapter 12, "Adding Peripherals to a
Cluster" .

5·12

Installing Terminals and Modems

HP Modems

Installing Terminals and Modems

5·13

HP Modems
Table 5-3. HP Modems

Path
Name 2

Device Name 1

HP Modem on select code 93 /dev/ttyd02

HP Modem on select code

File Major Driver
Type Number Name

Minor
Number

98626 Ox090000

/dev/cua02

98626 Ox090001

/dev/culO2

98626 Ox090001

HP Modem on select code 13 /dev/ttyd02

98642 OxOdOOOO

HP Modem on select code 13 /dev/cua02
HP Modem on select code 13 /dev/culO2

c
c

1
1

98642 OxOdOOO1

HP Modem on select code 20 /dev/ttyd02

98628 Ox140000

HP Modem on select code 20 /dev/cua02

1
1

98628 Ox140001

HP Modem on select code 20 /dev/culO2

c
c

HP Modem on select code 28 /dev/ttyd02

98642 Ox1cOnOO 4

HP Modem on select code 28 /dev/cua02

98642 Ox1cOn01 4

HP Modem on select code 28 /dev/culO2

98642 Ox1cOn01 4

98642 OxOdOOO1

98628 Ox140001

1 Modems require the dial-in modems device file ttydxx and the dial-out ports device file
culxx. If you are using a non-HoneyDanBear uucp, you will need a third modem device file,
cuaxx with the same minor number as the culxx device file.
2 The path name given here assumes this is the second modem you are connecting (ttyd02). If
not, change the path name accordingly (for example, Idev/ttyd03 for the third modem).
3 The built-in interface.
4 When connected to the HP 98638A or 98642 interface. The variable n in the minor number
should be replaced with the port number on the interface.

5-14

Installing Terminals and Modems

HP Modems

Connecting the Modem to an RS-232-C Interface
The following summary supplements the procedures outlined in your hardware
installation documentation for this modem. Read through this summary before
pro ceding with the installation.
1. Determine your interface.

The following RS-232-C interfaces can be used:
•
•
•
•
•
•

The built-in RS-232-C interface.
HP 98626A RS-232-C Interface.
HP 98628A Datacomm Interface.
HP 98642A 4-Channel Multiplexer Interface
HP 98638A 8-Channel Multiplexer Interface
HP 98644A RS-232-C Serial Interface.
5

Note

If you have more than one serial port, you need to know
the address of your port for testing communications and for
configuring your software.

Caution

Installing Terminals and Modems

5-15

HP Modems

2. Verify that the driver associated with the serial interface you are using is
included in your current kernel configuration file, usually /ete/eonf/dfile.
If you are adding a device that utilizes an interface type that is new on your
system, you may have to add the necessary device driver( s) to the kernel
configuration file. To verify that the necessary driver is part of your current
kernel configuration file, you can:
• Use SAM for the whole procedure. SAM will check your dfile for the
necessary device drivers, add any that are missing, and reconfigure the
kernel for you at this time. See the chapter on Setting Up HP -UX using
SAM that follows this chapter; then go on to step two.

or
• Look in your dfile for the driver (see Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices
Using HP- UX Commands" for a complete listing of Ithe RS-232 driver
names). If the driver is in your kernel configuration file, go on to step 2
now.
If the driver is not in the /ete/eonf/dfile, or is commented out with a
comment symbol (such as the * sign), edit the dfile to either add the
driver or remove the comment marks. You must reconfigure the kernel if
you edit the dfile for any reason. Use the /ete/eonfig program to do
this. See Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices Using HP- UX Commands" for
detailed information on this procedure.
3. Play it safe.
a. Shut down and halt the system using the /ete/shutdown -h command.
If you are operating in a diskless cluster, see Managing Clusters of HP
9000 Computers for additional information on shutting down the system.
b. TURN OFF the computer and unplug the power cord.

5-16

Installing Terminals and Modems

HP Modems

4. Ensure all power switches on the device and on the computer are in the OFF
position.
5. Set modem configuration values.
Before you connect your modem, consider the following:
• Is the DTR (Data Terminal Ready) line forced high? If so, set it to follow
the line or do not force it high.
• Is the CD (Carrier Detect) line forced high? If so, set it to follow the line
or do not force it high.
• Is the modem a Hayes compatable? If so, the SO register needs to be set
to one or greater. If you are going to use eu or uuep then the number
should not be greater than three or the connection will fail.
You will need a cable with the following pins:
5

Table 5-4.
Computer Modem

Note

The 9 pin port will work if the 9 pin to 25 pin adaptor that
ships with the system is used with this cable.

Installing Terminals and Modems

5-17

6. Connect the modem to your telephone cable and to your computer.
Connect the modem to your telephone cable and to your computer following
the instructions provided in the hardware installation manual for the
modem. Be sure to set any special modem configuration values as instructed
in the installation manual for the modem.

7. Connect the modem '3 power cord.
8. Turn on the modem.
9. Plug in and power on the computer.

What To Do Next
5

If you are using SAM to complete the software set up portion of this procedure,
refer to Chapter 6, "Setting Up HP-UX for Terminals and Modems Using
SAM" . If you are using the commands method to install this modem, refer to
Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX Commands"

5·18

Installing Terminals and Modems

6
Setting Up HP-UX for Terminals and Modems
Using SAM
Introduction
This chapter discusses setting up HP- UX to communicate with your terminal
or modem. Setting up HP -UX for a terminal or modem consists of:
• creating the device file, or verifying that the correct device file already exists,
for communication with the device .
• creating an entry in the / etc/ ini ttab file for the device.
The SAM method of setting up HP- UX for terminals and modems is discussed
here. Refer to Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices Using HP- UX Commands" for
a description of the HP- UX commands method if you are not using SAM to
add this device.
SAM will create the device file needed to communicate with the terminal or
modem and add the necessary getty entry to the / etc/ ini ttab file.

Adding a Terminal or Modem to Your System
Make sure that the terminal or modem is physically connected to a port on
your computer's serial interface before continuing.
To configure HP-UX for a new terminal:

1. Log on as root.
2. Run SAM:
/usr/bin/sam

Setting Up HP-UX for Terminals and Modems Using SAM

6-1

3. Highlight

and activate

4 . Highlight

(Open ).

and activate

(Open).

5. From the "Actions" menu in the "Terminals and Modems" window, choose
6. In the "Add Terminal" window, set or select the following parameters:
•
•
•
•

The hardware path to the serial interface to be used by this terminal.
The port number to be used by this terminal.
The speed (baud rate) to be used by this terminal.
Whether or not this will be a UU CP connection.

When you finish setting the parameters, activate (OK ).

7. You will receive a series of messages indicating the progress of the task.
You will receive a message advising you of the necessity to
connect the terminal.

Note
6

When you receive the message Task completed, activate (OK l.
8. Exit SAM by returning to the "System Administration Manager" window
and activating (Exit SAM ).
To configure HP-UX for a new modem:

1. Log on as root.

2. Run SAM:
/usr/bin/sam

3 . Highlight
4. Highligh t

and activate

(Open ).

and activate

(Open ).

5. From the "Actions" menu in the "Terminals and Modems" window, choose

6-2

Setting Up HP-UX for Terminals and Modems Using SAM

6. In the "Add Modem" window, set or select the following parameters:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

The hardware path to the serial interface to be used by this modem.
The port number to be used by this modem.
The speed (baud rate) to be used by this modem.
Whether of not this modem will be used for calling out from your system.
Whether or not this modem will receive incoming calls.
Whether of not this is a CCITT (international protocol) modem.
Whether or not this will be a UUCP connection. If you specify that this
will be a UUCP connection, a list of modem types will appear from which
to select.

When you finish setting the parameters, activate

(OK ).

7. You will receive a series of messages indicating the progress of the task.

Note

You will receive a message advising you of the necessity to
connect the modem.

When you receive the message Task completed, activate

(OK ).

8. Exit SAM by returning to the "System Administration Manager" window
and activating (Exit SAM ).

Setting Up HP-UX for Terminals and Modems Using SAM

6-3

j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j

7
Installing Disk and Tape Drives
Introduction
This chapter contains installation and configuration information for the
following disk and tape drives:
HP
HP
HP
HP
HP
HP
HP
HP
HP
HP
HP
HP
HP
HP
HP
HP
HP
HP
HP
HP
HP
HP
HP
HP

C1707 A Series 6100 Model 600/ A HP-IB CD-ROM Drive
A1999A Series 6100 Model 700/S CD-ROM Drive
Optical Disk Library Systems
C1701A Series 6300 Model 650/ A Optical Disk Drive
7907 A Disk Drive
7911P /R, 7912P /R, and 7914P /R/CT Disk and Tape Drives
7933H/35H/36H/37H Disk Drives
7941A, 7942A, 7945A, 7946A Disk and Disk/Tape Drives
7957 A/B,7958A/B, and 7959B/62B/63B Disk Drives
7957/58/59S SCSI Disk Drives
9121D/S and HP 9122D/S/C Flexible Disk Drives
9125S Flexible Disk Drive
9127 A Flexible Disk Drive
9133D /H/L and 9134D /H/L Disk Drives
9153A/B and 9154A/B Disk Drives
C2200/03A Disk Drives
Mass Storage Systems
9144A/45A Tape Drive
7974A Tape Drive
7978A/B Tape Drive
7979A/7980A/7980XC Tape Drives
C1511A Series 6400 Model 1300H HP-IB DDS-Format Tape Drive
C1512A Series 6400 Model 1300S SCSI DDS-Format Tape Drive
C1520A/21A Sequential Access Tape Drives

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

7·1

HP C1707A Series 6100 Model 600/A
HP-IB CD-ROM Drive
The Model 600/ A is a Command Set 80 (CS/80) Compact Disk-Read Only
Memory (CD-ROM) Drive. It supports the 1SO-9660 (or High Sierra Group)
data format and connects to your computer via the built-in, high-speed HP-1B
interface or the high-speed HP-IB disk interface card.
The HP Series 6100 Mode1600/A HP-IB CD-ROM User's Guide, HP part
number C1707-90000, provides detailed information about this device. For
references to further information on CD-ROM technology, and details on the
CD-ROM File System, see How HP- UX Works: Concepts for the System
Administrator.

Note

Appendix B, "Series 400 Support Matrix" gives Series 400
hardware and software support information.

7-2

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

HP C1707A Model 600/A CD·ROM Drive

Before Installing This Device
Before you install this device:

• If you have not added this type of device to your system before, read the
material in Chapter 1, "Introduction". It provides interface and cabling
guidelines to follow when adding devices to your system.
• Have your HP Series 6100 Model 600/A HP-IB CD-ROM User's Guide,
part number C1707-90000, handy. You will need to refer to it during this
procedure.
• Plan ahead. Installing new peripherals on your system requires that you shut
down and power off the system. On a multiuser or clustered system you will
want to warn users and cluster clients in advance that the system (server)
will be coming down. Use the wallar cwall command to do this.

Caution

If your system is configured as an HP- UX cluster, refer to
Chapter 12, "Adding Peripherals to a Cluster" in Managing
Clusters of HP 9000 Computers before adding this device to
your system.
Disk and tape drives can be added in a cluster environment to
your client or server.

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

7·3

HP C1707 A Model 600/A CD-ROM Drive

If you are using commands to set up HP- UX to communicate with your device,
complete the hardware installation as outlined in the following section. Once
hardware installation is complete, use the information provided in this table to
complete the software set up as outlined in Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices
Using HP-UX Commands".
Table 7-1. HP C1707A Setup Information
Device Name
C1707A CD-ROM

Path
Name 1
/dev/dsk/ #sO

Interleave Select
File
Major Device
Minor
Factor
Code
Type Number Driver Number 2
b

es80

OxOeOnOO

C1707A CD-ROM / dev / rdsk/ # sO

es80

OxOeOnOO

C1707A CD-ROM

/dev/dsk/ #sO

es80

Ox070nOO

C1707A CD-ROM /dev/rdsk/ #sO

es80

Ox070nOO

# with any unique number, using the same number in both the /dev/dsk and
/dev/rdsk. SAM uses a longer naming convention that maps more closely to the hardware

1 Replace the

address of your device. See Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX Commands" for
details.

2 n is a number that identifies the address (set in step 4 of this installation procedure). Replace
n with 2 if the address is set to 2, use 3 if the address is set to 3, and so on.

7 -4

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

HP C1707A Model 600jA CD-ROM Drive

Connecting the Mode1600/A HP-IB CD-ROM Drive
The following summary supplements the procedures outlined in your hardware
installation documentation for this device. Read through this summary before
pro ceding with the installation.
1. Verify that the drivers required for this device are included in your current
kernel configuration file, usually the /etc/conf/dfile file.

Caution

CDFS (CD-ROM) file systems must reside on a drive attached
to the cluster root server.
You must, however, configure the CDFS software "driver" into
every cluster node's kernel. See Chapter 11, "Reconfiguring the
Kernel for a Cluster Node".

or
• Look in your dfile for the drivers. If the drivers are in your kernel
configuration file, go on to step 2 now.

If the drivers are not in the /etc/conf/dfile, or are commented out with
a comment symbol (such as the * sign), edit the dfile to either add the
driver or remove the comment marks. You must reconfigure the kernel if
you edit the dfile for any reason. Use the /etc/config program to do
this. See Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices Using HP- UX Commands" for
detailed information on this procedure.

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

7-5

HP C1707A Model 600/A CD·ROM Drive

2. Play it safe.

b. TURN OFF the computer and unplug the power cord.

3. Determine your interface type.
The following high-speed HP-IB interfaces can be used. They are listed in
order of preference for optimum disk performance:
• HP 98262A high-speed HP-IB daughter board
or
HP 98625B high-speed HP-IB disk interface card
• HP 98625A high-speed HP-IB disk interface card
• Built-in "optional" secondary high-speed HP-IB interface.

Note

With a 98625A high-speed HP-IB disk interface card, be sure
that no SCSI bus interface is installed.

4. Set the HP-IB bus address.

Note
7

Familiarize yourself with the HP -IB addresses that are
currently in use on your system. Determine the available
HP-IB addresses. Use the worksheet at the end of this book to
note already-used addresses.
You are limited to eight devices per HP-IB card, addresses 0
through 7.

a. Choose an available HP-IB bus address and make note of it.
b. Follow the procedures in the hardware installation documentation that
came with the device for setting the HP-IB bus address.

7·6

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

HP C1707 A Model 600jA CD-ROM Drive

5. Ensure all power switches on the device and on the computer are in the OFF
position.
6. Connect the Model 600/A to your computer.
Connect your Model 600/ A to your computer following the instructions in
the User's Guide for the device.

7. Connect the power cord to your device.
8. Turn on the CD-ROM drive.
9. Plug in and power on the computer.
Hardware installation complete! If you are using SAM, complete the software
set up portion of this procedures by following the instructions in Chapter 8,
"Setting Up HP-UX for Disk and Tape Drives Using SAM". If you are using
the commands method to install this device, refer to Chapter 14, "Setting Up
Devices Using HP- UX Commands"

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

7 -7

HP A 1999A Series 6100 Model 700/S
SCSI CD-ROM Drive
The HP A1999A Series 6100 Model 700/S SCSI CD-ROM drive is a half-height
device.
Refer to Appendix B, "Series 400 Support Matrix" for Series 400 hardware and
software support information.

Before Installing This Device
Before you install this device:

• If you have not added this type of device to your system before, read the
material in Chapter 1, "Introduction". It provides interface and cabling
guidelines to follow when adding devices to your system.
• Have your HP Series 6100 Model 700/S User's Guide handy. You will need
to refer to it during this procedure.
• Plan ahead. Installing new peripherals on your system requires that you shut
down and power off the system. On a multiuser or clustered system you will
want to warn users and cluster clients in advance that the system (server)
will be coming down. Use the wall or cwall command to do this.

Caution
7

7-8

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

HP A 1999A Model 700/S CD-ROM Drive

What You're Going To Do
The following table contains detailed HP- UX software set up information.
If you use SAM to install this device, you will not need all this detailed
information. Complete the hardware installation as outlined in the following
section, then refer to Chapter 8, "Setting Up HP- UX for Disk and Tape Drives
Using SAM" for set up instructions using SAM.
If you are using commands to set up HP- UX to communicate with your device,
complete the hardware installation as outlined in the following section. Once
hardware installation is complete, use the information provided in this table to
complete the software set up as outlined in Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices
Using HP-UX Commands".
Table 7-2.
HP A 1999A Model 700/S CD-ROM Drive Setup Information
Device Name

Path
Name 1

Major
File
Type Number

Device
Drivers

Select
Minor
Code Number 2

/dev/dsk/ #sO

scsi, cdfs

OxOeOnOO

Model 700/S CD-ROM /dev/rdsk/ #sO

scsi, cdfs

OxOeOnOO

Model 700/S CD-ROM

1 Replace the # with any unique number, using the same number in both the /dev/dsk
and /dev/rdsk. SAM uses a longer naming convention that maps more closely to the
hardware address of your device. See Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX
Commands" for details.
2 n is a number that identifies the bus address. Replace n with 2 if the bus address is set to
2, use 3 if the address is set to 3, and so on.

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

7-9

HP A 1999A Model 700/S CD-ROM Drive

Connecting the HP Series 6100 Model 700/S CD-ROM Drive
The following summary supplements the procedures outlined in your hardware
installation documentation for this device. Read through this summary before
proceding with the installation.

1. Verify that the drivers required for this device are included in your current
kernel configuration file, usually the /etc/conf/dfile file.

Caution

or
• Look in your dfile for the drivers. If the drivers are in your kernel
configuration file, go on to step 2 now.

If the drivers are not in the /etc/conf/dfile, or are commented out with
a comment symbol (such as the * sign), edit the dfile to either add the
driver or remove the comment marks. You must reconfigure the kernel if
you edit the dfile for any reason. Use the /etc/config program to do
this. See Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX Commands" for
detailed information on this procedure.

7 -10

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

HP A 1999A Model 700/S CD·ROM Drive

2. Play it safe.

a. Shut down and halt the system using the /etc/shutdown -h command.
If you are operating in a diskless cluster, see Managing Clusters of HP
9000 Computers for additional information on shutting down the system.
b. TURN OFF the computer and unplug the power cord.
3. Determine your interface.

• Built-in SCSI interface
• HP 98658A SCSI interface card
• HP 98265A SCSI interface daughter card
4. Set the SCSI bus address on your device.

Note

Familiarize yourself with the SCSI addresses that are currently
in use on your system. Determine the SCSI address( es) that
are available. Use the worksheet at the end of this book to note
already-used addresses.
You are limited to seven devices per SCSI interface, bus
addresses 0 through 6. Address 7 is reserved for the system's
SCSI controller.

Refer to your HP Series 6100 Model 700/S User's Guide for specific
instructions on how to set the SCSI bus address on your device.
7

5. Set the Parity, Arbitration, and Test switches on your device.

Parity and Arbitration switches should be set to 1 (up) and the Test
switch should be set to 0 (down). Refer to your User's Guide for specific
instructions on how to set these switches.

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

7·11

HP A 1999A Model 700/S CD-ROM Drive

6. Ensure all power switches on the device and on the computer are in the OFF
position.
7. Connect the CD-ROM drive to your computer.
Connect your Model 700/S to your computer following the instructions in
your HP Series 6100 Model 700/S User's Guide.
The HP Series 6100 Model 700/S CD-ROM drive has an internal bus length
of 0.3 meters.
The SCSI bus length is limited to a maximum of six meters. This length
includes the cable length between devices and the internal bus length for
each device on the bus. Available SCSI cables and terminators are included
in the "SCSI Device Guidelines" section of Chapter l.

8. Connect the power cord to your device.
9. Plug in and power on the computer.
Hardware installation complete! If you are using SAM, complete the
software set up portion of this procedure by following the instructions in
Chapter 8, "Setting Up HP- UX for Disk and Tape Drives Using SAM". If
you are using the commands method to install this device, refer to Chapter
14, "Setting Up Devices Using HP- UX Commands"

7 -12

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

Optical Disk Library Systems
The Deskside and Rackmount Optical Disk Library Systems are direct access
secondary storage (DASS) peripherals that allow multiple rewritable optical
disks to be shared between one, two or four optical disk drives.
• The Model 20 Optical Disk Library System can hold as many as 32 disks.
Each disk can store 325 Mbytes of data per side providing a total of 20.8
Gbytes of storage.
• The Model 60 Optical Disk Library System can hold as many as 88 disks.
Each disk can store 325 Mbytes of data per side providing a total of 57.2
Gbytes of storage.
• The Model 100 Optical Disk Library System can hold as many as 144 disks.
Each disk can store 325 Mbytes of data per side providing a total of 93.6
Gbytes of storage.
The Optical Disk Library Systems connect to your computer with a SCSI
interface and can be accessed as a conventional magnetic disk drive.
Refer to Appendix B, "Series 400 Support Matrix" for Series 400 hardware and
software support information.

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

7-13

Optical Disk Library Systems

Before Installing This Device
Optical Disk Library Systems should be installed by an HP
Customer Engineer. The installation cost is included in the
purchase price of the device. Your HP Customer Engineer will
set up and install your Optical Disk Library System for you.
For these details, please refer to the unpacking and installation
procedures that came with the device.

Note

Before having this device installed:
• Arrange to have your Hewlett- Packard Customer Engineer install your
device.
• Have the documentation that came with your device handy.

• If you have not added this type of device to your system before, read the
material in Chapter 1, "Introduction". It provides interface and cabling
guidelines to follow when adding devices to your system.
• Plan ahead. Installing new peripherals on your system requires that you shut
down and power off the system. On a multiuser or clustered system you will
want to warn users and cluster clients in advance that the system (server)
will be coming down. Use the wallar cwall command to do this.

Caution
7

The SCSI bus length is limited to a maximum of six meters. This length
includes the cable length between devices and the internal bus length for each
device on the bus. Available SCSI cables and terminators are included in the
"SCSI Device Guidelines" section of Chapter l.
Check the documentation that came with your model Optical Disk Library
System for information on internal SCSI cabling lengths.
7 -14

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

Optical Disk Library Systems

What You're Going To Do
Have your Hewlett-Packard Customer Engineer install and set up your Optical
Disk Library System.
Note that there are one, two or four optical disk drive devices for read/write
data transfer (depending on which library model you have) inside the
autochanger. Each optical disk drive device and the autochanger are assigned a
unique SCSI address.
The device drivers required for this device are autox and autoch. Device files
reside in /dev/ac and /dev/rac.
Table 7-3.
HP Optical Disk Library Autochanger Configuration Information
Path
Name 1

Device Name
The mechanical auto changer

File
Major
Type Number

Device
Drivers

Select
Minor
Code Number 2

/dev/rac/ioctl

autox, autoch, scsi

Ox201nO

Optical disk 1, block,
side a and b

/dev/ac/cEd#_la

autox, autoch, scsi

Ox201nl

/dev/ac/cEd#_lb

autox, autoch, scsi

Ox201nl

Optical disk 1, character,
side a and b

/dev/rac/cEd#_la

autox, autoch, scsi

Ox201nl

/dev/rac/cEd#_lb

autox, autoch, scsi

Ox201nl

1 See Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX Commands" for device file naming conventions for
Optical Disk Libraries.

2 n is the bus address multiplied by two.

Note

The device file names and minor number formats shown in
the table above are shown as examples only. You will need
two device files for each optical disk surface. For example,
in a library that contains 32 disks there are 64 optical disk
surfaces, each requiring a block and character mode device file,
totalling 129 device files. Therefore, use the script files that
came with your Optical Disk Library or SAM to complete the
configuration of your library.

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

7-15

Optical Disk Library Systems

Connecting the Optical Disk Library Systems
The following summary supplements the procedures outlined in the hardware
installation documentation that came with this device. Read through this
summary before proceding with the installation.

1. Verify that the drivers required for this device are included in your current
kernel configuration file, usually the / etc/ conf / dfile file.
Your Customer Engineer will run a script that installs the appropriate
drivers and creates the necessary device files for your Optical Disk Library
system.

2. Play it safe.
a. Shut down and halt the system using the / etc/ shutdown -h command.

If you are operating in a diskless cluster, see Managing Clusters of HP
9000 Computers for additional information on shutting down the system.
b. TURN OFF the computer and unplug the power cord.

3. Ensure all power switches on the device and on the computer are in the OFF
position.
4. Complete the hardware installation. Complete hardware installation as
outlined in the Optical Disk Library Systems Setup Guide for the optical
disk library model you have purchased.
7

5. Complete the software set up task. After the hardware is installed, use SAM
to create the necessary device files for section 2 (or the whole disk). If you
do not have SAM available on your system, follow the steps outlined in the
Configuring and Using the Optical Disk Library System manual for your
system type.

Note

7-16

If you do not have pre-initialized media, you will need to
initialize each optical disk surface.

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

HP C1701A/C Model 650GB Optical Disk Drives
The HP C1701A and C1701C are stand-alone 5.25-inch Rewritable Optical
disk drives. The removable Magneto-Optical (MO) disk can store 650 Mbytes
of data (325 Mbytes per side) and complies with the Continuous-Composite
format. These disk drives connect to your computer with a SCSI interface and
can be accessed as conventional magnetic disk drives.
The HP C1701A and C1701C optical disk drives are supported as mass storage
devices or as boot devices, although they are not recommended for use as boot
devices.

Note

Refer to Appendix B, "Series 400 Support Matrix" for Series
400 hardware and software support information.

Caution

If your system is configured as an HP -UX cluster, refer to
Chapter 12, "Adding Peripherals to a Cluster" in Managing
Clusters of HP 9000 Computers before adding this device to
your system.

Disk and tape drives can be added in a cluster environment to
your client or server.

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

7-17

HP C1701AjC Model 650 Optical Disk Drive

What You're GOing To Do
The following table contains detailed HP- UX software set up information.
If you use SAM to install this device, you will not need all this detailed
information. Complete the hardware installation as outlined in the following
section, then refer to Chapter 8, "Setting Up HP- UX for Disk and Tape Drives
U sing SAM" for set up instructions.

If you are using commands to set up HP- UX to communicate with your device,
complete the hardware installation as outlined in this section. Once hardware
installation is complete, use the information provided in this table to complete
the software set up as outlined in Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices Using
HP-UX Commands".
Table 7-4. HP C1701AjC Setup Information
Device Name
C1701A/C Model 650

Path
Name 1
/ dev / dsk/ #sO

C1701A/C Model 650 /dev/rdsk/ #sO

File
Major Device
Minor
Interleave Select
Type Number Driver Number 2
Factor
Code
b

scsi

OxOeOnOO

scsi

OxOeOnOO

1 Replace the # with any unique number, using the same number in both the /dev/dsk and
/dev/rdsk. SAM uses a longer naming convention that maps more closely to the hardware address
of your device. See Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX Commands" for details.
2 n is a number that identifies the address (set in step 4 of this installation procedure). Replace n
with 2 if the address is set to 2, use 3 if the address is set to 3, and so on.

7 -18

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

HP C1701A/C Model 650 Optical Disk Drive

Connecting the Models 650 Optical Disk Drives
The following summary supplements the procedures outlined in your
installation documentation for this device. Read through this summary before
pro ceding with the installation.

1. Verify that the drivers required for this device are included in your current
kernel configuration file, usually the /etc/conf/dfile file.

If the drivers are not in the /etc/conf/dfile, or are commented out with
a comment symbol (such as the * sign), edit the dfile to either add the
driver or remove the comment marks. You must reconfigure the kernel if
you edit the dfile for any reason. Use the /etc/config program to do
this. See Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX Commands" for
detailed information on this procedure.
2. Play it safe.
a. Shut down and halt the system using the / etc/ shutdown -h command.

If you are operating in a diskless cluster, see Managing Clusters of HP
9000 Computers for additional information on shutting down the system.
b. TURN OFF the computer and unplug the power cord.

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

7·19

HP C1701AjC Model 650 Optical Disk Drive

3. Determine your interface.
• Built-in SCSI interface
• HP 98658A SCSI interface card
• HP 98265A SCSI interface daughter card

4. Set the SCSI bus address on your device.

Note

a. Choose an available SCSI bus address and make note of it.
b. Follow the procedures in the hardware installation documentation that
came with the device for setting the SCSI bus address.

5. Ensure all power switches on the device and on the computer are in the OFF
position.
6. Connect the disk drive to your computer.

Connect your device to your computer following the instructions in the
installation documentation for the device.
The SCSI bus length is limited to a maximum of six meters. This length
includes the cable length between devices and the internal bus length for
each device on the bus. Available SCSI cables and terminators are included
in the "SCSI Device Guidelines" section of Chapter 1.
The HP C1701A/C optical disk drive has an internal bus length of 0.3
meters.

7-20

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

HP C1701A/C Model 650 Optical Disk Drive

7. Connect the power cord to your device.
8. Turn on the disk drive.
Do NOT turn on the power to the computer before the disk drive.

Caution

If you are using the Model 650 as a boot device, insert the
optical disk before the system is powered up and do not remove
it until after the system is powered down.

9. Plug in and power on the computer.
Hardware installation complete! If you are using SAM, complete the
software set up portion of this procedures by following the instructions in
Chapter 8, "Setting Up HP- UX for Disk and Tape Drives Using SAM". If
you are using the commands method to install this device, refer to Chapter
14, "Setting Up Devices Using HP -UX Commands"

Note

Since optical media is removable, do not use the media as part
of your automatically-mounted file systems (that is, do not add
this disk drive to /etc/checklist).

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

7 -21

HP 7907A Disk Drive
The HP 7907A is a Command Set 80 (CS/80) device containing a 20.5-Mbyte
fixed disk and a 20.5-Mbyte removable cartridge disk. It connects to your
computer via the "optional" built-in high-speed HP-IB interface or a
high-speed HP-IB disk interface card.
The HP 7907 A disk drive is not supported as a system disk
and can only be used for secondary "mounted volumes" or LIF
utility volumes.

Note

Refer to Appendix B, "Series 400 Support Matrix" for Series 400 hardware and
software support information.

Before Installing This Device
Before you install this device:
• Have the installation documentation that came with the device handy. You
will need to refer to it during this procedure.
• If you have not added this type of device to your system before, read the
material in Chapter 1, "Introduction". It provides interface and cabling
guidelines to follow when adding devices to your system.
7

Caution

If your system is configured as an HP -UX cluster, refer to
Chapter 12, "Adding Peripherals to a Cluster" in Managing
Clusters of HP 9000 Computers before adding this device to
your system.

Disk and tape drives can be added in a cluster environment to
your client or server.

7 -22

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

HP 7907 A Disk Drive

If you are using commands to set up HP- UX to communicate with your device,
complete the hardware installation as outlined in the following section. Once
hardware installation is complete, use the information provided in this table to
complete the software set up as outlined in Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices
Using HP -UX Commands".
Table 7-5. HP 7907 A Setup Information
Device Name

Path
Name 1

File
Major Device
Minor
Interleave Select
Type Number Driver Number 2
Factor
Code

HP 7907 A - Fixed Disk

/dev/dsk/ #sO

cs80

OxOeOnOO

HP 7907 A - Fixed Disk

/dev/rdsk/ #sO

cs80

OxOeOnOO

/ dev / dsk/ #sO

HP 7907A - Removable Disk

cs80

OxOeOn10

HP 7907 A - Removable Disk /dev/rdsk/ #sO

cs80

OxOeOn10

HP 7907A - Fixed Disk

/dev/dsk/ #sO

cs80

Ox070nOO

HP 7907A - Fixed Disk

/dev/rdsk/ #sO

cs80

Ox070nOO

/dev/dsk/ #sO

cs80

Ox070n10

cs80

Ox070n10

HP 7907 A - Removable Disk

HP 7907 A - Removable Disk /dev/rdsk/ #sO

2 n is a number that identifies the address (set in step 4 of this installation procedure). Replace n with 2 if
the address is set to 2, use 3 if the address is set to 3, and so on.

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

7-23

HP 7907 A Disk Drive

Connecting the HP 7907 A Disk Drive
The following summary supplements the procedures outlined in your hardware
installation documentation for this device. Read through this summary before
proceding with the installation.

1. Verify that the drivers required for this device are included in your current
kernel configuration file, usually the / ete/ eonf / dfile file.
If you are adding a device that utilizes an interface type that is new on your
system, you may have to add one or more necessary device drivers to the
kernel configuration file. To verify that the necessary drivers, listed in the
tables in the previous section, are part of your current kernel configuration
file, you can:
• Use SAM for the whole procedure. SAM will check your dfile for the
necessary device drivers, add any that are missing, and reconfigure the
kernel for you at this time. See the chapter on setting up HP- UX using
SAM that follows this chapter; then go on to step 2.
or
• Look in your dfile for the drivers. If the drivers are in your kernel
configuration file, go on to step 2 now.

If the drivers are not in the /ete/eonf/dfile, or are commented out with
a comment symbol (such as the * sign), edit the dfile to either add the
driver or remove the comment marks. You must reconfigure the kernel if
you edit the dfile for any reason. Use the /ete/eonfig program to do
this. See Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX Commands" for
detailed information on this procedure.

2. Play it safe.
a. Shut down and halt the system using the /ete/shutdown -h command.

If you are operating in a diskless cluster, see Managing Clusters of HP
9000 Computers for additional information on shutting down the system.
b. TURN OFF the computer and unplug the power cord.

7 -24

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

HP 7907 A Disk Drive

3. Determine your interface.
The following high-speed HP-IB interfaces can be used. They are listed in
order of preference for optimum disk performance:
• HP 98262A high-speed HP-IB daughter board
or
HP 98625B high-speed HP-IB disk interface card
• HP 98625A high-speed HP-IB disk interface card
• Built-in "optional" secondary high-speed HP-IB interface.

Note

With a 98625A high-speed HP-IB disk interface card, be sure
that no SCSI bus interface is installed.

4. Set the HP-IB bus address.

Note

Familiarize yourself with the HP-IB addresses that are
currently in use on your system. Determine the available
HP-IB addresses. Use the worksheet at the end of this book to
note already-used addresses.
You are limited to eight devices per HP-IB card, addresses 0
through 7.

a. Choose an available HP-IB bus address and make note of it.
b. Set the HP-IB bus address according to the instructions given in the
hardware installation documentation provided with the device.

5. Ensure all power switches on the device and on the computer are in the OFF
position.
6. Connect the disk drive to your computer.
Connect your HP 7907 A to your computer following the instructions in the
hardware installation documentation provided with the device.

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

7-25

HP 7907 A Disk Drive

7. Connect the power cord to your device.
8. Turn on the device.
9. Plug in and power on the computer.
Hardware installation complete! If you are using SAM, complete the
software set up portion of this procedures by following the instructions in
Chapter 8, "Setting Up HP-UX for Disk and Tape Drives Using SAM". If
you are using the commands method to install this device, refer to Chapter
14, "Setting Up Devices Using HP- UX Commands"

7 -26

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

HP 7911P/R, 7912P/R, and 7914P/R/CT Disk and Tape
Drives
These disk and tape drives are Command Set 80 (CS/80) devices. They
connect to your computer via the "optional" built-in, high-speed HP-IB
interface or the high-speed HP-IB disk interface card.
•
•
•
•

The HP7911P /R is a 28.1-Mbyte disk with cartridge tape drive.
The 7912P /R is a 65.6-Mbyte disk with cartridge tape drive.
The 7914P /R is a 132-Mbyte disk with cartridge tape drive.
The 7914CT is a 7914R disk drive and a 9144A cartridge tape drive in a
92211R cabinet.

Refer to Appendix B, "Series 400 Support Matrix" for Series 400 hardware and
software support information.

Note

The HP 7911P /R disk with tape drive is not supported as a
system disk and can only be used for secondary "mounted
volumes" or LIP utility volumes.

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

7-27

HP 7911P/R,7912P/R,7914P/R/CT
Disk/Tape Drives

Caution

If your system is configured as an HP- UX cluster, refer to
Chapter 12, "Adding Peripherals to a Cluster" in Managing
Clusters of HP 9000 Computers before adding this device to
your system.

Disk and tape drives can be added in a cluster environment to
your client or server.

7 ·28

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

HP 7911P/R,7912P/R,7914P/R/CT
Disk/Tape Drives

What You're Going To Do
Caution

Do not attempt to operate the unit until it is moved to the
installation site and the spindle and actuator are unlocked. Do
not apply any sudden mechanical shocks to the unit.

The following table contains detailed HP- UX software set up information.
If you use SAM to install this device, you will not need all this detailed
information. Complete the hardware installation as outlined in the following
section, then refer to Chapter 8, "Setting Up HP- UX for Disk and Tape Drives
Using SAM" for set up instructions.

If you are using commands to set up HP- UX to communicate with your device,
complete the hardware installation as outlined in the following section. Once
the hardware installation is complete, use the information provided in this
table to complete the software set up as outlined in Chapter 14, "Setting Up
Devices Using HP-UX Commands".

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

7·29

HP 7911P/R,7912P/R,7914P/R/CT
DiskjTape Drives
Table 7-6. HP 7911/12/14 Setup Information
Device Name

Path
Name 1

HP 7911/12/14 - Disk

/dev/dsk/ #sO

HP 7911/12/14 - Disk

/dev/rdsk/ #sO
/dev/ct/ #sO

File
Major Device
Minor
Interleave Select
Type Number Driver Number 2
Factor
Code
b

cs80

OxOeOnOO

cs80

OxOeOnOO

cs80

OxOeOnl0

HP 7911/12/14 - Tape 3
HP 7911/12/14 - Tape 3

/dev/rct/ #sO

cs80

OxOeOnl0

HP 7911/12/14 - Disk

/dev/dsk/ #sO

cs80

Ox070nOO

HP 7911/12/14 - Disk

/dev/rdsk/ #sO

cs80

Ox070nOO

/dev/ct/ #sO

cs80

Ox070nl0

HP 7911/12/14 - Tape3
HP 7911/12/14 - Tape 3
HP 7911/12/14 - Tape 4
HP 7911/12/14 - Tape 4
HP 7911/12/14 - Tape 4
HP 7911/12/14 - Tape 4

/dev/rct/ #sO

cs80

Ox070nl0

/dev/ct/ #sO

cs80

Ox070nOO

/dev/rct/ #sO

cs80

Ox070nOO

/ dev / ct/ #sO

cs80

Ox080nOO

/dev/rct/ #sO

cs80

Ox080nOO

# with any unique number, using the same number in both the / dev / dsk and
/dev/rdsk. SAM uses a longer naming convention that maps more closely to the hardware address

1 Replace the

of your device. See Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX Commands" for details.
2 n is a number that identifies the address (set in step 4 or step 8 of this installation procedure).
Replace n with 2 if the address is set to 2, use 3 if the address is set to 3, and so on.
3 Single tape controller
4 Dual tape controller

7 -30

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

HP 7911P/R,7912PjR,7914PjRjCT
DiskjTape Drives

Connecting the HP 7911/1912/1914 DiskjTape Drives
The following summary supplements the procedures outlined in your hardware
installation documentation for this device. Read through this summary before
pro ceding with the installation.
1. Verify that the drivers required for this device are included in your current
kernel configuration file, usually the / ete/ eonf / df ile file.
If you are adding a device that utilizes an interface type that is new on
your system, you may have to add one or more necessary device drivers to
the kernel configuration file. To verify that the necessary drivers, listed
in the tables in the previous section, are part of your current kernel
configuration file, you can:

• Use SAM for the whole procedure. SAM will check your dfile for the
necessary device drivers, add any that are missing, and reconfigure the
kernel for you at this time. See the chapter on setting up HP- UX using
SAM that follows this chapter; then go on to step 2.
or
• Look in your dfile for the drivers. If the drivers are in your kernel
configuration file, go on to step 2 now.
If the drivers are not in the /ete/eonf/dfile, or are commented out
with a comment symbol (such as the * sign), edit the dfile to either
add the driver or remove the comment marks. You must reconfigure
the kernel if you edit the dfile for any reason. Use the /ete/eonfig
program to do this. See Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX
Commands" for detailed information on this procedure.
2. Play it safe.

a. Shut down and halt the system using the /ete/shutdown -h command.
If you are operating in a diskless cluster, see Managing Clusters of
HP 9000 Computers for additional information on shutting down the
system.

b. TURN OFF the computer and unplug the power cord.

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

7 -31

HP 7911PjR,7912PjR,7914PjRjCT
DiskjTape Drives

3. Determine your disk interface.
The following high-speed HP-IB interfaces can be used. They are listed in
order of preference for optimum disk performance:
• HP 98262A high-speed HP-IB daughter board
or
HP 98625B high-speed HP-IB disk interface card
• HP 98625A high-speed HP-IB disk interface card
• Built-in "optional" secondary high-speed HP-IB interface.

Note

With a 98625A high-speed HP-IB disk interface card, be sure
that no SCSI bus interface is installed.

4. Set the disk HP-IB bus address.

Note

Familiarize yourself with the HP-IB addresses that are
currently in use on your system. Determine the available
HP-IB addresses. Use the worksheet at the end of this book to
note already-used addresses.
You are limited to eight devices per HP-IB card, addresses 0
through 7.

If you have a dual controller you must allocate two HP-IB addresses. One
for the disk drive and one for the tape drive. If you do not have a dual
controller, the tape is accessed through the same HP -IB connector as the
disk.
a. Choose an available HP-IB bus address and make note of it.
b. Set the HP-IB bus address according to the instructions provided in the
installation documentation for the device.

5. Ensure all power switches on the device and on the computer are in the
OFF position.

7-32

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

HP 7911P/R,7912P/R,7914P/R/CT
Disk/Tape Drives

6. Connect the disk to your computer.

Connect the disk to your computer following the instructions in the
hardware installation manual provided with the device.

Note

Complete steps 7, 8, and 9 only if you have a dual controller. If
you do not have a dual controller, skip to step 10.

7. Determine the tape interface. (Dual Controller Only).

Note

Do not install HP-IB tape drives on the same interface as the
root device (main disk drive). Doing so can degrade your disk
drive's performance

• If you selected the HP 98625A/B HP-IB Disk Interface for your disk, use
the built-in HP-IB Interface for your tape.
• If you selected the built-in HP-IB interface for your disk, use an HP
98624A HP -IB Interface for your tape (if available).
• Otherwise, use your built-in HP-IB interface for both disk and tape.

8. Set the tape HP-IB bus address (Dual Controller Only).

a. Choose an available HP-IB bus address and make note of it.

Note

Make sure to select a different bus address than the one you
selected in the previous step for the disk drive.

b. Set the tape HP-IB bus address according to the instructions provided
in the installation documentation for the device.

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

7-33

HP 7911PjR,7912PjR,7914PjR/CT
Disk/Tape Drives

9. Connect the tape to your computer (Dual Controller Only).
Connect the tape to your computer following the instructions in the
hardware installation manual provided with the device.

10. Connect the power cord.
1l. Turn on the device.

12. Plug in and power on the computer.
Hardware installation complete! If you are using SAM, complete the software
set up portion of this procedures by following the instructions in Chapter 8,
"Setting Up HP-UX for Disk and Tape Drives Using SAM". If you are using
the commands method to install this device, refer to Chapter 14, "Setting Up
Devices Using HP -UX Commands"

7-34

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

HP 7933H/35H/36H/37H Disk Drives
These disk drives are Command Set 80 (CS/80) devices. They connect to your
computer via the built-in, high-speed HP-IB interface or the high-speed HP-IB
disk interface card.
The
The
The
The

HP
HP
HP
HP

7933H
7935H
7936H
7937H

is
is
is
is

a
a
a
a

404- Mbyte
404- Mbyte
308-Mbyte
571-Mbyte

fixed disk.
removable disk.
fixed disk.
fixed disk.

Refer to Appendix B, "Series 400 Support Matrix" for Series 400 hardware and
software support information.

Caution

If your system is configured as an HP- UX cluster, refer to
Chapter 12, "Adding Peripherals to a Cluster" in Managing
Clusters of HP 9000 Computers before adding this device to
your system.

Disk and tape drives can be added in a cluster environment to
your client or server.

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

7-35

HP 7933/35/36/37H Disk Drives

What You're Going To Do
Caution

Do not attempt to operate the unit until it is moved to the
installation site and the spindle and actuator are unlocked.
Do not apply any sudden mechanical shocks to the unit.

The following table contains detailed HP- UX software set up information.
If you use SAM to install this device, you will not need all this detailed
information. Complete the hardware installation as outlined in the following
section, then refer to Chapter 8, "Setting Up HP-UX for Disk and Tape Drives
Using SAM" for set up instructions.

If you are using commands to set up HP- UX to communicate with your device,
complete the hardware installation as outlined in the following section. Once
hardware installation is complete, use the information provided in this table to
complete the software set up as outlined in Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices
Using HP-UX Commands".
Table 7-7. HP 7933/35/36/37H Setup Information
Device Name
HP 7933/35/36/37

Path
Name 1
/dev/dsk/ #sO

Major Device
Interleave Select
File
Minor
Type Number Driver Number 2
Factor
Code
b

cs80

OxOeOnOO

HP 7933/35/36/37 /dev/rdsk/ #sO

cs80

OxOeOnOO

HP 7933/35

/dev/dsk/ #sO

cs80

Ox070nOO

HP 7933/35

/dev/rdsk/ #sO

cs80

Ox070nOO

1 Replace the # with any unique number, using the same number in both the /dev/dsk and
/dev/rdsk. SAM uses a longer naming convention that maps more closely to the hardware
address of your device. See Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX Commands" for
details.
2 n is a number that identifies the address (set in step 4 of this installation procedure). Replace n
with 2 if the address is set to 2, use 3 if the address is set to 3, and so on.

7 -36

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

HP 7933/35/36/37H Disk Drives

Connecting the HP 7933/35/36/37H Disk Drives
The following summary supplements the procedures outlined in your hardware
installation documentation for this device. Read through this summary before
pro ceding with the installation.
1. Verify that the drivers required for this device are included in your current
kernel configuration file, usually the /ete/eonf/dfile file.

If you are adding a device that utilizes an interface type that is new on your
system, you may have to add one or more necessary device drivers to the
kernel configuration file. To verify that the necessary drivers, listed in the
tables in the previous section, are part of your current kernel configuration
file, you can:
• Use SAM for the whole procedure. SAM will check your dfile for the
necessary device drivers, add any that are missing, and reconfigure the
kernel for you at this time. See the chapter on setting up HP -UX using
SAM that follows this chapter; then go on to step 2.
or
• Look in your dfile for the drivers. If the drivers are in your kernel
configuration file, go on to step 2 now.
If the drivers are not in the /ete/eonf/dfile, or are commented out with
a comment symbol (such as the * sign), edit the dfile to either add the
driver or remove the comment marks. You must reconfigure the kernel if
you edit the dfile for any reason. Use the /ete/eonfig program to do
this. See Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX Commands" for
detailed information on this procedure.

2. Play it safe.

a. Shut down and halt the system using the fete/shutdown -h command.

If you are operating in a diskless cluster, see Managing Clusters of HP
9000 Computers for additional information on shutting down the system.
b. TURN OFF the computer and unplug the power cord.

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

7-37

HP 7933/35/36/37H Disk Drives

Note

With a 98625A high-speed HP-IB disk interface card, be sure
that no SCSI bus interface is installed.

4. Set the HP-IB bus address.

Note

Familiarize yourself with the HP-IB addresses that are
currently in use on your system. Determine the available
HP-IB addresses. Use the worksheet at the end of this book to
note already-used addresses.
You are limited to eight devices per HP-IB card, addresses 0
through 7.

a. Choose an available HP-IB bus address and make note of it.
b. Set the HP-IB bus address according to the instructions in the
installation documentation provided with the device.

7 -38

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

HP 7933/35/36/37H Disk Drives

5. Ensure all power switches on the device and on the computer are in the OFF
position.
6. Connect the disk to your computer.
Connect the disk to your computer following the instructions provided in the
hardware installation manual for the device.
7. Connect the power cord.
8. Turn on the device.
9. Plug in and power on the computer.
Hardware installation complete! If you are using SAM, complete the software
set up portion of this procedures by following the instructions in Chapter 8,
"Setting Up HP- UX for Disk and Tape Drives Using SAM". If you are using
the commands method to install this device, refer to Chapter 14, "Setting Up
Devices Using HP- UX Commands"

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

7-39

HP 7941A, 7942A, 7945A, 7946A
Disk and Disk/Tape Drives
The HP 7941A and HP 7945A are Command Set 80 (CS/80) disks. These
disk drives connect to your computer via the built-in high-speed HP-IB or the
high-speed HP-IB disk interface card.
• The HP 7941 is a 23.8-Mbyte disk.
• The HP 7945A is a 55.5-Mbyte disk.
• The HP 7942A and HP 7946A products contain a 9144A cartridge tape drive
in addition to the HP 7941A and HP 7945A disk drives respectively.
Refer to Appendix B, "Series 400 Support Matrix" for Series 400 hardware and
software support information.

Note

The HP 7941A and 7942A disk drives are not supported as
system disks and can only be used for secondary "mounted
volumes" or LIF utility volumes.

7·40

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

HP 7941A/42A/45A/46A
Disk and Disk/Tape Drives

Before Installing This Device
Before you install this device:
• Have the hardware installation documentation that came with the device
handy. You will need to refer to it during this procedure.

• If you have not added this type of device to your system before, read the
material in Chapter 1, "Introduction". It provides interface and cabling
guidelines to follow when adding devices to your system.
• Plan ahead. Installing new peripherals on your system requires that you shut
down and power off the system. On a multiuser or clustered system you will
want to warn users and cluster clients in advance that the system (server)
will be coming down. Use the wall or cwall command to do this.

Caution

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

7-41

HP 7941 A/42A/45A/46A
Disk and DiskjTape Drives

What You're Going To Do
The following table contains detailed HP- UX software set up information. If
you use SAM to install a disk or tape drive, you will not need this detailed
information. Complete the hardware installation as outlined in the following
section, then refer to Chapter 8, "Setting Up HP-UX for Disk and Tape Drives
U sing SAM" for software set up instructions using SAM.
If you are using commands to set up HP- UX to communicate with your device,
complete the hardware installation as outlined in this section. Once the
hardware installation is complete, use the information provided in this table to
complete the software set up as outlined in Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices
Using HP-UX Commands".
Table 7-8.
HP 7941A/42A/45A/46A Disk and DiskjTape Drive Setup
Information
File

Major

Device

Minor

cs80

OxOeOnOO

HP 7941/42/45/46 - Disk /dev/rdsk/ #sO

cs80

OxOeOnOO

HP 7942/46 - Tape

/dev/ct/ #sO

cs80

OxOeOn10

HP 7942/46 - Tape

/dev/rct/ #sO

cs80

OxOeOn10

HP 7941/42/45/46 - Disk

/ dev / dsk/ #sO

cs80

Ox070nOO

Device Name
HP 7941/42/45/46 - Disk

Path
Name 1
/ dev / dsk/ #sO

Type Number Driver Number 2

Interleave Select
Factor
Code

HP 7941/42/45/46 - Disk /dev/rdsk/ #sO

cs80

Ox070nOO

HP 7942/46 - Tape

/dev/ct/ #sO

cs80

Ox070n10

HP 7942/46 - Tape

/dev/rct/ #sO

cs80

Ox070n10

1 Replace the # with any unique number, using the same number in both the /dev/dsk and /dev/rdsk.
SAM uses a longer naming convention that maps more closely to the hardware address of your device.
See Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX Commands" for details.
2 n is a number that identifies the address (set in step 4 of this installation procedure). Replace n with
2 if the address is set to 2, use 3 if the address is set to 3, and so on.

7 -42

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

HP 7941 A/42A/45A/46A

Disk and Disk/Tape Drives

Connecting the HP 7941A/42A/45A/46A
Disk and Disk/Tape Drives
The following summary supplements the procedures outlined in your hardware
installation documentation for this device. Read through this summary before
pro ceding with the installation.

1. Verify that the drivers required for this device are included in your current
kernel configuration file, usually the /ete/eonf/dfile file.

If the drivers are not in the /ete/eonf/dfile, or are commented out with
a comment symbol (such as the * sign), edit the dfile to either add the
driver or remove the comment marks. You must reconfigure the kernel if
you edit the dfile for any reason. Use the /ete/eonfig program to do
this. See Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices Using HP- UX Commands" for
detailed information on this procedure.
2. Play it safe.
a. Shut down and halt the system using the /ete/shutdown -h command.

If you are operating in a diskless cluster, see Managing Clusters of HP
9000 Computers for additional information on shutting down the system.
b. TURN OFF the computer and unplug the power cord.

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

7-43

HP 7941A/42A/45A/46A
Disk and Disk/Tape Drives

Note

With a 98625A high-speed HP-IB disk interface card, be sure
that no SCSI bus interface is installed.

4. Set the HP-IB bus address.

Note

Familiarize yourself with the HP-IB addresses that are
currently in use on your system. Determine the available
HP-IB addresses. Use the worksheet at the end of this book to
note already-used addresses.
You are limited to eight devices per HP-IB card, addresses 0
through 7.

a. Choose an available HP-IB bus address and make note of it.
b. Set the HP-IB bus address according to the instructions in the hardware
installation documentation provided with the device.

7·44

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

HP 7941A/42A/45A/46A
Disk and Disk/Tape Drives

5. Ensure all power switches on the device and on the computer are in the OFF
position.
6. Connect the disk drive to your computer.

Connect the device to your computer following the instructions in the
hardware installation manual provided with the device.
7. Connect the power cord to your device.
8. Turn on the device.
9. Plug in and power on the computer.
Hardware installation complete! If you are using SAM, complete the software
set up portion of this procedures by following the instructions in Chapter 8,
"Setting Up HP-UX for Disk and Tape Drives Using SAM". If you are using
the commands method to install this device, refer to Chapter 14, "Setting Up
Devices Using HP-UX Commands"

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

7-45

HP 7957A/578/58A/588 and 79598/628/638 Disk Drives
These disk drives are Command Set (CS/80) devices. They connect to your
computer via the built-in, high-speed HP-IB interface or the high-speed HP-IB
disk interface card and have the following storage capacities:
HP
HP
HP
HP

7957A/B
7958A
7958B/62B
7959B/63B

80 Mbytes storage capacity.
131 Mbytes storage capacity.
152 Mbytes storage capacity.
304 Mbytes storage capacity.

Refer to Appendix B, "Series 400 Support Matrix" for Series 400 hardware and
software support information.

Caution

If your system is configured as an HP- UX cluster, refer to
Chapter 12, "Adding Peripherals to a Cluster" in Managing
Clusters of HP 9000 Computers before adding this device to
your system.

Disk and tape drives can be added in a cluster environment to
your client or server.

7-46

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

HP 7957 A/57B/58A/588 and 79598/62B/638 Disk Drives

What You're Going To Do
The following tables contain detailed HP- UX software set up information. If
you use SAM to install any of these devices, you will not need this detailed
information. Complete the hardware installation as outlined in the following
section, then refer to Chapter 8, "Setting Up HP-UX for Disk and Tape Drives
U sing SAM" for set up instructions using SAM.

If you are using commands to set up HP- UX to communicate with any of these
devices, complete the hardware installation as outlined in this section. Once
the hardware installation is complete, use the information provided in these
tables to complete the software set up as outlined in Chapter 14, "Setting Up
Devices Using HP- UX Commands".
Table 7-9.
HP 7957 A/578/58A/588 and HP 79598/628/638 Setup
Information
Device Name

Path
Name 1

HP 7957 A/7958A

/dev/dsk/ #sO

HP 7957 A/7958A

/dev/rdsk/ #sO

HP 7957A/7958A

/dev/dsk/ #sO

HP 7957 A/7958A

/dev/rdsk/ #sO
/dev/dsk/ #sO

HP 7957/58/59B or /dev/rdsk/ #sO
HP 7962/63B
HP 7957/58/59B or
HP 7962/63B

HP 7957/58/59B or
HP 7962/63B

/dev/dsk/ #sO

HP 7957/58/59B or /dev/rdsk/ #sO
HP 7962/63B

Major Device
File
Minor
Interleave Select
Type Number Driver Number 2
Factor
Code
b

OxOeOnOO

cs80

OxOeOnOO

cs80

Ox070nOO

cs80

Ox070nOO

cs80

OxOeOnOO

cs80

OxOeOnOO

cs80

Ox070nOO

cs80

Ox070nOO

cs80

c
b

1 Replace the # with any unique number, using the same number in both the /dev/dsk and
/dev/rdsk. SAM uses a longer naming convention that maps more closely to the hardware
address of your device. See Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX Commands" for
details.
2 n is a number that identifies the address (set in step 4 of this installation procedure). Replace n

with 2 if the address is set to 2, use 3 if the address is set to 3, and so on.

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

7-47

HP 7957A/578/58A/588 and 79598/628/638 Disk Drives

Connecting the HP 7957 A/578/58A/588 and 79598/628/638 Disk
Drives
The following summary supplements the procedures outlined in your hardware
installation documentation for this device. Read through this summary before
proceding with the installation.

1. Verify that the drivers required for this device are included in your current
kernel configuration file, usually the / etc/ conf / dfile file.
If you are adding a device that utilizes an interface type that is new on your
system, you may have to add one or more necessary device drivers to the
kernel configuration file. To verify that the necessary drivers, listed in the
tables in the previous section, are part of your current kernel configuration
file, you can:
• Use SAM for the whole procedure. SAM will check your dfile for the
necessary device drivers, add any that are missing, and reconfigure the
kernel for you at this time. See the chapter on setting up HP- UX using
SAM that follows this chapter; then go on to step 2.
or
• Look in your dfile for the drivers. If the drivers are in your kernel
configuration file, go on to step 2 now.

If the drivers are not in the / etc/ conf / dfile, or are commented out with
a comment symbol (such as the * sign), edit the dfile to either add the
driver or remove the comment marks. You must reconfigure the kernel if
you edit the dfile for any reason. Use the /etc/config program to do
this. See Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX Commands" for
detailed information on this procedure.

2. Play it safe.
a. Shut down and halt the system using the /etc/shutdolArn -h command.

If you are operating in a diskless cluster, see Managing Clusters of HP
9000 Computers for additional information on shutting down the system.
b. TURN OFF the computer and unplug the power cord.

7-48

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

HP 7957 A/578/58A/588 and 79598/628/638 Disk Drives

3. Determine your interface.

The following high-speed HP-IB interfaces can be used. They are listed in
order of preference for optimum disk performance:
• HP 98262A high-speed HP-IB daughter board
or
HP 98625B high-speed HP-IB disk interface card
• HP 98625A high-speed HP-IB disk interface card
• Built-in "optional" secondary high-speed HP-IB interface.

Note

With a 98625A high-speed HP-IB disk interface card, be sure
that no SCSI bus interface is installed.

4. Set the HP-IB bus address.

Note

Familiarize yourself with the HP-IB addresses that are
currently in use on your system. Determine the available
HP-IB addresses. Use the worksheet at the end of this book to
note already-used addresses.
You are limited to eight devices per HP-IB card, addresses 0
through 7.

a. Choose an available HP-IB bus address and make note of it.

Caution

Do not use address positions 8 and 9. On the HP
7957B/58B/59B/62B/63B disk drives, positions 8 and 9 on the
ADDRESS wheel are for use by service personnel only. If the
drive is powered on with 8 or 9 selected, loss of data can occur.

b. Set the HP-IB bus address according to the instructions in the hardware
installation documentation provided with the device.

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

7-49

HP 7957 A/57B/58A/58B and 7959B/62B/63B Disk Drives

5. Ensure all power switches on the device and on the computer are in the OFF
position.
6. Connect the disk drive to your computer.
Connect the device to your computer following the instructions provided in
the hardware installation manual for the device.

7. Connect the power cord to your device.
8. Turn on the device.
9. Plug in and power on the computer.
Hardware installation complete! If you are using SAM, complete the
software set up portion of this procedures by following the instructions in
Chapter 8, "Setting Up HP- UX for Disk and Tape Drives Using SAM". If
you are using the commands method to install this device, refer to Chapter
14, "Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX Commands"

7 -50

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

HP 7957/58/59S SCSI Disk Drives
These disk drives are Small Computer Systems Interface (SCSI) devices. They
connect to your computer via the built-in SCSI interface or SCSI interface card
and have the following storage capacities:
HP 7957S
HP 7958S
HP 7959S

107 Mbytes storage capacity.
161 Mbytes storage capacity.
323 Mbytes storage capacity.

Refer to Appendix B, "Series 400 Support Matrix" for Series 400 hardware and
software support information.

Caution

If your system is configured as an HP -UX cluster, refer to
Chapter 12, "Adding Peripherals to a Cluster" in Managing
Clusters of HP 9000 Computers before adding this device to
your system.

Disk and tape drives can be added in a cluster environment to
your client or server.

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

7-51

HP 7957/58/59S SCSI Disk Drives

What You're Going To Do
The following table contains detailed HP- UX software set up information. If
you use SAM to install any of these devices, you will not need this detailed
information. Complete the hardware installation as outlined in the following
section, then refer to Chapter 8, "Setting Up HP- UX for Disk and Tape Drives
U sing SAM" for set up instructions using SAM.

If you are using commands to set up HP- UX to communicate with any of these
devices, complete the hardware installation as outlined in this section. Once
the hardware installation is complete, use the information provided in this
table to complete the software set up as outlined in Chapter 14, "Setting Up
Devices Using HP-UX Commands".
Table 7·10. HP 7957S/58S/59S Setup Information
Device Name
HP 7957/58/59S

Path
Name 1

File
Major Device
Minor
Interleave Select
Type Number Driver Number 2
Factor
Code

/dev/dsk/ #sO

scsi

OxOeOnOO

HP 7957/58/59S /dev/rdsk/ #sO

scsi

OxOeOnOO

1 Replace the # with any unique number, using the same number in both the /dev/dsk and
/dev/rdsk. SAM uses a longer naming convention that maps more closely to the hardware
address of your device. See Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX Commands" for
details.
2 n is a number that identifies the address (set in step 4 of this installation procedure).
Replace n with 2 if the address is set to 2, use 3 if the address is set to 3, and so on.

7·52

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

HP 7957/58/595 SCSI Disk Drives

Connecting the HP 7957/58/595 SCSI Disk Drives
The following summary supplements the procedures outlined in your hardware
installation documentation for this device. Read through this summary before
proceding with the installation.
1. Verify that the drivers required for this device are included in your current
kernel configuration file, usually the / etc/ conf / dfile file.
If you are adding a device that utilizes an interface type that is new on your
system, you may have to add one or more necessary device drivers to the
kernel configuration file. To verify that the necessary drivers, listed in the
tables in the previous section, are part of your current kernel configuration
file, you can:

• Use SAM for the whole procedure. SAM will check your dfile for the
necessary device drivers, add any that are missing, and reconfigure the
kernel for you at this time. See the chapter on setting up HP- UX using
SAM that follows this chapter; then go on to step 2.
or
• Look in your dfile for the drivers. If the drivers are in your kernel
configuration file, go on to step 2 now.
If the drivers are not in the /etc/conf/dfile, or are commented out with
a comment symbol (such as the * sign), edit the dfile to either add the
driver or remove the comment marks. You must reconfigure the kernel if
you edit the dfile for any reason. Use the /etc/config program to do
this. See Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX Commands" for
detailed information on this procedure.
2. Play it safe.

b. TURN OFF the computer and unplug the power cord.

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

7-53

HP 7957/58/59S SCSI Disk Drives

3. Determine your interface.
• Built-in SCSI interface
• HP 98658A SCSI interface card
• HP 98265A SCSI interface daughter card
4. Set the SCSI bus address on your device.

Note

a. Choose and available SCSI bus address and make note of it.
b. Set the SCSI bus address according to the instructions in the hardware
installation documentation provided with the device.

Note

Setting the SCSI bus address to 8 or 9 selects the bus addresses

o or 1 respectively.

5. Ensure all power switches on the device and on the computer are in the OFF
position.
6. Connect the disk drive to your computer.
Connect your device to your computer following the instructions in the
hardware installation manual provided with the device.
The HP 7957/58/59S SCSI disk drives have internal bus lengths of 0.3
meters.
The SCSI bus length is limited to a maximum of six meters. This length
includes the cable length between devices and the internal bus length for
each device on the bus. Available SCSI cables and terminators are included
in the "SCSI Device Guidelines" section of Chapter 1.

7·54

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

HP 7957/58/59S SCSI Disk Drives

7. Connect the power cord to your device.
8. Turn on the device.

DO NOT turn on the power to the computer before the disk drive.
9. Plug in and power on the computer.
Hardware installation complete! If you are using SAM, complete the
software set up portion of this procedures by following the instructions in
Chapter 8, "Setting Up HP- UX for Disk and Tape Drives Using SAM". If
you are using the commands method to install this device, refer to Chapter
14, "Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX Commands"

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

7-55

Flexible Disk Drives
HP 91210/5 Flexible Disk Drives
The HP 9121D /S records 270 Kbytes of data on a single-sided (low density)
3.5-inch disk. The HP 9121S has a single disk drive, while the HP 9121D has
two disk drives in the unit. The HP 9121 uses the amigo protocol.

HP 9122D/5/C Flexible Disk Drives
HP 9122D /S records 630 Kbytes of data on double-sided (high density) or 315
Kbytes of data on single-sided (low density) 3.5-inch disks. The 9122S has a
single disk drive, while the HP 9122D has two disk drives in the unit.

The HP 9122C records 2 Mbytes of data unformatted and 1.4 Mbytes
formatted on double-sided (high density) 3.5-inch disks. The HP 9122C unit is
available with one or two disk drives per unit.
The HP 9122 uses the Command Set 80 (CS-80) protocol.

HP 91255 Flexible Disk Drive
The HP 9125S is a single 5.25-inch flexible disk drive and has a capacity of 270
Kbytes.
7

HP 9127A Flexible Disk Drive
The 9127 A is single 5.25-inch flexible disk drive and has a capacity of 270
Kbytes.

7-56

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

HP Flexible Disk Drives

These flexible disk drives connect to your computer via the built-in,
standard-speed HP-IB interface or the standard-speed HP-IB disk interface
card.
Refer to Appendix B, "Series 400 Support Matrix" for Series 400 hardware and
software support information .

Note

• These HP flexible disk drives are not supported as system
disks and can only be used for secondary "mounted volumes"
or LIF utility volumes .
• SAM does not support installation of flexible disk drives.

Caution

If your system is configured as an HP- UX cluster, refer to
Chapter 12, "Adding Peripherals to a Cluster" in Managing
Clusters of HP 9000 Computers before adding this device to
your system.

Disk and tape drives can be added in a cluster environment to
your client or server.

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

7·57

HP Flexible Disk Drives

What You're Going To Do
The following table contains detailed HP- UX software set up information.
SAM does not support flexible disk drive set up. You will need to refer to this
table and Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX Commands" to use
commands to set up these devices. to communicate with HP- UX.
The device file naming conventions, file type specifications, major numbers,
minor number format, and device file creation examples are described in
Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX Commands".
Table 7 -11. HP 9121 and HP 9121 D Setup Information
Device Name

Path
Name 1

File
Major Device
Minor
Interleave Select
Type Number Driver Number 2
Factor
Code

HP 9121 - Left

/ dev / dsk/ #sO

amigo

Ox070nOO

HP 9121 - Left

/dev/rdsk/ #sO

amigo

Ox070nOO

HP 9121D - Right

/dev/dsk/ #sO

amigo

Ox070n10

HP 9121D - Right /dev/rdsk/ #sO

amigo

Ox070n10

HP 9121 - Left

/dev/dsk/ #sO

amigo

Ox080nOO

HP 9121 - Left

/dev/rdsk/ #sO

amigo

Ox080nOO

HP 9121D - Right

/dev/dsk/ #sO

amigo

Ox080n10

HP 9121D - Right /dev/rdsk/ #sO

amigo

Ox080n10

1 Replace the # with any unique number, using the same number in both the /dev/dsk and
/dev/rdsk. SAM uses a longer naming convention that maps more closely to the hardware
address of your device. See Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX Commands" for
details.
2 n is a number that identifies the address (set in step 4 of this installation procedure). Replace
n with 2 if the address is set to 2, use 3 if the address is set to 3, and so on.

7 -58

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

HP Flexible Disk Drives
Table 7-12. HP 9122 and HP 9122D Setup Information
Device Name

Path
Name 1

File
Major Device
Minor
Interleave Select
Type Number Driver Number 2
Factor
Code

HP 9122 - Left

/dev/dsk/ #sO

cs80

Ox070nOO

HP 9122 - Left

/dev/rdsk/ #sO

cs80

Ox070nOO

HP 9122D - Right

/dev/dsk/ #sO

cs80

Ox070n10

HP 9122D - Right /dev/rdsk/ #sO

cs80

Ox070n10

HP 9122 - Left

/ dev / dsk/ #sO

cs80

Ox080nOO

HP 9122 - Left

/dev/rdsk/ #sO

cs80

Ox080nOO

/dev/dsk/ #sO

cs80

Ox080n10

HP 9122D - Right /dev/rdsk/ #sO

cs80

Ox080n10

HP 9122D - Right

1 Replace the # with any unique number, using the same number in both the /dev/dsk and
/dev/rdsk. SAM uses a longer naming convention that maps more closely to the hardware
address of your device. See Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX Commands" for
details.
2 n is a number that identifies the address (set in step 4 of this installation procedure). Replace
n with 2 if the address is set to 2, use 3 if the address is set to 3, and so on.

Table 7-13. HP 9125S Setup Information
Device Name

Path
Name 1

File
Major Device
Minor
Interleave Select
Type Number Driver Number 2
Factor
Code

HP 9125S

/dev/dsk/ #sO

cs80

Ox070nOO

HP 9125S

/dev/rdsk/ #sO

cs80

Ox070nOO

HP 9125S

/ dev / dsk/ #sO

cs80

Ox080nOO

HP 9125S

/dev/rdsk/ #sO

cs80

Ox080nOO

1 Replace the # with any unique number, using the same number in both the /dev/dsk and
/dev/rdsk. SAM uses a longer naming convention that maps more closely to the hardware
address of your device. See Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX Commands" for
details.
2 n is a number that identifies the address (set in step 4 of this installation procedure).
Replace n with 2 if the address is set to 2, use 3 if the address is set to 3, and so on.

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

7-59

HP Flexible Disk Drives
Table 7-14. HP 9127A Setup Information
Device Name

Path
Name 1

Major Device
Interleave Select
File
Minor
Type Number Driver Number 2
Factor
Code

HP 9127A

/dev/dsk/ #sO

cs80

Ox070nOO

HP 9127A

/dev/rdsk/ #sO

cs80

Ox070nOO

HP 9127A

/ dev / dsk/ #sO

cs80

Ox080nOO

HP 9127A

/dev/rdsk/ #sO

cs80

Ox080nOO

# with any unique number, using the same number in both the / dev / dsk and
/dev/rdsk. SAM uses a longer naming convention that maps more closely to the hardware

1 Replace the

address of your device. See Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX Commands" for
details.
2 n is a number that identifies the address (set in step 4 of this installation procedure).
Replace n with 2 if the address is set to 2, use 3 if the address is set to 3, and so on.

'Connecting the Flexible Disk Drives
The following summary supplements the procedures outlined in your hardware
installation documentation for this device. Read through this summary before
proceding with the installation.

• Use SAM for the whole procedure. SAM will check your dfile for the
necessary device drivers, add any that are missing, and reconfigure the
kernel for you at this time. See the chapter on setting up HP- UX using
SAM that follows this chapter; then go on to step 2.
or
• Look in your dfile for the drivers. If the drivers are in your kernel
configuration file, go on to step 2 now.
If the drivers are not in the /etc/conf/dfile, or are commented out with
a comment symbol (such as the * sign), edit the dfile to either add the
driver or remove the comment marks. You must reconfigure the kernel if
you edit the dfile for any reason. Use the /etc/config program to do
7 -60

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

HP Flexible Disk Drives

this. See Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices Using HP- UX Commands" for
detailed information on this procedure.

2. Play it safe.
a. Shut down and halt the system using the /etc/shutdown -h command.

If you are operating in a diskless cluster, see Managing Clusters of HP
9000 Computers for additional information on shutting down the system.
b. TURN OFF the computer and unplug the power cord.

3. Determine your interface .
• HP 98624A standard-speed HP-IB interface card
• Built-in standard-speed HP-IB interface

4. Set the HP-IB bus address.

Note

Familiarize yourself with the HP-IB addresses that are
currently in use on your system. Determine the available
HP-IB addresses. Use the worksheet at the end of this book to
note already-used addresses.
You are limited to eight devices per HP-IB card, addresses 0
through 7.

a. Choose an available HP-IB bus address and make note of it.
b. Set the HP-IB bus address according to the instructions in the hardware
installation documentation provided with the device.

5. Ensure that all power switches on the device and on the computer are in the
OFF position.

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

7-61

HP Flexible Disk Drives

6. Connect the disk drive to your computer.
Connect your device to your computer following the instructions in the
hardware installation manual for the device.

7. Connect the power cord to your device.
8. Plug in and power on the computer.
Hardware installation complete! Refer to Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices
Using HP-UX Commands" to complete the sofware set up using commands.

7 -62

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

HP 9133D/H/L and 9134D/H/L Disk Drives
The HP 9133D /H/L contain an HP 9122A 3.5-inch double-sided flexible
disk drive, and a 9134D, 9134H, and 9134L Winchester (hard) disk drive
respectively. The HP 9134D /H/L contain only the Winchester (hard) disk
drive.
These disk drives connect to your computer via the built-in, high-speed HP-IB,
disk interface card, or the standard-speed HP-IB disk interface card.
Refer to Appendix B, "Series 400 Support Matrix" for Series 400 hardware and
software support information.

Caution

If your system is configured as an HP- UX cluster, refer to
Chapter 12, "Adding Peripherals to a Cluster" in Managing
Clusters of HP 9000 Computers before adding this device to
your system.

Disk and tape drives can be added in a cluster environment to
your client or server.

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

7-63

HP 9133D/H/L and 9134D/H/L Disk Drives

What You're Going To Do
Note

SAM does not support 9133D /H/L and 9134D /H/L disk drive
set up.

The following tables contain detailed HP- UX software set up information. You
cannot use SAM to set up HP- UX to communicate with any of these devices.
Complete the hardware installation as outlined in the following section, then
use the information provided in these tables to complete the software set up as
outlined in Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices Using HP- UX Commands".

7·64

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

HP 9133D/H/L and 9134D/H/L Disk Drives
Table 7-15. HP 9133/34 (select code 14) Setup Information
Device Name l

Path
Name 2

Major Device
File
Minor
Interleave Select
Type Number Driver Number3
Factor
Code

HP 9133/34 - Hard, 1st vol.

/dev/dsk/ #sO

cs80

OxOeOnOO

HP 9133/34 - Hard, 1st vol.

/dev/rdsk/ #sO

cs80

OxOeOnOO

HP 9133/34 - Hard, 2nd vol.

/dev/dsk/ #sO

cs80

OxOeOn01

HP 9133/34 - Hard, 2nd vol. /dev/rdsk/ #sO

cs80

OxOeOn01

HP 9133/34 - Hard, 3rd vol.

/ dey / dsk/ #sO

cs80

OxOeOn02

HP 9133/34 - Hard, 3rd vol.

/dev/rdsk/ #sO

cs80

OxOeOn02

HP 9133/34 - Hard, 4th vol.

/dev/dsk/ #sO

cs80

OxOeOn03

HP 9133/34 - Hard, 4th vol.

/dev/rdsk/ #sO

cs80

OxOeOn03

HP 9133/34 - Hard, 5th vol.

/ dey / dsk/ #sO

cs80

OxOeOn04

HP 9133/34 - Hard, 5th vol.

/dev/rdsk/ #sO

cs80

OxOeOn04

HP 9133/34 - Hard, 6th vol.

/dev/dsk/ #sO

cs80

OxOeOn05

HP 9133/34 - Hard, 6th vol.

/dev/rdsk/ #sO

cs80

OxOeOn05

HP 9133/34 - Hard, 7th vol.

/ dey / dsk/ #sO

cs80

OxOeOn06

HP 9133/34 - Hard, 7th vol.

/dev/rdsk/ #sO

cs80

OxOeOn06

HP 9133/34 - Hard, 8th vol.

/ dey / dsk/ #sO

cs80

OxOeOn07

HP 9133/34 - Hard, 8th vol.

/dev/rdsk/ #sO

cs80

OxOeOn07

HP 9133 - Flexible

/dev/dsk/ #sO

cs80

OxOeOn10

HP 9133 - Flexible

/dev/rdsk/ #sO

cs80

OxOeOn10

1 Refer only to the entries for the nuJber of volumes you selected. If you have one volume (default
configuration), only the "1st vol" entry applies to your disk.
2 Replace the # with any unique number, using the same number in both the /dev/dsk and /dev/rdsk. A
longer naming convention that maps more closely to the hardware address of your device is described in
Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX Commands".

3 n is a number that identifies the address (set in step 4 of this installation procedure). Replace n with 2 if
the address is set to 2, use 3 if the address is set to 3, and so on.

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

7-65

HP 9133D/H/L and 9134D/H/L Disk Drives
Table 7-16. HP 9133/34 (select code 7) Setup Information
Device Name 1

Path
Name 2

Interleave Select
File
Major Device
Minor
Type Number Driver Number 3
Factor
Code

HP 9133/34 - Hard, 1st vol.

/dev/rdsk/ #sO

cs80

Ox070nOO

HP 9133/34 - Hard, 2nd vol.

/dev/dsk/ #sO

cs80

Ox070n01

HP 9133/34 - Hard, 2nd vol. /dev/rdsk/ #sO

cs80

Ox070n01

HP 9133/34 - Hard, 3rd vol.

/ dev / dsk/ #so

cs80

Ox070n02

HP 9133/34 - Hard, 3rd vol.

/dev/rdsk/ #so

cs80

Ox070n02

HP 9133/34 - Hard, 4th vol.

/dev/dsk/ #so

cs80

Ox070n03

HP 9133/34 - Hard, 4th vol.

/dev/rdsk/ #sO

cs80

Ox070n03

HP 9133/34 - Hard, 5th vol.

/dev/dsk/ #sO

cs80

Ox070n04

HP 9133/34 - Hard, 5th vol.

/dev/rdsk/ #sO

cs80

Ox070n04

HP 9133/34 - Hard, 6th vol.

/dev/dsk/ #so

cs80

Ox070n05

HP 9133/34 - Hard, 6th vol.

/dev/rdsk/ #sO

cs80

Ox070n05

HP 9133/34 - Hard, 7th vol.

/ dev / dsk/ #sO

cs80

Ox070n06

HP 9133/34 - Hard, 7th vol.

/dev/rdsk/ #sO

cs80

Ox070n06

HP 9133/34 - Hard, 8th vol.

/ dev / dsk/ #so

cs80

Ox070n07

/dev/rdsk/ #sO

cs80

Ox070n07

HP 9133 - Flexible

/dev/dsk/ #sO

cs80

Ox070n10

HP 9133 - Flexible

/dev/rdsk/ #sO

cs80

Ox070n10

HP 9133/34 - Hard, 8th vol.

1 Refer only to the entries for the number of volumes you selected. If you have one volume (default
configuration), only the "1st vol" entry applies to your disk.

2 Replace the # with any unique number, using the same number in both the /dev/dsk and /dev/rdsk. A
longer naming convention that maps more closely to the hardware address of your device is described in
Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX Commands".
3 n is a number that identifies the address (set in step 4 of this installation procedure). Replace n with 2 if
the address is set to 2, use 3 if the address is set to 3, and so on.

7 -66

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

HP 9133D/H/L and 9134DjH/L Disk Drives
Table 7-17. HP 9133/34 (select code 8) Setup Information
Device Name l

Path
Name 2

HP 9133/34 - Hard, 1st vol.

/dev/dsk/ #sO

HP 9133/34 - Hard, 1st vol.

/dev/rdsk/ #sO

HP 9133/34 - Hard, 2nd vol.

/dev/dsk/ #sO

Major Device
Interleave Select
File
Minor
Type Number Driver Number3
Factor
Code
b

Ox080nOO

Ox080n01

es80

Ox080nOO

es80

HP 9133/34 - Hard, 2nd vol. /dev/rdsk/ #sO

es80

Ox080n01

HP 9133/34 - Hard, 3rd vol.

/dev/dsk/ #sO

es80

Ox080n02

HP 9133/34 - Hard, 3rd vol.

/dev/rdsk/ #sO

es80

Ox080n02

HP 9133/34 - Hard, 4th vol.

/dev/dsk/ #sO

es80

Ox080n03

HP 9133/34 - Hard, 4th vol.

/dev/rdsk/ #sO

es80

Ox080n03

HP 9133/34 - Hard, 5th vol.

/ dey / dsk/ #sO

es80

Ox080n04

HP 9133/34 - Hard, 5th vol.

/dev/rdsk/ #sO

es80

Ox080n04

HP 9133/34 - Hard, 6th vol.

/dev/dsk/ #sO

es80

Ox080n05

HP 9133/34 - Hard, 6th vol.

/dev/rdsk/ #sO

es80

Ox080n05

HP 9133/34 - Hard, 7th vol.

/dev/dsk/ #sO

es80

Ox080n06

HP 9133/34 - Hard, 7th vol.

/dev/rdsk/ #sO

es80

Ox080n06

HP 9133/34 - Hard, 8th vol.

/dev/dsk/ #sO

es80

Ox080n07

HP 9133/34 - Hard, 8th vol.

/dev/rdsk/ #sO

es80

Ox080n07

HP 9133 - Flexible

/dev/dsk/ #sO

es80

Ox080n10

HP 9133 - Flexible

/dev/rdsk/ #sO

es80

Ox080010

1 Refer only to the entries for the number of volumes you selected. If you have one volume (default
configuration), only the "1st vol" entry applies to your disk.
2 Replace the # with any unique number, using the same number in both the /dev/dsk and /dev/rdsk. A
longer naming convention that maps more closely to the hardware address of your device is described in
Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX Commands".

3 n is a number that identifies the address (set in step 4 of this installation procedure). Replace n with 2 if
the address is set to 2, use 3 if the address is set to 3, and so on.

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

7-67

HP 9133DjHjL and 9134DjHjL Disk Drives

Connecting the HP 9133D/H/L and 9134D/H/L Disk Drives
The following summary supplements the procedures outlined in your hardware
installation documentation for this device. Read through this summary before
proceding with the installation.

1. Verify that the drivers required for this device are included in your current
kernel configuration file, usually the /ete/eonf/dfile file.

If the drivers are not in the /ete/eonf/dfile, or are commented out with
a comment symbol (such as the * sign), edit the dfile to either add the
driver or remove the comment marks. You must reconfigure the kernel if you
edit the dfile for any reason. Use the /ete/eonfig program to do this.
See Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX Commands" for detailed
information on this procedure.
2. Play it safe.
a. Shut down and halt the system using the jete/shutdown -h command.
7

If you are operating in a diskless cluster, see Managing Clusters of HP
9000 Computers for additional information on shutting down the system.
b. TURN OFF the computer and unplug the power cord.

7 -68

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

HP 9133D/H/L and 9134D/H/L Disk Drives

Note

With a 98625A high-speed HP-IB disk interface card, be sure
that no SCSI bus interface is installed.

4. Set the HP-IB bus address.

Note

Familiarize yourself with the HP-IB addresses that are
currently in use on your system. Determine the available
HP-IB addresses. Use the worksheet at the end of this book to
note already-used addresses.
You are limited to eight devices per HP-IB card, addresses 0
through 7.

a. Choose an available HP-IB bus address and make note of it.

b. Set the HP-IB bus address according to the instructions in the hardware
installation documentation provided with the device.

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

7-69

HP 9133D/H/L and 9134D/H/L Disk Driv,es

5. Set the configuration switch.
The configuration switch partitions the disk into multiple volumes, making
the disk act like several smaller disk drives. The switch is preset for a single
volume. If you want multiple volumes on your disk, follow the procedures
outlined in the installation documentation that came with your disk drive.
If you are satisfied with one volume (as is usually the case with HP- UX),
carryon with this procedure.

Caution

Files can be lost if you change the configuration switch after
initializing the disk. Only change the configuration switch
immediately before you initialize, or re-initialize, the disk.

6. Ensure all power switches on the device and on the computer are in the OFF
position.
7. Connect the disk drive to your computer.
Connect the device to your computer following the instructions in the
hardware installation manual provided with the device.
8. Connect the power cord to your device.
9. Plug in and power on the computer.
Hardware installation complete! Refer to Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices
Using HP-UX Commands" to complete the sofware set up using commands.
7

7·70

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

HP 9153A/B and 9154A/B Disk Drives
The HP 9153A contains an HP 9154A 10-Mbyte Winchester (hard) disk drive
and an HP 9122S 3.5-inch double-sided flexible disk drive. The HP 9153B
contains an HP 9154B 20-Mbyte Winchester (hard) disk drive and an HP
9122S 3.5-inch double-sided flexible disk drive. The HP 9154A and HP 9154B
contain the Winchester (hard) disk drive only.
These disk drives connect to your computer via the built-in, high-speed HP-IB
disk interface card, or the standard-speed HP-IB disk interface card.
Refer to Appendix B, "Series 400 Support Matrix" for Series 400 hardware and
software support information.
Additional information about the HP 9153 and 9154A/B can be found in the
installation and user documentation that came with device.

Note

The HP 9153A/B and 9154A/B disk drives are not supported
as system disks and can only be used for secondary "mounted
volumes" or LIF utility volumes.

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

7-71

HP 9153A/B and 9154A/B Disk Drives

Before Installing This Device
Before you install this device:
• Have the hardware installation documentation that came with the device
handy. You will need to refer to it during this procedure.

• If you have not added this type of device to your system before, read the
material in Chapter 1, "Introduction". It provides interface and cabling
guidelines to follow when adding devices to your system.
• Plan ahead. Installing new peripherals on your system requires that you shut
down and power off the system. On a multiuser or clustered system you will
want to warn users and cluster clients in advance that the system (server)
will be coming down. Use the wall or cwall command to do this.

Caution

7·72

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

HP 9153AjB and 9154AjB Disk Drives

What You're Going To Do
Note

SAM does not support 9153A/B disk drive set up.

The following tables contain detailed HP- UX software set up information. You
cannot use use SAM to set up HP- UX to communicate with these devices.
Complete the hardware installation as outlined in the following section, then
use the information provided in these tables to complete the software set up as
outlined in Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX Commands".

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

7·73

HP 9153AjB and 9154AjB Disk Drives
Table 7-18.
HP 9153 and 9154AjBj (select code 14) Setup Information
Device Name
HP 9153/54 - Hard, 1st vol.

File
Major Device
Minor
Interleave Select
Type Number Driver Number 2
Factor
Code

/dev/dsk/ #sO

cs80

OxOeOnOO

HP 9153/54 - Hard, 1st vol.

/dev/rdsk/ #sO

cs80

OxOeOnOO

HP 9153/54 - Hard, 2nd vol.

/dev/dsk/ #sO

cs80

OxOeOnOl

HP 9153/54 - Hard, 2nd vol. /dev/rdsk/ #sO

cs80

OxOeOnOl

HP 9153/54 - Hard, 3rd vol.

/ dey / dsk/ #sO

cs80

OxOeOn02

/dev/rdsk/ #sO

cs80

OxOeOn02

HP 9153/54 - Hard, 4th vol.

/dev/dsk/ #sO

cs80

OxOeOn03

HP 9153/54 - Hard, 4th vol.

/dev/rdsk/ #sO

cs80

OxOeOn03

HP 9153/54 - Hard, 5th vol.

/dev/dsk/ #sO

cs80

OxOeOn04

HP 9153/54 - Hard, 5th vol.

/dev/rdsk/ #sO

cs80

OxOeOn04

HP 9153/54 - Hard, 6th vol.

/dev/dsk/ #sO

cs80

OxOeOn05

HP 9153/54 - Hard, 6th vol.

/dev/rdsk/ #sO

cs80

OxOeOn05

HP 9153/54 - Hard, 7th vol.

/dev/dsk/ #sO

cs80

OxOeOn06

HP 9153/54 - Hard, 7th vol.

/dev/rdsk/ #sO

cs80

OxOeOn06

HP 9153/54 - Hard, 8th vol.

HP 9153/54 - Hard, 3rd vol.

Path
Name 1

/dev/dsk/ #sO

cs80

OxOeOn07

HP 9153/54 - Hard, 8th vol. /dev/rdsk/ #sO

cs80

OxOeOn07

HP 9153 - Flexible

/dev/dsk/ #sO

cs80

OxOeOnl0

HP 9153 - Flexible

/dev/rdsk/ #sO

cs80

OxOeOnl0

1 Replace the # with any unique number, using the same number in both the /dev/dsk and /dev/rdsk. A
longer naming convention that maps more closely to the hardware address of your device is described in
Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX Commands".
2 n is a number that identifies the address (set in step 4 of this installation procedure). Replace n with 2 if
the address is set to 2, use 3 if the address is set to 3, and so on.

7·74

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

HP 9153A/B and 9154A/B Disk Drives
Table 7·19. HP 9153A/54A (select code 7) Setup Information
Device Name

Path
Name 1

File
Major Device
Minor
Interleave Select
Type Number Driver Number 2
Factor
Code
b

cs80

Ox070nOO

/dev/rdsk/ #sO

cs80

Ox070nOO

/dev/dsk/ #sO

cs80

Ox070n01

HP 9153/54 - Hard, 1st vol.

/ dey / dsk/ #sO

HP 9153/54 - Hard, 1st vol.
HP 9153/54 - Hard, 2nd vol.

HP 9153/54 - Hard, 2nd vol. /dev/rdsk/ #sO

cs80

Ox070n01

HP 9153/54 - Hard, 3rd vol.

/dev/dsk/ #sO

cs80

Ox070n02

HP 9153/54 - Hard, 3rd vol.

/dev/rdsk/ #sO

cs80

Ox070n02

HP 9153/54 - Hard, 4th vol.

/ dey / dsk/ #sO

cs80

Ox070n03

HP 9153/54 - Hard, 4th vol.

/dev/rdsk/ #sO

cs80

Ox070n03

HP 9153/54 - Hard, 5th vol.

/dev/dsk/ #sO

cs80

Ox070n04

HP 9153/54 - Hard, 5th vol.

/dev/rdsk/ #sO

cs80

Ox070n04

HP 9153/54 - Hard, 6th vol.

/dev/dsk/ #sO

cs80

Ox070n05

HP 9153/54 - Hard, 6th vol.

/dev/rdsk/ #sO

cs80

Ox070n05

HP 9153/54 - Hard, 7th vol.

/dev/dsk/ #sO

cs80

Ox070n06

HP 9153/54 - Hard, 7th vol.

/dev/rdsk/ #sO

cs80

Ox070n06

HP 9153/54 - Hard, 8th vol.

/dev/dsk/ #sO

cs80

Ox070n07

HP 9153/54 - Hard, 8th vol.

/dev/rdsk/ #sO

cs80

Ox070n07

HP 9153 - Flexible

/dev/dsk/ #sO

cs80

Ox070n10

HP 9153 - Flexible

/dev/rdsk/ #sO

cs80

Ox070n10

1 Replace the # with any unique nUIllber, using the same nUIllber in both the /dev/dsk and /dev/rdsk. A
longer naming convention that maps more closely to the hardware address of your device is described in
Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX Commands".
2 n is a nUIllber that identifies the address (set in step 4 of this installation procedure). Replace n with 2 if
the address is set to 2, use 3 if the address is set to 3, and so on.

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

7·75

HP 9153AjB and 9154AjB Disk Drives

Connecting the HP 9153 and 9154A/B Disk Drives
The following summary supplements the procedures outlined in your hardware
installation documentation for this device. Read through this summary before
proceding with the installation.
1. Verify that the drivers required for this device are included in your current
kernel configuration file, usually the /ete/eonf/dfile file.

If the drivers are not in the /ete/eonf/dfile, or are commented out with
a comment symbol (such as the * sign), edit the dfile to either add the
driver or remove the comment marks. You must reconfigure the kernel if you
edit the dfile for any reason. Use the /ete/eonfig program to do this.
See Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices Using HP- UX Commands" for detailed
information on this procedure.
2. Play it safe.
a. Shut down and halt the system using the tete/shutdown -h command.
7

If you are operating in a diskless cluster, see Managing Clusters of HP
9000 Computers for additional information on shutting down the system.
b. TURN OFF the computer and unplug the power cord.

7-76

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

HP 9153A/B and 9154A/B Disk Drives

3. Determine your interface.
The following high-speed HP-IB interfaces can be used. They are listed in
order of preference for optimum disk performance:

• HP 98262A high-speed HP-IB daughter board
or
HP 98625B high-speed HP-IB disk interface card
• HP 98625A high-speed HP-IB disk interface card
• Built-in "optional" secondary high-speed HP-IB interface.

Note

With a 98625A high-speed HP-IB disk interface card, be sure
that no SCSI bus interface is installed.

4. Set the HP-IB bus address.

Note

Familiarize yourself with the HP-IB addresses that are
currently in use on your system. Determine the available
HP-IB addresses. Use the worksheet at the end of this book to
note already-used addresses.
You are limited to eight devices per HP-IB card, addresses 0
through 7.

a. Choose an available HP-IB bus address and make note of it.

b. Set the HP-IB bus address according to the instructions in the hardware
installation documentation provided with the device.

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

7-77

HP 9153AJB and 9154A/B Disk Drives

5. Set the configuration switch.
The configuration switch partitions the disk into multiple volumes, making
the disk act like several smaller disk drives. The switch is preset for a single
volume. If you want multiple volumes on your disk, follow the steps outlined
in the the hardware installation documentation that came with this device.
If you are satisfied with one volume (as is usually the case with HP- UX),
continue with this procedure.

Caution

Files can be lost if you change the configuration switch after
initializing the disk. Only change the configuration switch
immediately before you initialize, or re-initialize, the disk.

8. Connect the power cord to the device.
9. Plug in and power on the computer.
Hardware installation complete! Refer to Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices
Using HP-UX Commands" to complete the sofware set up using commands.
7

7 -78

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

HP C220A/03A HP-IB Disk Drives
The HP C220Aj03A 5.25-inch disk drives are HP-IB interface devices. The
HP C2200A (Model 335H) has a capacity of 335 Mbytes and the HP C2203A
(Model 670H) has a capacity of 670 Mbytes.
These disk drives connect to your computer via the built-in, high-speed HP-IB
interface, high-speed HP-IB disk interface card, or the standard-speed HP-IB
disk interface card.
Refer to Appendix B, "Series 400 Support Matrix" for Series 400 hardware and
software support information.

Caution

If your system is configured as an HP -UX cluster, refer to
Chapter 12, "Adding Peripherals to a Cluster" in Managing
Clusters of HP 9000 Computers before adding this device to
your system.

Disk and tape drives can be added in a cluster environment to
your client or server.

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

7·79

HP C2200/03 Disk Drives

What You're Going To Do
Note

You can install the HP C220Aj03A disks yourself if you deleted
the installation option when you purchased the units. If you
deleted the installation support, refer to the HP Series 6000
Disk Storage Systems Installation Guide Models 335H, 670H,
and 670XP shipped with your units for installation details.
The HP C220Aj03A disks can be installed by an HP Customer
Engineer. The installation cost is included in the purchase price
of the unit if you did not select the "delete installation" option.
Your HP Customer Engineer will unpack and install your disk
for you. For these details, please refer to the unpacking and
installation procedures that came with the disk drive.

The following table contains detailed HP- UX software set up information.
If you use SAM to install this disk drive, you will not need all this detailed
information. Complete the hardware installation as outlined in the following
section, then refer to Chapter 8, "Setting Up HP- UX for Disk and Tape Drives
U sing SAM" for set up instructions.

7 -80

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

HP C2200/03 Disk Drives
Table 7-20. HP 2200/03 Setup Information
Device Name

Path
Name 1

File
Major Device
Minor
Interleave Select
Type Number Driver Number 2
Factor
Code

/dev/dsk/ #sO

cs80

OxOeOnOO

HP 2200/03

/dev/rdsk/ #sO

cs80

OxOeOnOO

HP 2200/03

/dev/dsk/ #sO

cs80

OxOeOn10

HP 2200/03

/dev/rdsk/ #sO

cs80

OxOeOn10

HP 2200/03

/dev/dsk/ #sO

cs80

Ox070nOO

HP 2200/03

/dev/rdsk/ #sO

cs80

Ox070nOO

HP 2200/03

/dev/dsk/ #sO

cs80

Ox070n10

HP 2200/03

/dev/rdsk/ #sO

cs80

Ox070n10

HP 2200/03

1 Replace the # with any unique number, using the same number in both the / dev / dsk and
/dev/rdsk. SAM uses a longer naming convention that maps more closely to the hardware
address of your device. See Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX Commands" for
details.
2 n is a number that identifies the address (set in step 4 of this installation procedure).
Replace n with 2 if the address is set to 2, use 3 if the address is set to 3, and so on.

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

7-81

HP C2200j03 Disk Drives

Connecting the C220Aj03A Disk Drives
The following summary supplements the procedures outlined in your hardware
installation documentation for this device. Read through this summary before
pro ceding with the installation.

1. Verify that the drivers required for this device are included in your current
kernel configuration file, usually the / ete/ eonf / dfile file.
If you are adding a device that utilizes an interface type that is new on
your system, you may have to add one or more necessary device drivers to
the kernel configuration file. To verify that the necessary drivers, listed
in the tables in the previous section, are part of your current kernel
configuration file, you can:
• Use SAM for the whole procedure. SAM will check your dfile for the
necessary device drivers, add any that are missing, and reconfigure the
kernel for you at this time. See the chapter on setting up HP- UX using
SAM that follows this chapter; then go on to step 2.
or
• Look in your dfile for the drivers. If the drivers are in your kernel
configuration file, go on to step 2 now.

If the drivers are not in the /ete/conf/dfile, or are commented out
with a comment symbol (such as the * sign), edit the dfile to either
add the driver or remove the comment marks. You must reconfigure
the kernel if you edit the dfile for any reason. Use the /ete/eonfig
program to do this. See Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices Using HP- UX
Commands" for detailed information on this procedure.

2. Play it safe.
a. Shut down and halt the system using the /ete/shutdown -h command.

If you are operating in a diskless cluster, see Managing Clusters of
HP 9000 Computers for additional information on shutting down the
system.
b. TURN OFF the computer and unplug the power cord.

7 -82

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

HP C2200j03 Disk Drives

3. Determine your interface.
The following HP-IB interfaces can be used. They are listed in order of
preference for optimum disk performance:
• HP 98262A high-speed HP-IB daughter board
or
HP 98625B high-speed HP-IB disk interface card
• HP 98625A high-speed HP-IB disk interface card
• Built-in "optional" secondary high-speed HP-IB interface.
• HP 98624A standard-speed HP-IB interface card
• Built-in standard-speed HP-IB interface

Note

With a 98625A high-speed HP-IB disk interface card, be sure
that no SCSI bus interface is installed.

4. Set the HP-IB bus address.

Note

Familiarize yourself with the HP-IB addresses that are
currently in use on your system. Determine the available
HP-IB addresses. Use the worksheet at the end of this book to
note already-used addresses.
You are limited to eight devices per HP-IB card, addresses 0
through 7.

a. Choose an available HP-IB bus address and make note of it.
b. Set the HP-IB bus address according to the instructions in the hardware
installation documentation provided with the device.

Caution

Positions 8 and 9 on the ADDRESS wheel are for use by
service personnel only. If the drive is powered on with 8 or 9
selected, loss of data can occur.

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

7-83

HP C2200j03 Disk Drives

5. Ensure all power switches on the device and on the computer are in the
OFF position.
6. Connect the disk drive to your computer.
Connect the device to your computer following the instructions provided in
the hardware installation manual for the device.

7. Select the Line Voltage.
Refer to the HP Series 6000 Disk Storage Systems Installation Guide
Models 335H, 670H, and 670XP that was shipped with your disk drive to
set the proper setting for the voltage select switch.

8. Connect the power cord to the device.
9. Turn on the device.
10. Plug in and power on the computer.
Hardware installation complete! If you are using SAM, complete the software
set up portion of this procedures by following the instructions in Chapter 8,
"Setting Up HP-UX for Disk and Tape Drives Using SAM". If you are using
the commands method to install this device, refer to Chapter 14, "Setting Up
Devices Using HP -UX Commands".

7-84

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

Mass Storage Systems
The following Series 6000 Mass Storage Systems are covered in this section:
HP C2213A

HP C2214B

HP C2216T

HP C2217T

The Series 6000 Mass Storage Systems are available with various combinations
of SCSI devices as factory installed options or field upgrade kits. Refer to the
HP Series 6000 Mass Storage System Configuration Quick Reference Card that
came with your device for complete information on the options and upgrade
kits available for your device.
Refer to Appendix B, "Series 400 Support Matrix" for Series 400 hardware and
software support information.

C2213A and C2216T Mass Storage Systems
The HP C2213A and C2216T Mass Storage System contain a power supply,
5.25-inch hard disk drive, two open slots within the cabinet to install additional
SCSI (Small Computer System Interface) devices and a 664-Mbyte disk. (The
HP C2213A is also referred to as a Series 6000 Model 660S. Text in this section
will refer to this product as the HP C2213A. The HP C2216T is also referred
to as a Series 6000 Model 670SE. Text in this section will refer to this product
as the HP C2216T.)
This Mass Storage System is shipped in a cabinet with two additional 5.25-inch
slots available for additional SCSI devices.

HP C2214B and C2217T Mass Storage Systems
The HP C2214B Mass Storage System contains a power supply, 5.25-inch hard
disk drive, three full-height slots within the cabinet to install additional SCSI
(Small Computer System Interface) devices, and a 1300-Mbyte disk drive. (The
HP C2214B is also referred to as a Series 6000 Models 1350SE. Text in this
section will refer to this product as the HP C2214B.)
The HP C2217T Mass Storage System is the same as the C2214B, except in a
floor-standing tower model.

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

7 -85

Before Installing This Device
Before you install this device:
• Have the hardware installation documentation that came with the device
handy. You will need to refer to it during this procedure.

• If you have not added this type of device to your system before, read the
material in Chapter 1, "Introduction". It provides interface and cabling
guidelines to follow when adding devices to your system.
• Plan ahead. Installing new peripherals on your system requires that you shut
down and power off the system. On a multiuser or clustered system you will
want to warn users and cluster clients in advance that the system (server)
will be coming down. Use the wall or cwall command to do this.

Caution

7·86

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

Mass Storage Systems

What You're Going To Do
The following tables contain detailed HP- UX software set up information.
If you use SAM to install this device, you will not need all this detailed
information. Complete the hardware installation as outlined in the following
section, then refer to Chapter 8, "Setting Up HP-UX for Disk and Tape Drives
Using SAM" for set up instructions.
If you are using commands to set up HP- UX to communicate with your device,
complete the hardware installation as outlined in the following section. Once
the hardware installation is complete, use the information provided in these
tables to complete the software set up as outlined in Chapter 14, "Setting Up
Devices Using HP-UX Commands".
Table 7-21. HP Mass Storage Systems Setup Information
Device Name

Path
Name 1

Minor
File
Major Device Interleave Select
Factor
Type Number Driver
Code Number 2

disk drive

/dev/dsk/ #sO

scsi

OxOeOnOO

disk drive

/dev/rdsk/ #sO

scsi

OxOeOnOO

2 n is a number that identifies the bus address. Replace n with 2 if the bus address is set to
2, use 3 if the address is set to 3, and so on.

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

7-87

Mass Storage Systems
Table 7-22.
Examples of SCSI Devices Used with Mass Storage Systems
Path
Name 1

Device Name
optical disk

Major
File
Type Number

Device
Driver

Interleave Select
Minor
Factor
Code Number 2

/dev/dsk/ #sO

scsi

OxOeOnOO

optical disk

/dev/rdsk/ #sO

scsi

OxOeOnOO

DDS-format drive, no rewind

/dev/rmt/ #mn

scsi tape

OxOeOn03

CD-ROM

/ dev / dsk/ #sO

scsi

OxOeOnOO

CD-ROM

/dev/rdsk/ #sO

scsi

OxOeOnOO

1 Replace the # with any unique number, using the same number in both the /dev/dsk and /dev/rdsk.
SAM uses a longer naming convention that maps more closely to the hardware address of your device. See
Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX Commands" for details.
2 n is a number that identifies the bus address. Replace n with 2 if the bus address is set to 2, use 3 if the
address is set to 3, and so on.

7 -88

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

Mass Storage Systems

Connecting the Mass Storage Systems
The following summary supplements the procedures outlined in your hardware
installation documentation for this device. Read through this summary before
pro ceding with the installation.
1. Verify that the drivers required for this device are included in your current
kernel configuration file, usually the /ete/eonf/dfile file.

• Use SAM for the whole procedure. SAM will check your dfile for the
necessary device drivers, add any that are missing, and reconfigure the
kernel for you at this time. See the chapter on setting up HP- UX using
SAM that follows this chapter; then go on to step 2.
or
• Look in your dfile for the drivers. If the drivers are in your kernel
configuration file, go on to step 2 now.
If the drivers are not in the /ete/eonf/dfile, or are commented out with
a comment symbol (such as the * sign), edit the dfile to either add the
driver or remove the comment marks. You must reconfigure the kernel if
you edit the dfile for any reason. Use the /ete/eonfig program to do
this. See Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX Commands" for
detailed information on this procedure.
2. Play it safe.

a. Shut down and halt the system using the /ete/shutdown -h command.
If you are operating in a diskless cluster, see Managing Clusters of HP
9000 Computers for additional information on shutting down the system.

b. TURN OFF the computer and unplug the power cord.

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

7·89

Mass Storage Systems

3. Determine your interface.

• Built-in SCSI interface
• HP 98658A SCSI interface card
• HP 98265A SCSI interface daughter card
4. Set the SCSI bus addresses on your devices.

Familiarize yourself with the SCSI addresses that are currently in use on
your system. Determine the SCSI addresses that are available. Use the
worksheet at the end of this book to note already-used addresses.
You are limited to seven devices per SCSI interface, bus addresses 0 through
6. Address 7 is reserved for the system's SCSI controller.
a. Set the hard disk SCSI bus addresses .
• Choose an available SCSI bus address and make note of it .
• Set the SCSI bus address according to the instructions in the hardware
installation documentation provided with the device.

Note

For optimum disk performance, your system disk should be set
to SCSI address 6. The SCSI interface gives highest priority to
the highest address (6) and priority decreases as you work back
towards zero (0).

b. Set the SCSI bus addresses of any additional SCSI devices that are part
of your Mass Storage system. For example, the CD-ROM, DDS-format
tape drive, and/or the optical disk drive. Setting the SCSI address of
other devices supported in the Mass Storage System is described in the
installation manual specific to your model of Mass Storage System.

7·90

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

Mass Storage Systems

5. Ensure all power switches on the device and on the computer are in the OFF
position.
6. Connect the Mass Storage System to your computer.
Connect the mass storage device to your computer following the instructions
outlined in the hardware installation manual provided with the device.
The SCSI bus length is limited to a maximum of six meters. This length
includes the cable length between devices and the internal bus length for
each device on the bus. Available SCSI cables and terminators are included
in the "SCSI Device Guidelines" section of Chapter l.
Check your hardware installation documentation for internal SCSI cable
lengths on each device.

7. Connect the power cord to the device.
8. Turn on the power to the Mass Storage System.
Do NOT turn on the power to the computer before you power on the Mass
Storage System.

Note

Apparent disk drive self test failure will occur when only
computer power is off. When computer power is added, the
self test failure should clear. If you are concerned about the
apparent self test failure, disconnect both SCSI connectors from
the Mass Storage System and observe the self test completion.
7

9. Plug in and power on the computer.
Hardware installation complete! If you are using SAM, complete the software
set up portion of this procedures by following the instructions in Chapter 8,
"Setting Up HP- UX for Disk and Tape Drives Using SAM". If you are using
the commands method to install this device, refer to Chapter 14, "Setting Up
Devices Using HP-UX Commands"

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

7-91

HP 9144A/45A Tape Drive
The HP 9144A/45A Tape Drives use 1/4-inch tape cartridges. Two formatted
storage capacities are available using the 88140SC (a package of 5, 150 ft.
cartridge tapes, each 16.7 megabyte) or the 88140LC (a package of 5, 600 ft.
cartridge tapes, each 67.0 megabyte) cartridges. The HP 9144A tape drive can
read and write to 16 track tape only. The HP 9145A tape drive reads 16 track
tape and can read and write to 32 track tape. The tape drives are compatible
with existing 1/4-inch cartridges built into other HP mass storage devices.
The HP 9144A/45A tape drives connect to your computer via the built-in,
standard-speed HP-IB or the standard-speed HP-IB disk interface cards.
Refer to Appendix B, "Series 400 Support Matrix" for Series 400 hardware and
software support information.

• Plan ahead. Installing new peripherals on your system requires that you shut

down and power off the system. On a multiuser or clustered system you will
want to warn users and cluster clients in advance that the system (server)
will be coming down. Use the wall or cwall command to do this.

Caution

If your system is configured as an HP- UX cluster, refer to
Chapter 12, "Adding Peripherals to a Cluster" in Managing
Clusters of HP 9000 Computers before adding this device to
your system.

Disk and tape drives can be added in a cluster environment to
your client or server.

7 -92

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

HP 9144A/45A Tape Drive

Path
Name 1

HP 9144A/45A

/dev/et/ #sO

Major Device
File
Minor
Interleave Select
Type Number Driver Number 2
Factor
Code
b

es80

Ox070nOO

HP 9144A/45A /dev/ret/ #sO

es80

Ox070nOO

HP 9144A/45A

es80

Ox080nOO

es80

Ox080nOO

/dev/et/ #sO

HP 9144A/45A /dev/ret/ #sO
1

# is a nUIllber that identifies the device (for example, 1 for the first tape device installed).
Replace # with any unique nUIllber.

2 n is a nUIllber that identifies the address (set in step 4 of this installation procedure).
Replace n with 2 if the address is set to 2, use 3 if the address is set to 3, and so on.

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

7-93

HP 9144A/45A Tape Drive

Connecting the HP 9144A/45A Tape Drive
The following summary supplements the procedures outlined in your hardware
installation documentation for this device. Read through this summary before
proceding with the installation.
1. Verify that the drivers required for this device are included in your current
kernel configuration file, usually the / etc/ conf / dfile file.

• Use SAM for the whole procedure. SAM will check your dfile for the
necessary device drivers, add any that are missing, and reconfigure the
kernel for you at this time. See the chapter on setting up HP- UX using
SAM that follows this chapter; then go on to step 2.
or
• Look in your dfile for the drivers. If the drivers are in your kernel
configuration file, go on to step 2 now.
If the drivers are not in the /etc/conf/dfile, or are commented out with
a comment symbol (such as the * sign), edit the dfile to either add the
driver or remove the comment marks. You must reconfigure the kernel if
you edit the dfile for any reason. Use the /etc/config program to do
this. See Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX Commands" for
detailed information on this procedure.

2. Play it safe.

b. TURN OFF the computer and unplug the power cord.

7·94

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

HP 9144A/45A Tape Drive

3. Determine your interface .
• HP 98624A standard-speed HP-IB interface card
• Built-in standard-speed HP-IB interface

Note

Do not install HP-IB tape drives on the same interface as the
root device (main disk drive). Doing so can degrade your disk
drive's performance

4. Set the HP-IB bus address.

Note

Familiarize yourself with the HP-IB addresses that are
currently in use on your system. Determine the available
HP-IB addresses. Use the worksheet at the end of this book to
note already-used addresses.
You are limited to eight devices per HP-IB card, addresses 0
through 7.

a. Choose and available HP-IB bus address and make note of it.
b. Set the HP-IB bus address according to the instructions in the hardware
installation documentation provided with the device.

5. Ensure all power switches on the device and on the computer are in the OFF
position.
7

6. Connect the tape drive to your computer. Connect the device to your
computer following the instructions given in the hardware installation
manual for the device.

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

7-95

HP 9144A/45A Tape Drive

7. Connect the power cord.
8. Turn on the device.
9. Plug in and power on the computer.
Hardware installation complete! If you are using SAM, complete the software
set up portion of this procedure by following the instructions in Chapter 8,
"Setting Up HP- UX for Disk and Tape Drives Using SAM". If you are using
the commands method to install this device, refer to Chapter 14, "Setting Up
Devices Using HP-UX Commands"

7 -96

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

HP 7974A Tape Drive
The HP 7974A is a 100/50-ips, 1/2-inch, 9-track, open-reel tape drive supplied
in an upright cabinet. It supports 1600-cpi Phase Encoded (PE) format and
optionally 800-cpi NRZI format. The HP 7974A operates in either start/stop
(50 ips) or streaming (100 ips) mode depending on whether data is available on
the bus.
This tape drive connects to your computer via the built-in, high-speed HP-IB
interface or the high-speed HP-IB disk interface card.
Refer to Appendix B, "Series 400 Support Matrix" for Series 400 hardware and
software support information.

Caution

If your system is configured as an HP- UX cluster, refer to
Chapter 12, "Adding Peripherals to a Cluster" in Managing
Clusters of HP 9000 Computers before adding this device to
your system.

Disk and tape drives can be added in a cluster environment to
your client or server.

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

7-97

HP 7974A Tape Drive

What You're Going To Do
The following table contains detailed HP- UX software set up information.
If you use SAM to install this device, you will not need all this detailed
information. Complete the hardware installation as outlined in the following
section, then refer to Chapter 8, "Setting Up HP- UX for Disk and Tape Drives
Using SAM" for set up instructions.
If you are using commands to set up HP- UX to communicate with your device,
complete the hardware installation as outlined in the following section. Once
hardware installation is complete, use the information provided in this table to
complete the software set up as outlined in Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices
Using HP-UX Commands".

7 -98

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

HP 7974A Tape Drive
Table 7-24. HP 7974 Setup Information
Device Name

Path
Name 1

File
Major Device
Interleave Select
Minor
Type Number Driver Number 2
Factor
Code

HP 7974A, 800 cpi,
Berkeley, no rewind

/dev/rmt/ #1n

stape

OxOeOn03

HP 7974A, 800 cpi,
Berkeley, autorewind

/dev/rmt/ #1

stape

OxOeOn02

HP 7974A, 800 cpi,
AT&T, no rewind

/dev/rmt/ #1n

stape

OxOeOnOl

HP 7974A, 800 cpi,
AT&T, autorewind

/dev/rmt/ #1

stape

OxOeOnOO

HP 7974A, 1600 cpi,
Berkeley, no rewind

/dev/rmt/ #mn

stape

OxOeOn43

HP 7974A, 1600 cpi,
Berkeley, autorewind

/dev/rmt/ #m

stape

OxOeOn42

HP 7974A, 1600 cpi,
AT&T, no rewind

/dev/rmt/ #mn

stape

OxOeOn41

HP 7974A, 1600 cpi,
AT&T, autorewind

/dev/rmt/ #m

stape

OxOeOn40

HP 7974A, 800 cpi,
Berkeley, no rewind

/dev/rmt/ #1n

stape

Ox070n03

HP 7974A, 800 cpi,
Berkeley, autorewind

/dev/rmt/ #1

stape

Ox070n02

HP 7974A, 800 cpi,
AT&T, no rewind

/dev/rmt/ #1n

stape

Ox070nOl

stape

Ox070nOO

HP 7974A, 800 cpi,
AT&T, autorewind

I/dev/rmtl #1

HP 7974A, 1600 cpi,
Berkeley, no rewind

/dev/rmt/ #mn

stape

Ox070n43

HP 7974A, 1600 cpi,
Berkeley, autorewind

/dev/rmt/ #m

stape

Ox070n42

HP 7974A, 1600 cpi,
AT&T, no rewind

/dev/rmt/ #mn

stape

Ox070n41

HP 7974A, 1600 cpi,
AT&T, autorewind

/dev/rmt/ #m

stape

Ox070n40

# is a nUIllber that identifies the tape drive. Replace
/dev/rmt/Oh for the first tape drive).

with any unique nUIllber (for example,

2 n is a nUIllber that identifies the address (set in step 4 of this installation procedure). Replace n
with 2 if the address is set to 2, use 3 if the address is set to 3, and so on.

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

7·99

HP 7974A Tape Drive

Connecting the HP 7974A Tape Drive
The following summary supplements the procedures outlined in your hardware
installation documentation for this device. Read through this summary before
proceding with the installation.
1. Verify that the drivers required for this device are included in your current
kernel configuration file, usually the / ete/ eonf / dfile file.

If the drivers are not in the /etc/eonf/dfile, or are commented out with
a comment symbol (such as the * sign), edit the dfile to either add the
driver or remove the comment marks. You must reconfigure the kernel if
you edit the dfile for any reason. Use the /ete/eonfig program to do
this. See Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX Commands" for
detailed information on this procedure.
2. Play it safe.

b. TURN OFF the computer and unplug the power cord.
3. TURN ON your HP 7974A Tape Drive.

7-100

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

HP 7974A Tape Drive

4. Determine your interface.
The following high-speed HP-IB interfaces can be used. They are listed in
order of preference for optimum disk performance:
• HP 98262A high-speed HP-IB daughter board

or
HP 98625B high-speed HP-IB disk interface card
• HP 98625A high-speed HP-IB disk interface card
• Built-in "optional" secondary high-speed HP-IB interface.

Note

With a 98625A high-speed HP-IB disk interface card, be sure
that no SCSI bus interface is installed.

Note

Do not install HP-IB tape drives on the same interface as the
root device (main disk drive). Doing so can degrade your disk
drive's performance

5. Set the HP-IB bus address.

Note

Familiarize yourself with the HP-IB addresses that are
currently in use on your system. Determine the available
HP-IB addresses. Use the worksheet at the end of this book to
note already-used addresses.
You are limited to eight devices per HP-IB card, addresses 0
through 7.

a. Choose an available HP-IB bus address and make note of it.
b. Set the HP-IB bus address according to the instructions in the hardware
installation documentation provided with the device.

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

7-101

HP 7974A Tape Drive

6. Connect the tape drive to your computer.
Connect the device to your computer following the instructions in the.
hardware installation manual for the device.

7. Plug in and power on the computer.
Hardware installation complete! If you are using SAM, complete the software
set up portion of this procedures by following the instructions in Chapter 8,
"Setting Up HP- UX for Disk and Tape Drives Using SAM". If you are using
the commands method to install this device, refer to Chapter 14, "Setting Up
Devices Using HP-UX Commands"

7·102

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

HP 7978A/B Tape Drives
The HP 7978A/B are 75-ips, 1/2-inch, 9-track, open-reel tape drives supplied
in an upright cabinet. They support 1600-cpi Phase Encoded (PE) format and
6250-cpi Group Code Recording (GCR) format. The HP 7978A/B operates
only in streaming mode.
These tape drives connect to your computer via the built-in, high-speed HP-IB
or the high-speed HP-IB disk interface card.
Refer to Appendix B, "Series 400 Support Matrix" for Series 400 hardware and
software support information.

Before Installing This Device
Note

Arrange to have your HP Customer Engineer install the HP
7978A/B Tape drive. The installation cost is included in the
purchase price of the unit.

Before having this device installed:
• Have the hardware installation documentation that came with the device
handy.

• If you have not added this type of device to your system before, read the
material in Chapter 1, "Introduction". It provides interface and cabling
guidelines to follow when adding devices to your system.
• Plan ahead. Installing new peripherals on your system requires that you shut
down and power off the system. On a multiuser or clustered system you will
want to warn users and cluster clients in advance that the system (server)
will be coming down. Use the wall or c-wall command to do this.

Caution

7-103

HP 7978AJB Tape Drives

7-104

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

HP 7978AJB Tape Drives
Table 7-25.
HP 7978AJB Tape Drive
Connected to Built-in HP-IB Interface (Select Code 7)

Device Name

File Major Device
Type Number Driver

Path
Name 1

Minor
Number 2

HP 7978A/B, 6250 cpi, Berkeley, /dev/rrnt/ #hn
no rewind

stape

Ox070n83

HP 7978A/B, 6250 cpi, Berkeley,
autorewind

/dev/rrnt/ #h

stape

Ox070n82

HP 7978A/B, 6250 cpi, AT&T,
no rewind

/dev/rrnt/ #hn

stape

Ox070n81

HP 7978A/B, 6250 cpi, AT&T,
autorewind

/dev/rrnt/ #h

stape

Ox070n80

HP 7978A/B, 1600 cpi, Berkeley, /dev/rrnt/ #rnn
no rewind

stape

Ox070n43

HP 7978A/B, 1600 cpi, Berkeley,
autorewind

/dev/rrnt/ #rn

stape

Ox070n42

HP 7978A/B, 1600 cpi, AT&T,
no rewind

/dev/rrnt/ #rnn

stape

Ox070n41

HP 7978A/B, 1600 cpi, AT&T,
autorewind

/dev/rrnt/ #rn

stape

Ox070n40

# is a number that identifies the tape drive. Replace
/dev/rmt/Oh for the first tape drive).

# with any unique number (for example,

2 n is a number that identifies the address. Replace n with a 0 if the address is set to 0, use 2 if the
address is set to 2, and so on.

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

7-105

HP 7978AJB Tape Drives

Connecting the HP 7978A/B Tape Drives
The following summary supplements the procedures outlined in your hardware
installation documentation for this device. Read through this summary before
proceding with the installation.

1. Verify that the drivers required for this device are included in your current
kernel configuration file, usually the / ete/ eonf / dfile file.
If you are adding a device that utilizes an interface type that is new on
your system, you may have to add one or more necessary device drivers to
the kernel configuration file. To verify that the necessary drivers, listed
in the tables in the previous section, are part of your current kernel
configuration file, you can:
• Use SAM for the whole procedure. SAM will check your dfile for the
necessary device drivers, add any that are missing, and reconfigure the
kernel for you at this time. See the chapter on setting up HP- UX using
SAM that follows this chapter; then go on to step 2.
or
• Look in your dfile for the drivers. If ~he drivers are in your kernel
configuration file, go on to step 2 now.

If the drivers are not in the /ete/eonf/dfile, or are commented out
with a comment symbol (such as the * sign), edit the dfile to either
add the driver or remove the comment marks. You must reconfigure
the kernel if you edit the dfile for any reason. Use the /ete/eonfig
program to do this. See Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX
Commands" for detailed information on this procedure.

2. Play it safe.
a. Shut down and halt the system using the /ete/shutdown -h command.

If you are operating in a diskless cluster, see Managing Clusters of
HP 9000 Computers for additional information on shutting down the
system.
b. TURN OFF the computer and unplug the power cord.

7·106

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

HP 7978A/B Tape Drives

Note

With a 98625A high-speed HP-IB disk interface card, be sure
that no SCSI bus interface is installed.

4. Ensure that the power switch is in the OFF position.
5. Connect the power cord to the device.
6. Turn ON the tape drive.
7. Set the HP-IB bus address.

Note

Find out which HP-IB addresses are currently in use on
this system. Determine the available HP-IB addresses. Use
the worksheet at the end of this book to note already-used
addresses.
7

You are limited to eight devices per HP-IB card, addresses 0
through 7.
a. Choose an available HP-IB bus address and make note of it.
b. Set the HP-IB bus address according to the instructions in the hardware
installation documentation provided with the device.

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

7·107

HP 7978AjB Tape Drives

8. Ensure all power switches on the device and on the computer are in the
OFF position.
9. Connect the Tape Drive to the Computer.
Connect the device to the computer following the instructions provided in
the hardware installation documentation for the device.
10. Plug in and power on the computer.
Hardware installation complete! If you are using SAM, complete the software
set up portion of this procedures by following the instructions in Chapter 8,
"Setting Up HP- UX for Disk and Tape Drives Using SAM". If you are using
the commands method to install this device, refer to Chapter 14, "Setting Up
Devices Using HP- UX Commands"

7-108

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

HP 7979A/7980A/7980XC Tape Drives
The HP 7979A is an HP-IB 125-ips 1/2-inch 9-track open-reel tape drive
supplied in an upright cabinet. It supports 1600-cpi Phase Encoded (PE)
format (can be upgraded to 6250 cpi). The HP 7980A is an HP-IB 125-ips
1/2-inch 9-track open-reel tape drive which supports 1600-cpi Phase Encoded
(PE) format and 6250-cpi Group Coded Recording (GCR) format. The HP
7980XC is the same as the 7980A, with the added feature of being able to read
and write in compressed format.
Refer to Appendix B, "Series 400 Support Matrix" for Series 400 hardware and
software support information.

Before Installing This Device
Note

Arrange to have your HP Customer Engineer install your tape
drive. The installation cost is included in the purchase price of
the unit.

Before you have this device installed:
• Have the installation documentation that came with the device handy.
• If you have not added this type of device to your system before, read the
material in Chapter 1, "Introduction". It provides interface and cabling
guidelines to follow when adding devices to your system.

Caution

If your system is configured as an HP -UX cluster, refer to
Chapter 12, "Adding Peripherals to a Cluster" in Managing
Clusters of HP 9000 Computers before adding this device to
your system.

Disk and tape drives can be added in a cluster environment to
your client or server.

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

7 -109

HP 7979Aj7980Aj7980XC Tape Drives

What You're Going To Do
Your HP Customer Engineer will unpack and install your tape drive, following
these general procedures.

Caution

Do not attempt to operate the unit until your HP Customer
Engineer has installed the unit for you.

The following tables contain detailed HP- UX software set up information.
If you use SAM to install this device, you will not need all this detailed
information. Have the hardware installation completed as outlined in the
following section, then refer to Chapter 8, "Setting Up HP-UX for Disk and
Tape Drives Using SAM" for set up instructions using SAM.
If you are using commands to set up HP- UX to communicate with your device,
have the hardware installation completed as outlined in the following section.
Once the hardware installation is complete, use the information provided in
these tables to complete the software set up as outlined in Chapter 14, "Setting
Up Devices Using HP-UX Commands".

7 -110

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

HP 7979A/7980A/7980XC Tape Drives
Table 7-26.
HP 7979/80A Tape Drive
Connected to HP 98625 Disk Interface (Select Code 14)

Device Name

Path
Name 1

File Major Device
Minor
Type Number Driver Number 2

HP 7979/80A, 6250 cpi, Berkeley, /dev/rrnt/ #hn
no rewind

stape

OxOeOn83

HP 7979/80A, 6250 cpi, Berkeley, /dev/rrnt/ #h
autorewind

stape

OxOeOn82

HP 7979/80A, 6250 cpi, AT&T,
no rewind

/dev/rrnt/ #hn

stape

OxOeOn81

HP 7979/80A, 6250 cpi, AT&T,
autorewind

/dev/rrnt/ #h

stape

OxOeOn80

HP 7979/80A, 1600 cpi, Berkeley, /dev/rrnt/ #rnn
no rewind

stape

OxOeOn43

HP 7979/80A, 1600 cpi, Berkeley, / dev /rrnt/ #rn
autorewind

stape

OxOeOn42

HP 7979/80A, 1600 cpi, AT&T,
no rewind

/dev/rrnt/ #rnn

stape

OxOeOn41

HP 7979/80A, 1600 cpi, AT&T,
autorewind

/dev/rrnt/ #rn

stape

OxOeOn40

7
1

# is a number that identifies the tape drive. Replace
/dev/rmt/Ornn for the first tape drive).

with any unique number (for example,

2 n is a number that identifies the address (set in step 3 of the Installation Procedure). Replace n
with a 0 if the address is set to 0, use 2 if the address is set to 2, and so on.

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

7-111

HP 7979Aj7980Aj7980XC Tape Drives
Table 7·27.
HP 7979j80A Tape Drive
Connected to Built·in Hp·IB Interface (Select Code 7)

Device Name

File Major Device
Type Number Driver

Path
Name 1

Minor
Number 2

HP 7979/80A, 6250 cpi, Berkeley, /dev/rrnt/ #hn
no rewind

stape

Ox070n83

HP 7979/80A, 6250 cpi, Berkeley, /dev/rrntl #h
autorewind

stape

Ox070n82

HP 7979/80A, 6250 cpi, AT&T,
no rewind

/dev/rrnt/ #hn

stape

Ox070n81

HP 7979/80A, 6250 cpi, AT&T,
autorewind

/dev/rrnt/ #h

stape

Ox070n80

HP 7979/80A, 1600 cpi, Berkeley, /dev/rrnt/ #rnn
no rewind

stape

Ox070n43

HP 7979/80A, 1600 cpi, Berkeley, /dev/rrnt/ #rn
autorewind

stape

Ox070n42

HP 7979/80A, 1600 cpi, AT&T,
no rewind

/dev/rrnt/ #rnn

stape

Ox070n41

HP 7979/80A, 1600 cpi, AT&T,
autorewind

/dev/rrnt/ #rn

stape

Ox070n40

7
1

# is a number that identifies the tape drive. Replace
/dev/rmt/Om for the first tape drive).

with any unique number (for example,

2 n is a number that identifies the address. Replace n with a 0 if the address is set to 0, use 2 if the
address is set to 2, and so on.

7·112

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

HP 7979Aj7980Aj7980XC Tape Drives
Table 7-28.
HP 7980XC Tape Drive
Connected to HP 98625 Disk Interface (Select Code 14)
Device Name

Path
Name 1

File Major Device
Minor
Type Number Driver Number 2

HP 7980XC, 6250 cpi, Berkeley,
no rewind, compressed

/dev/rrnt/ #hn

stape

OxOeOnc3

HP 7980XC, 6250 cpi, Berkeley,
autorewind, compressed

/dev/rrnt/ #h

stape

OxOeOnc2

HP 7980XC, 6250 cpi, AT&T,
no rewind, compressed

/dev/rrnt/ #hn

stape

OxOeOnc1

HP 7980XC, 6250 cpi, AT&T,
autorewind, compressed

/dev/rrnt/ #h

stape

OxOeOncO

# is a number that identifies the tape drive. Replace
/dev/rmt/Ohn for the first tape drive).

with any unique number (for example,

2 n is a number that identifies the address (set in step 3 of the Installation Procedure). Replace n
with a if the address is set to 0, use 2 if the address is set to 2, and so on.

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

7-113

HP 7979A/7980A/7980XC Tape Drives
Table 7-29.
HP 7980XC Tape Drive
Connected to Built-in HP-IB Interface (Select Code 7)

Device Name

Path
Name 1

File Major Device
Minor
Nwnber2
Type Nwnber File

HP 7980XC, 6250 cpi, Berkeley,
no rewind, compressed

/ dev /rmt/ #hn

stape

Ox070nc3

HP 7980XC, 6250 cpi, Berkeley,
autorewind, compressed

/dev/rmt/ #h

stape

Ox070nc2

HP 7980XC, 6250cpi, AT&T,
no rewind, compressed

/dev/rmt/ #hn

stape

Ox070ncl

HP 7980XC, 6250 cpi, AT&T,
autorewind, compressed

/dev/rmt/ #h

stape

Ox070ncO

# is a number that identifies the tape drive. Replace
/dev/rmt/Omn for the first tape drive).

with any unique number (for example,

2 n is a number that identifies the address (set in step 3 of the Installation Procedure). Replace n
with a 0 if the address is set to 0, use 2 if the address is set to 2, and so on.

7-114

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

HP 7979A/7980A/7980XC Tape Drives

Connecting the HP 7979A/1980A/1980XC Tape Drives
The following summary supplements the procedures outlined in your hardware
installation documentation for this device. Read through this summary before
proceding with the installation.
1. Verify that the drivers required for this device are included in your current
kernel configuration file, usually the / etc/ conf / dfile file.

• Use SAM for the whole procedure. SAM will check your dfile for the
necessary device drivers, add any that are missing, and reconfigure the
kernel for you at this time. See the chapter on setting up HP- UX using
SAM that follows this chapter; then go on to step 2.
or
• Look in your dfile for the drivers. If the drivers are in your kernel
configuration file, go on to step 2 now.
If the drivers are not in the /etc/conf/dfile, or are commented out
with a comment symbol (such as the * sign), edit the dfile to either
add the driver or remove the comment marks. You must reconfigure
the kernel if you edit the dfile for any reason. Use the /etc/config
program to do this. See Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX
Commands" for detailed information on this procedure.
2. Play it safe.

b. TURN OFF the computer and unplug the power cord.

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

7-115

HP 7979A/7980A/7980XC Tape Drives

Note

With a 98625A high-speed HP-IB disk interface card, be sure
that no SCSI bus interface is installed.

4. Ensure that the power switch is in the OFF position.
5. Connect the power cord to the device.
6. Turn ON the tape drive.
7. Set the HP-IB bus address.

Note

Find out which HP-IB addresses are currently in use on
this system. Determine the available HP-IB addresses. Use
the worksheet at the end of this book to note already-used
addresses.

8. Ensure all power switches on the device and on the computer are in the
OFF position.

7·116

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

HP 7979A/7980A/7980XC Tape Drives

9. Connect the tape drive to the computer.
Connect the device to the computer following the instructions provided in
the hardware installation documentation for the device.
10. Plug in and power on the computer.
Hardware installation complete! If you are using SAM, complete the software
set up portion of this procedures by following the instructions in Chapter 8,
"Setting Up HP- UX for Disk and Tape Drives Using SAM". If you are using
the commands method to install this device, refer to Chapter 14, "Setting Up
Devices Using HP-UX Commands"

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

7-117

HP C1511A Series 6400 Model 1300H HP-IB DDS-Format
Drive
The HP Series 6400 Model 1300H is a streaming tape drive that stores data in
a format called Digital Data Storage (DDS) on cassettes that can each hold up
to 1.3 gigabytes (1300 megabytes) of data. It is a standalone drive and uses a
high-speed HP-IB interface.
Refer to Appendix B, "Series 400 Support Matrix" for Series 400 hardware and
software support information.
Use only HP labeled DDS-format tapes in HP DDS-format tape
drives. HP 92283A contains five (60m) HP labeled DDS-format
tapes. Use only 60 meter tapes on this drive.

Note

Caution

If your system is configured as an HP- UX cluster, refer to
Chapter 12, "Adding Peripherals to a Cluster" in Managing
Clusters of HP 9000 Computers before adding this device to
your system.

Disk and tape drives can be added in a cluster environment to
your client or server.

7 -118

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

HP C1511A DDS-Format Tape Drive

What You're Going To Do
The following table contains detailed HP- UX software set up information.
If you use SAM to install this device, you will not need all this detailed
information. Complete the hardware installation as outlined in the following
section, then refer to Chapter 8, "Setting Up HP- UX for Disk and Tape Drives
Using SAM" for set up instructions.
If you are using commands to set up HP- UX to communicate with your device,
complete the hardware installation as outlined in the following section. Once
the hardware installation is complete, use the information provided in this
table to complete the software set up as outlined in Chapter 14, "Setting Up
Devices Using HP-UX Commands".
Table 7-30. HP C1511A HP-IB DDS-Format Drive
Device Name

Path
Name 1

Major Device
Minor
Interleave Select
File
Type Number Driver Number 2
Factor
Code

HP C151lA HP-IB DDS /dev/rmt/ #sO

stape

OxOeOnOO

HP C151lA HP-IB DDS /dev/rmt/ #sO

stape

Ox070nOO

# is a number that identifies the tape drive. Replace
/dev/rmt/OsO for the first tape drive).

with any unique number (for example,

2 n is a number that identifies the address (set in step 4 of this installation procedure). Replace n
with 2 if the address is set to 2, use 3 if the address is set to 3, and so on.

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

7-119

HP C1511A DDS-Format Tape Drive

Connecting the HP C1511A Tape Drive
The following summary supplements the procedures outlined in your hardware
installation documentation for this device. Read through this summary before
proceding with the installation.

1. Verify that the drivers required for this device are included in your current
kernel configuration file, usually the / ete/ eonf / dfile file.

If the drivers are not in the /ete/eonf/dfile, or are commented out with
7

a comment symbol (such as the * sign), edit the dfile to either add the
driver or remove the comment marks. You must reconfigure the kernel if
you edit the dfile for any reason. Use the /ete/eonfig program to do
this. See Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX Commands" for
detailed information on this procedure.

2. Play it safe.
a. Shut down and halt the system using the /ete/shutdown -h command.

If you are operating in a diskless cluster, see Managing Clusters of HP
9000 Computers for additional information on shutting down the system.
b. TURN OFF the computer and unplug the power cord.

7 -120

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

HP C1511A DDS-Format Tape Drive

Note

With a 98625A high-speed HP-IB disk interface card, be sure
that no SCSI bus interface is installed.

4. Set the HP-IB bus address

Note

Familiarize yourself with the HP-IB addresses that are
currently in use on your system. Determine the available
HP-IB addresses. Use the worksheet at the end of this book to
note already-used addresses.
You are limited to eight devices per HP-IB card, addresses 0
through 7.

a. Choose an available HP-IB bus address and make note of it.

b. Set the HP-IB bus address according to the instructions in the hardware
installation documentation provided with the device.

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

7-121

HP C1511A DDS·Format Tape Drive

5. Ensure all power switches on the device and on the computer are in the OFF
position.
6. Connect the tape drive to your computer.
Connect your device to your computer following the instructions in the
hardware installation manual for the device.

7. Turn on the drive.
8. Insert tape.

Note

You must insert the tape before turning on the computer. If
the DDS-format drive is found on the bus before the root disk
during the automatic boot sequence, and no tape is inserted,
the system will wait for you to insert a tape.

9. Plug in and power on the computer.
Hardware installation complete! If you are using SAM, complete the software
set up portion of this procedures by following the instructions in Chapter 8,
"Setting Up HP -UX for Disk and Tape Drives Using SAM". If you are using
the commands method to install this device, refer to Chapter 14, "Setting Up
Devices Using HP -UX Commands"

7·122

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

HP C1512A HP Series 6400 Model 1300S SCSI
DDS-Format Drive
The HP Series 6400 Model 1300S is a streaming tape drive that stores data in
a format called Digital Data Storage (DDS) on cassettes that can each hold up
to 1.3 gigabytes (1300 megabytes) of data. It is a standalone drive and uses a
SCSI (Small Computer System Interface) interface.
Refer to Appendix B, "Series 400 Support Matrix" for Series 400 hardware and
software support information.

Note

Use only HP labeled DDS-format tapes in HP DDS-format tape
drives. HP 92283A contains five (60m) HP labeled DDS-format
tapes. Use only 60 meter tapes on this drive.

Before Installing This Device
Before you install this device:
• Have the hardware installation documentation that came with the device
handy. You will need to refer to it during this procedure.
• If you have not added this type of device to your system before, read the
material in Chapter 1, "Introduction". It provides interface and cabling
guidelines to follow when adding devices to your system.
• Plan ahead. Installing new peripherals on your system requires that you shut
down and power off the system. On a multiuser or clustered system you will
want to warn users and cluster clients in advance that the system (server)
will be coming down. Use the wall or cwall command to do this.

Caution

If your system is configured as an HP -UX cluster, refer to
Chapter 12, "Adding Peripherals to a Cluster" in Managing
Clusters of HP 9000 Computers before adding this device to
your system.
Disk and tape drives can be added in a cluster environment to
your client or server.

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

7·123

C1512A SCSI DDS-Format Tape Drive

Major
File
Type Number

Device
Drivers

Select
Minor
Code Number 23

HP C1512A SCSI DDS,
autorewind, AT&T

/dev/rmt/ #m

scsitape, scsi

OxOeOnOO

HP C1512A SCSI DDS,
autorewind, Berkeley

/dev/rmt/ #m

scsitape, scsi

OxOeOn02

HP C1512A SCSI DDS, /dev/rmt/ #Inn
no rewind, Berkeley

scsitape, scsi

OxOeOn03

Path
Name 1

# is a number that identifies the tape drive. Replace
example, /dev/rmt/Om for the first tape drive).

with any unique number (for

2 n is a number that identifies the bus address. Replace n with 2 if the bus address is set to 2,
use 3 if the address is set to 3, and so on.
3 Select partition 1 of the tape by adding Ox000010 to the minor number.

7 -124

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

C1512A SCSI DDS-Format Tape Drive

Connecting the HP C1512A SCSI DDS-Format Tape Drive
The following summary supplements the procedures outlined in your hardware
installation documentation for this device. Read through this summary before
proceding with the installation.
1. Verify that the drivers required for this device are included in your current
kernel configuration file, usually the / etc/ conf / dfile file.
If you are adding a device that utilizes an interface type that is new on
your system, you may have to add one or more necessary device drivers to
the kernel configuration file. To verify that the necessary drivers, listed
in the tables in the previous section, are part of your current kernel
configuration file, you can:

• Use SAM for the whole procedure. SAM will check your dfile for the
necessary device drivers, add any that are missing, and reconfigure the
kernel for you at this time. See the chapter on setting up HP- UX using
SAM that follows this chapter; then go on to step 2.
or
• Look in your dfile for the drivers. If the drivers are in your kernel
configuration file, go on to step 2 now.
If the drivers are not in the /etc/conf/dfile, or are commented out
with a comment symbol (such as the * sign), edit the dfile to either
add the driver or remove the comment marks. You must reconfigure
the kernel if you edit the dfile for any reason. Use the /etc/config
program to do this. See Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices Using HP- UX
Commands" for detailed information on this procedure.
2. Play it safe.

a. Shut down and halt the system using the /etc/shutdoTNn -h command.
If you are operating in a diskless cluster, see Managing Clusters of
HP 9000 Computers for additional information on shutting down the
system.

b. TURN OFF the computer and unplug the power cord.

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

7-125

C1512A SCSI DDS-Format Tape Drive

3. Determine your interface.
• Built-in SCSI interface
• HP 98658A SCSI interface card
• HP 98265A SCSI interface daughter card

4. Set the SCSI bus address on your device.

Note

a. Choose an available SCSI bus address and make note of it.
b. Set the SCSI bus address according to the instructions in the hardware
installation documentation provided with the device.

5. Set the Parity (P) jumper to one (shorted).
6. Set the Termpower (T) jumper to one (shorted).
7. Ensure all power switches on the device and on the computer are in the
OFF position.
7

8. Connect the tape drive to your computer.
Connect your device to your computer following the instructions in the
hardware installation manual for the device.
The HP C1512A DDS-Format drive has an internal bus length of .55
meters.
The SCSI bus length is limited to a maximum of six meters. This length
includes the cable length between devices and the internal bus length for
each device on the bus. Available SCSI cables and terminators are included
in the "SCSI Device Guidelines" section of Chapter 1.

7-126

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

C1512A SCSI DDS-Format Tape Drive

9. Turn on the drive.
10. Insert tape.

Note

On a Series 300 only, you must insert the tape before turning
on the computer. If the DDS-format drive is found on the bus
before the root disk during the automatic boot sequence, and
no tape is inserted, the system will wait for you to insert a
tape.

11. Plug in and power on the computer.
Hardware installation complete! If you are using SAM, complete the software
set up portion of this procedures by following the instructions in Chapter 8,
"Setting Up HP -UX for Disk and Tape Drives Using SAM". If you are using
the commands method to install this device, refer to Chapter 14, "Setting Up
Devices Using HP- UX Commands"

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

7-127

HP C1520B/C1521B HP Series 6400 SCSI DDS-Format
Tape Drives
The HP C1520B Digital Audio Tape (DAT) drive is a streaming tape drive
that stores data in a format called Digital Data Storage (DDS). It is a
high-capacity, medium transfer-rate standalone tape drive that uses a SCSI
(Small Computer System Interface) interface. The C1520B has a fast search
capability and can read data compressed tapes.
The HP C1521B is the same as the HP C1520B except that it can both read
and store data in a data compressed DDS format.
A sixty meter (60m) DDS cassettes can hold up to 1.3 gigabytes (1300
megabytes) of uncompressed data. In compressed mode, a 60m DDS cassette
can hold approximately 5.2 gigabytes (5200 megabytes) of data. A ninety
meter (90m) DDS cassettes can hold up to 2.0 gigabytes (2000 megabytes)
of uncompressed data. In compressed mode, a 90m DDS cassette can hold
approximately 8.0 gigabytes (8000 megabytes) of data .

Note

• Data storage rate and capacity, especially in compressed
mode, is dependent upon the computer's capacity to keep up
with the device and the type of data being stored .
• Use only HP labeled DDS-format tapes in HP DDS-format
tape drives. HP 92283A contains five (60m) HP labeled
DDS-format tapes; and HP 92283B contains five (90m) HP
labeled DDS-format tapes.

Refer to Appendix B, "Series 400 Support Matrix" for Series 400 hardware and
software support information.

7-128

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

C1520B/C1521B SCSI DDS-Format Tape Drives

Before Installing This Device
Before you install this device:
• Have the hardware installation documentation that came with the device
handy. You will need to refer to it during this procedure.

• If you have not added this type of device to your system before, read the
material in Chapter 1, "Introduction". It provides interface and cabling
guidelines to follow when adding devices to your system.
• Plan ahead. Installing new peripherals on your system requires that you shut
down and power off the system. On a multiuser or clustered system you will
want to warn users and cluster clients in advance that the system (server)
will be coming down. Use the wall or cwall command to do this.

Caution

Refer to the User's Guides that came with your device for information on
setting up, using, and maintaining this tape drive.
7

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

7-129

C1520B/C1521B SCSI DDS-Format Tape Drives

What You're Going To Do
The following table contains detailed HP- UX software set up information.
If you use SAM to install this device, you will not need all this detailed
information. Complete the hardware installation as outlined in the following
section, then refer to Chapter 8, "Setting Up HP- UX for Disk and Tape Drives
Using SAM" for set up instructions using SAM.
If you are using commands to set up HP- UX to communicate with your device,
complete the hardware installation as outlined in the following section. Once
hardware installation is complete, use the information provided in this table to
complete the software set up as outlined in Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices
Using HP-UX Commands".----------------------Table 7-32. C1520B SCSI DDS-Format Drive
Device Name

Major
File
Type Number

Device
Driver

Select
Minor
Code Number 2

HP C1520B SCSI DDS,
/dev/rmt/ #mn
uncompressed, partition 0,
Berkeley close, autorewind

scsitape

OxOeOn42

HP C1520B SCSI DDS,
uncompressed, partition 0
Berkely close, no rewind

scsitape

OxOeOn43

Path
Name 1

/dev/rmt/ #mn

# is a number that identifies the tape drive. Replace
example, /dev/rmt/Om for the first tape drive).

with any unique number (for

2 n is a number that identifies the bus address. Replace n with 2 if the bus address is set to
2, use 3 if the address is set to 3, and so on.

7 -130

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

C1520BjC1521B SCSI DDS-Format Tape Drives
Table 7-33. C1521B SCSI DDS-Format Drive
Device Name

Path
Name 1

Major
File
Type Number

Device
Driver

Select
Minor
Code Number 2

HP C1521B SCSI DDS,
/dev/rmt/ #mn
uncompressed, partition 1
Berkeley close, autorewind

scsi tape

OxOeOn52

HP C1521B SCSI DDS,
uncompressed, partition 1
Berkeley close, no rewind

/dev/rmt/#mn

scsitape

OxOeOn53

HP C1521B SCSI DDS,
compressed, partition 1,
Berkeley close, autorewind

/dev/rmt/ #h

scsi tape

OxOeOnD2

HP C1521B SCSI DDS,
compressed, partition 1,
Berkeley close, no rewind

/dev/rmt/ #hn

scsitape

OxOeOnD3

HP C1521B SCSI DDS,
uncompressed, partition 0
AT&T close, no rewind

/dev/rmt/ #mn

scsitape

OxOeOn41

HP C1521B SCSI DDS,
uncompressed, partition 1
AT&T close, no rewind

/dev/rmt/ #mn

scsitape

OxOeOn51

HP C1521B SCSI DDS,
compressed, partition 0
AT&T close, no rewind

/dev/rmt/ #hn

scsitape

OxOeOnCl

HP C1521B SCSI DDS,
compressed, partition 1
AT&T close, no rewind

/dev/rmt/ #hn

scsitape

OxOeOnDl

# is a number that identifies the tape drive. Replace
example, /dev/rmt/Om for the first tape drive).

with any unique number (for

2 n is a number that identifies the bus address. Replace n with 2 if the bus address is set to
2, use 3 if the address is set to 3, and so on.

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

7-131

C1520B/C1521B SCSI DDS-Format Tape Drives

Connecting the HP C1520A/C1521A SCSI DDS-Format Tape Drives
The following summary supplements the procedures outlined in your hardware
installation documentation for this device. Read through this summary before
proceding with the installation.

1. Verify that the drivers required for this device are included in your current
kernel configuration file, usually the / ete/ eonf / dfile file.
If you are adding a device that utilizes an interface type that is new on
your system, you may have to add one or more necessary device drivers to
the kernel configuration file. To verify that the necessary drivers, listed
in the tables in the previous section, are part of your current kernel
configuration file, you can:
• Use SAM for the whole procedure. SAM will check your dfile for the
necessary device drivers, add any that are missing, and reconfigure the
kernel for you at this time. See the chapter on setting up HP- UX using
SAM that follows this chapter; then go on to step 2.
or
• Look in your dfile for the drivers. If the drivers are in your kernel
configuration file, go on to step 2 now.

If the drivers are not in the /ete/eonf/dfile, or are commented out
with a comment symbol (such as the * sign), edit the dfile to either
add the driver or remove the comment marks. You must reconfigure
the kernel if you edit the dfile for any reason. Use the /ete/eonfig
program to do this. See Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX
Commands" for detailed information on this procedure.

2. Play it safe.
a. Shut down and halt the system using the fete/shutdown -h command.

If you are operating in a diskless cluster, see Managing Clusters of
HP 9000 Computers for additional information on shutting down the
system.
b. TURN OFF the computer and unplug the power cord.

7-132

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

C1520B/C1521B SCSI DDS-Format Tape Drives

3. Determine your interface.
• Built-in SCSI interface
• HP 98658A SCSI interface card
• HP 98265A SCSI interface daughter card

4. Set the SCSI bus address on your device.

Note

a. Choose an available SCSI bus address and make note of it.
b. Set the SCSI bus address according to the instructions in the hardware
installation documentation provided with the device.

5. Enable computer control of data compression on writes.
Set the switches on the bottom of the mechanism to enable computer
control of data compression on writes. Compressed data is automatically
decompressed during a read.
7

Table 7-34. C1520/21B Switch Settings

Switch Number Setting
1
2
3
4

5
6
7
8

off
on
on
on
on
on
on
on

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

7-133

6. Ensure all power switches on the device and on the computer are in the
OFF position.
7. Connect the tape drive to your computer.
Connect your device to your computer following the instructions in the
hardware installation manual for the device.
Consult the documentation that came with your tape drive for internal bus
length information.
The SCSI bus length is limited to a maximum of six meters. This length
includes the cable length between devices and the internal bus length for
each device on the bus. Available SCSI cables and terminators are included
in the "SCSI Device Guidelines" section of Chapter l.

8. Turn on the drive.
9. Insert tape.

Note

10. Plug in and power on the computer.
7

Hardware installation complete! If you are using SAM, complete the software
set up portion of this procedures by following the instructions in Chapter 8,
"Setting Up HP- UX for Disk and Tape Drives Using SAM". If you are using
the commands method to install this device, refer to Chapter 14, "Setting Up
Devices Using HP -UX Commands"

7·134

Installing Disk and Tape Drives

8
Setting Up HP-UX for Disk and Tape Drives
Using SAM
Introduction
This chapter discusses setting up HP- UX to communicate with your disk drive.
Setting up HP- UX for a disk drive consists of:
• creating the device file or verifying the correct device file already exists for
communication with the device.
• ensuring the appropriate HP- UX device driver is part of the current kernel
configuration.
There are two methods for setting up HP- UX:
• SAM method
• HP- UX Commands method
This chapter focuses on the SAM method to set up HP- UX for disk and tape
drives. Refer to Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices Using HP- UX Commands"
for a description of the HP- UX commands method of setting up devices if you
do not have SAM on your system.

Setting Up HP-UX for Disk and Tape Drives Using SAM

8-1

Setting Up HP-UX for a Disk Drive
Before you begin:

Make sure that you know how you intend to use this disk:
• For file storage only
• For swap space only
• For both file storage and swap space
Also, make a note of the disk drive model and its hardware address (select code
and bus address).
To set up HP-UX for your disk drive:

1. Log on as root.
2. Run SAM:
$ /usr/bin/sam
3. Highlight

and activate

(Open ).

5. From the "Actions" menubar title in the "Disk and File
window, highlight and choose

Manager"

6. Within the "Add a Hard Disk Drive" window, highlight and choose
8

7. Within the "Select disk to add" window, highlight the disk you wish to
add. You can identify it by its model number, select code and bus address.
Activate (OK).
8. Within the "Add a Hard Disk Drive" window, highlight and choose

8-2

Setting Up HP-UX for Disk and Tape Drives Using SAM

Setting Up HP-UX for a Disk Drive

9. Within the "Set disk usage and options" window:
a. Activate the highlig;~~~~J.?~:rl~?utton.
usage you prefer OI-~±~t~~II~!ti,
b. In the "Mount Directory;" field, type in the name of the directory that
will be the mount point for the file system on this disk. Press (Return l.
c. You may receive an advisory messag;~~t thi~:point. Read any such
message carefully before activating;~t~§ or!~t.
If you choose
directory name.

repeat the previous step by typing in a different

d. Turn on the checkbox labeled "Create a new file system."
e. Several checkbox options appear below "Create a new file system."
Turn on or off any of these checkbox options as required by your new
filesystem.
f. Activate (OK l.
10. You may need to change certain options, such as when to mount the disk
and how its access permissions are set. If
within the "Add a Hard Disk
then within the
Drive" window, highlight and activate
dialog box, turn on the checkboxes that apply.
11. Within the "Add a Hard Disk Drive" window, highlight and activate (oKl.
12. A "Messages" Box appears, reporting the progress of the task. When the
task if finished, activate (OK l.
13. Exit SAM by returning to the "System Administration Manager" window
and activating (Exit SAM l.

Setting Up HP-UX for Disk and Tape Drives Using SAM

8-3

Setting Up HP-UX for a Tape Drive
Before you begin:

Make a note of the tape drive model and its hardware address (select code and
bus address).
To set up HP-UX for your tape drive:

1. Log on as root.
2. Run SAM:
$ /usr/bin/sarn

3. Highlight
4. Highlight

and activate
and activate

(Open ).

5. From the "Actions" menubar title in the "Tape Drive Manager" window,
highlight and choose
6. Within the "Add a Tape Drive" window, read the instructions, then
activate (OK ).
7. SAM may detect that your HP-UX kernel lacks the drivers necessary
to make use of the tape drive. If so, within the "Device Driver Check"
window, read the messages and choose the appropriate action.
If

you·

SAM will create the kerIlel·
:need and
your
The rebooted system will be able to use the tape drive.
8

8. If you had to shutdown your system in order to physically connect the tape
drive, re-enter SAM and repeat steps 3 through 6 above.
9. Highlight the new tape drive. You can identify it by its model number,
select code and bus address.
10. From the "Actions" menubar, highlight and choosee
11. Activate (OK) and exit SAM.

8-4

Setting Up HP-UX for Disk and Tape Drives Using SAM

9
Installing Printers
Introduction
This chapter contains the installation and configuration procedures for the
following printers:
HP
HP
HP
HP
HP
HP
HP
HP
HP
HP
HP
HP
HP
HP
HP

2225A ThinkJet Printer
2227 A/B QuietJet Plus Printer
2228A/B QuietJ et Printer
2563B, 2564B, and 2566B Printers
2684A/D /P Laser J et 2000 Printer
2686A/D LaserJet Printer
33440A LaserJet-II Printer
33447A Laser J et- lID Printer
33449A LaserJet Series III Printer
33459A LaserJet Series IIID Printer
33491A LaserJet Series IIIsi Printer
2932A and 2934A Printers
3630A PaintJet Printer
C1602A PaintJet XL Printer
2563/64/66/67C Impact Printers

Refer to Appendix B, "Series 400 Support Matrix" for Series 400 hardware and
software support information.

Installing Printers

9-1

HP 2225A ThinkJet Printer
The HP 2225A ThinkJet printer connects to the computer through an HP-IB
interface.
Refer to Appendix B, "Series 400 Support Matrix" for Series 400 hardware and
software support information.

Before Installing This Device
Before you install this device:
• Refer to your printer's manuals for instructions on unpacking and preparing
the printer for installation.

• If you have not added this type of device to your system before, read the
material in Chapter 1, "Introduction". It provides interface and cabling
guidelines to follow when adding devices to your system.
• Have the documentation shipped with your device handy. You will need to
refer to it during this procedure.
• Plan ahead. Installing new peripherals on your system requires that you shut
down and power off the system. On a multiuser or clustered system, you will
want to warn users and cluster clients in advance that the system (server)
will be coming down. Use the wall or cW'all command to do this.

Caution

If you are adding this device to a cluster-node, you must be
logged into that node to do HP- UX configuration tasks.
For more information about adding devices to a system
configured as an HP-UX cluster, refer to Managing Clusters of
HP 9000 Computers, Chapter 12, "Adding Peripherals to a
Cluster" .

9-2

Installing Printers

HP 2225A ThinkJet Printer

What You're Going To Do
The following tables contain detailed HP- UX software set up information.
If you use SAM to install this device, you will not need all this detailed
information. Complete the hardware installation as outlined in the following
section, then refer to Chapter 10, "Setting Up HP-UX for Printers Using SAM"
for set up instructions.
If you are using commands to set up HP- UX to communicate with your device,
complete the hardware installation as outlined in the following section. Once
the hardware installation is complete, use the information provided in these
tables to complete the software set up as outlined in Chapter 14, "Setting Up
Devices Using HP-UX Commands".
Table 9-1.
HP 2225A ThinkJet
Connected to an HP-IB Interface
Device Name

Path
Name 1

File
Major
Type Number

Device
Driver

Select
Minor
Code Number 2

HP 2225A ThinkJ et /dev/lp2225

printer

Ox070nOO

HP 2225A ThinkJ et /dev/rlp2225

hpib

Ox070nOO

HP 2225A ThinkJ et /dev/lp2225

printer

Ox080nOO

HP 2225A ThinkJ et /dev/rlp2225

hpib

Ox080nOO

1 Device file naming conventions are described in Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices Using
HP-UX Commands".
2 n represents the HP-IB bus address. Replace n with a 1 if the bus address was set to 1, use 4
if the bus address was set to 4, and so on.
3 Built-in HP-IB interface.
4 HP 98624 HP-IB Interface.

Installing Printers

9-3

HP 2225A ThinkJet Printer

Connecting the Printer
The following summary supplements the procedures outlined in your hardware
installation documentation for this device. Read through this summary before
pro ceding with the installation.
1. Verify that the drivers required for this device are included in your
/ etc/ eonf / dfile file.
If you are adding a device that utilizes an interface type that is new on your
system, you may have to add one or more necessary device drivers to the
kernel configuration file. To verify that the necessary drivers, listed in the
tables in the previous section, are part of your current kernel configuration
file, you can:

• Use SAM for the whole procedure. SAM will check your dfile for the
necessary device drivers, add any that are missing, and reconfigure the
kernel for you at this time. See the chapter on setting up HP- UX using
SAM that follows this chapter; then go on to step 2.
or
• Look in your dfile for the drivers. If the drivers are in your kernel
configuration file, go on to step 2 now.
If the drivers are not in the /ete/conf/dfile, or are commented out with
a comment symbol (such as the * sign), edit the dfile to either add the
driver or remove the comment marks. You must reconfigure the kernel if
you edit the dfile for any reason. Use the /ete/eonfig program to do
this. See Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX Commands" for
detailed information on this procedure.

2. Play it safe.
a. Shut down and halt the system using the /ete/shutdown -h command.
If you are operating in a diskless cluster, see the System Administration
Tasks manual Chapter 3, "Starting and Stopping HP- UX" for additional
information on shutting down the system.

b. TURN OFF the computer and unplug the power cord.

9-4

Installing Printers

HP 2225A ThinkJet Printer

3. Determine your interface.

The following standard-speed HP-IB interfaces can be used:
• HP 98624A standard-speed HP-IB interface card
• Built-in standard-speed HP-IB interface

Note

Avoid placing the printer on the same interface used by
your disk or tape drives. A dedicated HP-IB interface is
recommended. Placing a printer on the same standard-speed
HP-IB interface as your disk or tape drive could substantially
affect the performance of your disk or tape drive.

4. Set the HP-IB bus address.

Note

Determine which HP-IB addresses are in use by other devices
on this HP-IB card. Use the worksheet at the end of this book
to note already-used addresses.
You are limited to eight devices per HP-IB card, addresses 0
through 7.

a. Choose an available HP-IB bus address and make note of it.
b. Set the HP-IB bus address according to the instructions in the
installation documentation provided with the device.

Installing Printers

9-5

HP 2225A ThinkJet Printer

7. Connect the power cord.
8. Turn on the device.
9. Plug in and power on the computer.
Hardware installation complete! You can now proceed to the set up procedures
in Chapter 10, "Setting Up HP -UX for Printers Using SAM" if you are using
SAM. If you are not using SAM, refer to Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices
Using HP-UX Commands" for instructions on how to configure your system
using commands.

9-6

Installing Printers

HP 2227A/B QuietJet Plus
and HP 2228A/B QuietJet Printers
The HP 2227 A QuietJet Plus and 2228A QuietJet printers connect to the
computer via an RS-232-C interface. The HP 2227B QuietJet Plus and 2228B
QuietJet printers connect to the computer via an HP-IB interface.
Refer to Appendix B, "Series 400 Support Matrix" for Series 400 hardware and
software support information.

Note

Your printer might be pre configured at the factory to operate
in parallel mode. If you intend to connect the printer to a serial
interface, you will need to reconfigure the printer for serial
operation mode. See your printer's documentation for details.

• Plan ahead. Installing new peripherals on your system requires that you shut
down and power off the system. On a multiuser or clustered system, you will
want to warn users and cluster clients in advance that the system (server)
will be coming down. Use the wall or cwall command to do this.

Caution

If you are adding this device to a cluster-node, you must be
logged into that node to do HP- UX configuration tasks.

For more information about adding devices to a system
configured as an HP- UX cluster, refer to Managing Clusters of
HP 9000 Computers, Chapter 12, "Adding Peripherals to a
Cluster" .

Installing Printers

9· 7

HP 2227 A/B QuietJet Plus
and HP 2228A/B QuietJet Printers

What You're Going To Do
The device driver you will need for this printer depends on the type of interface
you are using. The following tables outline this information and contain
additional detailed HP- UX software set up information. If you use SAM to
install this device, you will not need this detailed information. Complete the
hardware installation as outlined in this section, then refer to Chapter 10,
"Setting Up HP- UX for Printers Using SAM" for set up instructions using
SAM.
If you are using commands to set up HP- UX to communicate with your device,
complete the hardware installation as outlined in this section. Once the
hardware installation is complete, use the information provided in these tables
to complete the software set up as outlined in Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices
Using HP- UX Commands".

9-8

Installing Printers

HP 2227 A/B QuietJet Plus
and HP 2228A/B QuietJet Printers
Table 9·2.
HP 2227 A/28A
Connected to RS·232·C Interfaces

Device Name

Path
Name 1

File
Major Device Select
Type Number Driver Code

Minor
Number

HP 2227 A/28A

/dev/lp2227a

98626

HP 2227 A/28A

/dev/lp2227a

98626

92
93

Ox140004

Ox090004
Ox090004

/dev/lp2227a

98628

20 4

HP 2227 A/28A, port 0 /dev/lp2227a

98642

13 5

OxOdOOO4

HP 2227 A/28A, port 1 /dev/lp2227a

98642

135

OxOd0104

98642

135

OxOd0204
OxOd0304

HP 2227 A/28A

HP 2227 A/28A, port 2 /dev/lp2227a

HP 2227 A/28A, port 3 /dev/lp2227a

98642

13 5

HP 2227 A/28A, port 0 /dev/lp2227a

98642

28 6

Ox1cOOO4

98642

28 6

Ox1c0104

98642

28 6

Ox1c0204
Ox1c0304

HP 2227 A/28A, port 1 /dev/lp2227a
HP 2227 A/28A, port 2 /dev/lp2227a

c
c

1
1

HP 2227 A/28A, port 3 /dev/lp2227a

98642

28 6

HP 2227 A/28A, port 4 /dev/lp2227a

98642

28 6

Ox1c0404

98642

28 6

Ox1c0504

98642

28 6

Ox1c0604

98642

28 6

Ox1c0704

HP 2227 A/28A, port 5 /dev/lp2227a
HP 2227 A/28A, port 6 /dev/lp2227a
HP 2227 A/28A, port 7 /dev/lp2227a

c
c
c

1
1
1

1 Device file naming conventions are described in Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX
Commands" .
2 Built-in RS-232-C port.
3 HP 98626A RS-232-C Interface.
4 HP 98628A Datacomm Interface.
5 HP 98642A 4-Channel Multiplexer Interface.
6 HP 98638A 8-Channel Multiplexer Interface

Installing Printers

9·9

HP 2227 A/B QuietJet Plus
and HP 2228A/8 QuietJet Printers
Table 9-3.
HP 22278/288
Connected to HP-IB Interfaces

Device Name

Path
Name 1

File
Major
Type Number

Device
Driver

Select
Minor
Code Number 2

HP 2227B & 2228B /dev/lp2227b 3

printer

Ox07OnOO

HP 2227B & 2228B /dev/rlp2227b 3

hpib

Ox07OnOO

HP 2227B & 2228B /dev/lp2227b3

printer

Ox080nOO

HP 2227B & 2228B /dev/rlp2227b 3

hpib

Ox080nOO

1 Device file naming conventions are described in Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX
Commands" .
2 n represents the HP-IB bus address. Replace n with a 1 is the bus address was set to 1, use 4 if
the bus address was set to 4, and so on.
3 Substitute 2228b for 2227b in path name if applicable.
4 Built-in HP-IB Interface.
5 HP 98624A Standard-Speed HP-IB Interface.

Connecting the Printer
The following summary supplements the procedures outlined in your hardware
installation documentation for this printer. Read through this summary before
proceding with the installation.
1. Verify that the drivers required for this printer are included in your
/etc/conf/dfile file.

lf you are adding a device that utilizes an interface type that is new on
your system, you may have to add one or more necessary device drivers to
the kernel configuration file. To verify that the necessary drivers, listed
in the tables in the previous section, are part of your current kernel
configuration file, you can:

9-10

Installing Printers

HP 2227 A/B QuietJet Plus
and HP 2228A/B QuietJet Printers

or
• Look in your dfile for the drivers. If the drivers are in your kernel
configuration file, go on to step 2 now.
If the drivers are not in the /etc/conf/dfile, or are commented out
with a comment symbol (such as the * sign), edit the dfile to either
add the driver or remove the comment marks. You must reconfigure
the kernel if you edit the dfile for any reason. Use the /etc/config
program to do this. See Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX
Commands" for detailed information on this procedure.
2. Play it safe.

b. TURN OFF the computer and unplug the power cord.
3. Determine your interface.
Table 9-4. Interface Options
Serial Interfaces1

HP-IB Interfaces 2

Built-in RS-232-C

Built-in standard-speed HP-IB

HP 98626A RS- 232-C

HP 98624A standard-speed HP-IB

2 A void placing the printer on the same HP-IB interface used by a disk or tape
drive. A dedicated HP-IB interface is recoIllIllended.

Installing Printers

9-11

HP 2227 AlB QuietJet Plus
and HP 2228A/B QuietJet Printers

Caution

Many computer systems have both parallel and RS-232-C
ports. These ports frequently appear identical. Make sure you
plug your cable into the correct port or you could damage your
device.

Note

Your printer may be pre configured at the factory to operate
in parallel mode. If you intend to connect the printer to a
different type of interface, you will need to reconfigure the
printer for operation mode. See your printer's documentation
for details.

4. If you are using a standard HP-IB interface, set the HP-IB bus address
now. If not, skip this step.

Note

a. Choose an available HP-IB bus address and make note of it.
b. Set the HP-IB bus address according to the instructions in the
installation documentation provided with the device.

5. Ensure all power switches on the device and on the computer are in the
OFF position.

9·12

Installing Printers

HP 2227 A/B QuietJet Plus
and HP 2228A/B QuietJet Printers

6. Connect the printer to your computer.
Connect the printer to your computer following the instructions provided in
the hardware installation manual for the device.
If you are connected to an RS-232-C interface, the following data
transmission values should be checked:

•
•
•
•
•

baud rate
parity
data length
handshake
symbol set (character set)

7. Connect the power cord.
8. Turn on the device.
9. If you have any other devices to connect, do so now.
10. Plug in and power on the computer.
Hardware installation complete! You may now proceed to the set up
procedures in Chapter 10, "Setting Up HP-UX for Printers Using SAM" if you
are using SAM. If you are not using SAM, refer to Chapter 14, "Setting Up
Devices Using HP-UX Commands" for instructions on how to configure your
system using commands.

Installing Printers

9-13

HP 25638, 25648, and 25668 Printers
The HP 2563B, 2564B, and 2566B are dot-matrix impact printers. They
connect to your computer system via the HP-IB or RS-232-C interfaces.
Refer to Appendix B, "Series 400 Support Matrix" for Series 400 hardware and
software support information.

Note

These printers are installed by an HP Customer Engineer.
Make arrangements for installation with your nearest HP Sales
and Service office.

9·14

Installing Printers

Before Installing This Device
Before you have this printer installed:
• Refer to the manuals that came with your printer for instructions on
unpacking and preparing your printer for installation. Keep these manuals
handy. You will need to refer to them during this procedure.

Note

Your printer might be pre configured at the factory to operate
in serial mode. If you intend to connect the printer to an
HP-IB interface, you will need to reconfigure the printer for
this operation mode. See your printer's documentation for
details.

Caution

If you are adding this device to a cluster-node, you must be
logged into that node to do HP- UX configuration tasks.

For more information about adding devices to a system
configured as an HP- UX cluster, refer to Managing Clusters of
HP 9000 Computers, Chapter 12, "Adding Peripherals to a
Cluster" .

Installing Printers

9-15

HP 2563B, 2564B, and 2566B Printers

If you are using commands to set up HP- UX to communicate with your device,
complete the hardware installation as outlined in the following section. Once
the hardware installation is complete, use the information provided in these
tables to complete the software set up as outlined in Chapter 14, "Setting Up
Devices Using HP -UX Commands".
Table 9-5.
HP 2563/64/66B
Connected to Built-in HP-IB Interface (Select Code 7)

Device Name

Path
Name 1

File Major
Type Number

Device
Driver

Minor
Number 2

HP 2563/64/66B Opt. 200 non-CIPER /dev/lp2563

printer Ox070nOO

HP 2563/64/66B Opt. 200 non-CIPER /dev/rlp2563

printer Ox070n01

HP 2563/64/66B Opt. 850 CIPER

/dev/lp2563

ciper

Ox070nOO

HP 2563/64/66B Opt. 850 CIPER

/dev/rlp2563

ciper

Ox070n01

1 If you have an HP 2564B or HP 2566B, substitute 2564 or 2566 for 2563 in the path name. Device file
naming conventions are described in Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX Commands".
2 n represents the HP-IB bus address. Replace n with a 1 if the address was set to 1, use 4 if the address was
set to 4, and so on.

9-16

Installing Printers

HP 25638, 25648, and 25668 Printers
Table 9-6.
HP 2563/64/668
Connected to HP 98624 HP-18 Interface (Select Code 8)
Device Name

Path
Name 1

Major
File
Type Number

Device
Driver

Minor
Number 2

/dev/lp2563

printer Ox080nOO

HP 2563/64/66B Opt. 200 lloll-CIPER /dev/rlp2563

printer Ox080n01

HP 2563/64/66B Opt. 200 lloll-CIPER

HP 2563/64/66B Opt. 850 CIPER

/dev/lp2563

ciper

Ox080nOO

HP 2563/64/66B Opt. 850 CIPER

/dev/rlp2563

ciper

Ox080n01

Installing Printers

9-17

HP 25638, 25648, and 25668 Printers

If you are adding a device that utilizes an interface type that is new on your
system, you may have to add one or more necessary device drivers to the
kernel configuration file. To verify that the necessary drivers, listed in the
tables in the previous section, are part of your current kernel configuration
file, you can:
• Use SAM for the whole procedure. SAM will check your dfile for the
necessary device drivers, add any that are missing, and reconfigure the
kernel for you at this time. See the chapter on setting up HP- UX using
SAM that follows this chapter; then go on to step 2.
or
• Look in your dfile for the drivers. If the drivers are in your kernel
configuration file, go on to step 2 now.
If the drivers are not in the /etc/conf/dfile, or are commented out with
a comment symbol (such as the * sign), edit the df ile to either add the
driver or remove the comment marks. You must reconfigure the kernel if
you edit the dfile for any reason. Use the /etc/config program to do
this. See Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices Using HP- UX Commands" for
detailed information on this procedure.
2. Play it safe.

9-18

Installing Printers

HP 25638, 25648, and 25668 Printers

3. Determine your interface.
Table 9-7. Interface Options
Serial Interfaces 1

HP-IB Interfaces 2

Built-in RS-232-C

Built-in standard-speed HP-IB

HP 98626A RS-232-C

HP 98624A standard-speed HP-IB

HP 98628A Datacomm
HP 98642A 4-Channel Muliplexer
HP 98638A 8-Channel Mulitplexer
HP 98644A RS-232-C
1 If you have more than one serial port, make note of the address of the serial port
you are using. You will need this information for testing and configuring your
device.
2 Avoid placing the printer on the same HP-IB interface used by a disk or tape
drive. A dedicated HP-IB interface is recommended.

Caution

Note

Your printer might be preconfigured at the factory to operate
in serial mode. If you intend to connect the printer to an
HP-IB interface, you might need to reconfigure the printer for
serial operation mode. See your printer's documentation for
details.

Installing Printers

9-19

HP 25638, 25648, and 25668 Printers

4. If you are using a standard HP-IB interface, set the HP-IB bus address now.
If not, skip this step.

Note

a. Choose an available HP-IB bus address and make note of it.
b. Set the HP -IB bus address according to the instructions in the
installation documentation provided with the device.

5. Ensure all power switches on the device and on the computer are in the OFF
position.
6. Connect the printer to your computer.
Connect the printer to your computer following the instructions provided in
the hardware installation manual for the device.
If you connect your printer to an RS-232-C interface, check the following
data transmission values:
•
•
•
•
•

baud rate
parity
data length
handshake
symbol set (character set)

7. Connect the power cord.
8. Turn on the device.
9. Plug in and power on the computer.

Hardware installation complete! You can now proceed to the set up procedures
in Chapter 10, "Setting Up HP- UX for Printers Using SAM" if you are using
SAM. If you are not using SAM, refer to Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices
Using HP-UX Commands" for instructions on how to configure your system
using commands.

9-20

Installing Printers

HP 2684A/D/P LaserJet 2000 Printer
The HP 2684A/D/P connects to the computer via an RS-232/422 or parallel
interface.
Refer to Appendix B, "Series 400 Support Matrix" for Series 400 hardware and
software support information.

Note

Your authorized dealer or HP Service Representative will assist
in the initial set-up and configuration of your printer.

Before Installing This Device
Before having this device installed:
• Refer to the manuals that came with your printer for instructions on
unpacking and preparing your printer for installation. Keep these manuals
handy. You will need to refer to them during this procedure.
• Chapter 1, "Introduction" of this manual gives interface and cabling
guidelines to follow when adding devices to your system. If you have not
added this type of device to your system before, read the material in Chapter
1.
• Plan ahead. Installing new peripherals on your system requires that you shut
down and power off the system. On a multiuser or clustered system, you will
want to warn users and cluster clients in advance that the system (server)
will be coming down. Use the wall or cwall command to do this.

Caution

If you are adding this device to a cluster-node, you must be
logged into that node to do HP- UX configuration tasks.
For more information about adding devices to a system
configured as an HP- UX cluster, refer to Managing Clusters of
HP 9000 Computers, Chapter 12, "Adding Peripherals to a
Cluster" .
9

Installing Printers

9·21

HP 2684A/D/P LaserJet 2000 Printer

What You're Going To Do
The following tables contain detailed HP- UX software set up information.
If you use SAM to install this device, you will not need all this detailed
information. Complete the hardware installation as outlined in the following
section, then refer to Chapter 10, "Setting Up HP-UX for Printers Using SAM"
for set up instructions.
If you are using commands to set up HP- UX to communicate with your device,
complete the hardware installation as outlined in the following section. Once
the hardware installation is complete, use the information provided in these
tables to complete the software set up as outlined in Chapter 14, "Setting Up
Devices Using HP- UX Commands".

9·22

Installing Printers

HP 2684AjDjP LaserJet 2000 Printer
Table 9-8.
HP 2684AjD
Connected to RS·232·C Interfaces
Device Name

Path
Name 1

File
Major Driver Select
Type Number Name Code

Minor
Number

HP 2684AjD jP

/dev/lp2684

98626

Ox090004

HP 2684AjD jP

/dev/lp2684

98628

20 3

Ox140004

HP 2684AjD, port 0 /dev/lp2684

98642

13 4

OxOdOOO4

HP 2684AjD, port 1 /dev/lp2684

98642

13 4

OxOd0104
OxOd0204

HP 2684AjD, port 2 /dev/lp2684

98642

13 4

HP 2684AjD, port 3 /dev/lp2684

98642

13 4

OxOd0304

HP 2684AjD, port 0 /dev/lp2684

98642

28 5

Ox1cOOO4

HP 2684AjD, port 1 /dev/lp2684

98642

28 5

Ox1c0104

HP 2684AjD, port 2 /dev/lp2684

98642

28 5

Ox1c0204

HP 2684AjD, port 3 /dev/lp2684

98642

28 5

Ox1c0304

HP 2684AjD, port 4 /dev/lp2684

98642

28 5

Ox1c0404

HP 2684AjD, port 5 /dev/lp2684

98642

28 5

Ox1c0504

HP 2684AjD, port 6 /dev/lp2684

98642

28 5

Ox1c0604

HP 2684AjD, port 7 /dev/lp2684

98642

28 5

Ox1c0704

1 Device file naming conventions are described in Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices Using
HP-UX Commands".
2 Built-in RS-232-C Interface and HP 98626A RS-232-C Interface.
3 HP 98628A Datacomm Interface.
4 HP 98642A 4-Channel Multiplexer Interface
5 HP 98638A 8-Channel Multiplexer Interface

Installing Printers

9·23

HP 2684A/D/P LaserJet 2000 Printer
Table 9-9.
HP 2684A/D
Connected to a Parallel Interface
Device Name

Path
Name 1

HP 2684A/D /dev/lp2684

Major
File
Type Nwnber
c

Driver
Name

Select
Code

Minor
Nwnber

paralle1 2

23 3

Ox170000

1 Device file naming conventions are described in Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices Using
HP-UX Co:rrunands".
2 The parallel driver requires the "hpib" driver to be part of the kernel configuration.
3 Built-in Parallel Interface.

9-24

Installing Printers

HP 2684AjDjP LaserJet 2000 Printer

If you are adding a device that utilizes an interface type that is new on your
system, you may have to add one or more necessary device drivers to the
kernel configuration file. To verify that the necessary drivers, listed in the
tables in the previous section, are part of your current kernel configuration
file, you can:
• Use SAM for the whole procedure. SAM will check your dfile for the
necessary device drivers, add any that are missing, and reconfigure the
kernel for you at this time. See the chapter on setting up HP- UX using
SAM that follows this chapter; then go on to step 2.
or
• Look in your dfile for the drivers. If the drivers are in your kernel
configuration file, go on to step 2 now.
If the drivers are not in the /ete/eonf/dfile, or are commented out with
a comment symbol (such as the * sign), edit the dfile to either add the
driver or remove the comment marks. You must reconfigure the kernel if
you edit the dfile for any reason. Use the /ete/eonfig program to do
this. See Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices Using HP- UX Commands" for
detailed information on this procedure.

2. Play it safe.

a. Shut down and halt the system using the /ete/shutdown -h command.

If you are operating in a diskless cluster, see Managing Clusters of HP
9000 Computers for additional information on shutting down the system.

b. TURN OFF the computer and unplug the power cord.
9

Installing Printers

9-25

HP 2684A/DjP LaserJet 2000 Printer

3. Determine your interface.
Table 9-10. Interface Options
Serial Interfaces 1

Built-in RS-232-C

Parallel Interfaces

Built-in PARALLEL

HP 98626A RS-232-C
HP 98628A Datacomm
HP 98642A 4-Channel Muliplexer
HP 98638A 8-Channel Mulitplexer
HP 98644A RS-232-C
1 If you have more than one serial port, make note of the address of
the serial port you are using. You will need this information for
testing and configuring your device.

Caution

4. Set the printer's switches.
Refer to the LaserJet 2000 Technical Reference Manual for the appropriate
configuration settings.
5. Ensure all power switches on the device and on the computer are in the OFF
position.

9-26

Installing Printers

HP 2684AjDjP LaserJet 2000 Printer

•
•
•
•
•

baud rate
parity
data length
handshake
symbol set (character set)

7. Connect the power cord.
8. Turn on the device.
9. Plug in and power on the computer.
Hardware installation complete! You can now proceed to the set up procedures
in Chapter 10, "Setting Up HP-UX for Printers Using SAM" if you are using
SAM. If you are not using SAM, refer to Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices
Using HP-UX Commands" for instructions on how to configure your system
using commands.

Installing Printers

9·27

HP 2686A/D Laser Jet,
HP 33440A LaserJet-ll, and
HP 33447A LaserJet-IID Printer
The HP 2686A/D LaserJet, HP 33440A LaserJet-II, and HP 33447A
LaserJet-IID printers connect to the computer via an RS-232-C or parallel
interface.
The LaserJet-II and LaserJet-IID printers support network based printing via a
LAN interface card installed in the printer. Detailed installation instructions
are provided with the interface card.
Refer to Appendix B, "Series 400 Support Matrix" for Series 400 hardware and
software support information.

Before Installing This Device
Before you install this device:
• Refer to the manuals that came with your printer for instruction on
unpacking and preparing your printer for installation.

• If you have not added this type of device to your system before, read the
material in Chapter 1, "Introduction". It provides interface and cabling
guidelines to follow when adding devices to your system.
• Have the documentation shipped with your device handy. You will need to
refer to it during this procedure.
• Plan ahead. Installing new peripherals on your system requires that you shut
down and power off the system. On a multiuser or clustered system, you will
want to warn users and cluster clients in advance that the system (server)
will be coming down. Use the wall or cwall command to do this.

Caution

If you are adding this device to a cluster-node, you must be
logged into that node to do HP- UX configuration tasks.
For more information about adding devices to a system
configured as an HP- UX cluster, refer to Managing Clusters of
HP 9000 Computers, Chapter 12, "Adding Peripherals to a
Cluster" .

9-28

Installing Printers

HP 2686AjD LaserJet
HP 33440A LaserJet·1I
HP 33447 A LaserJet·IID Printers

What You're GOing To Do
The following tables contain detailed HP- UX software set up information.
If you use SAM to install this device, you will not need all this detailed
information. Complete the hardware installation as outlined in the following
section, then refer to Chapter 10, "Setting Up HP- UX for Printers Using SAM"
for set up instructions.
If you are using commands to set up HP- UX to communicate with your device,
complete the hardware installation as outlined in the following section. Once
the hardware installation is complete, use the information provided in these
tables to complete the software set up as outlined in Chapter 14, "Setting Up
Devices Using HP- UX Commands".

Installing Printers

9·29

HP 2686AJD LaserJet
HP 33440A LaserJet-1i
HP 33447 A LaserJet;.IID Printers
Table 9-11.
HP 2686AjD, 33440A, or 33447 A
Connected to RS-232-C Interfaces
Device Name

Path
Name 1

Major Driver Select Minor
File
Type Number Name Code Number

HP 2686A/D and 33440A/47A

/dev/lp2686

98626

Ox090004

HP 2686A/D and 33440A/47A

/dev/lp2686

98628

20 3

Ox140004
OxOdOOO4

HP 2686A/D and 33440A/47A, port 0 /dev/lp2684

98642

13 4

HP 2686A/D and 33440A/47A, port 1 /dev/lp2684

98642

13 4

OxOd0104

HP 2686A/D and 33440A/47A, port 2 /dev/lp2684

98642

13 4

OxOd0204
OxOd0304

HP 2686A/D and 33440A/47A, port 3 /dev/lp2684

98642

134

HP 2686A/D and 33440A/47A, port 0 /dev/lp2684

98642

28 5

Ox1cOOO4

HP 2686A/D and 33440A/47A, port 1 /dev/lp2684

98642

28 5

Ox1c0104

HP 2686A/D and 33440A/47A, port 2 /dev/lp2684

98642

28 5

Ox1c0204

HP 2686A/D and 33440A/47A, port 3 /dev/lp2684

98642

28 5

Ox1c0304
Ox1c0404

HP 2686A/D and 33440A/47A, port 4 /dev/lp2684

98642

28 5

HP 2686A/D and 33440A/ 4 7 A, port 5 /dev/lp2684

98642

28 5

Ox1c0504

HP 2686A/D and 33440A/47A, port 6 /dev/lp2684

98642

28 5

Ox1c0604

98642

28 5

Ox1c0704

HP 2686A/D and 33440A/47A, port 7 /dev/lp2684

1 Device file naming conventions are described in Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX
COIDIllands" .
2 Built-in RS-232-C Interface and HP 98626A RS-232-C Interface.
3 HP 98628A DatacoIDIll Interface.
4 HP 98642A 4-Channel Multiplexer Interface
5 HP 98638A 8-Channel Multiplexer Interface

9-30

Installing Printers

HP 2686A/D LaserJet
HP 33440A LaserJet·1I
HP 33447A LaserJet·IID Printers

• Use SAM for the whole procedure. SAM will check your dfile for the
necessary device drivers, add any that are missing, and reconfigure the
kernel for you at this time. See the chapter on setting up HP- UX using
SAM that follows this chapter; then go on to step 2.
or
• Look in your dfile for the drivers. If the drivers are in your kernel
configuration file, go on to step 2 now.
If the drivers are not in the /etc/conf/dfile, or are commented out with
a comment symbol (such as the * sign), edit the dfile to either add the
driver or remove the comment marks. You must reconfigure the kernel if
you edit the dfile for any reason. Use the /etc/config program to do
this. See Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX Commands" for
detailed information on this procedure.
2. Play it safe.

b. TURN OFF the computer and unplug the power cord.
9

Installing Printers

9·31

HP 2686AJD LaserJet
HP 33440A LaserJet·1I
HP 33447 A LaserJet·IID Printers

3. Determine your interface.
Table 9·12. Interface Options

Serial Interfaces l

Parallel Interfaces

Built-in PARALLEL

Built-in RS-232-C
HP 98626A RS-232-C
HP 98628A Datacomm
HP 98642A 4-Channel Muliplexer
HP 98638A 8-Channel Mulitplexer
HP 98644A RS-232-C

1 If you have more than one serial port, make note of the address of
the serial port you are using. You will need this information for
+~_+:

____ ...1

- - - ----0

Caution

--~

_~_.,:::_._:

___

----0---.. .

.. _ ...1 __ .: __
--

-~~.

4. Ensure all power switches on the device and on the computer are in the OFF
position.
5. Configure and connect the printer to your computer.
Refer to the documentation shipped with your printer to configure the
printer for either the RS-232-C serial interface or the parallel interface.
Connect the printer to your computer following the instructions provided in
the hardware installation manual for the device.

9·32

Installing Printers

HP 2686A/D LaserJet
HP 33440A LaserJet-1i
HP 33447 A LaserJet-IiD Printers

6. Connect the power cord.
7. Turn on the device.
8. Plug in and power on the computer.
Hardware installation complete! You can now proceed to the set up procedures
in Chapter 10, "Setting Up HP-UX for Printers Using SAM" if you are using
SAM. If you intend to use your printer as a network- based printer, use the
procedure entitled "Adding a Network-Based Printer Using SAM" in the next
chapter. If you are not using SAM, refer to Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices
Using HP- UX Commands" for instructions on how to configure your system
using commands.

Installing Printers

9-33

HP 33449A LaserJet III,
HP 33459A LaserJet 1110, and
HP 33491A LaserJet IIlsi Printers
The HP 33449A LaserJet III, 33459A LaserJet IIID and 33491A LaserJet
IIIsi printers can connect to your system via an RS-232-C (serial) or parallel
interface.
The LaserJet III, IIID, and IIIsi printers also support network based printing
via a LAN interface card installed in the printer. Detailed installation
instructions are provided with the interface card.
Refer to Appendix B, "Series 400 Support Matrix" for Series 400 hardware
software support information.

9·34

Installing Printers

~nd

HP 33449A LaserJet III,
HP 33459A LaserJet 1110, and
HP 33491A LaserJet IIIsi Printers

Before Installing This Device
Before you install this device:
• Refer to your printer manuals for instructions on unpacking and preparing
your printer for installation.
• If you have not added this type of device to your system before, read the
material in Chapter 1, "Introduction". It provides interface and cabling
guidelines to follow when adding devices to your system.

• Have the documentation shipped with your device handy. You will need to
refer to it during this procedure.
• Plan ahead. Installing new peripherals on your system requires that you shut
down and power off the system. On a multiuser or clustered system, you will
want to warn users and cluster clients in advance that the system (server)
will be coming down. Use the wall or cwall command to do this.

Caution

If you are adding this device to a cluster-node, you must be
logged into that node to do HP- UX configuration tasks.

For more information about adding devices to a system
configured as an HP- UX cluster, refer to Managing Clusters of
HP 9000 Computers, Chapter 12, "Adding Peripherals to a
Cluster" .

Installing Printers

9-35

HP 33449A LaserJet III,
HP 33459A LaserJet 1110, and
HP 33491A LaserJet IIIsi Printers

What You're Going To Do
The following tables contain detailed HP- UX software set up information.
If you use SAM to install this device, you will not need all this detailed
information. Complete the hardware installation as outlined in the following
section, then refer to Chapter 10, "Setting Up HP-UX for Printers Using SAM"
for set up instructions.
If you are using commands to set up HP- UX to communicate with your device,
complete the hardware installation as outlined in the following section. Once
the hardware installation is complete, use the information provided in these
tables to complete the software set up as outlined in Chapter 14, "Setting Up
Devices Using HP- UX Commands".
Table 9-13.
HP LaserJet III, 1110 or IIIsi Printer
Connected to a Parallel Interface

Device Name

Path
Name 1

HP 33449A LaserJ et III /dev/lp33449a 2

File
Major
Type Number
c

Driver
Name

Select
Code

Minor
Number

paralle1 3

23 4

Ox170000

1 Device file naming conventions are described in Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX
Commands".
2 Substitute 33459 and 33491 for those models.
3 The parallel driver requires the "hpib" driver to be part of the kernel configuration.
4 Built in parallel interface.

9-36

Installing Printers

HP 33449A LaserJet III,
HP 33459A LaserJet 1110, and
HP 33491A LaserJet IIIsi Printers
Table 9-14.
HP LaserJet III, 1110 or IIIsi Printer
Connected to RS-232-C Interfaces

Device Name
HP 33449A LaserJet III
HP 33449A LaserJet III

Path
Name 1
/dev/lp33449A
/dev/lp33449A

File
Major Driver Select
Type Number Name Code
c
c

1
1

Minor
Number

98626

Ox090004

98628

20 3

Ox140004
OxOdOOO4

/dev/lp33449A

98642

13 4

HP 33449A LaserJ et III, /dev/lp33449A
port 1

98642

13 4

OxOdOl04

HP 33449A LaserJet III, /dev/lp33449A
port 2

98642

13 4

OxOd0204

HP 33449A LaserJet III, /dev/lp33449A
port 3

98642

13 4

OxOd0304

HP 33449A LaserJet III, /dev/lp33449A
port 0

98642

28 5

OxlcOOO4

HP 33449A LaserJet III, /dev/lp33449A
port 1

98642

28 5

OxlcOl04

HP 33449A LaserJet III, /dev/lp33449A
port 2

98642

28 5

Oxlc0204

HP 33449A LaserJ et III, /dev/lp33449A
port 3

98642

28 5

Oxlc0304

HP 33449A LaserJ et III, /dev/lp33449A
port 4

98642

28 5

Oxlc0404

HP 33449A LaserJet III, /dev/lp33449A
port 5

98642

28 5

Oxlc0504

HP 33449A LaserJet III, /dev/lp33449A
port 6

98642

28 5

Oxlc0604

HP 33449A LaserJet III, /dev/lp33449A
port 7

98642

28 5

Oxlc0704

HP 33449A LaserJet III
port 0

1 Substitute 33459 and 33491 for those models. Device file naming conventions are described in
Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX Commands".

2 Built-in RS-232-C Interface and HP 98626A RS-232-C Interface.
3 HP 98628A Datacomm Interface.
4 HP 98642A 4-Channel Multiplexer Interface
5 HP 98638A 8-Channel Multiplexer Interface

Installing Printers

9·37

HP 33449A LaserJet III,
HP 33459A LaserJet 1110, and
HP 33491 A Laser Jet IIIsi Printers

• Use SAM for the whole procedure. SAM will check your dfile for the
necessary device drivers, add any that are missing, and reconfigure the
kernel for you at this time. See the chapter on setting up HP- UX using
- ~AlVl tnat IOllOWS "(;nlS cnapter; "(;nen go on La SLep L..
or
• Look in your dfile for the drivers. If the drivers are in your kernel
configuration file, go on to step 2 now.
If the drivers are not in the /ete/eonf/dfile, or are commented out with
a comment symbol (such as the * sign), edit the dfile to either add the
driver or remove the comment marks. You must reconfigure the kernel if
you edit the dfile for any reason. Use the / ete/ eonfig program to do
this. See Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX Commands" for
detailed information on this procedure.
2. Play it safe.

a. Shut down and halt the system using the /ete/shutdown -h command.
If you are operating in a diskless cluster, see Managing Clusters of HP
9000 Computers for additional information on shutting down the system.

b. TURN OFF the computer and unplug the power cord.
9

9·38

Installing Printers

HP 33449A LaserJet III,
HP 33459A LaserJet 1110, and
HP 33491A LaserJet IIIsi Printers

3. Determine your interface.
Table 9·15. Interface Options
Serial Interfaces 1

Built-in RS-232-C

Parallel Interfaces

Built-in PARALLEL

Caution

4. Ensure all power switches on the device and on the computer are in the OFF
position.
5. Connect the printer to your computer.
Connect the printer to your computer following the instructions provided in
the hardware installation manual for the device.
If you are connected to an RS-232-C interface, the following data
transmission values should be checked:

•
•
•
•
•

baud rate
parity
data length
handshake
symbol set (character set)

Installing Printers

9·39

HP 33449A LaserJet III,
HP 33459A LaserJet 1110, and
HP 33491 A LaserJet IIIsi Printers

6. Connect the power cord.
7. Turn on the device.
S. Plug in and power on the computer.

Hardware installation complete! You can now proceed to the set up procedures
in Chapter 10, "Setting Up HP-UX for Printers Using SAM" if you are using
SAM. If you intend to use your printer as a network-based printer, use the
procedure entitled "Adding a Network-Based Printer Using SAM", in the next
chapter. If you are not using SAM, refer to Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices
Using HP- UX Commands" for instructions on how to configure your system
using commands.

9-40

Installing Printers

HP 2932A and HP 2934A Printers
The HP 2930 Series of printers provide features for several levels of printer
categories. However, installation for all printers in the series is common. These
printers connect to your system via the HP-IB interface.
Refer to Appendix B, "Series 400 Support Matrix" for Series 400 hardware and
software support information.

Before Installing This Device
Before you install this device:
• Refer to the manuals that came with your printer for instructions on
unpacking and preparing the printer for installation.
• If you have not added this type of device to your system before, read the
material in Chapter 1, "Introduction". It provides interface and cabling
guidelines to follow when adding devices to your system.

Caution

If you are adding this device to a cluster-node, you must be
logged into that node to do HP- UX configuration tasks.

For more information about adding devices to a system
configured as an HP- UX cluster, refer to Managing Clusters of
HP 9000 Computers, Chapter 12, "Adding Peripherals to a
Cluster" .

Installing Printers

9·41

HP 2932A and HP 2934A Printers

What You're Going To Do
The following tables contain detailed HP- UX software set up information.
If you use SAM to install this device, you will not need all this detailed
information. Complete the hardware installation as outlined in the following
section, then refer to Chapter 10, "Setting Up HP-UX for Printers Using SAM"
for set up instructions.
If you are using commands to set up HP- UX to communicate with your device,
complete the hardware installation as outlined in the following section. Once
the hardware installation is complete, use the information provided in these
tables to complete the software set up as outlined in Chapter 14, "Setting Up
Devices Using HP- UX Commands".
Table 9·16.
HP 2932J34A
Connected to Hp·IB Interfaces
Driver
Name

Select
Code

Minor
Number 2

printer

Ox070nOO 4

printer

Ox070n01 S

/dev/lp2932

printer

Ox080nOO 4

HP 2932/34A /dev/rlp2932

printer

Ox080n01 S

File
Major
Type Number

Device Name

Path
Name 1

HP 2932/34A

/dev/lp2932

HP 2932/34A /dev/rlp2932
HP 2932/34A

1 If you have an HP 2934A, substitute 2934 for 2932 in the path name. Device file
naming conventions are described in Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX
Commands".
2 n represents the HP-IB bus address. Replace n with a 1 if the bus address was set to 1,
use 4 if the bus address was set to 4, and so on.
3 Built-in HP-IB Interface.
4 Amigo HP-IB protocol-minor number bit
S Non-protocol-minor number bit
6 HP 98624 HP-IB Interface

9·42

Installing Printers

a set.

a not

set.

HP 2932A and HP 2934A Printers

• Use SAM for the whole procedure. SAM will check your df ile for the
necessary device drivers, add any that are missing, and reconfigure the
kernel for you at this time. See the chapter on setting up HP - UX using
SAM that follows this chapter; then go on to step 2.
or
• Look in your dfile for the drivers. If the drivers are in your kernel
configuration file, go on to step 2 now.
If the drivers are not in the /ete/eonf/dfile, or are commented out
with a comment symbol (such as the * sign), edit the dfile to either
add the driver or remove the comment marks. You must reconfigure
the kernel if you edit the dfile for any reason. Use the / ete/ eonfig
program to do this. See Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX
Commands" for detailed information on this procedure.
2. Play it safe.

a. Shut down and halt the system using the /ete/shutdown -h command.
If you are operating in a diskless cluster, see the System Administration
Tasks manual Chapter 3, "Starting and Stopping HP-UX" for additional
information on shutting down the system.

b. TURN OFF the computer and unplug the power cord.

Installing Printers

9·43

HP 2932A and HP 2934A Printers

3. Determine your interface.
The following standard-speed HP-IB interfaces can be used:
• HP 98624A standard-speed HP-IB interface card
• Built-in standard-speed HP-IB interface

Note

Avoid placing the printer on the same HP-IB interface used
by a disk or tape drive. A dedicated HP-IB interface is
recommended.

4. Set the HP-IB bus address.

Note

Determine which HP-IB addresses are in use by other devices
on this HP-IB card. Use the worksheet at the end of this book
to note already-used addresses.
You are limited to eie:ht devices Der HP-IB card. addrpssps 0
through 7.

a. Choose an available HP-IB bus address and make note of it.
b. Set the HP-IB bus address according to the instructions in the
installation documentation provided with the device.
5. Enable the AMIGO Protocol.
Follow the procedure in your printer's installation material to enable the
AMIGO protocol. This allows HP-UX to pace the printer (time-share the
bus with other devices on the interface) if the printer's address is in the
range 0 to 7.
6. Ensure all power switches on the device and on the computer are in the
OFF position.
7. Connect the printer to your computer, or to the last device on the chain of
HP-IB devices.

Connect the printer to your computer following the instructions provided in
the hardware installation manual for the device.

9·44

Installing Printers

HP 2932A and HP 2934A Printers

8. Connect the power cord.
9. Turn on the device.
10. Plug in and power on the computer.
Hardware installation complete! You can now proceed to the set up procedures
in Chapter 10, "Setting Up HP-UX for Printers Using SAM" if you are using
SAM. If you are not using SAM, refer to Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices
Using HP- UX Commands" for instructions on how to configure your system
using commands.

Installing Printers

9-45

HP 3630A PaintJet Printer
The HP 3630A PaintJet printer connects to your computer through an HP-IB
or RS-232-C interface.
Refer to Appendix B, "Series 400 Support Matrix" for Series 400 hardware and
software support information.

Before Installing This Device
Before you install this device:
• Refer to the manuals that came with your printer for instructions on
unpacking and preparing your printer for installation.
• If you have not added this type of device to your system before, read the
material in Chapter 1, "Introduction". It provides interface and cabling
guidelines to follow when adding devices to your system.

Caution

If you are adding this device to a cluster-node, you must be
logged into that node to do HP- UX configuration tasks.

For more information about adding devices to a system
configured as an HP- UX cluster, refer to Managing Clusters of
HP 9000 Computers, Chapter 12, "Adding Peripherals to a
Cluster" .

9·46

Installing Printers

HP 3630A PaintJet Printer

What You're GOing To Do
The following tables contain detailed HP- UX software set up information.
If you use SAM to install this device, you will not need all this detailed
information. Complete the hardware installation as outlined in the following
section, then refer to Chapter 10, "Setting Up HP-UX for Printers Using SAM"
for set up instructions.
If you are using commands to set up HP- UX to communicate with your device,
complete the hardware installation as outlined in the following section. Once
the hardware installation is complete, use the information provided in these
tables to complete the software set up as outlined in Chapter 14, "Setting Up
Devices Using HP-UX Commands".
Table 9-17.
HP 3630A PaintJet
Connected to HP-IB Interfaces

Device Name

Path
Name 1

File
Major
Type Number

Driver
Name

Minor
Select
Code Number 2

/dev/lp3630

printer

Ox070nOO

HP 3630A PaintJ et /dev/rlp3630

hpib

Ox070nOO

HP 3630A PaintJ et

printer

Ox080nOO

hpib

Ox080nOO

HP 3630A PaintJ et

/dev/lp3630

HP 3630A PaintJet /dev/rlp3630

1 Device file naming conventions are described in Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices Using
HP-UX Commands".
2 n representes the HP-IB bus address. Replace n with a 1 if the bus address was set to 1, use
4 if the bus address was set to 4, and so on.
3 Built-in HP-IB Interface.
4 HP 98624 HP-IB Interface.

Installing Printers

9-47

HP 3630A PaintJet Printer
Table 9-18.
HP 3630A PaintJet Printer
Connected to RS-232-C Interfaces

Device Name

Path
Name 1

File Major Driver Select
Type Number Name Code

Minor
Number

98626

Ox090004

98628

Ox140004

1
1

20 3

98642

13 4

OxOdOOO4

98642

13 4

OxOdOl04

98642

13 4

OxOd0204

98642

13 4

OxOd0304

98642

28 5

OxlcOOO4

PaintJ et /dev/lp3630A

98642

28 5

OxlcOl04

PaintJ et /dev/lp3630A

98642

28 5

Oxlc0204

PaintJet /dev/lp3630A

98642

28 5

Oxlc0304

PaintJ et /dev/lp3630A

98642

28 5

Oxlc0404

PaintJ et /dev/lp3630A

98642

28 5

Oxlc0504

PaintJ et /dev/lp3630A

98642

28 5

Oxlc0604

PaintJ et /dev/lp3630A

98642

28 5

Oxlc0704

HP 3630A PaintJ et /dev/lp3630A
HP 3630A PaintJ et /dev/lp3630A
HP 3630A PaintJet /dev/lp3630A

port 0
HP 3630A PaintJ et /dev/lp3630A
port 1
HP 3630A PaintJet /dev/lp3630A
port 2
HP 3630A PaintJ et /dev/lp3630A

c
c

port 3
HP 3630A PaintJ et /dev/lp3630A

port 0
HP 3630A
port 1
HP 3630A
port 2
HP 3630A
port 3
HP 3630A
port 4
HP 3630A
port 5
HP 3630A
port 6
HP 3630A
port 7

1 Device file naming conventions are described in Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices Using
HP-UX COIIllIlands".
2 Built-in RS-232-C Interface and HP 98626A RS-232-C Interface.
3 HP 98628A DatacoIIllIl Interface.
4 HP 98642A 4-Channel Multiplexer Interface
5 HP 98638A 8-Channel Multiplexer Interface

9-48

Installing Printers

HP 3630A PaintJet Printer

• Use SAM for the whole procedure. SAM will check your dfile for the
necessary device drivers, add any that are missing, and reconfigure the
kernel for you at this time. See the chapter on setting up HP- UX using
SAM that follows this chapter; then go on to step 2.
or
• Look in your dfile for the drivers. If the drivers are in your kernel
configuration file, go on to step 2 now.
If the drivers are not in the /etc/conf/dfile, or are commented out
with a comment symbol (such as the * sign), edit the dfile to either
add the driver or remove the comment marks. You must reconfigure
the kernel if you edit the dfile for any reason. Use the / etc/ config
program to do this. See Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices Using HP- UX
Commands" for detailed information on this procedure.
2. Play it safe.

b. TURN OFF the computer and unplug the power cord.

Installing Printers

9-49

HP 3630A PaintJet Printer

3. Determine your interface.
Table 9·19. Interface Options

Serial Interfaces 1

HP-IB Interfaces 2

Built-in RS- 232-C

Built-in standard-speed HP-IB

HP 98626A RS-232-C

HP 98624A standard-speed HP-IB

HP 98628A Datacomm
HP 98642A 4-Channel Muliplexer
HP 98638A 8-Channel Mulitplexer
HP 98644A RS-232-C
1 IT you have more than one serial port, make note of the address of the serial port
you are using. You will need this information for testing and configuring your
device.
2 Avoid placing the printer on the same HP-IB interface used by a disk or tape
drive. A dedicated HP-IB interface is recommended.

Caution

Many computer systems have both parallel and RS-232-C
ports. These ports frequently appear identical. Make sure you
plug your cable into the correct port or you could damage your
device.

4. If you are using a standard HP-IB interface, set the HP-IB bus address
now. If not, skip this step.

Note

a. Choose an available HP-IB bus address and make note of it.
b. Set the HP-IB bus address according to the instructions in the
installation documentation provided with the device.
9-50

Installing Printers

HP 3630A PaintJet Printer

5. Enable the AMIGO Protocol.
Follow the procedure in your printer's installation material to enable the
AMIGO protocol. This allows HP- UX to pace the printer (time-share the
bus with other devices on the interface) if the printer's address is in the
range 0 to 7.

6. Ensure all power switches on the device and on the computer are in the
OFF position.
7. Connect the printer to your computer.
Connect the printer to your computer following the instructions provided in
the hardware installation manual for the device.
If you are connected to an RS-232-C interface, the following data
transmission values should be checked:

•
•
•
•
•

baud rate
parity
data length
handshake
symbol set (character set)

Installing Printers

9-51

HP C1602A PaintJet XL Printer
The HP C1602A PaintJet XL printer is a high-speed color printer suited for a
shared, high-volume user environment. Some of the features offered by the HP
C1602A are:
• Presentation mode for highest quality graphics on paper; transparency mode
for top-quality printing on overhead transparency film.
• Eight primary colors with many shades and hues available.
• Unattended, fast print speed (167 characters per second at 10 pitch)
operation.
• Large standard buffer for downloadable fonts.
• Automatic sheet feed for standard paper and transparency sizes; manual feed
capability for non-standard media sizes.
• RS-232-C, Centronics parallel and HP-IB interfaces available.
Refer to Appendix B, "Series 400 Support Matrix" for Series 400 hardware and
software support information.
If you use graphics software, check your software documentation (or software
supplier) for specific computer hardware and memory requirements. When you
install your software, you might have to configure the graphics software.

9-52

Installing Printers

HP C1602A PaintJet XL Printer

Before Installing This Device
Before you install this device:
• Refer to the documentation that came with your printer for instructions on
unpacking and preparing your printer for installation.
• If you have not added this type of device to your system before, read the
material in Chapter 1, "Introduction". It provides interface and cabling
guidelines to follow when adding devices to your system.
• Have the documentation shipped with your device handy. You will need to
refer to it during this procedure.
• Plan ahead. Installing new peripherals on your system requires that you shut
down and power off the system. On a multiuser or clustered system, you will
want to warn users and cluster clients in advance that the system (server)
will be coming down. Use the wall or cwall command to do this.

Caution

Installing Printers

9-53

HP C 1602A PaintJet XL Printer

What You're Going To Do
The following tables contain detailed HP- UX software set up information.
If you use SAM to install this device, you will not need all this detailed
information. Complete the hardware installation as outlined in the following
section, then refer to Chapter 10, "Setting Up HP-UX for Printers Using SAM"
for set up instructions.
If you are using commands to set up HP- UX to communicate with your device,
complete the hardware installation as outlined in the following section. Once
the hardware installation is complete, use the information provided in these
tables to complete the software set up as outlined in Chapter 14, "Setting Up
Devices Using HP -UX Commands".
Table 9-20.
HP C1602A PaintJet XL Printer
Connected to HP-IB Interfaces
Device Name

Path
Name 1

Minor
File
Major Driver Select
Type Number Name Code Number2

HP C1602A Printer /dev/lp1602A

hpib

Ox070nOO

HP C1602A Printer /dev/lp1602A

hpib

Ox080nOO

1 Device file naming conventions are described in Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices Using
HP-UX Commands".
2 n is a number that identifies the bus address. Replace n with a 5 if the address was set to
5, use 7 if the address was set to 7, and so on.
3 Built-in standard-speed HP-IB interface.
4 HP 98624A standard-speed HP-IB interface.

9-54

Installing Printers

HP C 1602A PaintJet XL Printer
Table 9-21.
HP C1602A PaintJet XL Printer
Connected to a Parallel Interface

Device Name

Path
Name 1

Major
File
Type Number

HP C1602A Printer /dev/ptrxxxx

Driver
Name

Select
Code

Minor
Number

paralle1 2

23 3

Ox170000

1 Device file naming conventions are described in Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX
COIllIllands" .
2 The parallel driver requires the "hpib" driver to be part of the kernel configuration.
3 Built in parallel interface.

Table 9-22.
HP C1602A PaintJet XL Printer
Connected to RS-232-C Interfaces

Device Name

Path
Name 1

File
Major Driver Select
Type Number Name Code

HP C1602A Printer /dev/lp1602A
HP C1602A Printer /dev/lp1602A

c
c

1
1

Minor
Number

98626

Ox090004

98628

20 3

Ox140004
OxOdOOO4

HP C1602A Printer /dev/lp1602A
port 0

98642

13 4

HP C1602A Printer /dev/lp1602A

98642

13 4

OxOd0104

98642

13 4

OxOd0204

98642

13 4

OxOd0304

port 1
HP C1602A Printer /dev/lp1602A

port 2
HP C1602A Printer /dev/lp1602A

port 3
1 Device file naming conventions are described in Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices Using
HP-UX COIllIllands".
2 Built-in RS-232-C Interface and HP 98626A RS-232-C Interface.
3 HP 98628A DatacoIllIll Interface.
4 HP 98642A 4-Channel Multiplexer Interface

Installing Printers

9-55

HP C 1602A PaintJet XL Printer
Table 9·22.
HP C 1602A PaintJet XL Printer
Connected to RS·232·C Interfaces (continued)

Device Name

Path
Name 1

File
Major Driver Select
Type Number Name Code

Minor
Number

HP C1602A Printer /dev/lp1602A
port 0
HP C 1602A Printer /dev/lp1602A
port 1

98642

28 1

OxlcOOO4

98642

28 1

OxlcOl04

HP C1602A Printer /dev/lp1602A
port 2

98642

28 1

Oxlc0204

HP C1602A Printer /dev/lp1602A
port 3
HP C1602A Printer /dev/lp1602A
port 4

98642

28 1

Oxlc0304

98642

28 1

Oxlc0404

HP C1602A Printer /dev/lp1602A
port 5
HP C1602A Printer /dev/lp1602A
port 6

98642

28 1

Oxlc0504

98642

28 1

Oxlc0604

HP C1602A Printer /dev/lp1602A
port 7

98642

28 1

Oxlc0704

1 HP 98638A 8-Channel Multiplexer Interface

9·56

Installing Printers

HP C 1602A PaintJet XL Printer

If you are adding a device that utilizes an interface type that is new on
your system, you may have to add one or more necessary device drivers to
the kernel configuration file. To verify that the necessary drivers, listed
in the tables in the previous section, are part of your current kernel
configuration file, you can:
• Use SAM for the whole procedure. SAM will check your dfile for the
necessary device drivers, add any that are missing, and reconfigure the
kernel for you at this time. See the chapter on setting up HP- UX using
SAM that follows this chapter; then go on to step 2.
or
• Look in your dfile for the drivers. If the drivers are in your kernel
configuration file, go on to step 2 now.
If the drivers are not in the /ete/eonf/dfile, or are commented out
with a comment symbol (such as the * sign), edit the dfile to either
add the driver or remove the comment marks. You must reconfigure
the kernel if you edit the dfile for any reason. Use the /ete/eonfig
program to do this. See Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX
Commands" for detailed information on this procedure.
2. Play it safe.

Installing Printers

9-57

HP C1602A PaintJet XL Printer

3. Determine your interface.
Table 9·23. Interface Options

Serial Interfaces1

HP-IB Interfaces 2

Built-in RS-232-C

Built-in standard-speed HP-IB

HP 98626A RS-232-C

HP 98624A standard-speed HP-IB

Parallel Interfaces

Built-in PARALLEL

HP 98628A Datacomm
HP 98642A 4-Channel Muliplexer
HP 98638A 8-Channel Mulitplexer
HP 98644A RS-232-C
1 IT you have more than one serial port, make note of the address of the serial port you are using. You will
need this information for testing and configuring your device.
2 Avoid placing the printer on the same HP-IB interface used by a disk or tape drive. A dedicated HP-IB
interface is recommended.

Caution

4. If you are using a standard HP-IB interface, set the HP-IB bus address
now. If not, skip this step.

Note

a. Choose an available HP-IB bus address and make note of it.
b. Set the HP-IB bus address according to the instructions in the
installation documentation provided with the device.
9·58

Installing Printers

HP C1602A PaintJet XL Printer

5. If you are connected to an RS-232-C interface, the following data
transmission values should be set.
•
•
•
•
•

baud rate
parity
media size
handshake
symbol set (character set)

Refer to your printer's documentation for instructions on setting these
values.

Note

Do not reset these values unless you change your
computer /printer system set up.

8. Connect the power cord.
9. Turn on the device.
10. Plug in and power on the computer.
Hardware installation complete! You can now proceed to the set up procedures
in Chapter 10, "Setting Up HP-UX for Printers Using SAM" if you are using
SAM. If you are not using SAM, refer to Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices
Using HP-UX Commands" for instructions on how to configure your system
using commands.

Installing Printers

9-59

HP 2563/64/66/67C Impact Printers
The high-speed, impact line printers discussed in this section replace the
previous models with the same model numbers and a "B" suffix. They are used
in situations requiring high-volume system printing applications.
The
The
The
The

HP
HP
HP
HP

2563C
2564C
2566C
2567C

prints
prints
prints
prints

at
at
at
at

a
a
a
a

rate
rate
rate
rate

of 420 lines per minute.
of 840 lines per minute.
of 1200 lines per minute.
of 1600 lines per minute.

These printers support the following interfaces:
• HP-IB
• RS-232-C
• Parallel
Refer to Appendix B, "Series 400 Support Matrix" for Series 400 hardware and
software support information.

9-60

Installing Printers

HP 2563j64/66j67C Impact Printers

Before Installing This Device
Before having this device installed:
• Refer to your printer's documentation for instructions on unpacking and
preparing your printer for installation.
• Chapter 1, "Introduction" of this manual gives interface and cabling
guidelines to follow when adding devices to your system. If you have not
added this type of device to your system before, read the material in Chapter
1.

Caution

If you are adding this device to a cluster-node, you must be
logged into that node to do HP- UX configuration tasks.

For more information about adding devices to a system
configured as an HP- UX cluster, refer to Managing Clusters of
HP 9000 Computers, Chapter 12, "Adding Peripherals to a
Cluster" .

Installing Printers

9·61

HP 2563j64/66j67C Impact Printers

What You're Going To Do
The following tables contain detailed HP- UX software set up information.
If you use SAM to install this device, you will not need all this detailed
information. Have the hardware installation completed as outlined in the
following section, then refer to Chapter 10, "Setting Up HP- UX for Printers
U sing SAM" for set up instructions using SAM.
If you are using commands to set up HP- UX to communicate with your device,
have the hardware installation completed as outlined in the following section.
Once the hardware installation is complete, use the information provided in
these tables to complete the software set up as outlined in Chapter 14, "Setting
Up Devices Using HP-UX Commands".
Table 9·24.
HP 2563j64j66j67C Impact Printers
Connected to Hp·IB Interfaces

Device Name

Path
Name 1

File Major Driver Select
Minor
Type Number Name Code Number 2

HP 256xC Printers /dev/lp256xC

hpib

Ox070nOO

HP 256xC Printers /dev/lp256xC

hpib

Ox080nOO

1 Replace the x in the device file with the correct number depending on which printer you
are installing. Device file naming conventions are described in Chapter 14, "Setting Up
Devices Using HP -UX Commands".
2 n is a number that identifies the bus address. Replace n with a 5 if the address was set to
5, use 7 if the address was set to 7, and so on.
3 Built-in standard-speed HP-IB interface.
4 HP 98624A standard-speed HP-IB interface.

9·62

Installing Printers

HP 2563/64/66/67C Impact Printers
Table 9-25.
HP 2563/64/66/67C Impact Printers
Connected to a Parallel Interface
Device Name

Path
Name 1

HP 256xC Printers !dev!ptr256xC

Major
File
Type Number
c

Driver
Name

Select
Code

Minor
Number

paralle1 2

23 3

Ox170000

1 Device file naming conventions are described in Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX
Corrrrnands" .
2 The parallel driver requires the "hpib" driver to be part of the kernel configuration.
3 Built in parallel interface.

Installing Printers

9-63

HP 2563j64j66j67C Impact Printers
Table 9-26.
HP 2563j64j66j67C Impact Printers
Connected to RS-232-C Interfaces
Device Name

Path
Name 1

HP 256xC Printers /dev/lp256xC
HP 256xC Printers /dev/lp256xC

File
Major Driver Select
Type Number Name Code
c
c

1
1

Minor
Number

98626

Ox090004

98628

20 3

Ox140004
OxOdOOO4

HP 256xC Printers /dev/lp256xC
port 0

98642

13 4

HP 256xC Printers /dev/lp256xC
port 1

98642

13 4

OxOd0104

HP 256xC Printers /dev/lp256xC
port 2

98642

13 4

OxOd0204

HP 256xC Printers /dev/lp256xC
port 3

98642

13 4

OxOd0304

HP 256xC Printers /dev/lp256xC
port 0

98642

28 5

Ox1cOOO4

HP 256xC Printers /dev/lp256xC
port 1

98642

28 5

Ox1c0104

HP 256xC Printers /dev/lp256xC
port 2

98642

28 5

Ox1c0204

HP 256xC Printers /dev/lp256xC
port 3

98642

28 5

Ox1c0304

HP 256xC Printers /dev/lp256xC
port 4

98642

28 5

Ox1c0404

HP 256xC Printers /dev/lp256xC
port 5

98642

28 5

Ox1c0504

HP 256xC Printers /dev/lp256xC
port 6

98642

28 5

Ox1c0604

HP 256xC Printers /dev/lp256xC
port 7

98642

28 5

Ox1c0704

9-64

Installing Printers

HP 2563j64j66j67C Impact Printers

• Use SAM for the whole procedure. SAM will check your dfile for the
necessary device drivers, add any that are missing, and reconfigure the
kernel for you at this time. See the chapter on setting up HP- UX using
SAM that follows this chapter; then go on to step 2.
or
• Look in your dfile for the drivers. If the drivers are in your kernel
configuration file, go on to step 2 now.
If the drivers are not in the /ete/eonf/dfile, or are commented out
with a comment symbol (such as the * sign), edit the dfile to either
add the driver or remove the comment marks. You must reconfigure
the kernel if you edit the dfile for any reason. Use the /ete/eonfig
program to do this. See Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX
Commands" for detailed information on this procedure.

2. Play it safe.

b. TURN OFF the computer and unplug the power cord.

Installing Printers

9-65

HP 2563j64j66j67C Impact Printers

3. Determine the interface.
Table 9-27. Interface Options

Serial Interfaces 1

HP-IB Interfaces 2

Built-in RS-232-C

Built-in standard-speed HP-IB

HP 98626A RS-232-C

HP 98624A standard-speed HP-IB

Parallel Interfaces

Built-in parallel

HP 98628A Datacomm
HP 98642A 4-Channel Muliplexer
HP 98638A 8-Channel Mulitplexer
HP 98644A RS-232-C
1 If you have more than one serial port, make note of the address of the serial port you are using. You will
need this information for testing and configuring your device.
2 A void placing the printer on the same HP-IB interface used by a disk or tape drive. A dedicated HP-IB
interface is recommended.

Caution

4. If YOtt are ttsing a standard HP-IB interface, set the HP-IB btts address
now. If not, skip this step.

Note

a. Choose an available HP-IB bus address and make note of it.
b. Set the HP-IB bus address according to the instructions in the
installation documentation provided with the device.
9·66

Installing Printers

5. Ensure all power switches on the device and on the computer are in the
OFF position.
6. Connect the printer to your computer.
Connect the printer to your computer following the instructions provided in
the hardware installation manual for the device.
If you are connected to an RS-232-C interface, the following data
transmission values should be checked:

•
•
•
•
•

baud rate
parity
data length
handshake
symbol set (character set)

7. Connect the power cord.
8. Turn on the device.
9. If you have any other devices to connect, do so now.
10. Plug in and power on the computer.
Hardware installation complete! You can now proceed to the set up procedures
in Chapter 10, "Setting Up HP- UX for Printers Using SAM" if you are using
SAM. If you are not using SAM, refer to Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices
Using HP- UX Commands" for instructions on how to configure your system
using commands.

Installing Printers

9-67

j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j

10
Setting Up HP-UX for Printers Using SAM
This chapter describes how to use SAM to set up HP- UX to communicate with
your printer.
Gather the necessary information:

• The name you are giving to this printer.
• The model or interface that the printer will use.
• The name of the device file that the printer will use.
• The priority for this printer.
• The class to which the printer will be added (optional).
• Whether or not you wish to make this device your system's default printer.
If you are adding a remote printer, be sure to have thjs additional information
on hand:

• The name of the remote system to which the printer is attached.
• The name of the remote printer.
• The "cancel" model on the remote system (optional).
• The "status" model on the remote system (optional).
• Whether or not you wish to allow any user to cancel any printing request.
• Whether or not the remote printer is on a system using BSD (Berkeley
Software Distibution) UNIX.
If you are adding a network-based printer, make a note of the link-level address
used by the printer's network interface.

Setting Up HP-UX for Printers Using SAM

10-1

Adding a Local Printer
To configure your printer:

1. Log on as root.
2. Run SAM:
/usr/bin/sam

3 . Highlight
4. Highlight
5. Highlight

and activate

(Open ).

and activate
and activate

(Open ).

6. From the "Actions" menu title in the "Printer/Plotter Manager" window,
highlight and choose the appropriate one of the following menu items:

•
7. If you are adding a local printer, SAM will search for any interfaces to which
the printer might be connected. This information appears in an object list
within a "Printer/plotter hardware location" window. Highlight and choose
the appropriate hardware path.
An "Add printer" dialog box appears. The titling and appearance of the
dialog box will vary according to the type of connection you are using.
8. Type the required information into the fields displayed.

Note

Some of the field names in the dialog box may be buttons
((Printer class ), for example). Activate these for information about
available choices for entering in the fields.

9. When you have entered all the information into the dialog box, activate
(OK).

10-2

Setting Up HP-UX for Printers Using SAM

SAM will create the device file needed to communicate with the printer. SAM
uses the device file naming convention Ip_xxxx, where xxxx is the name of your
printer.

Adding a Network-Based Printer Using SAM
To add a network- based printer or plotter using SAM:
Gather the necessary information:

• The name you are giving to this printer or plotter.
• The printer node name.
• The model or interface that the printer will use.
• The link-level address of the network card installed in the printer.
• The TCP-IP protocol printer requires an Internet Protocol (IP) address.
• The priority for this printer.
• The class to which the printer or plotter will be added (optional).
1. Ensure that the printer is connected to the network according to the
installation instructions shipped with the network-based printer or the
network interface card for the printer.

2. Run SAM; type:
/usr/bin/sam

See Chapter 1, "Introduction to System Administration" for additional
information about using SAM.
3. Highlight

and activate the (Open] control button.

4. Highlight

1~'81~p*I and activate the (Open) control button.

5 . Highlight ilffi~1~1;

.•

ljB1~.~".~~·; ~tI and activate the (Open] control button.
then

Setting Up HP-UX for Printers Using SAM

10-3

7. Fill in the printer interface dialog box fields and turn on and off check box
values.
Activating the (Help) button from a dialog or message box gives you
information about the attributes and tasks you can perform from the
currently displayed window.
Pressing the @ key gives you context-sensitive information for the object
field at the location of the cursor.
8. Activate the (OK) control button.
SAM provides an on line help system to assist you when you need additional
information.
Activating the (Help) button from the SAM main window, a dialog box, or
message box gives you information about the attributes and tasks you can
perform from the currently displayed window.
From within a functional area, choosing an item from the "Help" menu gives
you information about:
• the current functional area
• keyboard navigation within SAM
• using the SAM help system
• displaying the version of SAM you are currently running
From a dialog box (a window displaying fields to be filled in), pressing the @)
key gives you context-sensitive information for the object at the location of the
cursor.
The software SAM needs to configure your network-based printer is shipped
separately. Follow the instruction shipped with your printer to load the
software.
In an HP -UX cluster, you can run SAM from a cluster client or the cluster
server to add a network-based printer, in either case the printer will be
available to all computers in the cluster.

10-4

Setting Up HP-UX for Printers Using SAM

11
Installing Plotters and Graphic Devices
Introduction
This chapter contains the installation instructions for the following plotters and
graphic devices:
• HP Plotters
o HP 7550B Plus Plotter
o HP 7575/76A DraftPro DXL/EXL Plotters
o HP C1600A/01A 7600 Series Models 240D and 240E Plotters
o HP C1620A Series 7600 Model 355 Electrostatic Plotter
o HP C1625A/27A Series 7600 Models 250 and 255 Plotters
• HP 13279B Color Monitor
• HP 45911A/C Graphics Tablet
• HP 46087/88A Digitizers and HP 46089A Cursor
• HP 9111A Graphics Tablet
• HP 98287 A Graphics Display Controller Interface
• HP 98548/49/50A High Resolution Graphics Interface
• HP 98556A 2D Integer Based Graphics Accelerator Accessory Card
• HP 98627 A Color Output Interface
• HP 98700 CX Graphics Display Controller
• HP 98702A Graphics Address and Data Bus Interface
• HP 98705A/B/C Graphics Display Controllers
• HP 98720A SRX Graphics Display Controller
• HP 98724A/25A Local Graphics Bus Interface
• HP 98726A Local Graphics Bus Interface
• HP 98730A TurboSRX Graphics Display Controller
• HP 98735-66580 Physical DMA Interface
• HP 98735-66581 Virtual DMA Interface
• HP 98735A/36A/36B Graphics Display Controllers
• HP A1416A High Resolution Color Graphics Interface

Installing Plotters and Graphic Devices

11-1

HP Plotters
HP plotters can connect to your computer using a variety of interface types.
The following table shows the plotters described in this chapter and the
interface types they support.
Table 11-1. Plotter Models and Supported Interface Types

HP-IB

Parallel

RS-232 (serial)

7550B

Yes

1600A/OIA

Yes

1620A

Yes

1625A/27A

Yes

7575/76A

Yes

HP Plotter
Product No.

Refer to Appendix B, "Series 400 Support Matrix" for Series 400 hardware and
software support information.
If the plotter you are connecting is one of the models listed in the preceding
table, find and read the description of the plotter in the following sections.
Note that some plotters are not customer installable and attempting to install
them could invalidate your warranty. This will be noted in the descriptive
section that follows, and in the documentation that carne with your plotter.
If you are connecting a plotter that is not specifically mentioned in the
following section, find the procedure that outlines plotter connection for
the interface type you are using in the "Installing Your Plotter" section.
These generic procedures will apply to most plotters. Always consult
the documentation that carne with the plotter for specific exceptions and
configuration information for that model.

11-2

Installing Plotters and Graphic Devices

HP Plotters
11

HP 75508 Plus Plotter
The HP 7550B Plus plotter is a desktop color plotter, that is compatible with
the HP-GL and HP-GL/2 languages. An additional 1- or 2-megabyte board
option allows you to download plot files to the plotter and regain control of
computer.
The HP 7550B Plus plotter has two back panel configuration options:
• RS-232-C and parallel option
This option of the HP 7550B Plus plotter has a parallel and an RS-232-C
(serial) interface. For optimum data transmission speed, use the parallel
instead of the RS-232-C interface.
• RS- 232- C and HP -IB option
This option of the HP 7550B Plus plotter has an HP-IB and two RS-232-C
(serial) interfaces.

Installing Plotters and Graphic Devices

11·3

HP Plotters
11

HP C1600A/01A 7600 Series Models 2400 and 240E Plotters
The HP C1600A/01A are monochrome electrostatic plotters compatible
with the HP-GL and HP-GL/2 languages. They are intended for use in a
computer-aided design (CAD) environment. A built-in 40 megabyte hard disk
automatically stores the current drawing. The plotters support RS-232-C,
parallel and HP-IB interfaces.
Pen plotters are vector devices. Vectors are straight line segments that form
images such as squares, circles, or other polygons. Electrostatic plotters are
raster devices. A raster device creates an image using an array of dots to form
an image. Most graphics software programs send data in vector formats. Your
electrostatic plotter has a vector-to-raster converter (VRC) to convert your
design from the vector data to raster data.

Caution

Do not install the VRC or set up the plotter yourself. Defects
that result from customer setup invalidate the plotter's
warranty.
Call your local HP Sales and Support Office for a certified
representative to install the vector-to-raster converter (VRC)
and set up your plotter. The installer will install the VRC, load
toner and media, and ensure the plotter is operating properly.
A list of worldwide HP offices was included in your accessories
box that accompanies the plotter.

11-4

Installing Plotters and Graphic Devices

HP Plotters
11

HP C1620A Series 7600 Model 355 Electrostatic Plotter
The HP C1620A is a color electrostatic plotter that is compatible with
HP-GL/2 and PCL-based raster graphics input. A rasterizer and built-in 40
megabyte hard disk provide simultaneous rasterization and printing. This
plotter supports RS-232-C, parallel and HP-IB interfaces.
Refer to Appendix B, "Series 400 Support Matrix" for Series 400 hardware and
software support information.
Pen plotters are vector devices. Vectors are straight line segments that form
images such as squares, circles, or other polygons. Electrostatic plotters are
raster devices. A raster device creates an image using an array of dots to form
an image. Most graphics software programs send data in vector formats. Your
electrostatic plotter has a vector-to-raster converter (VRC) to convert your
design from the vector data to raster data.

Caution

SAM uses the naming convention Ip_xxxx for device files. If you wish to use
the device files shipped with your system (pIt_parallel) you may specify the
shipped device file name on the SAM screen for adding a plotter.

Installing Plotters and Graphic Devices

11-5

HP Plotters
11

HP C1625A/27A Series 7600 Models 250 and 255 Plotters
The HP C1625A/27 A are monochrome electrostatic plotters and is compatible
with HP-GL/2 and PCL-based raster graphics input. These plotters have a
rasterizer and built-in 40 megabyte hard disk for simultaneous rasterization
and printing. They supports RS-232-C, Centronics and HP-IB interfaces.
Pen plotters are vector devices. Vectors are straight line segments that form
images such as squares, circles, or other polygons. Electrostatic plotters are
raster devices. A raster device creates an image using an array of dots to form
an image. Most graphics software programs send data in vector formats. Your
electrostatic plotter has a vector-to-raster converter (VRC) to convert your
design from the vector data to raster data.

Caution

HP 7575/76A DraftPro DXL/EXL Plotters
The DraftPro plotters support the standard HP-GL language and have a oneor two-megabyte buffer option which will allow you to download an entire plot,
freeing your computer. The HP7575/76A support HP-IB, HP-IB Secondary
Command Support, and RS-232-C interfaces.

11·6

Installing Plotters and Graphic Devices

HP Plotters
11

What You're Going To Do
The following tables contain detailed HP- UX software set up information. If
you use SAM to install this device, you will not need this detailed information.
Complete the hardware installation as outlined in the following sections, then
refer to Chapter 12, "Setting Up HP- UX for Plotters Using SAM" for set up
instructions using SAM.
If you are using commands to set up HP- UX to communicate with your device,
complete the hardware installation as outlined in the following section. Once
the hardware installation is complete, use the information provided in these
tables to complete the software set up as outlined in Chapter 14, "Setting Up
Devices Using HP- UX Commands".
Table 11-2.
HP Plotters
Connected to HP-IB Interfaces
Device Name

Path
Name!

File
Type

Major
Number

Driver
Name

Select
Code

Minor
Number2

Plotter

/dev/lpxxxx

hpib

Ox070nOO

Plotter

/dev/lpxxxx

hpib

Ox080nOO

1 Replace xxxx with the model number of the plotter. For example, /dev/lp7550
2 n is a number that identifies the bus address. Replace n with a 5 if the address was set to 5, use 7
if the address was set to 7, and so on.
3 Built-in standard-speed HP-IB interface.
4 HP 98624A standard-speed HP-IB interface.

Installing Plotters and Graphic Devices

11-7

HP Plotters
11
Table 11-3.
HP Plotters
Connected to a Parallel Interface

Device
Name

Path

HP Plotter

Name 1

File
Type

Major
Number

Driver
Name

Select
Code

Minor
Number

/dev/lpxxxx

paralle1 2

23 3

1 Replace xxxx with the model number of the plotter.
2 The parallel driver requires the "hpib" driver to be part of the kernel configuration.
3 Built in parallel interface.

Table 11-4.
HP Plotters
Connected to an RS-232-C Interface

Device Name

Name 1

File
Type

Major
Number

Driver
Name

Select
Code

Minor
Number

HP Plotters

/dev/lpxxxx

98626

Ox090004

HP 7550B,
7575/76A

/dev/lpxxxx

98628

20 3

Ox140004

Path

Plotters
1 Replace xxxx with the model number of the plotter.
2 Built in RS-232-C interface and HP 98626A RS-232-C Interface.
3 HP 98628A Datacomm Interface

11-8

Installing Plotters and Graphic Devices

Installing Your Plotter
Before you Install This Device

• Refer to your plotter's manuals for instructions on unpacking and preparing
the plotter for installation.
• If you have not added this type of device to your system before, read the
material in Chapter 1, "Introduction". It provides interface and cabling
guidelines to follow when adding devices to your system.

• Have the documentation shipped with your device handy. You will need to
refer to it during this procedure.
• Plan ahead. Installing new peripherals on your system requires that you shut
down and power off the system. On a multiuser or clustered system you will
want to warn users and cluster clients in advance that the system (server)
will be coming down. Use the cTrlall command to do this.

Caution

If you are adding this device to a cluster-node, you must be
logged into that node to do HP- UX configuration tasks.

For more information about adding devices to a system
configured as an HP- UX cluster, refer to Managing Clusters of
HP 9000 Computers, Chapter 12, "Adding Peripherals to a
Cluster" .

Installing Plotters and Graphic Devices

11·9

11
Connecting Your Plotter to an HP-IB Interface

The following summary supplements the procedures outlined in your hardware
installation documentation for this· device. Read through this summary before
pro ceding with the installation.
1. Verify that the driver required for this plotter is included in your current
kernel configuration file, usually the / ete/ eonf / dfile file.

To verify that the necessary drivers, listed in the set up tables at the
beginning of this chapter, are part of your current kernel configuration, you
can:
• Use SAM to check your dfile for the necessary drivers, add any that are
missing and reconfigure the kernel for you at this time. See Chapter 12,
"Setting Up HP- UX for Plotters Using SAM", and then go on to step two.
or
• Look in your dfile for the drivers. If the drivers are in your kernel
configuration file, go on to step 2 now.
If the drivers are not in the /ete/eonf/dfile, or are commented out
with a comment symbol (such as the * sign), edit the dfile to either
add the driver or remove the comment marks. You must reconfigure the
kernel if you edit the dfile for any reason. You can use the / ete/ eonfig
program to do this. See Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices Using HP- UX
Commands" for detailed information on this procedure.
2. Play it safe.

a. Shut down and halt the system using the /ete/shutdown -h command.
If you are operating in a diskless cluster, see Managing Clusters of HP
9000 Computers for additional information on shutting down the system.

b. TURN OFF the computer and unplug the power cord.

11-10

Installing Plotters and Graphic Devices

3. Determine your HP-IB interface.

The following standard-speed HP-IB interfaces can be used:

• HP 98624A standard-speed HP-IB interface card
• Built-in standard-speed HP-IB interface

Note

A void placing the plotter on the same interface used by
your disk or tape drives. A dedicated HP-IB interface is
recommended. Placing a plotter on the same standard-speed
HP-IB interface as your disk or tape drive could substantially
affect the performance of your disk or tape drive.

4. Set the HP-IB bus address.

Note

a. Check the plotters documentation for information on preset bus
addresses. If the preset address is available, make note of it and go on to
the next step.
b. If the preset bus address is already in use, choose an available HP-IB bus
address and make note of it.
Set the HP -IB bus address according to the instructions in the installation
documentation provided with the device.

Installing Plotters and Graphic Devices

11-11

5. Ensure all power switches on the device and on the computer are in the OFF
position.
6. Connect the plotter to your computer.
Connect the plotter to your computer using a stand-speed HP-IB cable.
Follow the instructions provided in the plotter's installation manual.

7. Connect the power cord to the plotter.
8. Turn on the plotter.
9. Plug in and power on the computer.
Hardware installation complete! You may now proceed to the set up
procedures in Chapter 12, "Setting Up HP-UX for Plotters Using SAM". If you
are not using SAM, refer to Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX
Commands" for instructions on how to configure your system using commands.

11-12

Installing Plotters and Graphic Devices

11
Connecting Your Plotter to a Parallel Interface

The following summary supplements the procedures outlined in your hardware
installation documentation for this device. Read through this summary before
proceding with the installation.
1. Verify that the driver required for this plotter is included in your current
kernel configuration file, usually the / etc/ conf / df ile file.

To verify that the necessary drivers, listed in the set up tables at the
beginning of this chapter, are part of your current kernel configuration, you
can:
• Use SAM to check your dfile for the necessary drivers, add any that are
missing and reconfigure the kernel for you at this time. See Chapter 12,
"Setting Up HP -UX for Plotters Using SAM", and then go on to step two.
or
• Look in your dfile for the drivers. If the drivers are in your kernel
configuration file, go on to step 2 now.
If the drivers are not in the /etc/conf/dfile, or are commented out
with a comment symbol (such as the * sign), edit the dfile to either
add the driver or remove the comment marks. You must reconfigure the
kernel if you edit the dfile for any reason. You can use the /etc/config
program to do this. See Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices Using HP- UX
Commands" for detailed information on this procedure.

Installing Plotters and Graphic Devices

11-13

b. TURN OFF the computer and unplug the power cord.
3. Determine your interface.
Locate the built-in parallel interface on the back of the computer. It should
be labeled PARALLEL.
4. Ensure all power switches on the plotter and on the computer are in the OFF
position.
5. Connect the plotter to your computer.

Caution

Many computer systems have both parallel and RS-232-C
ports. These ports frequently appear identical. The built-in
parallel interface should be labeled PARALLEL. Make sure
you plug your parallel cable into the parallel port or you could
damage your plotter.

Connect the plotter to your computer following the instructions provided in
the installation manual for the device.
6. Connect the power cord to your device.
7. Turn on the device.
8. Plug in and power on the computer.
Hardware installation complete! You may now proceed to the set up
procedures in Chapter 12, "Setting Up HP- UX for Plotters Using SAM". If you
are not using SAM, refer to Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX
Commands" for instructions on how to configure your system using commands.

11-14

Installing Plotters and Graphic Devices

11
Connecting Your Plotter to an RS-232 Interface

To verify that the necessary drivers, listed in the set up tables at the
beginning of this chapter, are part of your current kernel configuration, you
can:
• Use SAM to check your dfile for the necessary drivers, add any that are
missing and reconfigure the kernel for you at this time. See Chapter 12,
"Setting Up HP -UX for Plotters Using SAM", and then go on to step two.
or
• Look in your dfile for the drivers. If the drivers are in your kernel
configuration file, go on to step 2 now.
If the drivers are not in the /etc/conf/dfile, or are commented out
with a comment symbol (such as the * sign), edit the dfile to either
add the driver or remove the comment marks. You must reconfigure the
kernel if you edit the dfile for any reason. You can use the /etc/config
program to do this. See Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices Using HP- UX
Commands" for detailed information on this procedure.

Installing Plotters and Graphic Devices

11-15

2. Play it safe.

The following Serial Interfaces are supported:
•
•
•
•
•
•

Built-in RS-232-C
HP 98626A RS- 232- C
HP 98628A Datacomm
HP 98642A 4-Channel Muliplexer
HP 98638A 8-Channel Mulitplexer
HP 98644A RS-232-C

Note

If you have more than one serial port, make note of the address
of the serial port you are using. You will need this information
for testing and configuring your device.

Caution

4. Determine the type of connection.

•
•
•
•

standalone
eavesdrop
local
remote

Refer to the plotter's documentation to determine the appropriate
configuration settings.

11-16

Installing Plotters and Graphic Devices

5. Ensure all power switches on the device and on the computer are in the OFF
position.
6. Connect the plotter to your computer.
Connect the plotter to your computer following the instructions provided in
the installation manual for the plotter.

7. Connect the power cord.
8. Turn on the device.
Configure the following RS-232-C data transmission values.
baud rate
Set to match your computer's baud rate.
parity
Set to match your computer's parity setting.
data length
handshake
symbol set
(character set)
9. Plug in and power on the computer.
Hardware installation complete! You may now proceed to the set up
procedures in Chapter 12, "Setting Up HP- UX for Plotters Using SAM" if you
are using SAM. If you are not using SAM, refer to Chapter 14, "Setting Up
Devices Using HP- UX Commands" for instructions on how to configure your
system using commands.

Installing Plotters and Graphic Devices

11-17

HP 9111A Graphics Tablet
The HP 9111A Graphics Tablet connects to your computer via the
standard-speed HP-IB interface.
Refer to Appendix B, "Series 400 Support Matrix" for Series 400 hardware and
software support information.

Before Installing This Device
Before you install this device:
• Refer to your graphics device manuals for instructions on unpacking and
preparing the device for installation.
• If you have not added this type of device to your system before, read the
material in Chapter 1, "Introduction". It provides interface and cabling
guidelines to follow when adding devices to your system.

• Have the documentation shipped with your graphics device handy. You will
need to refer to it during this procedure.
• Plan ahead. Installing new peripherals on your system requires that you shut
down and power off the system. On a multiuser or clustered system you will
want to warn users and cluster clients in advance that the system (server)
will be coming down. Use the wall or cwall command to do this.

Caution

If you are adding this device to a cluster-node, you must be
logged into that node to do HP -UX configuration tasks.

For more information about adding devices to a system
configured as an HP- UX cluster, refer to Managing Clusters of
HP 9000 Computers, Chapter 12, "Adding Peripherals to a
Cluster" .

11-18

Installing Plotters and Graphic Devices

HP 9111 A Graphics Tablet
11

What You're Going To Do
The following table contains detailed HP- UX software set up information.
Complete the hardware installation as outlined in this section. Once hardware
installation is complete, use the information provided in this table to complete
the software set up as outlined in Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices Using
HP-UX Commands".
Table 11-5.
HP 9111A
Connected to Built-in HP-IB Interface

Path
Name

File
Type

Major
Number

Select
Code

Minor
Number 1

HP 9111A

/dev/dig9111

Ox070nOO

HP 9111A

/dev/dig9111

Ox080nOO

Device Name

1 n is a number that identifies the bus address (set in step 4 of the installation procedure). Replace n
with a 6 if the address was set to 6, use 7 if the address was set to 7, and so on.

Installing Plotters and Graphic Devices

11-19

HP 9111 A Graphics Tablet
11

Connecting the HP 9111A Graphics Tablet
The following summary supplements the procedures outlined in your hardware
installation documentation for this device. Read through this summary before
proceding with the installation.
1. Verify that the drivers required for this device are included in your
I etcl conf I dfile file.

To verify that the necessary drivers are part of your current kernel
configuration, you can:
• Use SAM to check your dfile for the drivers, add it (them) if necessary
and reconfigure the kernel for you at this time. See Chapter 12, "Setting
Up HP-UX for Plotters Using SAM", and then go on to step two.
or
• Look in your dfile for the drivers. If the necessary drivers are in your
kernel configuration file, go on to step 2 now.
If the drivers are not in the letc/conf/dfile, or are commented out
with a comment symbol (such as the * sign), edit the dfile to either
add the drivers or remove the comment marks. You must reconfigure the
kernel if you edit the dfile for any reason. You can use the letc/config
program to do this. See Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX
Commands" for detailed information on this procedure.
2. Play it safe.

h. TURN OFF the computer and unplug the power cord.

11·20

Installing Plotters and Graphic Devices

HP 9111 A Graphics Tablet
11

3. Determine your interface.

The following standard-speed HP-IB interfaces may be used:
• HP 98624A standard-speed HP-IB interface card
• Built-in standard-speed HP-IB interface

Note

Avoid placing the tablet on the same interface used by your
disk or tape drives. A dedicated HP 98624A HP-IB Interface is
recommended. Placing a tablet on the same HP-IB interface
as your disk or tape drive could substantially affect the
performance of your disk or tape drive.

4. Set the HP- IB Address.

Note

Familiarize yourself with the HP-IB addresses that are
currently in use on your system. Determine the available
HP-IB addresses. Use the worksheet at the end of this book to
note already-used addresses.
You are limited to eight devices per HP-IB card, addresses 0
through 7.

Installing Plotters and Graphic Devices

11-21

HP 9111A Graphics Tablet
11

6. Connect the HP 9111A to the computer, or to the last device on the chain of
HP-IB devices.
Connect the graphics device to your computer following the instructions
provided in the installation manual that came with the device.
7. Connect the power cord to the graphics tablet.
8. Turn on the graphics tablet.
9. Plug in and power on the computer.
Hardware installation complete! You may now proceed to the set up
proced ures in Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices Using HP -UX Commands" for
instructions on how to configure your system.

Note

11-22

SAM does not support configuration of graphics devices.

Installing Plotters and Graphic Devices

HP 45911A/C Graphics Tablet
The HP 45911AjC Graphics Tablet is installed as an HP-HIL device. See
Chapter 13, "Installing HP-HIL Accessories" for installation and configuration
details.
Refer to Appendix B, "Series 400 Support Matrix" for Series 400 hardware and
software support information.

LG2001n_OO1

Figure 11-1. HP 45911 C Graphics Tablet

Installing Plotters and Graphic Devices

11-23

HP 46087/88A Digitizers and
HP 46089A Cursor
The HP 46087 A and 46088A are low-cost, high-resolution digitizers suitable for
menu/object picking, free-hand graphics entry and digitizing. The HP 46087 A
is ANSI A/ISO A4 size. The HP 46088A is ANSI B /ISO A3. Both digitizers
include a stylus with tip switch and a platen overlay. Both digitizers connect to
your computer via the HP-HIL interface. See Chapter 13, "Installing HP-HIL
Accessories" for installation and configuration details.
The HP 46089A four-button, cross-hair cursor is available separately or as
digitizer Option 001. The cursor is recommended for digitizing existing
drawings, artwork or other hard-copy images. It uses no additional power and
occupies no HP-HIL addresses.
Refer to Appendix B, "Series 400 Support Matrix" for Series 400 hardware and
software support information.

11-24

Installing Plotters and Graphic Devices

HP 98627A Color Video Output Interface
The HP 98627 A Color Output Interface allows you to connect an external color
monitor to your computer.
Refer to Appendix B, "Series 400 Support Matrix" for Series 400 hardware and
software support information.

___

til

ELECT
CODE
-t"
S
v
c:::B
c:::B

c:::li

fE]

DISPLAY
OPTIONS

~
Figure 11-2.
HP 98627 A Color Video Output Interface Switches

Installing Plotters and Graphic Devices

11-25

HP 98627 A Color Output Interface
11

Before I nstalling This Device
Before you install this device:
• Refer to the documentation that came with your interface card for
instructions on unpacking and preparing to install the card.
• If you have not added this type of device to your system before, read the
material in Chapter 1, "Introduction". It provides interface and cabling
guidelines to follow when adding devices to your system.

• Keep the documentation that came with the card handy. You will need to
refer to it during this procedure.
• Plan ahead. Installing a new interface card on your system requires that you
shut down and power off the system. On a multiuser or clustered system
you will want to warn users and cluster clients in advance that the system
(server) will be coming down. Use the wall or cwall command to do this.

Caution

If you are adding this device to a cluster-node, you must be
logged into that node to do HP- UX configuration tasks.

For more information about adding devices to a system
configured as an HP- UX cluster, refer to Managing Clusters of
HP 9000 Computers, Chapter 12, "Adding Peripherals to a
Cluster" .

11-26

Installing Plotters and Graphic Devices

HP 98627 A Color Output Interface
11

What You're GOing To Do
The following table contains HP- UX configuration information for this interface
card. Interface cards do not need device files associated with them. Only the
device connected to the interface card requires device files.
For interface cards, ensure that the necessary device driver is part of your
kernel configuration file and install the card as outlined in this section.
Each interface card must have a unique select code setting.
Record the select code( s) used for this interface card. Select
codes zero through seven (0- 7) are reserved for internal
interface cards.

Note

If you need to change the select code of an internal interface
card for any reason, do so by entering Configuration Mode
during the Boot ROM sequence. For instructions on interacting
with the Boot ROM Configuration Mode on a model 362 or
382 computer, consult the Hardware Configuration Guide. To
interact with the Boot ROM Configuration Mode of any other
S300 or S400 computer, refer to the Service Manual for the
specific model computer.
Table 11-6.
HP 98627 Color Output Interface HP-UX Set Up Values
Device Name
HP 98627

File
Type

Major
Number

Driver
Name

Select
Code

Minor
Number

graphics

Oxic0200

Installing Plotters and Graphic Devices

11-27

HP 98627 A Color Output Interface
11

Installing the HP 98627 A Color Output Interface
The following summary supplements the procedures outlined in your
installation documentation for this interface card. Read through this summary
before proceding with the installation.
1. Verify that the graphics driver required for this interface card, is included in
your current kernel configuration file, usually the /etc/conf/dfile file.

If the graphics driver is not in the / etc/ conf / dfile, or is commented
out with a comment symbol (such as the * sign), edit the dfile to either
add the driver or remove the comment marks. You must reconfigure the
kernel if you edit the dfile for any reason. You can use the /etc/config
program to do this. See Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX
Commands" for detailed information on this procedure.
2. Play it safe.

a. Shut down and halt the system using the /etc/shutdown -h command.

If you are operating in a diskless cluster, see Managing Clusters of HP
9000 Computers for additional information on shutting down the system.
b. TURN OFF the computer and unplug the power cord.
c. Remove the Color Output Interface from its envelope, being careful to
handle the card only by its edges and metal end plate. The card may be
easily damaged by electrostatic discharge (static zap).
d. Place the card on the envelope.

11-28

Installing Plotters and Graphic Devices

HP 98627 A Color Output Interface
11

3. Set the select code and make note of it.
Use the documentation that came with this interface card to set the select
code. Each interface must have a unique select code setting.
Select codes zero through seven (0-7) are reserved for internal interface
cards.

Note

The Color Output Interface is preset to use select codes 28 and
29.
The Multiprogrammer Interface is also preset to select code 29
If you have both of these interfaces, change the select code of
the Multiprogrammer Interface to an unused select code.

4. Set Display Option Switch 1 and Switch 2.
Set the display option switches according to the instructions provided in the
documentation that came with this interface card.

Note

If you intend to connect an HP 13279B Color Monitor to this
interface, you can skip to step 4. Display option switch 1 is
preset for a combined green and sync signal and need not
be changed. Display option switch 2 is preset to a 24.8 kHz
horizontal scan and need not be changed.

5. Insert the interface.
You must insert the interface card in an empty even-nttmbered slot. Refer to
the installation document that came with your interface cards form complete
instructions.

Installing Plotters and Graphic Devices

11-29

HP 98627 A Color Output Interface
11

6. Verify installation.
a. Plug in the power cord, turn on your computer, and hold down the space
bar for a few seconds.
b. Check the list of components displayed on the left-hand side of the
screen. If the message:

HP 98627 at 28
appears you have correctly installed the Color Output Interface.
If this message does not appear, make sure there are no select code
conflicts and that the board is seated in an even numbered slot. If you
still have problems, call your HP Service Representative for assistence.

Installation Complete!

11·30

Installing Plotters and Graphic Devices

HP 13279B Color Monitor
The HP 13279B Color Monitor connects to the HP 98627 A Interface.

Note

This monitor should be installed by an HP Customer Engineer.
Installation and adjustment is included in the price of the
monitor.

Before Installing This Device
Before you install this monitor:
• Contact your Hewlett-Packard Sales and Service Office to arrange for
installation of your monitor. Installation and adjustment are included in the
price of the unit.
• Have the documentation that came with the monitor handy during the
procedure.
• Plan ahead. Installing this monitor on your system requires that you shut
down and power off the system. On a multiuser or clustered system you will
want to warn users and cluster clients in advance that the system (server)
will be coming down. Use the wall or cW'all command to do this.

Caution

If you are adding this device to a cluster-node, you must be
logged into that node to do HP- UX configuration tasks.

For more information about adding devices to a system
configured as an HP-UX cluster, refer to Managing Clusters of
HP 9000 Computers, Chapter 12, "Adding Peripherals to a
Cluster" .

Installing Plotters and Graphic Devices

11·31

HP 13279B Color Monitor
11

HP-UX Set Up Information
The following table contains detailed HP- UX software set up information.
Once the monitor is installed by your Hewlett-Packard representative, use the
information provided in this table to complete the software set up as outlined
in Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices Using HP- UX Commands".
Table 11-7. HP 13279B Color Monitor

Device Name

File
Type

HP 1327gB, select code 28

Major
Minor
NumbeI Number l

Oxic0200

1 If you changed the select code of the HP 98627 A Color Output Interface, write
in the new select code (in hexadecimal) instead of lc in the minor number.

Connecting the HP 13279B Color Monitor
1. Play It Safe.

a. Turn your computer off and remove the power cord.
b. Have your Hewlett-Packard customer engineer install your monitor and
adjust the scan rate. Installation and adjustment are included in the
price of the unit.
2. Plug in and power on the monitor.
3. Plug in and power on the computer.

11-32

Installing Plotters and Graphic Devices

HP 98548/49/50A High Resolution Graphics Interface
The HP 98548/49/50A High Resolution Graphics Interface outputs video from
the host computer to the following set of HP High Resolution Monitors:
• The HP 98548A board is for use with High Resolution (1024x768 pixel)
Monochrome Monitors.
• The HP 98549A board is for High Resolution (1024x768 pixel) Color
Monitors. It has 6-color planes that can be soft-configured as four image
planes and two overlay planes.
• The HP 98550A board is also for High Resolution (1280 X 1024 pixel) Color
Monitors. It has 8-color planes for 256 colors, plus two full-time overlay
planes.
Refer to Appendix B, "Series 400 Support Matrix" for Series 400 hardware and
software support information.

Installing Plotters and Graphic Devices

11·33

HP 98548Aj49Aj50A High Resolution Graphic Interface
11

• Have the documentation that came with the interface card handy. You will
need to refer to it during this procedure.
• Plan ahead.
Installing interface cards on your system requires that you shut down and
power off the system. On a multiuser or clustered system you will want to
warn users and cluster clients in advance that the system (server) will be
coming down. Use the wall or cwall command to do this.

Caution

If you are adding this device to a cluster-node, you must be
logged into that node to do HP- UX configuration tasks.

For more information about adding devices to a system
configured as an HP -UX cluster, refer to Managing Clusters of
HP 9000 Computers, Chapter 12, "Adding Peripherals to a
Cluster".

11-34

Installing Plotters and Graphic Devices

HP 98548A/49A/50A High Resolution Graphic Interface
11

What You're GOing To Do
The following table contains detailed HP- UX software set up information.
Complete the hardware installation as outlined in the following section. Once
hardware installation is complete, use the information provided in this table to
complete the software set up as outlined in Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices
U~ing HP- UX Comrnands".
SAM does not support the installation of graphics devices.

Note

Detailed information needed for completing the mknod commands is provided in
tables Table 11-9.
Table 11-8.
HP 98548/49/50A High Resolution Graphic Interface HP-UX Set
Up Values

Device Name

Device
File 1

File
Type

Major
NumbeI

Select
Code

Minor
Number

HP 98548A

/dev/crt

internal

OxOOOOOO

HP 98548A

/dev/crt

255

OxFF0200

HP 98549A/50A

/dev/crt

internal

OxOOOOOO

HP 98548A/50A

/dev/ocrt

internal

OxOOOOO1

HP 98548A/50A

/dev/icrt

internal

OxOOOOO2

HP 98548A/50A

/dev/crt

249

OxF90200

HP 98548A/50A

/dev/ocrt

249

OxF90201

HP 98548A/50A

/dev/icrt

249

OxF90202

1 Device file naming conventions are described in Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX
COIllIllands" .

The HP 98549A color display is supported by the hp98550 and hp98556 device
drivers.
Installing Plotters and Graphic Devices

11-35

HP 98548A/49A/50A High Resolution Graphic Interface
11

Connecting the HP 98548/49/50A High Resolution Graphic Interface
The following summary supplements the procedures outlined in your
installation documentation for these interface cards. Read through this
summary before proceding with the installation.
1. Verify that the driver required for this interface card, and any peripheral

device you intend to install at this time, is included in your current kernel
configuration file, usually the /etc/conf/dfile file.

To verify that the graphics driver is part of your current kernel
configuration, you can:
• You can use SAM to check your dfile for the graphics driver, add
it and reconfigure the kernel for you at this time. Refer to Chapter 3,
"Adding Drivers for Interface and Accessory Cards Using SAM" for
complete instructions, then go on to step two.
or
• Look in your dfile for the necessary drivers. If the drivers are in your
kernel configuration file, go on to step 2 now.
If the necessary drivers are not in the /etc/conf/dfile, or are
commented out with a comment symbol (such as the * sign), edit the
dfile to either add the driver or remove the comment marks. You
must reconfigure the kernel if you edit the dfile for any reason. You
can use the /etc/config program to do this. See Chapter 14, "Setting
Up Devices Using HP -UX Commands" for detailed information on this
procedure.

11-36

Installing Plotters and Graphic Devices

HP 98548A/49A/50A High Resolution Graphic Interface
11

2. Play it safe

a. Shut down and halt the system using the fete/shutdown -h command.

If you are operating in a diskless cluster, see Managing Clusters of
HP 9000 Computers for additional information on shutting down the
system.
b. TURN OFF the computer and unplug the power cord.
c. If you have a monitor connected to your computer, turn it off, unplug
the monitor's power cord, and disconnect the video cables from the
computer and monitor.
d. Remove the High Resolution Graphic Interface from its envelope, being
careful to handle the card only by its edges. The card may be easily
damaged by electrostatic discharge (static zap).
e. Place the card on the envelope.
3. Move the processor board.

If you are upgrading a computer which has video furnished by a
combination processor/video board, you must move the processor board.
Refer to the documentation that came with the interface card for these
procedures. Otherwise, skip to step 4.
4. Remove existing video board (if you have one).

Remove the existing video board or empty slot cover plate from the bottom
wide slot on the back of the computer (see Figure 11-3). You may need a
Pozidriv screwdriver to loosen it.

Installing Plotters and Graphic Devices

11-37

HP 98548A/49Aj50A High Resolution Graphic Interface
11

The

new Video

Board

goes here.

Figure 11-3. Graphics Interface Placement

11-38

Installing Plotters and Graphic Devices

HP 98548A/49A/50A High Resolution Graphic Interface
11

5. Set the select code configuration switches on the board. Make note of the
setting.
Set the interface card's select code configuration switches. See the
documentation that came with the card for instructions and default
settings. Be sure to make note of the setting you used. You will need it to
complete your HP- UX configuration.
Select code settings zero through seven (0-7) are reserved.

6. Insert the High Resolution Graphics interface card.
7. Ensure all power switches on the monitor and on the computer are in the
OFF position.
8. Connect the video cable or cable set to the new video board and to the new
monitor.
9. Plug in the and power on the monitor.
10. Plug in and power on the computer.
Hardware Installation Complete!

Select Code Settings and Minor Numbers
The following tables provide the minor number information you will need to
use with the mknod command to create device files. Locate the select code
setting( s) you chose in step five above and you will find the corresponding
minor number information.

Installing Plotters and Graphic Devices

11-39

HP 98548A/49A/50A High Resolution Graphic Interface
11
Table 11-9.
HP 98548/49/50A High Resolution Graphic Interface
HP-UX Setup Values
DIO-II
Select
Code

Switch
MSBLSB

internal

0000 0001

132

1000 0100

133

1000 0101

134

mknod
Minor
Number

DIO-U
Select
Code

Switch
MSBLSB

OxOOOOOO

152

1001 1000

Ox980200

Ox840200

153

1001 1001

Ox990200

Ox850200

154

1001 1010

Ox9A0200

10000110

Ox860200

155

1001 1011

135

1000 0111

Ox870200

156

136

1000 1000

Ox880200

137

1000 1001

Ox890200

138

1000 1010

139

DIO-II

Switch
MSBLSB

mknod
Minor
Number

173

1010 1101

OxAD0200

174

1010 1110

OxAE0200

175

1010 1111

OxAF0200

Ox9B0200

176

1011 0000

OxB00200

1001 1100

Ox9C0200

177

1011 0001

OxB10200

157

1001 1101

Ox9D0200

178

1011 0010

OxB20200

158

1001 1110

Ox9E0200

179

1011 0011

OxB30200

Ox8A0200

159

1001 1111

Ox9F0200

180

1011 0100

OxB40200

1000 1011

Ox8B0200

160

1010 0000

OxA00200

181

1011 0101

OxB50200

140

1000 1100

Ox8C0200

161

1010 0001

OxAl0200

182

1011 0110

OxB60200

141

1000 1101

Ox8D0200

162

1010 0010

OxA20200

183

1011 0111

OxB70200

142

1000 1110

Ox8E0200

163

10100011

OxA30200

184

1011 1000

OxB80200

143

1000 1111

Ox8F0200

164

1010 0100

OxM0200

185

1011 1001

OxB90200

144

1001 0000

Ox900200

165

1010 0101

OxA50200

186

1011 1010

OxBA0200

145

1001 0001

Ox910200

166

1010 0110

OxA60200

187

1011 1011

OxBB0200

146

1001 0010

Ox920200

167

1010 0111

OxA70200

188

1011 1100

OxBC0200

147

1001 0011

Ox930200

168

1010 1000

OxA80200

189

1011 1101

OxBD0200

148

1001 0100

Ox940200

169

1010 1001

OxA90200

190

1011 1110

OxBE0200

149

1001 0101

Ox950200

170

1010 1010

OxAA0200

191

1011 1111

OxBF0200

150

1001 0110

Ox960200

171

1010 1011

OxAB0200

192

11000000

OxC00200

151

1001 0111

Ox970200

172

1010 1100

OxAC0200

193

1100 0001

OxCl0200

11-40

mknod
Minor
Number

Installing Plotters and Graphic Devices

Select
Code

HP 98548A/49A/50A High Resolution Graphic Interface
11
Table 11-9.
HP 98548/49/50A High Resolution Graphic Interface
HP-UX Setup Values (continued)
Switch
MSBLSB

mknod
Minor
Number

010-11
Select
Code

Switch
MSBLSB

mknod
Minor
Number

010-11

Select
Code

Switch
MSBLSB

mknod
Minor
Number

194

1100 0010

OxC20200

215

1101 0111

OxD70200

236

1110 1100

OxEC0200

195

1100 0011

OxC30200

216

1101 1000

OxD80200

237

1110 1101

OxED0200

196

1100 0100

OxC40200

217

1101 1001

OxD90200

238

1110 1110

OxEE0200

197

1100 0101

OxC50200

218

1101 1010

OxDA0200

239

1110 1111

OxEF0200

198

1100 0110

OxC60200

219

1101 1011

OxDB0200

240

1111 0000

OxFOO200

199

11000111

OxC70200

220

1101 1100

OxDC0200

241

1111 0001

OxF10200

200

1100 1000

OxC80200

221

1101 1101

OxDD0200

242

1111 0010

OxF20200
OxF30200

010-11

201

1100 1001

OxC90200

222

1101 1110

OxDE0200

243

1111 0011

202

1100 1010

OxCA0200

223

1101 1111

OxDF0200

244

1111 0100

OxF40200

203

1100 1011

OxCB0200

224

11100000

OxEOO200

245

1111 0101

OxF50200

204

1100 1100

OxCC0200

225

1110 0001

OxE10200

246

1111 0110

OxF60200

205

1100 1101

OxCD0200

226

1110 0010

OxE20200

247

1111 0111

OxF70200

206

1100 1110

OxCE0200

227

1110 0011

OxE30200

248

1111 1000

OxF80200

207

1100 1111

OxCF0200

228

11100100

OxE40200

249

1111 1001

OxF90200

208

1101 0000

OxDOO200

229

1110 0101

OxE50200

250

1111 1010

OxFA0200

209

1101 0001

OxD10200

230

11100110

OxE60200

251

1111 1011

OxFB0200

210

1101 0010

OxD20200

231

11100111

OxE70200

252

1111 1100

OxFC0200

211

1101 0011

OxD30200

232

1110 1000

OxE80200

253

1111 1101

OxFD0200

212

1101 0100

OxD40200

233

1110 1001

OxE90200

254

1111 1110

OxFE0200

213

1101 0101

OxD50200

234

1110 1010

OxEA0200

255

1111 1111

OxFF0200

214

1101 0011

OxD60200

235

1110 1011

OxEB0200

Installing Plotters and Graphic Devices

11-41

HP 98556A 20 Integer Based Graphics Accelerator
Accessory Card
The HP 98556A 2D Graphics Accelerator is an add-on option for the HP
98549A and HP 98550A Color Graphic Interfaces. The Graphics Accelerator
Accessory Card connects directly to the Color Graphic Interface Card
"piggy-back" style. The board pair fits into one slot in the computer or
Direct-Connect I/O Expander.

Note

If you have an HP 98264A/B ECC RAM card or an HP
98248A Floating- Point Accelerator card mounted in your
computer, the HP 98556A 2D Graphics Accelerator card must
be mounted in the Direct-Connect I/O Expander.

Refer to Appendix B, "Series 400 Support Matrix" for Series 400 hardware and
software support information.

11-42

Installing Plotters and Graphic Devices

Figure 11-4. Graphics Interface and HP 98556A Accelerator

Circuit side of HP 98556A Accelerator.
four mounting screws.

Installing Plotters and Graphic Devices

11-43

HP 98556A 2D Graphics Accelerator
Accessory Card
11

Installing the HP 98556A
20 Graphics Accelerator
1. Play it safe.

a. Shut down and halt the system using the tete/shutdown -h command.
If you are operating in a diskless cluster, see the System Administration
Tasks manual Chapter 3, "Starting and Stopping HP- UX" for additional
information on shutting down the system.

b. TURN OFF the computer and unplug the power cord.
c. Remove the Graphics Accelerator from its envelope, being careful to
handle the card only by its non-connector edges. The card may be
easily damaged by electrostatic discharge (static zap).
d. Place the card on its envelope, or use a static-free workstation, HP part
number 9300-0933.
2. Disconnect the RGB (Red Green Blue) video cable from the video board.
3. Remove the video board from the computer and place it on a static-free
surface.
4. Insert the Graphics Accelerator into the connector on the video board.
a. Make sure it is firmly seated.
b. Turn the board pair so that the video board is facing up and the
Graphics Accelerator is facing down.
c. Insert and tighten the three screws that correspond with stand-offs on
the Graphics Accelerator.
d. Turn the assembly over and insert and tighten the fourth screw in the
hole corresponding with the stand-off on the video board.
5. Install the board pair into the I/O expander or computer.
Make sure it is firmly seated into the connector.
6. Reconnect the RGB video cable to the video board.
7. Ensure all power switches are in the OFF position.

11-44

Installing Plotters and Graphic Devices

HP 98556A 20 Graphics Accelerator
Accessory Card
11

8. Connect the power cord to the computer.
9. Turn on the monitor.
10. Turn on the computer.
Hardware Installation Complete!

Installing Plotters and Graphic Devices

11-45

HP A1416A High Resolution Color Graphics Interface
The HP A1416A Graphics Interface board is a graphics processor that connects
to the computer's DIO-II bus and outputs color video to a high resolution
(1280 by 1024 pixel) color monitor.
Refer to Appendix B, "Series 400 Support Matrix" for Series 400 hardware and
software support information.

Before Installing This Device
Before you install this interface board:
• If you have not added this type of device to your system before, read the
material in Chapter 1, "Introduction". It provides interface and cabling
guidelines to follow when adding devices to your system.

• Have the documentation that came with the interface board handy. You will
need to refer to it during this procedure.
• Plan ahead.
Installing interface boards on your system requires that you shut down and
power off the system. On a multiuser or clustered system you will want to
warn users and cluster clients in advance that the system (server) will be
coming down. Use the TJall or cTJal1 command to do this.

Caution

If you are adding a device to a cluster-node, you must be
logged into that node to do HP- UX configuration tasks.

For more information about adding devices to a system
configured as an HP -UX cluster, refer to the Managing Clusters
of HP 9000 Computers.

11-46

Installing Plotters and Graphic Devices

HP A 1416A High Resolution
Color Graphics Interface
11

What You're Going To Do
The following table contains detailed HP- UX software set up information.
Complete the hardware installation as outlined in the following section. Once
hardware installation is complete, use the information provided in this table to
complete the software set up as outlined in Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices
Using HP-UX Commands".

Note

SAM does not support the installation of graphics devices.

Detailed information needed for completing the mknod commands is provided in
tables Table 11-9.
Table 11-10.
HP A 1416A High Resolution Color Graphics Interface
HP-UX Setup Values

Device Name
HP 1416A

Device
File 1

File
Type

Major
NumbeI

Select
Code 2

Minor
Number

/dev/crt

132

Ox840000

1 Device file naming conventions are described in Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX
Commands" .
2 The example shown here uses select code setting 132. This is the default select code setting of the
board as it comes from the factory. See Table 11-11 for alternate settings.

This interface uses the graphics device driver.

Installing Plotters and Graphic Devices

11-47

HP A1416A High Resolution
Color Graphics Interface
11

Caution

The A1416A Graphics Interface contains circuits that are
easily damaged by electrostatic discharge. Use a static-free
workstation (HP part number 9300-0933) or lay the Graphics
Interface on the protective bag it was shipped in.

Installing the HP A 1416A High Resolution Color Graphics Interface
Card
The following summary supplements the procedures outlined in the installation
documentation that came with this interface board. Read through this
summary before proceding with the installation.
1. Verify that the graphics driver required for this interface board is included
in your current kernel configuration file, usually the / etc/ conf / dfile file.

To verify that the graphics driver is part of your current kernel
configuration, you can:
• You can use SAM to check your dfile for the graphics driver, add
it and reconfigure the kernel for you at this time. Refer to Chapter 3,
"Adding Drivers for Interface and Accessory Cards Using SAM" for
complete instructions, then go on to step two.
or
• Look in your dfile for the graphics driver. If the graphics driver is in
your kernel configuration file, go on to step 2 now.
If the graphics driver is not in the /etc/conf/dfile, or is commented
out with a comment symbol (such as the * sign), edit the dfile to either
add the driver or remove the comment marks. You must reconfigure
the kernel if you edit the dfile for any reason. You can use the
/etc/config program to do this. See Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices
Using HP- UX Commands" for detailed information on this procedure.

11-48

Installing Plotters and Graphic Devices

HP A1416A High Resolution
Color Graphics Interface
11

2. Play it Safe.
a. Shut down and halt the system using the fete/shutdown -h command.
If you are operating in a diskless cluster, see Managing Clusters of
HP 9000 Computers for additional information on shutting down the
system.

b. TURN OFF the computer and unplug the power cord.
c. Keep the Graphics Interface board in its protective plastic bag until you
are ready to install it.
d. Do not touch the connector. Handle the board by its non-connector
edges only.

3. Remove an empty DIO-II slot cover plate.
You may need a Pozidriv or a slotted screwdriver to loosen the fasteners.

4. Unpackage the interface card.
Place the interface card on a static-free surface such as the plastic shipping
bag it arrived in.

5. Set the select code configuration switches and make note of the settings.
Refer to the documentation that came with the interface board for
instructions on setting the select code. Remember that each device
connected to your system must have a unique select code.
Select code settings zero through seven (0- 7) are reserved.

6. Insert the HP A1416A Graphics Interface.
7. Connect the RGB video cable.
8. Ensure all power switches are in the OFF position.
9. Connect the power cord to the monitor.
10. Turn on the monitor.
11. Plug in and power on the computer.
Hardware Installation Complete!

Installing Plotters and Graphic Devices

11-49

HP A1416A High Resolution
Color Graphics Interface
11

Select Code Settings and Minor Numbers
The following tables contain select code settings and their associated minor
number to be used with the mknod command. Use the information provided in
these tables to complete the software set up as outlined in Chapter 14, "Setting
Up Devices Using HP-UX Commands".
Table 11-11.
HP 1416A High Resolution Color Graphics Interface
HP-UX Setup Values
DIO-II
Select
Code

Switch
MSBLSB

Illknod
Minor
NUIllber

132

1000 0100

Ox840000

133

1000 0101

134

1000 0110

135

DIO-II

Switch
MSBLSB

Illknod
Minor
NUIllber

DIO-II

152

1001 1000

Ox980000

173

1010 1101

OxADOOOO

153

1001 1001

Ox990000

174

1010 1110

OxAEOOOO

Ox850000

154

1001 1010

Ox9AOOOO

175

1010 1111

OxAFOOOO

Ox8600DD

155

1001 1011

Ox9BOOOO

176

1011 0000

OxBOOOOO

10000111

Ox870000

156

1001 1100

Ox9COOOO

177

1011 0001

OxBl0000

136

1000 1000

Ox880000

157

1001 1101

Ox9DOOOO

178

1011 0010

OxB20000

137

1000 1001

Ox890000

158

1001 1110

Ox9EOOOO

179

1011 0011

OxB30000

138

1000 1010

Ox8AOOOO

159

1001 1111

Ox9FOOOO

180

1011 0100

OxB40000

139

1000 1011

Ox8BOOOO

160

1010 0000

OxAOOOOO

181

1011 0101

OxB50000

1011 0110

OxB60000

Select
Code

Switch
MSBLSB

Illknod
Minor
NUIllber

140

1000 1100

Ox8COOOO

161

1010 0001

OxAl0000

182

141

1000 1101

Ox8DOOOO

162

1010 0010

OxA20000

183

1011 0111

OxB70000

142

1000 1110

Ox8EOOOO

163

1010 0011

OxA30000

184

1011 1000

OxB80000

143

1000 1111

Ox8FOOOO

164

1010 0100

OxA40000

185

1011 1001

OxB90000

144

1001 0000

Ox900000

165

1010 0101

OxA50000

186

1011 1010

OxBAOOOO

145

1001 0001

Ox910000

166

1010 0110

OxA60000

187

1011 1011

OxBBOOOO

146

1001 0010

Ox920000

167

1010 0111

OxA70000

188

1011 1100

OxBCOOOO

147

1001 0011

Ox930000

168

1010 1000

OxA80000

189

1011 1101

OxBDOOOO
OxBEOOOO

148

1001 0100

Ox940000

169

1010 1001

OxA90000

190

1011 1110

149

1001 0101

Ox950000

170

1010 1010

OxAAOOOO

191

1011 1111

OxBFOOOO

150

1001 0110

Ox960000

171

1010 1011

OxABOOOO

192

1100 0000

OxCOOOOO

151

1001 0111

Ox970000

172

1010 1100

OxACOOOO

193

11000001

OxCl0000

11-50

Installing Plotters and Graphic Devices

HP A 1416A High Resolution
Color Graphics Interface
11
Table 11-11.
HP 1416A High Resolution Color Graphics Interface
HP-UX Setup Values (continued)
Switch
MSBLSB

mknod
Minor
Number

DIO-II
Select
Code

Switch
MSBLSB

mknod
Minor
Number

DIO-II

Select
Code

Switch
MSBLSB

mknod
Minor
Number

194

1100 0010

OxC20000

215

1101 0111

OxD70000

236

1110 1100

OxECOOOO

195

1100 0011

OxC30000

216

1101 1000

OxD80000

237

1110 1101

OxEDOOOO

196

1100 0100

OxC40000

217

1101 1001

OxD90000

238

1110 1110

OxEEOOOO

DIO-II

197

1100 0101

OxC50000

218

1101 1010

OxDAOOOO

239

1110 1111

OxEFOOOO

198

1100 0110

OxC60000

219

1101 1011

OxDBOOOO

240

1111 0000

OxFOOOOO

199

1100 0111

OxC70000

220

1101 1100

OxDCOOOO

241

1111 0001

OxF10000

200

1100 1000

OxC80000

221

1101 1101

OxDDOOOO

242

1111 0010

OxF20000

201

1100 1001

OxC90000

222

1101 1110

OxDEOOOO

243

1111 0011

OxF30000

202

1100 1010

OxCAOOOO

223

1101 1111

OxDFOOOO

244

1111 0100

OxF40000

203

1100 1011

OxCBOOOO

224

11100000

OxEOOOOO

245

1111 0101

OxF50000

204

1100 1100

OxCCOOOO

225

1110 0001

OxE10000

246

1111 0110

OxF60000

205

1100 1101

OxCDOOOO

226

11100010

OxE20000

247

1111 0111

OxF70000

206

1100 1110

OxCEOOOO

227

1110 0011

OxE30000

248

1111 1000

OxF80000

207

1100 1111

OxCFOOOO

228

1110 0100

OxE40000

249

1111 1001

OxF90000

208

1101 0000

OxDOOOOO

229

1110 0101

OxE50000

250

1111 1010

OxFAOOOO

209

1101 0001

OxD10000

230

1110 0110

OxE60000

251

1111 1011

OxFBOOOO

210

1101 0010

OxD20000

231

11100111

OxE70000

252

1111 1100

OxFCOOOO

211

1101 0011

OxD30000

232

1110 1000

OxE80000

253

1111 1101

OxFDOOOO

212

1101 0100

OxD40000

233

1110 1001

OxE90000

254

1111 1110

OxFEOOOO

213

1101 0101

OxD50000

234

1110 1010

OxEAOOOO

255

1111 1111

OxFFOOOO

214

1101 0011

OxD60000

235

1110 1011

OxEBOOOO

Installing Plotters and Graphic Devices

11-51

HP 98700 CX Graphics Display Controller and
The HP 98287A Graphics Display Controller Interface
The HP 98700 Graphics Display Controller connects to the HP 98287 A
Graphics Display Controller Interface. The following procedure describes how
to install the HP 98287 A interface, the HP 98700 Display Controller, the
optional HP 98710A Graphics Accelerator upgrade system, and the HP 98782A
Color Monitor. Installation of the HP 46081A Speaker Module is described in
Chapter 13, "Installing HP-HIL Accessories" .
Refer to Appendix B, "Series 400 Support Matrix" for Series 400 hardware and
software support information.

Before Installing This Device
Before you install:
• If you have not added this type of device to your system before, read the
material in Chapter 1, "Introduction". It provides interface and cabling
guidelines to follow when adding devices to your system.
• Have the documentation that came with the devices handy. You will need to
refer to it during this procedure.
• Plan ahead.
Installing peripheral devices on your system requires that you shut down and
power off the system. On a multiuser or clustered system you will want to
warn users and cluster clients in advance that the system (server) will be
coming down. Use the wall or cwall command to do this.

Caution

11-52

Installing Plotters and Graphic Devices

HP 98700 Graphics Display Controller
11

What You're Going To Do
The following tables contain detailed HP- UX software set up information.
Complete the hardware installation as outlined in this section. Once the
hardware installation is complete, use the information provided in these tables
to complete the software set up as outlined in Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices
Using HP-UX Commands".
The driver required for this device is the graphics driver.
Table 11-12.
98700 Graphics Display Controller
Set to External Addressing Mode

Device Name

File
Major Select
Type Number Code

Minor
Number

HP 98700

Ox170200

HP 98700

Ox180200

HP 98700

Ox190200

HP 98700

Ox1a0200

HP 98700

Ox1e0200

Table 11-13.
98700 Graphics Display Controller
Set to Internal Addressing Mode

File
Type

Major
Number

Minor
Number

HP 98700, with 8300 video1

OxOOO100

HP 98700, no 8300 video1

OxOOOOOO

Device Name

1 The first entry in the table applies to systems that have an enabled Series 300
built-in video interlace. The second entry applies to systems without a built-in
video interface

Installing Plotters and Graphic Devices

11-53

HP 98700 Graphics Display Controller
11

Installing the HP 98700 Graphics Display Controller
The following summary supplements the procedures outlined in your
installation documentation for this device. Read through this summary before
proceding with the installation.
1. Verify that the graphics driver required for this device is included in your
current kernel configuration file, usually the /etc/conf/dfile file.

To verify that the graphics driver is part of your current kernel
configuration, you can:
• You can use SAM to check your dfile for the graphics driver, add it
if necessary and reconfigure the kernel for you at this time. Refer to
Chapter 3, "Adding Drivers for Interface and Accessory Cards Using
SAM" for complete instructions, and then go on to step two.
or
• Look in your df ile for the graphics driver. If the graphics driver is in
your kernel configuration file, go on to step 2 now.
If the graphics driver is not in the /etc/conf/dfile, or is commented
out with a comment symbol (such as the * sign), edit the dfile to either
add the driver or remove the comment marks. You must reconfigure
the kernel if you edit the dfile for any reason. You can use the
/etc/config program to do this. See Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices
Using HP- UX Commands" for detailed information on this procedure.
2. Play it safe.

a. Shut down and halt the system using the /etc/shutdown -h command.
If you are operating in a diskless cluster, see Managing Clusters of
HP 9000 Computers for additional information on shutting down the
system.
b. TURN OFF the computer and unplug the power cord.
3. Ensure all power switches on the devices and on the computer are in the
OFF position.

11-54

Installing Plotters and Graphic Devices

HP 98700 Graphics Display Controller
11

4. Install the HP 98287A Graphics Display Controller Interface card, if
necessary.

The HP 98700 Graphics Display Controller connects to the HP 98287 A
Graphics Display Controller Interface card. If you have already installed
this card, skip to the next step. If you need to install this card follow these
instructions:

HP-HIL SELECT CODE=31

SW2
FRAME

BUFFER

ADDRESS=$300000

ADDRESS

MODE=INTERNAL
SELECT CODE=25

III
Figure 11-5.
Graphics Display Controller Interface switches

a. Remove the Graphics Display Controller Interface from its envelope,
being careful to handle the card only by its edges and metal end plate.
The card may be easily damaged by electrostatic discharge (static zap).

Installing Plotters and Graphic Devices

11-55

HP 98700 Graphics Display Controller
11

b. Place the card on the envelope.
c. Check the HP -HIL select code.
The HP-HIL select code switches (SW1), should be set to 31, as shown
in Figure 11-5.
d. Set the Frame Buffer Address and the Addressing Mode.
Refer to the instructions that came with the interface card for
information on the default settings of these values and for instructions
on how to change these settings.
Keep in mind the following restrictions:
• If you have both a Graphics Display Controller and a Series 300
bit-mapped display, do not use the frame buffer address $200000.
• If you have a Model 320 computer, do not use frame buffer address
$800000 or $900000.

• Only one graphics display controller can be set to internal addressing
mode (the mode used for the system console).
• If you use internal addressing mode, you cannot also use a Series
300 bit-mapped display connected to an HP 98542/43/44/45A video
card. (You can use a monitor connected to an HP 98546A Display
Compatibility Interface, however.) You must remove your HP
98542/43/44/45A video card. See your Installation Reference manual
for details.

• To use both a Graphics Display Controller and a Series 300
bit-mapped display, you must use external addressing mode.
To use the Graphics Display Controller as a graphics output device
only, set addressing mode to the external address (or select code)
setting.

11·56

Installing Plotters and Graphic Devices

HP 98700 Graphics Display Controller
11

e. Set the Graphics Display Controller select code and make note of it.
Refer to the Graphics Display Controller interface documentation for
the default setting of the select code value. If this default has already
been used on your system, change the select code setting to an unused
value following the instructions given.

Note

All devices on your system must have a unique select code
setting.

f. Remove the painted cover plates from the back of your computer until
you find an empty even-numbered slot. (Slots are numbered from top
to bottom, starting with number one (1) for the top-most slot.) Do not
remove the silver cover plates from the bottom of the computer.
g. Insert the Graphics Display Controller Interface, component side up,
into an empty, even-numbered slot. Refer to the installation note that
came with the interface card for complete instructions.
h. If you changed the select code of the Graphics Display Controller
Interface, find this number in the set of select code labels supplied with
the interface. Affix this label to the metal end plate.
1.

Note

If you have other interface or accessory cards to install, leave the cover
plates off; otherwise, replace them.
If you have the HP 98710A Graphics Accelerator, complete step
4, otherwise skip to step 5.

5. Install the 98710A Graphics Accelerator (optional).
a. Ensure that the HP 98700 is disconnected from its power source.
b. Install the 98710A Graphics Accelerator on to the HP 98700 Graphics
Display Controller. Follow the instructions that came with the
controller.

Installing Plotters and Graphic Devices

11-57

HP 98700 Graphics Display Controller
11

6. Place the HP 98700/98710 between the computer and the HP 98782A Color
Monitor.
Ensure that you place the units in a location that provides adequate
circulation for cooling. Do not place the monitor on any surface (rugs,
blankets, etc.) that will restrict air flow, or near curtains or draperies
that could block the ventilation holes. Do not install near heat sources
(radiators, or hot air ducts), or in direct sunlight. Avoid areas with
excessive dust, mechanical vibration, or shock.

7. Connect the HP 98700 Controller to the HP 98782 Color Monitor.
a. Connect the RGB (Red Green Blue) cables to the monitor, observing
the color coding of the cables: red to red, blue to blue and green to
green.
b. Connect the other end of the cables to the HP 98700 in the same
manner.

8. Connect the interconnect cable.
a. Connect the interconnect cable (HP part number 98700-61601) to the
HP 98287 A Graphics Display Controller Interface.
b. Connect the other end of the interconnect cable to the HP 98700.

9. Connect all power cords.
10. Turn on the monitor.
11. Turn on the HP 98700.

12. Turn on the computer.
Hardware installation complete! To complete the software set up portion of
this procedures, follow the instructions in Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices
Using HP-UX Commands".

11-58

Installing Plotters and Graphic Devices

HP 98724A/25A Local Graphics Bus Interface
The HP 98724A/25A Local Graphics Bus (LGB) interface cards provide a
connection between the HP 98720 SRX Graphics Display Controller and the
computer. The HP 98724A is a DIO-I interface card and the HP 98725A is a
DIO-System interface card.
Refer to Appendix B, "Series 400 Support Matrix" for Series 400 hardware and
software support information.

Before Installing This Device
Before you install this interface card:
• If you have not added this type of device to your system before, read the
material in Chapter 1, "Introduction". It provides interface and cabling
guidelines to follow when adding devices to your system.
• Have the documentation that came with the interface card handy. You will
need to refer to it during this procedure.
• Plan ahead.
Installing interface cards on your system requires that you shut down and
power off the system. On a multiuser or clustered system you will want to
warn users and cluster clients in advance that the system (server) will be
coming down. Use the wall or cwall command to do this.

Caution

If you are adding this device to a cluster-node, you must be
logged into that node to do HP- UX configuration tasks.

For more information about adding devices to a system
configured as an HP- UX cluster, refer to Managing Clusters of
HP 9000 Computers, Chapter 12, "Adding Peripherals to a
Cluster" .

Installing Plotters and Graphic Devices

11-59

HP 98724AJ98725A Local Graphics Bus Interface
11

Installing the HP 98724A/98725A Local Graphics Bus Interface

Fe _______
o

cs ______

Figure 11·6.
HP 98724A LGB Interface Switches

11·60 Installing Plotters and Graphic Devices

HP 98724Aj98725A Local Graphics Bus Interface
11

o
Figure 11-7.
HP 98725A LGB Interface Switches

Installing Plotters and Graphic Devices

11-61

HP 98724Aj98725A Local Graphics Bus Interface
11

The following summary supplements the procedures outlined in your
installation documentation for this interface card. Read through this summary
before proceding with the installation.
1. Verify that the graphics driver required for this interface card is included in
your c'Urrent kernel configuration file, usually the / etc/ conf / dfile file.

To verify that the graphics driver is part of your current kernel
configuration, you can:
• Use SAM to check your dfile for the graphics driver, add it and
reconfigure the kernel for you at this time. See Chapter 12, "Setting Up
HP- UX for Plotters Using SAM", and then go on to step two.
or
• Look in your dfile for the graphics driver. If the graphics driver is in
your kernel configuration file, go on to step 2 now.
If the graphics driver is not in the /etc/conf/dfile, or is commented
out with a comment symbol (such as the * sign), edit the dfile to either
add the driver or remove the comment marks. You must reconfigure the
kernel if you edit the dfile for any reason. You can use the /etc/config
program to do this. See Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX
Commands" for detailed information on this procedure.
2. Play it safe.

b. TURN OFF the computer and unplug the power cord.
c. Remove the HP 98724A/25A from its envelope, being careful to handle
the card by its edges and metal end plate. The card may be easily
damaged by electrostatic discharge (static zap).
d. Place the card on the envelope.

11-62

Installing Plotters and Graphic Devices

HP 98724Aj98725A Local Graphics Bus Interface
11

3. Set the Frame Buffer Address and select code.

Note

Your LGB interface card has been preset to an internal
addressing mode (as shown in Figure 11-6 and Figure 11- 7).
If this is the first (or only) LGB card you are installing, and
you want to use the Graphics Display Controller as the system
console, skip to step 3 now.
If you have two Graphics Display Controllers, only one can be
set to internal addressing mode. You will have to change the
setting of the second LGB card.

Follow the directions in the installation material provided with this interface
card to change the Frame Buffer Address to an external addressing mode if
this is the second LGB card you are installing, or if you do not intend to use
the Graphics Display Controller as the system console.
Then, use the installation material provided with the card to set the select
code settings. This interface requires two sequential select code values. Use
either 26 and 27, 28 and 29, or 30 and 31 if possible.
4. Insert the LGB Interface Card.
a. Insert the HP 98724A/25A, component side up, into an empty I/O slot
in your computer. Tighten the thumb screws on the metal end plate until
the end plate is flush with the back of the computer.
b. If you have other interface or accessory cards to install, leave the cover
plates off; otherwise replace them.

Installing Plotters and Graphic Devices

11-63

HP 98724A/98725A Local Graphics Bus Interface
11

5. Record the select code.

Make a note of the select code settings you chose. These settings are no
longer available for use on the system.

Note

Remember, each interface card must have a unique select code.
Select codes zero through seven (0-7) are reserved for internal
interface cards and cannot be used for new interface cards.
If you need to change the select code of an internal interface
card for any reason, do so by entering Configuration Mode
during the Boot ROM sequence. To interact with the Boot
ROM Configuration Mode on a model 362 or 382 computer,
consult the Hardware Configuration Guide for instructions. To
interact with the Boot ROM Configuration Mode of any other
S300 or S400 computer, refer to the Service Manual for the
specific model computer.

Installation Complete!
Refer to the "HP 98720A SRX Graphics Display Controller" section of this
chapter for instructions to connect the HP 98720A SRX Graphics Display
Controller to the HP 98724A/25A Local Graphics Bus Interface.

11·64

Installing Plotters and Graphic Devices

HP 98720A SRX Graphics Display Controller
The HP 98720A SRX Graphics Display Controller connects to the HP
98724A, 98725A Local Graphics Bus Interface, or built in Model 319 interface,
depending on which Series 300 model computer you are using.

Caution

Electronic assemblies in the HP 98720A such as the HP
98721A, 98722A, and the 98723A are very susceptible to
handling damage. They are installed by HP qualified personnel.
Damage caused by users may not be covered under warranty.

Refer to Appendix B, "Series 400 Support Matrix" for Series 400 hardware and
software support information.

• Have the documentation that came with the controller handy. You will need
to refer to it during this procedure.
• Plan ahead.
Installing new devices on your system requires that you shut down and power
off the system. On a multiuser or clustered system you will want to warn
users and cluster clients in advance that the system (server) will be coming
down. Use the wall or cwall command to do this.

Caution

If you are adding this device to a cluster-node, you must be
logged into that node to do HP- UX configuration tasks.

For more information about adding devices to a system
configured as an HP- UX cluster, refer to Managing Clusters of
HP 9000 Computers, Chapter 12, "Adding Peripherals to a
Cluster" .

Installing Plotters and Graphic Devices

11-65

What You're Going To Do
The following tables contain detailed HP- UX software set up information.
Complete the hardware installation as outlined in this section. Once hardware
installation is complete, use the information provided in these tables to
complete the software set up as outlined in Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices
Using HP-UX Commands".
SAM does not support the installation of graphics devices.

Note

Device file naming conventions are described in Chapter 14, "Setting Up
Devices Using HP- UX Commands".
Table 11-14.
HP 98720A
Set to Internal Addressing Mode

Device Name

Path
Name

File
Type

Major
Number

Minor
Number

HP 98720A, image planes

/dev/crt

OxOOOOOO

HP 98720A, overlay planes

/dev/ocrt

OxOOOOO1

11-66

Installing Plotters and Graphic Devices

11
Table 11-15.
HP 98720A
Set to External Addressing Mode (Select Code 26-27, 28-29,
30-31)
Path
Name

File
Type

Major
Number

Minor
Number

HP 98720A, select code 26-27,
image planes

/dev/crt

Ox1a0200

HP 98720A, select code 26-27,
overlay planes

/dev/ocrt

Ox1a0201

HP 98720A, select code 28-29,
image planes

/dev/crt

Ox1c0200

HP 98720A, select code 28-29,
overlay planes

/dev/ocrt

Ox1c0201

HP 98720A, select code 30-31,
image planes

/dev/crt

Ox1e0200

HP 98720A, select code 30-31,
overlay planes

/dev/ocrt

Ox1e0201

Device Name

Installing Plotters and Graphic Devices

11-67

HP 98720A SRX Graphics Display Controller
11

Installing the HP 98720A SRX Graphics Display Controller
Make sure that the correct interface is installed in your computer. Installation
of the HP 98724A and 98725A interface cards are covered in the previous
section of this chapter .
• If you have a Model 320 computer, you should have an HP 98724A Local
Graphics Bus (LGB) interface card .
• If you have a Model 330 or 350 computer, you need an HP 98725A Local
Graphics Bus (LGB) interface card.

The following summary supplements the procedures outlined in your
installation documentation for this interface card. Read through this summary
before pro ceding with the installation.
1. Verify that the device drivers required for this controller are included in your
current kernel configuration file, usually the /etc/conf/dfile file.

To verify that the necessary drivers are part of your current kernel
configuration, you can:
• You can use SAM to check your dfile for the drivers, add them if
necessary and reconfigure the kernel for you at this time. Refer to
Chapter 3, "Adding Drivers for Interface and Accessory Cards Using
SAM" for complete instructions, then go on to step two.
or
• Look in your dfile for the necessary drivers. If the drivers are in your
kernel configuration file, go on to step 2 now.
If the drivers are not in the /etc/conf/dfile, or are commented out
with a comment symbol (such as the * sign), edit the dfile to either
add the driver or remove the comment marks. You must reconfigure
the kernel if you edit the dfile for any reason. You can use the
/etc/config program to do this. See Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices
Using HP-UX Commands" for detailed information on this procedure.

11-68

Installing Plotters and Graphic Devices

HP 98720A SRX Graphics Display Controller
11

2. Play it safe.
a. Shut down and halt the system using the fete/shutdown -h command.
b. Shut down and halt the system using the fete/shutdown -h command.
If you are operating in a diskless cluster, see Managing Clusters of
HP 9000 Computers for additional information on shutting down the
system.

c. TURN OFF the computer and unplug the power cord.
d. Unpack the display station and check the voltage setting according to
the documentation.

3. Locate the Graphics Display Controller near the computer and the monitor.
4. Connect the RG B cable.

5. Connect the LGB cable to the HP 98724A/25A interface connector.
6. Connect the other end of the LGB cable to the HP 98720A.
7. Ensure all power switches are in the OFF position.
8. Connect all power cords.
If your HP 98720A contains two power supplies, connect both power cords.

9. Turn on the monitor.
10. Turn on the HP 98720A.
11. Turn on the computer.
Hardware Installation Complete!

Refer to Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX Commands" for
software configuration instructions.

Installing Plotters and Graphic Devices

11-69

HP 98726A Local Graphics Bus Interface
The HP 98726A interface card provides a connection between a Series 300
SPU-backplane DIO-II bus and the 32-bit multiplexed address/data Local
Graphics Bus (LGB). The interface acts as a slave on the DIO bus and as
a master controller on the LGB for the HP 98730A TurboSRX Display
Controller.
The interface supports byte and word transfers in accordance with DIO-I
specifications as well as longword and unaligned transfers specified in DIO- II.
Refer to Appendix B, "Series 400 Support Matrix" for Series 400 hardware and
software support information.

Before Installing This Device
Before you install:
• If you have not added this type of device to your system before, read the
material in Chapter 1, "Introduction". It provides interface and cabling
guidelines to follow when adding devices to your system.
• Have the documentation that came with the interface card handy. You will
need to refer to it during this procedure.
• Plan ahead.
Installing new devices on your system requires that you shut down and power
off the system. On a multiuser or clustered system you will want to warn
users and cluster clients in advance that the system (server) will be coming
down. Use the wall or cwall command to do this.

Caution

If you are adding this device to a cluster-node, you must be
logged into that node to do HP- UX configuration tasks.
For more information about adding devices to a system
configured as an HP- UX cluster, refer to Managing Clusters of
HP 9000 Computers, Chapter 12, "Adding Peripherals to a
Cluster" .

11-70

Installing Plotters and Graphic Devices

HP 98726A Local Graphics Bus Interface
11

Installing the HP 98726A Local Graphics Bus Interface
Complete the hardware installation as outlined in below:

b. TURN OFF the computer and unplug the power cord.
c. Remove the HP 98726A from its envelope, being careful to handle the
card by its edges and metal end plate. The card may be easily damaged
by electrostatic discharge (static zap).
d. Place the card on the envelope.

2. Set the following values according to the instructions provided in the
installation document that came with the interface.
a. Set address mode and select code.

Note

Make note of the select codes used for this interface card.
Remember, each interface card must have a unique select code.
Select codes zero through seven (0- 7) are reserved for internal
interface cards.
If you need to change the select code of an internal interface
card for any reason, do so by entering Configuration Mode
during the Boot ROM sequence. To interact with the Boot
ROM Configuration Mode on a model 362 or 382 computer
consult the Hardware Configuration Guide for instructions. To
interact with the Boot ROM Configuration Mode of any other
S300 or S400 computer, refer to the Service Manual for the
specific model computer.

Installing Plotters and Graphic Devices

11-71

HP 98726A Local Graphics Bus Interface
11

b. Set the interface control space.
The card's control space can be at $200000 (default and recommended)
or at $800000.

Caution

When using memory location $800000 ensure that there is
no other use of this area of memory. Unpredictable results
will occur if other software/hardware attempt to use memory
location $800000.

3. Configure the interface for system console or peripheral device.
CONSOLE CONFIGURATION

a. A System Console Terminal is an RS-232 terminal that has the remote
bit set on the RS-232 interface card by altering the hardware switch or
altering the switch value at boot-up with boot ROM rev. D or rev. 400.
The RS- 232 interface card may also configure the remote bit set by a
resistor being removed. Any Console Terminal connected to your system
is the system console, no matter what other terminals or displays are
connected to the system.
b. As a second choice, any bit-mapped display attached to an interface
addressed to $560000 is the system console. This is the default DIO-I
internal addressing configuration shipped. This is the recommended
choice for the HP 98726A / HP 98730A subsystem used as a system
console.
c. For a third choice, the first bit-mapped display found in DIO-I space is
recognized as the console. The search is from lowest to highest memory
location (select code) in DIO-I space.
d. For a fourth choice, the first bit-mapped display found in DIO-II space is
recognized as the console. The search is from lowest to highest memory
location (select code) in DIO-II space.

11· 72

Installing Plotters and Graphic Devices

HP 98726A Local Graphics Bus Interface
11
PERIPHERAL CONFIGURATION

a. When a Console Terminal is the system console, the HP 98726A can be
placed at any legal location and is treated as a peripheral.
b. When a bit-mapped display is the system console at $560000, then the
HP 98726A must be placed at any legal address that is not $560000
and jumper JPl must be placed in the $800000 position. See previous
CA UTION note.
c. If a bit-mapped display is the system console and located in DIO-II
space, the HP 98726A must be addressed at a higher memory location in
DIO-II space. The jumper JPl setting is ignored in DIO-II space.
4. Install the interface card in your computer or expander.
a. Insert the card, component side up, into an empty I/O slot in your
computer. Tighten the thumb screws on the metal end plate until the
end plate is flush with the back of the computer.
b. If you have other interface or accessory cards to install, leave the cover
plates off; otherwise replace them.
Installation Complete!
Refer to the "HP 98730A TurboSRX Graphics Display Controller" section of
this chapter for instructions to connect the HP 98730A TurboSRX Graphics
Display Controller to the HP 98726A Local Graphics Bus Interface.

Installing Plotters and Graphic Devices

11-73

HP 98730A TurboSRX Graphics Display Controller
The HP 98730A TurboSRX Graphics Display Controller connects to your
system via the HP 98726A Local Graphics Bus Interface.
Refer to Appendix B, "Series 400 Support Matrix" for Series 400 hardware and
software support information.

Before Installing This Device
Before you install this controller:
• If you have not added this type of device to your system before, read the
material in Chapter 1, "Introduction". It provides interface and cabling
guidelines to follow when adding devices to your system.

Caution

If you are adding this device to a cluster-node, you must be
logged into that node to do HP- UX configuration tasks.

For more information about adding devices to a system
configured as an HP-UX cluster, refer to Managing Clusters of
HP 9000 Computers, Chapter 12, "Adding Peripherals to a
Cluster" .

11-74

Installing Plotters and Graphic Devices

HP 98730A TurboSRX Graphics Display Controller
11

HP-UX Set Up Information
The settings in Table 11-16 are DIO-I settings on the 98726A interface card.
This setting requires the jumper JP1 to be in the $200000 position on the
interface card. This is the recommended choice for the HP 98726A and HP
98730A subsystem used as a system console. The DIO-I external address
settings in Table 11-16 require the jumper JP1 to be in the $800000 position on
the interface card.
Table 11-16.
HP 98726A/98730A
010-1 Settings

Switch Setting CTL_BASE Select
MSB ... LSB 1
Code
(hex)

File Major
Type No.

Minor
No.

0101 0110 2

$560000

internal

OxOOOOOO

0110 1010
0110 1100
0110 1110

$6AOOOO

$6EOOOO

10-11
12-13
14-15

$6COOOO

12
12
12

0111
0111
0111
0111

0000
0010
0100
0110

$700000
$720000
$7400000
$760000

16-17
18-19
20-21
22-23

0111
0111
0111
0111

1000
1010
1100
1110

$780000
$7 AOOOO
$7COOOO
$7EOOOO

24-25
26-27
28-29
30-31

OxOA0200
OxOC0200
OxOE0200
Oxl00200
Ox120200
Ox140200
Ox160200
Ox180200
OxlA0200
OxlC0200
OxlE0200

c
c
c
c
c
c
c

12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12

1 Additional settings can be found by referring to the tables listed in the
Installation Note for this interface card.
2 default setting

The settings in Table 11-17 reflect DIO-II settings for all possible select codes.
The jumper JP1 is ignored for DIO-II.

Installing Plotters and Graphic Devices

11-75

HP 98730A TurboSRX Graphics Display Controller
11
Table 11-17. HP 98726j98730A 010-11 Settings
Switch Setting
MSB ... LSB 1

CTL_BASE
(hex)

Select
Code

File
Type

Major
No.

Minor
No.

10000101

$01400000

133

OX850200

10001001

$02400000

137

OX890200

10001101

$03400000

141

OX8D0200

1001 0001

$04400000

145

OX910200

1001 0101

$05400000

149

OX950200

1001 1001

$06400000

153

OX990200

1001 1101

$07400000

157

OX9D0200

1010 0001

$08400000

161

OXA10200

1010 0101

$09400000

165

OXA50200

1010 1001

$OA400000

169

OXA90200

1010 1101

$OB400000

173

OXAD0200

1011 0001

$OC400000

177

OXB10200

1011 0101

$OD400000

181

OXB50200

1011 1001

$OE400000

185

OXB90200

1011 1101

$OF400000

189

OXBD0200

11000001

$10400000

193

OXC10200

11000101

$11400000

197

OXC50200

11001001

$12400000

201

OXC90200
OXCD0200

11001101

$13400000

205

1101 0001

$14400000

209

OXD10200

1101 0101

$15400000

213

OXD50200

1101 1001

$16400000

217

OXD90200

1101 1101

$17400000

221

OXDD0200

11100001

$18400000

225

OXE10200

11100101

$19400000

229

OXE50200

11101001

$A4000000

233

OXE90200

11101101

$B4000000

237

OXED0200

1111 0001

$lC400000

241

OXF50200

1111 0101

$lD400000

245

OXF50200

1111 1001

$lE400000

249

OXFD0200

1111 1101

$lF400000

253

OXFD0200

1 Additional settings can be found by referring to the tables listed in the
Installation Note for this interface card.

11-76

Installing Plotters and Graphic Devices

HP 98730A TurboSRX Graphics Display Controller
11

Connecting the HP 98730A TurboSRX Graphics Display Controller
Refer to the documentation that came with the 98730A to:
• Unpack the HP 98730A .
• Check the voltage setting.
Make sure that the HP 98726A interface is installed in your computer.
Installation of this interface card is covered in a separate section of this
chapter.
1. Play it safe.
a. Shut down and halt the system using the fete/shutdown -h command.
If you are operating in a diskless cluster, see Managing Clusters of HP
9000 Computers for additional information on shutting down the system.

b. TURN OFF the computer and unplug the power cord.
c. Remove system power cords from the power outlets.
2. Locate the Graphics Display Controller near the computer and the monitor.
3. Connect the LGB cable.
a. Connect the 1GB cable to the HP 98726A 1GB interface connector.
The cable connector key projects outward near the top from each end of
the connector shell. Ensure that this is UP when connecting it to the
interface or the HP 98730A.
b. Connect the other end of the 1GB cable to the HP 98730A.

Installing Plotters and Graphic Devices

11·77

HP 98730A TurboSRX Graphics Display Controller
11

4. Connect the RGB cable.
a. Connect the RGB (Red Green Blue) cable to the monitor: red to red,
green to green, and blue to blue connectors.
b. Connect the other end of the RG B cable to the HP 98730A in the same
manner.

5. Ensure the power switches are in the OFF position.
6. Connect all power cords.
If your HP 98730A contains two power supplies, connect both power cords.

7. Turn on the monitor.
8. Turn on the HP 98730A.
9. Turn on the computer.
Installation Complete! Refer to Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices Using HP -UX
Commands" for software configuration instructions.

11-78

Installing Plotters and Graphic Devices

HP 98702A Graphics Address and Data Bus Interface
The 98702A Graphics Address and Data Bus Interface provides the connection
between your computer and an HP 98705A, B, or C Graphics Display
Controller.
Refer to Appendix B, "Series 400 Support Matrix" for Series 400 hardware and
software support information.

Before Installing This Device
Before you install:
• If you have not added this type of device to your system before, read the
material in Chapter 1, "Introduction". It provides interface and cabling
guidelines to follow when adding devices to your system.
• Have the documentation that came with the interface card handy. You will
need to refer to it during this procedure.
• Plan ahead.
Installing new devices on your system requires that you shut down and power
off the system. On a multiuser or clustered system you will want to warn
users and cluster clients in advance that the system (server) will be coming
down. Use the wall or cwall command to do this.

Caution

If you are adding this device to a cluster-node, you must be
logged into that node to do HP- UX configuration tasks.
For more information about adding devices to a system
configured as an HP-UX cluster, refer to Managing Clusters of
HP 9000 Computers, Chapter 12, "Adding Peripherals to a
Cluster" .

Installing Plotters and Graphic Devices

11-79

HP 98702A Graphics Address
and Data Bus Interface
11

Installing the HP 98702A Graphics Address and Data Bus Interface
The following summary supplements the procedures outlined in your
installation documentation for this interface card. Read through this summary
before proceding with the installation.
1. Play it safe.

a. Shut down and halt the system using the fete/shutdown -h command.

If you are operating in a diskless cluster, see Managing Clusters of HP
9000 Computers for additional information on shutting down the system.
b. TURN OFF the computer and unplug the power cord.
c. Remove the HP 98702A from its envelope, being careful to handle the
card by its edges and metal end plate. The card may be easily damaged
by electrostatic discharge (static zap).
d. Place the card on its envelope.

2. Set the select code and make note of the settings.
The select code is preset to 133-135.

Note

Select codes zero through seven (0- 7) are reserved.

If your system has a conflict with the interface's select code address, you can
change the address. If a second interface is installed with the same select
code, one of them will have to be given a new select code switch setting.

11-80

Installing Plotters and Graphic Devices

HP 98702A Graphics Address
and Data Bus Interface
11

Note:

If switch IS down
on the open side,
that bit IS zero

010-11 Extended
Select Code
Figure 11·8. HP 98702A Interface Default Address Switch Setting

The switch configuration shown in Figure 11-8 is the default configuration
on the card as shipped. It is configured for DIO-II select code 133-135.
The interface occupies three consecutive select codes in uncached address
space. The first select code provides 4 Mbytes of address space for control.
The second two select codes allocate 8 Mbytes of address space for full pixel
addressing to the frame buffer.
)

Each switch position corresponds to four DIO-II select codes. The first
select code is not used and is available for use with other than the Graphics
Processor. The second select code is used for the Graphics Processor's
control space, and the last two are used for the Graphics Processor's frame
buffer space. Table Table 11-18 shows the translation between the interface's
address switch settings, the DIO- II select code, and the mknod minor
number.

Installing Plotters and Graphic Devices

11·81

HP 98702A Graphics Address
and Data Bus Interface
11
Table 11-18.
HP 98702 Graphics Interface
HP-UX Setup Values
Switch
MSBLSB

DIO-II
Select
Code

Switch
MSBLSB

133-135

00001

205-207

10011

137-139

00010

209-211

10100

141-143

00011

213-215

10101

145-147

00100

217-219

10110

149-151

00101

221-223

10111

153-155

00110

225-227

11000

157-159

00111

229-231

11001

161-163

01000

233-235

11010

185-187

01110

237-239

11011

189-191

01111

241-243

11100

193-195

10000

245-247

11101

197-199

10001

249-251

11110

201-203

10010

253-255

11111

DIO-II
Select
Code

Note

a. A switch setting of 00000 is not a valid address code. The
result will be a failure of the lODC test code to load and
run at power-up (all LEDs on the interface will stay ON).
b. The Frame Buffer addresses are always 4 Mbytes (Ox400000)
above the CTL_BASE address.

11-82

Installing Plotters and Graphic Devices

HP 98702A Graphics Address
and Data Bus Interface
11

3. Insert the interface card in your computer or expander.

a. Insert the card, component side up, into an empty I/O slot. Tighten the
thumb screws on the metal end plate until the end plate is flush with the
back of the computer or expander.
b. If you have other interface or accessory cards to install, leave the cover
plates off; otherwise replace them.
Installation Complete

Refer to the "HP 98705A/B/C Graphics Display Controllers" section of this
chapter for instructions to connect the HP 98705A/B/C Graphics Display
Controller to the HP 98702A Graphics Address and Data Bus Interface.

Installing Plotters and Graphic Devices

11·83

HP 98705A/B/C Graphics Display Controllers
The HP 98705A/B/C Graphics Display Controller connects to your system via
the HP 98702A Graphics Address and Data Bus Interface.
The HP 98705A Graphic Display Controller consists of eight image planes and
four overlays.
The HP98705B Graphic Display Controller consists of 16 image planes, four
overlays, and a 16-bit Z buffer.
The 98705C Graphic Display Controller mirrors the HP 98705A configuration
with slower performance.
Refer to Appendix B, "Series 400 Support Matrix" for Series 400 hardware and
software support information.

;;;;;-:::

-=--

-ow

~
~

-7

9)Q)K~~
Figure 11-9. HP 98705AjBjC Inventory

11-84

Installing Plotters and Graphic Devices

HP 98705A/B/C Graphics Display Controllers
11

Before Installing This Device
Before you install:
• If you have not added this type of device to your system before, read the
material in Chapter 1, "Introduction". It provides interface and cabling
guidelines to follow when adding devices to your system.
• Have the documentation that came with the controller handy. You will need
to refer to it during this procedure.
• Plan ahead.
Installing new devices on your system requires that you shut down and power
off the system. On a multiuser or clustered system you will want to warn
users and cluster clients in advance that the system (server) will be coming
down. Use the wall or cwall command to do this.

Caution

If you are adding this device to a cluster-node, you must be
logged into that node to do HP- UX configuration tasks.
For more information about adding devices to a system
configured as an HP- UX cluster, refer to Managing Clusters of
HP 9000 Computers, Chapter 12, "Adding Peripherals to a
Cluster" .

Installing Plotters and Graphic Devices

11·85

HP 98705AjBjC Graphics Display Controllers
11

HP-UX Set Up Information
The following table contains detailed HP- UX software set up information.
Complete the hardware installation as outlined in this section. Once the
hardware installation is complete, use the information provided in this table to
complete the software set up as outlined in Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices
Using HP-UX Commands".
The device file naming conventions are described in Chapter 14, "Setting Up
Devices Using HP- UX Commands".
Table 11-19.
HP 98702 Graphics Interface
HP-UX Setup Values
DIO-II

mknod
Minor
Number

CTL_BASE
(hex)

DIO-II
Select
Code

Switch
MSBLSB

mknod
Minor
Number

CTL_BASE
(hex)

00001

Ox850200

Ox01400000

205.:.207

10011

Oxcd0200

Ox13400000

00010

Ox890200

Ox02400000

209-211

10100

Oxd10200

Ox14400000

141-143

00011

Ox8d0200

Ox03400000

213-215

10101

Oxd50200

Ox15400000

145-147

00100

Ox910200

Ox04400000

217-219

10110

Oxd90200

Ox16400000

149-151

00101

Ox950200

Ox05400000

221-223

10111

Oxdd0200

Ox17400000

153-155

00110

Ox990200

Ox06400000

225-227

11000

Oxe10200

Ox18400000

157-159

00111

Ox9d0200

Ox07400000

229-231

11001

Oxe50200

Ox19400000

161-163

01000

Oxa10200

Ox08400000

233-235

11010

Oxe90200

Ox1A400000

01110

Oxb90200

OxOE400000

237-239

11011

Oxed0200

Ox1B400000

189-191

01111

Oxbd0200

OxOF400000

241-243

11100

Ox:f10200

Ox1C400000

193-195

10000

Oxc10200

Ox10400000

245-247

11101

Ox:f50200

Ox1D400000

197-199

10001

Oxc50200

Ox11400000

249-251

11110

Ox:f90200

Ox1E400000

201-203

10010

Oxc90200

Ox12400000

253-255

11111

Ox:fd0200

Ox1F400000

Select
Code

Switch
MSBLSB

133-135
137-139

185-187

11-86

Installing Plotters and Graphic Devices

HP 98705A/B/C Graphics Display Controllers
11

Installing the HP 98705A/B/C Graphics Display Controllers
Refer to the documentation that came with the 98705A/B/C to:
• Unpack the HP 98705A/B/C .
• Check the voltage setting.
Make sure that the HP 98702A interface is installed in your computer.
Installation of this interface card is covered in the previous section of this
chapter.
1. Play it safe.

b. TURN OFF the computer and unplug the power cord.
2. Locate the Graphics Display Controller near the computer and the monitor.
Ensure air flow is not restricted at the front or rear of the Graphics
Processor.
3. Connect the Graphics Address and Data (GAD) bus cable.
a. Connect the GAD bus cable to the HP 98702A GAD bus interface
connector.
b. Connect the other end of the GAD bus cable to the HP 98705A/B/C.
Ensure that the connector locks into position.

Installing Plotters and Graphic Devices

11-87

HP 98705A/B/C Graphics Display Controllers
11

5. Ensure that the power switches are in the OFF position.
6. Connect all power cords.
7. Turn on the monitor.
8. Turn on the HP 98705A/B/C.
9. Turn on the computer.

Note

11-88

If you purchased an add-on HP 98705 for either the HP A1421
or HP A1630 SPU, two attachment kits were included in the
package. HP part number 98705-87904 is used with the HP
A1630. HP part number 98705-87905 is used with the HP
A14121.

Installing Plotters and Graphic Devices

HP 98705A/B/C Graphics Display Controllers
11

10. Verify installation.
Compare the console screen to Figure 11-10.

Note

This screen represents a Model 375 and an HP 98705B installed
as the console. Other configurations may have different screen
messages.

Copyright 1989,
Hewlett-Packard Company.
All Rights Reserved.
BOOTROM Rev. D
MC68030 Processor
MC68882 Coprocessor
HIL Keyboard
HP-IB
DMA-CO
RAM 16776992 Bytes
HP98644 (RS-232) at 9
HP98625 (HS HP-IB at 15
HP98643 (LAN) at 21, 080009AAAAAA
Centronics at 23
Bit Mapped Video at 133

SEARCHING FOR A SYSTEM (Press RETURN to Pause)
RESET To Power-Up
Figure 11-10. Display Showing Boot Up Sequence with HP 98705B as Console

Installation Complete! Refer to Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices Using HP- UX
Commands" for software configuration instructions.

Installing Plotters and Graphic Devices

11-89

HP 98735-66580 Physical DMA Interface
The HP 98735-66580 is a DIO-II physical DMA interface for the HP 98735A
Graphics Display Controller.
Refer to Appendix B, "Series 400 Support Matrix" for Series 400 hardware and
software support information.

,---------,

......
......
......
......
......
......
......
.....

lODe
Error

LEDs

o
(j)
(TJ

,'I
-i

(TJ
(j)

-i

[
Figure 11-11. Physical D MA Interface

11-90

Installing Plotters and Graphic Devices

LSB

HP 98735-66580 Physical DMA Interface
11

• Have the documentation that came with the interface card handy. You will
need to refer to it during this procedure.
• Plan ahead.
Installing new devices on your system requires that you shut down and power
off the system. On a multiuser or clustered system you will want to warn
users and cluster clients in advance that the system (server) will be coming
down. Use the wall or cwall command to do this.

Caution

If you are adding this device to a cluster-node, you must be
logged into that node to do HP- UX configuration tasks.

For more information about adding devices to a system
configured as an HP- UX cluster, refer to Managing Clusters of
HP 9000 Computers, Chapter 12, "Adding Peripherals to a
Cluster" .

Installing Plotters and Graphic Devices

11-91

HP 98735-66580 Physical DMA Interface
11

Installing the HP 98735-66580 Physical DMA Interface
The following summary supplements the procedures outlined in your
installation documentation for this interface card. Read through this summary
before proceding with the installation.
1. Play it safe.

a. Shut down and halt the system using the lete/shutdown -h command.
If you are operating in a diskless cluster, see Managing Clusters of HP
9000 Computers for additional information on shutting down the system.

b. TURN OFF the computer and unplug the power cord.
2. Set the select code and make note of it.

The select code is preset to 132.
Select codes zero through 7 (0- 7) are reserved for use by
internal interface cards.

Note

An eight segment DIP switch is used to set the select codes. These eight
switches indicate the binary coding in Table 11-20. the most significant bit
(MSB) switch is always a one (open position) and the two least significant
bit (LSB) switch are always zero (closed position) .

Caution

• If you have "Instant Ignition" (or if you depend on / dev / crt
to automatically select the console) do not use a select code
above 140 .

• A switch setting of switches 2 through 6 all set to zeros
(closed position) must never be used. The interface card will
interfere with proper system operation and may prevent the
system from booting.

11-92

Installing Plotters and Graphic Devices

HP 98735-66580 Physical DMA Interface
11

The interface occupies 16 Mbytes of address space corresponding to four
consecutive select codes. You should never install another DIO-II card with
a select code equal to the four select codes taken up by the interface board
(for example, if the interface has a select code of 144, no other cards may
have select codes of 144, 145, 146, or 147). Failure to observe this limitation
will result in bus contention, with neither card operating properly.
Table 11-20.
HP 98735-66580 Physical DMA Interface
HP-UX Setup Values
Switch
MSB-LSB

DIO-II

176-179

1011 0000

220-223

1101 1100

10001000

180-183

1011 0100

224-227

11100000

10001100

184-187

1011 1000

228-231

11100100

144-147

1001 0000

188-191

1011 1100

232-235

1110 1000

148-151

1001 0100

192-195

11000000

236-239

1110 1100

152-155

1001 1000

196-199

11000100

240-243

1111 0000

156-159

1001 1100

200-203

11001000

244-247

1111 0100

160-163

1010 0000

204-207

11001100

248-251

1111 1000

164-167

1010 0100

208-211

1101 0000

252-255

1111 1100

168-171

1010 1000

212-215

1101 0100

172-175

1010 1100

216-219

1101 1000

DIO-II

Switch
MSB-LSB

DIO-II

132-135

10000100

136-139
140-143

Select
Code

Switch
MSB-LSB

Installing Plotters and Graphic Devices

11-93

HP 98735-66580 Physical DMA Interface
11

3. Set the Bus Master Daisy Chain Jumpers.
Refer to the documentation that carne with the interface card for the correct
proced ure and settings.

Caution

Incorrect setting of the Bus Master Daisy Chain configuration
could cause the following situations:
• The System will "hang" in boot ROM .
• The HP- UX system will boot correctly, but "hangs" when
DMA is attempted.
The only remedy to "hanging" your system is to power off the
CPU and change the jumpers. This could cause an fsck and
loss of data.

Rules for determining the jumper position:
a. The daisy chain MUST start with the CPU and continue in order to the
last board in the chain. There can be no open (unoccupied) positions.
b. The CPU board can start the chain in any of four locations: MC, A, B,
C. All supported DIO-II CPU boards have an eight-pin jumper array.
On Series 300, the jumper array is located between the DID-II
connectors. The position nearest the small connector is position MC. The
position nearest the large connector is C.
On the Model 400S the jumper is labelled "XBG3" at the MC position
and "BGO" at the C position.
c. The DMA on an HP 9000 Series 375, and Model 400S are hard wired to
D. Therefore, the CPU may have to start at a position other than MC in
order to keep from leaving open positions in the chain.
d. The HP 98735A/36A/36B Graphics Display Controller interfaces can be
set to position A through F.

11-94

Installing Plotters and Graphic Devices

HP 98735-66580 Physical DMA Interface
11

Once the position of each board in the chain has been determined, all
configurable boards need to have their jumpers checked or set to conform
with the rules for determining the jumper position. See Figure 11-11 for
location of the jumper on the interface card.
4. Insert the PDMA Interface into a DIO-II slot.
5. Record the select code.

Make a note that the select code you have assigned to the interface has been
used and is no longer available. Use the foldout worksheet at the end of this
book for this purpose.

Installation Complete!
Refer to the "HP 98735A/36A/36B Graphics Display Controllers" section
of this chapter for instructions to connect the HP 98735A Graphics Display
Controller to the HP 98735-66580 Physical DMA Interface.

Installing Plotters and Graphic Devices

11-95

HP 98735-66581 Virtual DMA Interface
The HP 98735-66581 is a DIO-II virtual DMA interface for the HP 98736A and
HP 98736B Graphics Display Controllers.
Refer to Appendix B, "Series 400 Support Matrix" for Series 400 hardware and
software support information.

,;::
UJ
Ell

lODe
Error
LEDs

......
......
......
......
.....
......
.....
......
r

Ell

MSTR
JP1

Figure 11-12. Virtural DMA Interface

11-96

Installing Plotters and Graphic Devices

HP 98735-66581 Virtual DMA Interface
11

Before Installing This Device
Before you install:

• If you have not added this type of device to your system before, read the
material in Chapter 1, "Introduction". It provides interface and cabling
guidelines to follow when adding devices to your system.
• Have the documentation that came with the interface card handy. You will
need to refer to it during this procedure.
• Plan ahead.
Installing new devices on your system requires that you shut down and power
off the system. On a multiuser or clustered system you will want to warn
users and cluster clients in advance that the system (server) will be coming
down. Use the wall or ewall command to do this.

Caution

If you are adding this device to a cluster-node, you must be
logged into that node to do HP- UX configuration tasks.
For more information about adding devices to a system
configured as an HP- UX cluster, refer to Managing Clusters of
HP 9000 Computers, Chapter 12, "Adding Peripherals to a
Cluster" .

Installing the HP 98735-66581 Virtual DMA Interface
1. Play it safe.

a. Shut down and halt the system using the fete/shutdown -h command.

If you are operating in a diskless cluster, see Managing Clusters of HP
9000 Computers for additional information on shutting down the system.
b. TURN OFF the computer and unplug the power cord.

Installing Plotters and Graphic Devices

11-97

HP 98735-66581 Virtual DMA Interface
11

2. Set the select code and make note of it.
The select code is preset to 132.
Select codes zero through seven (0- 7) are reserved for internal
interface cards.

Note

An eight segment DIP switch is used to set the select codes. These eight
switches indicate the binary coding in Table 11-21. the most significant bit
(MSB) switch is always a one (open position) and the two least significant
bit (LSB) switch are always zero (closed position) .

Caution

• If you have "Instant Ignition" (or if you depend on / dev / crt
to automatically select the console) do not use a select code
above 140 .

The interface occupies 16 Mbytes of address space corresponding to four
consecutive select codes. You should never install another DIO-II card with
a select code equal to the four select codes taken up by the interface board
(for example: if the interface has a select code of 144, no other cards may
have select codes of 144, 145, 146, or 147). Failure to observe this limitation
will result in bus contention, with neither card operating properly.

11-98

Installing Plotters and Graphic Devices

HP 98735-66581 Virtual DMA Interface
11
Table 11-21.
HP 98735-66581 Virtual DMA Interface
HP-UX Setup Values

DIO-I1

Switch
MSB-LSB

DIO-II

Switch
MSB-LSB

DIO-II

132-135

1000 0100

136-139

1000 1000

176-179

1011 0000

220-223

1101 1100

180-183

1011 0100

224-227

11100000

140-143

1000 1100

184-187

1011 1000

228-231

11100100

144-147

1001 0000

188-191

1011 1100

232-235

1110 1000

148-151

1001 0100

192-195

11000000

236-239

11101100

152-155

1001 1000

196-199

11000100

240-243

1111 0000

Select
Code

Switch
MSB-LSB

156-159

1001 1100

200-203

11001000

244-247

1111 0100

160-163

1010 0000

204-207

11001100

248-251

1111 1000

164-167

1010 0100

208-211

1101 0000

252-255

1111 1100

168-171

1010 1000

212-215

1101 0100

172-175

1010 1100

216-219

1101 1000

3. Bet the Bus Master Daisy Chain Jumpers.
For the system to perform DMA transfers correctly, the Bus Master Daisy
Chain must be set to the appropriate configuration. The card location
in the chassis is independent of the card's position in the daisy chain.
Jumpers on the interface card determine the location in the daisy chain.
The Physical DMA Interface (PDMA), Virtual DMA Interface (VDMA),
and CPU cards each have to be configured to daisy chain operation (as well
as any other interface cards).

Installing Plotters and Graphic Devices

11-99

HP 98735·66581 Virtual DMA Interface
11

Caution

Incorrect setting of the Bus Master Daisy Chain configuration
could cause:
• System to "hang" in boot ROM .
• HP- UX system to boot correctly, but "hangs" when DMA is
attempted.
The only remedy to "hanging" your system is to power off the
CPU and change the jumpers. This could cause an fsck and
loss of data.

Available daisy chain positions are: MC, and A through F. MC is the
highest position and F is the lowest position. (There is also a G position for
the special case of BOTH F and G being DIO-I cards.)
MC can only be used by the CPU. Therefore, it may not be shown on other
cards.
Normally, the default jumper position on the cards can be used without
causing interference. However, if you have a DOS coprocessor, a VME
expander, or more that one HP 98735A/36A/36B Graphics Display
Controller interface, the daisy chain jumpers must be checked.
The CPU Bus Master Daisy Chain default is position C.
The DMA controller chip on the HP 9000 Model 375 and Model 400S are
hard wired at a fixed location (D) in the daisy chain. The rest of the CPU
is dependent on the jumper for Bus Master position.
Figure 11-12 shows the location of the jumpers on the PDMA Interface card
and the default jumper position E.
The VME expander has a default position E.
The DOS coprocessor may be either E or F and is set through a software
configuration file.

11-100

Installing Plotters and Graphic Devices

HP 98735·66581 Virtual DMA Interface
11

Rules for determining the jumper position:
a. The daisy chain MUST start with the CPU and continue in order to the
'last board in the chain. There can be no open (unoccupied) positions.
b. The CPU board can start the chain in any of four locations: MC, A, B,
C. All supported DIO-II CPU boards have an eight-pin jumper array.
On Series 300, the jumper array is located between the DIO-II
connectors. The position nearest the small connector is position MC. The
position nearest the large connector is C.
On the Model 400S the jumper is labelled "XBG3" at the MC position
and "BGO" at the C position.
c. The DMA on an HP 9000 Series 375, and Model 400S are hard wired to

D. Therefore, the CPU may have to start at a position other than MC in
order to keep from leaving open positions in the chain.
d. The HP 98735A/36A/36B Graphics Display Controller interfaces can be
set to position A through F.
Once the position of each board in the chain has been determined, all
configurable boards need to have their jumpers checked or set to conform
with the rules for determining the jumper position. See Figure 11-12 for
location of the jumper on the interface card.

4. Insert the VDMA Interface into a DID-II slot.
Installation Complete!
Refer to the "HP 98735A/36A/36B Graphics Display Controllers" section of
this chapter for instructions to connect the HP 98736A/36B Graphics Display
Controller to the HP 98735-66581 Virtual DMA Interface.

Installing Plotters and Graphic Devices

11-101

HP 98735A/36A/36B Graphics Display Controllers
The HP 98735A is a low cost 3D graphics peripheral that connects to your
system via the 98735-66580 Physical DMA Interface. The HP 98736A is
a mid-range controller and the HP 98736B is a high-range controller, that
connect to your system via the 98735-66581 Virtural DMA Interface.
Refer to the documentation that came with your controller for more
information.
Refer to Appendix B, "Series 400 Support Matrix" for Series 400 hardware and
software support information.

Caution

If you are adding this device to a cluster-node, you must be
logged into that node to do HP- UX configuration tasks.

For more information about adding devices to a system
configured as an HP- UX cluster, refer to Managing Clusters of
HP 9000 Computers, Chapter 12, "Adding Peripherals to a
Cluster" .

11-102

Installing Plotters and Graphic Devices

HP 98735A/36A/36B Graphics Display Controllers
11

HP-UX Set Up Information
The following tables contain detailed HP- UX software set up information.
Complete the hardware installation as outlined in this section. Once hardware
installation is complete, use the information provided in these tables to
complete the software set up as outlined in Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices
Using HP -UX Commands".
Table 11-22.
HP 98735-66580 Physical and Virtual DMA Interface
HP-UX Setup Values

DIO-II

Select Code

Switch
MSB-LSB

mknod Minor
Number

Select Code

Switch
MSB-LSB

mknod Minor
Number

132-135

10000100

Ox840200

196-199

11000100

OxC40200

136-139

10001000

Ox880200

200-203

1100 1000

OxC80200

140-143

10001100

Ox8C0200

204-207

11001100

OxCC0200

144-147

1001 0000

Ox900200

208-211

1101 0000

OxD00200

148-151

1001 0100

Ox940200

212-215

1101 0100

OxD40200

152-155

1001 1000

Ox980200

216-219

1101 1000

OxD80200

156-159

1001 1100

Ox9C0200

220-223

1101 1100

OxDC0200

160-163

1010 0000

OxA00200

224-227

11100000

OxE00200

164-167

1010 0100

OxA40200

228-231

11100100

OxE40200

168-171

1010 1000

OxA80200

232-235

11101000

OxE80200

172-175

1010 1100

OxAC0200

236-239

11101100

OxEC0200

176-179

1011 0000

OxB00200

240-243

1111 0000

OxF00200

180-183

1011 0100

OxB40200

244-247

1111 0100

OxF40200

184-187

10111000

OxB80200

248-251

1111 1000

OxF80200

188-191

1011 1100

OxBC0200

252-255

1111 1100

OxFC0200

192-195

11000000

OxC00200

Installing Plotters and Graphic Devices

11-103

HP 98735Aj36Aj36B Graphics Display Controllers
11

.c-

--;;-

~
~

L::::

-.i77

Figure 11-13. HP 98735Aj36Aj36B Inventory

11-104

Installing Plotters and Graphic Devices

HP 98735A/36A/36B Graphics Display ControlleF3
11

Installing the HP 98735A/36A/36B Graphics Display Controllers
Refer to the documentation that came with the 98735A/36A/37 A to unpack
the Graphics Display Controller.
Make sure that the 98735-66580 Physical DMA Interface or the 98735-66581
Virtual DMA Interface is installed in your computer. Installation of these
interface cards is covered in separate sections of this chapter.
1. Play it safe.

b. TURN OFF the computer and unplug the power cord.
2. Locate the Graphics Display Controller near the computer and the monitor.
3. Connect the GBUS cable.
a. Connect one end of the GBUS cable to the interface card in the
computer.
b. Connect the other end of the GBUS cable to the Graphics Display
Controller.
c. Ensure that the connector locks into position.
Refer to the installation documentation that came with the controller for
specific installation information.
4. Connect the RG B cable.
a. Connect the RGB (Red Green Blue) cable to the monitor: red to red,
green to green, and blue to blue connectors.
b. Connect the other end of the RGB cable to the HP 98735A/36A/36B in
the same manner.
5. Ensure that the power switches are in the OFF position.
6. Connect all power cords.

Installing Plotters and Graphic Devices

11·105

HP 98735A/36A/36B Graphics Display Controllers
11

Ensure that the proper power cord is used for the Graphic Display
Controller. This cord has heavier wiring and a distinct slot in the controller
connector end.
a. Connect the power cord to your Graphic Display Controller.
b. Connect the other end of the power cord to the power outlet.
c. Turn on the monitor.
d. Turn on the HP 98735A/36A/36B.
e. Turn on the computer.

7. Verify installation.
Compare the console screen to Figure 11-14.

Note

11-106

This screen is represents a Model 375 and an HP 98735B
installed as the console. Other configurations may have
differen t screen messages.

Installing Plotters and Graphic Devices

SEARCHING FOR A SYSTEM (Press RETURN to Pause)
RESET To Power-Up
Figure 11-14. Display Showing Boot Up Sequence with HP 98735B as Console

Installation Complete! Refer to Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices Using HP- UX
Commands" for software configuration instructions.

Installing Plotters and Graphic Devices

11-107

12
12

Setting Up HP-UX for Plotters Using SAM
This chapter describes how to use SAM to set up HP- UX to communicate with
your plotter only.
SAM does not support the following graphics products:
• HP-HIL devices
• Graphics interface cards and associated displays
D
D

D
D
D

HP
HP
HP
HP
HP

13279B Color Monitor
98548A/ 49A/ 50A High Resolution Graphics Interfaces
98556A 2D Graphics Accelerator Accessory Card
98627 A Color Output Interface
A1416A High Resolution Color Graphics Interface

• Graphics interface cards, controllers, and associated displays
D

D
D
D

D
D
D
D

HP
HP
HP
HP
HP
HP
HP
HP
HP
HP
HP

98287 A Graphics Display Controller Interface
98700 CX Graphics Display Controller
98702A Graphics Address and Data Bus Interface
98705A/B / C Graphics Display Controllers
98720A SRX Graphics Display Controller
98724A/98725A Local Graphics Bus Interface
98726A Local Graphics Bus Interface
98730A TurboSRX Graphics Display Controller
98735-66580 Physical DMA Interface
98735-66581 Virtual DMA Interface
98735A/36A/36B Graphics Display Controllers

To set up HP- UX to communicate with the above-listed graphics products,
refer to Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices Using HP -UX Commands".

Setting Up HP-UX for Plotters Using SAM

12-1

Gather the necessary information:

• The name you are giving to this plotter.
• The model or interface that the plotter will use.
12

• The name of the device file that the plotter will use.

• The priority for this plotter.
• The class to which the plotter will be added (optional).
• Whether or not you wish to make this device your system's default plotter.
If you are adding a remote plotter, be sure to have this additional information
on hand:
• The name of the remote system to which the plotter is attached.
• The name of the remote plotter.
• The "cancel" model on the remote system (optional).
• The "status" model on the remote system (optional).
• Whether or not you wish to allow any user to cancel any plotting request.
• Whether or not the remote plotter is on a system using BSD (Berkeley
Software Distibution) UNIX.
If you are adding a network-based plotter, make a note of the link-level address
used by the plotter's network interface.

12-2

Setting Up HP-UX for Plotters Using SAM

To configure your plotter:

1. Log on as root.
2. Run SAM:
12

/usr/bin/sam

3. Highlight
4. Highlight
5. Highlight

and activate

(Open ).

and activate
and activate

(Open ).

6. From the "Actions" menu title in the "Printer/Plotter Manager" window,
highlight and choose the appropriate one of the following menu items:

•
•

•
7. If you are adding a local plotter, SAM will search for any interfaces to which
the plotter might be connected. This information appears in an object list
within a "Printer/plotter hardware location" window. Highlight and choose
the appropriate hardware path.
An "Add plotter" dialog box appears. The titling and appearance of the
dialog box will vary according to the type of connection you are using.
8. Type the required information into the fields displayed.

Note

Some of the field names in the dialog box may be buttons
((Plotter class ), for example). Activate these for information about
available choices for entering in the fields.

9. When you have entered all the information into the dialog box, activate
(OK).
SAM will create the device file needed to communicate with the plotter. SAM
uses the device file naming convention Ip_xxxx, where xxxx is the name of your
plotter.
Setting Up HP-UX for Plotters Using SAM

12-3

13
Installing HP-HIL Accessories
This chapter contains the installation and configuration procedures for the
following HP-HIL peripherals:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

HP
HP
HP
HP
HP
HP
HP
HP
HP
HP
HP
HP
HP
HP
HP

35723A Touch Bezel
45911A/C Graphics Tablet
46020/21 Keyboard
46060A/B Two/Three-Button Mouse
46080A Extension Module
46081A Extension/Speaker Module
46082A/B Remote Extension Module
46083A Rotary Control Knob
46084A ID Module
46085A Control Dials Module
46086A Button Box
46087 A/88A Digitizer
46089A Cursor
46094A Quadrature Port
92916A Bar Code Reader

Installing HP-HIL Accessories

13-1

Introduction
HP-HIL, the Hewlett-Packard Human Interface Link, is the HP standard
bus for interfacing a personal computer, terminal, or workstation to its
input devices. The bus is controlled by the hil(7) device driver, which is an
integrated part of the HP -UX operating system kernel.

On request from the HP- UX operating system or an application program, hil
queries the HP-HIL bus, identifies each connected device, and dynamically
associates each device it finds with a device file, in the order it is found on the
bus.
Refer to Appendix B, "Series 400 Support Matrix" for hardware and software
support information for HP-HIL devices on Series 400 systems.

13-2

Installing HP-HIL Accessories

HP-HIL Device Constraints
Keep the following limitations in mind when you revise HP-HIL devices on
your system.
• The HP-HIL devices connected to your computer can use no more than seven
device addresses, corresponding to the seven device files with major number
24. The number of files used by each device is shown in Table 13-1. Some
devices use no addresses, most use one, and one uses three.
• The power requirements of all connected HIL devices must not exceed 750
milliamps (rnA). To make sure you do not exceed this requirement, total
up the typical power required by each of your HP-HIL devices as shown
in Table 13-1. If the total exceeds 750 rnA, you must remove one or more
devices.
• HP-HIL devices can be added to or removed from the HP-HIL interface while
the system is running without necessarily affecting the HP- UX operating
system or some application programs, since the hil driver can identify
modifications dynamically.
However, if your running application uses a particular device, and you
remove the device from the link (even temporarily), or insert another device
in front of it, your application may fail to recognize the change and may not
work as expected.
When possible, reboot your computer or restart the application program
after you modify the HP -HIL devices on the link.

Installing Hp·HIL Accessories

13·3

Hardware Overview
HP -HIL devices can be added to or removed from the HP -HIL interface
without affecting the HP- UX operating system. However, it is preferable to
reboot the computer whenever any hardware change is made on the HP-HIL
bus.

HP-HIL devices are connected in a daisy-chain fashion from the HP-HIL bus
connector on the Human Interface Board on the back panel of the computer.
This socket is marked with two dots ( •• ) and can also be labeled HP-HIL,
KYBD, or KEYBOARD.
Cables of various lengths with HP-HIL plugs and marked at one end with
one dot (.) and at the other with two dots ( •• ) plug into sockets with the
same number of dots on the devices and interface. The cable ends are not
interchangeable. A plug with two dots must be inserted only in a socket with
two dots. A plug with one dot must be inserted only in a socket with one dot.

Caution

To avoid damage to your computer or peripheral hardware:
• DO NOT insert the one-dot end of an HP-HIL cable into a
two-dot socket.
• DO NOT insert the two-dot end of an HP-HIL cable into a
one-dot socket.
• DO NOT connect any HP-HIL cable plug or socket to a
telephone system.

Further restrictions are described below in "HP-HIL Device Constraints".
For installation details, consult the hardware installation documentation for the
specific device.

13·4

Installing Hp·HIL Accessories

Software Installation
Up to eight device files are needed to run the driver and communicate with
HP-HIL devices:
• One device file for the driver with major device number 23 and minor device
number OxOOOOOO .
• Up to seven device files for the HP-HIL devices with major number 24 and
minor numbers OxOOOOlO to Ox000070.
13

These eight files should already exist on your system in the / dev directory.
Type the following:
11 /dev I grep -E ' 23 I 24 '
to show directory entries like these:
crw-rw-rwcrw-rw-rwcrw-rw-rwcrw-rw-rwcrw-rw-rwcrw-rw-rwcrw-rw-rwcrw-rw-rw-

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

root
root
root
root
root
root
root
root

other
other
other
other
other
other
other
other

24
24
24
24
24
24
24
23

Ox000010
Ox000020
Ox000030
Ox000040
Ox000050
Ox000060
Ox000070
OxOOOOOO

May
May
May
May
May
May
May
May

8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8

16:55
16:55
16:55
16:55
16:55
16:55
16:55
16:55

hili
hi12
hi13
hi14
hi15
hi16
hi17
rhil

The device type and permissions (crw-rw-rw-) and the major (23, 24) and
minor (OxOOOOnO) device numbers should all be as shown. The file names can
be arbitrarily different.

If any entry is missing or in error, you can replace it (as superuser) by
executing the corresponding mknod(lM) command from the following group.
mknod
mknod
mknod
mknod
mknod
mknod
mknod
mknod

rhil
hili
hi12
hi13
hi14
hi15
hi16
hi17

c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c

23
24
24
24
24
24
24
24

OxOOOOOO
OxOOOO10
OxOOOO20
OxOOOO30
OxOOOO40
OxOOOO50
OxOOOO60
OxOOOO70
Installing HP-HIL Accessories

13-5

HP·HIL Device Constraints
Table 13·1. Hp·HIL Device Requirements

Device Name

COIlllection Restrictions

Files
Used1

Power
Used2

HP 35723A
Touch Bezel

None.

133 rnA

HP 45911A/C
Graphics Tablet

None.

200 rnA
+ 12 v.

HP 46020/21
Keyboard

None.

67 rnA

HP 46060A/B
Two/Three-Button Mouse

Must be connected after all other
devices.

133 rnA

HP 46080A
Extension Module

None.

17 rnA

HP 46081A
Extension/Speaker Module

Must be connected directly to HP-HIL
(KYBD) socket on computer chassis.

17 rnA

HP 46082A/B
Remote Extension Module

Must be connected directly to HP-HIL
(KYBD) socket on computer chassis.

33 rnA

HP 46083A
Rotary Control Knob

None.

73 rnA

HP 46084A
ID Module

None.

40 rnA

HP 46085A
Control Dials Module

None.

213 rnA

1 The total device files (addresses) used by all HP-HIL devices on a link cannot exceed seven.
2 The total power used by all HP-HIL devices on a link must not exceed 750 rnA.

13·6

Installing Hp·HIL Accessories

Table 13-1. HP-HIL Device Requirements (continued)

Connection Restrictions

Device Name

Files
Used1

Power
Used2

HP 46086A
Button Box

None.

53 rnA

HP 46087 A/88A
Digitizer

None.

133 rnA

HP 46089A
Cursor

Connects to HP 46087 A/88A Digitizer.

o rnA

HP 46094A
Quadrature Port

None.

125 rnA

HP 92916A
Bar Code Reader

Must be connected after HP 46020/21
Keyboard, if any.

133 rnA

Refer to Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX Commands" for
additional software configuration information for HP-HIL devices.

Summary of HP-HIL Devices
HP 35723A HP-HIL Touch Bezel
The HP 35723A Touch Bezel is a user-installable bezel which adds touchscreen
capability to the HP 35731 and 35741 12-inch video monitors.

HP 45911A/C HP-HIL Graphics Tablet
The HP 45911AjC Graphics Tablet is designed for use with many different
software applications. It includes a stylus and a protective overlay.

Installing HP-HIL Accessories

13-7

Summary of HP-HIL Devices

HP 46020/21 HP-HIL Keyboard
The HP 46020/21 Keyboards are offered in 17 languages.

HP 46060A/B HP-HIL Two/Three-Button Mouse
The HP 46060A Mouse has two buttons; the HP 46060B Mouse has three
buttons. If installed, the mouse must be the last in the HP-HIL device
sequence.
13

HP 46080A HP-HIL Extension Module
The HP 46080A Extension Module extends the distance between HP-HIL
devices.

HP 46081A HP-HIL Extension/Speaker Module
The HP 46081A Extension/Speaker Module extends the distance between
HP-HIL devices and includes an audio speaker on a separate circuit, with a
2.4m audio cable. It must be the first in the sequence of devices connected to
the HP-HIL interface.

HP 46082A/B HP-HIL Remote Extension Module
The HP 46082A/B Remote Extension Modules extend the distance between
HP-HIL devices and between monitors and their video interfaces. It must be
the first in the sequence of devices connected to the HP-HIL interface.

HP 46083A HP-HIL Rotary Control Knob
The HP 46083A Rotary Control Knob provides two-axis relative cursor
positioning via a rotary knob and a two-axis toggle button. It is best suited for
text editing and spreadsheet applications.

13-8

Installing HP-HIL Accessories

Summary of HP-HIL Devices

HP 46084A HP-HIL 10 Module
The HP 46084A ID Module contains a unique, machine-readable serial number
that is required by software that uses the HP Codeword Delivery security
scheme or software that is customized to an HP 46084A.

HP 46085A HP-HIL Control Dials Module
The HP 46085A Control Dials Module provides nine graphics positioning
devices, implemented as three 3-axis devices. The control dials module is
commonly used in graphics display applications to provide 3-axis attitude,
3-axis translation, scaling, and other attribute functions. It uses three HP-HIL
device files.

HP 46086A HP-HIL Button Box
The HP 46086A Button Box provides 32 user-definable buttons for menu
selection, and one user-programmable LED. Buttons can be labeled with
defined functions, freeing the display for other uses. It includes one pre-printed
and two blank overlays.

HP 46087 A/88A Digitizer and
HP 46089A Cursor
The HP 46087 A and 46088A Digitizers are low-cost, high-resolution digitizers
suitable for menu/object picking, free-hand graphics entry, and digitizing. The
HP 46087 A is ANSI A/ISO A4 size. The HP 46088A is ANSI B/ISa A3. Both
digitizers include a stylus with tip switch and a platen overlay.
The HP 46089A four-button, cross-hair cursor is available sepi1rately or as a
digitizer option. The cursor is recommended for digitizing existing drawings,
artwork, or other hardcopy images. It connects to the digitizer in place of the
stylus.

Installing HP-HIL Accessories

13-9

HP 46094A HP-HIL Quadrature Port
The HP 46094A Quadrature Port is used to connect a serial (non-HP)
three-button mouse or other compatible device to the HP-HIL interface.

HP 92916A HP-HIL Bar Code Reader

The HP 92916A Bar Code Reader is a general-purpose bar code reader. It
must be connected after the HP 46020/21 keyboard (if any) in the sequence of
HP-HIL devices.

13-10

Installing HP-HIL Accessories

14
Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX Commands
Introduction
If you are not using SAM to install your new peripheral device, you must
use commands to set up HP- UX to communicate with your newly connected
device. Setting up HP- UX to communicate with devices consists of two steps:

• Ensuring that the appropriate HP- UX device driver is part of the current
kernel configuration.

• Creating the device file or verifying that the correct device file already exists
for communication with the device.

Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX Commands

14-1

Ensuring the Device Driver is Part of the Kernel
The /etc/conf/dfile is typically used as input to generate a kernel. Look in
/ etc/ conf / dfile to see if your kernel includes the appropriate kernel driver
for the peripheral you want to add to your system.

Caution

Your /etc/conf/dfile reflects the current kernel configuration
if it was used to generate your current kernel. It is possible
that the currently executing kernel was generated from
a template other than /etc/conf/dfile. In this case,
/etc/conf/dfile may not reflect the configuration found in
the currently executing kernel.

If the dfile does not contain the driver you need to operate your peripheral,
you must add the driver to / etc/ conf / dfile and remake the kernel (this
involves a reboot of the system). Regenerating the kernel is discussed in the
following sections.

The following table lists the drivers that must be present for specific peripheral
types.

14-2

Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX Commands

Table 14-1. Device Drivers

Driver
Name

Used For:

cs80

most mass storage devices (included in all
sample configuration files)

SCSI

SCSI direct access storage devices

amigo

Amigo mass storage devices

Clper

Ciper printers

printer

Non-ciper printers

hpib

Plotters; also needed for Device I/O Library (DIL)

tape

9-Track magnetic tape drives

stape

9-Track streaming tape drives

scsitape SCSI tape drives
autoch
autox
apCl

Advanced Serial driver for Series 400

dos

HP 98686 DOS Coprocessor driver

vme
vme2

HP 98646 VME card
HP 98577 A VME expander

98624

Internal Standard-speed HP-IB disk controller
(always included-other drivers depend on it)

Optical autochanger drivers (require scsi driver)

parallel Parallel interface for plotters and printers.
98625

High-speed HPIB disk controller

98626

HP 98626, HP 98644 RS-232 serial interface,
or Series S300 RS-232-C built-in interface.

98628

HP 98628A RS- 232 datacomm card

98642

HP 98624 RS-232 4-channel and
HP 98638A 8-channel MUX card
HP 98265 SCSI interface card

98265
gpio

GPIO card; also include for Device I/O Library (DIL)

srm

Shared Resource Manager (SRM)

rJe

Remote Job Execution (RJE)

ptymas pseudo terminal drivers
ptyslv
(required for HP Windows/9000, Xwindows, and other software).
Included in all sample configuration files.
Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX Commands

14-3

Adding Device Drivers to the Kernel Using HP-UX
Commands
If you have checked you kernel configuration file, usually the /etc/conf/dfile,
and found that the device driver you need for your new peripheral or interface
is missing, or it is commented out with comment marks (usually *) you will
have to edit your kernel configuration file and regenerate the kernel. If you do
not intend to use SAM to do this, follow the instructions in the next section.
If the driver you need is present in the kernel and you do not have to edit the
kernel configuration file, proceed to the "Creating Device Files" section of this
chapter to learn how to create device files for your new peripheral device using
HP-UX commands.

In the context of the following instructions, the term "standalone machine"
refers to a machine that is not part of an HP- UX cluster. Adding new drivers
to your kernel requires that you reconfigure the kernel. Instructions differ when
reconfiguring a standalone machine, cluster server, or cluster client kernel.

Before You Begin
Adding a device driver and reconfiguring the kernel requires that you reboot
your system. Note, however, the impact on other users before you shut down
and reboot your system, especially the following:
• If others are logged into your system, rebooting it interrupts their work. If
you have a small number of users or clients on your system, it is best to
notify your users in person of the impending system shutdown. It is possible
that users can be using an application and not be aware of the message sent
by the shutdown command.
• If your system is a cluster server, or a swap server for other clients in a
cluster, rebooting your system brings down the associated clients. See
Managing Clusters of HP 9000 Computers for details.
• If your system is a file server in a cluster, rebooting it makes any file systems
mounted to the file server unavailable to clients. Again, see Managing
Clusters of HP 9000 Computers for details.
• If your system is an Internet Protocol router, rebooting it affects any IP
traffic routed through your system.

14-4

Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX Commands

The Procedure
To add HP drivers using HP- UX commands:
1. Ensure that you have superuser capabilities.
2. In an HP- UX cluster, ensure you are logged onto the machine for which
a new kernel is being generated, client or server. This sets the correct
context for creating the Ihp-ux context-dependent file and editing the
I etcl conf I dfile context-dependent kernel configuration file. You can
log in at the cluster node console or remotely log in to the cluster node
from another location by using the rlogin command. See the Managing
Clusters of HP 9000 Computers manual for additional cluster information.
3. Change your directory to I etcl conf:
cd letc/conf

Caution

You must get out of the root directory because you will be
creating a new kernel. Otherwise, you will overwrite the
currently executing kernel.

Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX Commands

14-5

4. Make a backup copy of your current configuration description file (which is
most commonly the /etc/conf/dfile).
Enter the following command for a standalone machine:
cp /etc/conf/dfile /etc/conf/dfile.old

Enter the following command for an HP- UX cluster server or client:
cp /etc/conf/dfile /etc/conf/dfile. cluster_node_name

where cluster_node_name is the name displayed by the getcontext
command or an abbreviated name to represent the hostname.

We highly recommend the use of /etc/conf/dfile as the kernel
configuration file so it remains up to date with the executing kernel, hp-ux.
Some system software depends on /etc/conf/dfile representing the
currently executing kernel.

Note

In a cluster, /etc/conf/dfile is a CDF and should be used
to recreate the kernel. See Chapter 11, "Reconfiguring the
Kernel for a Cluster Node", in Managing Clusters of HP 9000
Computers for more information.

5. Edit /etc/conf/dfile to add the peripheral device driver:
a. Find the line containing

* DEVICE DRIVERS.

b. Below this line, add the peripheral device driver. If an asterisk ("*")
appears before the driver name, remove the asterisk.

14-6

Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX Commands

6. Make a copy of the existing kernel.

Caution

• DO NOT perform this step if your system is booted from the
/SYSBCKUP backup kernel. If you do, you could overwrite the
only boatable kernel for your system .

• If you are creating a new cluster client kernel, do not copy
/hp-ux to /SYSBCKUP. If you do, you will overwrite the
cluster server's backup kernel.
If your system is a standalone or an HP- UX cluster server, enter:
cp /hp-ux /SYSBCKUP

If your system is an HP- UX cluster client, enter:
14

cp /hp-ux /SYSBCKUP. cluster_node_name

where cluster_node_name is the client nodename displayed by the
getcontext command.
Write down the filename of the backup kernel.
7. Run config on the configuration description file you edited:
/ etc/ config config_file

where:
config-file

is the configuration description file, for example,
/etc/conf/dfile.

Executing config creates the files conf . c and config .mk. Be sure you
have the correct version of these files by typing 11 (that is "el, el") from
the / etc/ conf directory and verifying the last modified date and time.
Refer to config(lM) in HP- UX Reference for additional information.

Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX Commands

14-7

8. Create the new HP-UX kernel (the file hp-ux) in the current directory
(/etc/conf):

make -f config.mk
As it is executing, config .mk displays the following two lines:

Compiling conf.c ...
Loading hp-ux ...
9. Bring the system into single-user mode using the shutdown command:

cd I
shutdown grace_period
See shutdown(lM) in HP- UX Reference.
14

where grace_period is the number of seconds the system will wait before
shutting down. Specifying a grace period is optional; the default is 60
seconds. The shutdown command sends all users currently logged into the
system a warning message that the system is shutting down. You can rely
on the system default message, or you can customize the message.

Caution

Shutting down a cluster server causes all clients of the server to
reboot.

10. Wait for the system to tell you it is in single-user mode.
11. Copy the new kernel to the I (root) directory:

cd letc/conf
cp hp-ux Ihp-ux
12. Halt the system:

reboot -h
13. Turn off the computer. Install interface cards or peripheral devices. Refer
to the documents shipped with the products being installed and the
appropriate chapters of this manual for specific instructions.

14-8

Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX Commands

Warning

Be sure to follow the ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) precautions
when handling cards and devices. ESD precautions are
described in the hardware installation and configuration guides.

14. Turn on the power. The system will boot from the new kernel.
If the new kernel fails to boot, boot the system from the backup kernel and
repeat the process of creating a new kernel. See "Booting the Standalone or
Cluster Server Backup Kernel Using the Boot ROM".

You can boot a cluster client backup kernel by restoring the backup kernel to
/hp-ux. See the "Restoring the Cluster Client Backup Kernel" section for
details.
Once you have successfully reconfigured and booted your system, and
connected your new peripheral device, you need to create device files for your
new peripheral. Proceed to the "Creating Device Files" section for detailed
information.

Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX Commands

14-9

Booting the Standalone or Cluster Server Backup Kernel Using the
Boot ROM
To boot a standalone machine or cluster server backup kernel, select the
backup kernal using the boot ROM.
1. Turn the computer off and then on (cycling power).
2. Hold down the space bar during boot up to enter the boot ROM attended
mode. This halts the automatic boot mechanism and allows you to
manually select the operating system to load.
3. Type in the two-character code associated with the backup kernel SYSBCKUP.
The backup kernel will begin to boot. When it displays the login prompt, log
in again and try to reconfigure the kernel again.
14

Caution

If you reconfigure the kernel for a second time using the steps
described previously, DO NOT create a backup of the current
kernel. Since you are currently booted from the backup kernel,
copying /hp-ux to a backup kernel could overwrite the only
bootable kernel on your system!

If your computer still fails to boot, there is something wrong with either the file
system or the hardware. Refer to your owner's guide for information on boot
failure.

14-10

Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX Commands

Restoring the Cluster Client Backup Kernel
If your system is a cluster client and the new kernel fails to boot:
1. Log into the cluster server from another client or the server console.

2. Ensure that you have superuser capabilities.
3. Move the client's backup kernel to the /hp-ux context-dependent file. For
example:
mv /SYSBCKUP. cluster_node_name /hp-ux+/ c_node_name

where:
cluster_node_name

is the client's full hostname as displayed by the
getcontext command

4. Reboot the cluster client by cycling the power.

The client's backup kernel will begin to boot. When you are given the login
prompt, log in again and try to reconfigure the kernel again.

Caution

If you reconfigure the kernel for the second time using the steps
described previously, DO NOT create a backup of the current
kernel. Since you are currently booted from the backup kernel,
copying /hp-ux to a backup kernel could overwrite the only
bootable kernel on your system!

Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX Commands

14-11

Creating Device Files
Device files (special files) are needed for every device connected to your system.
Interface cards are an exception. The interface card itself does not require a
device file, but the device that is connected to the interface card does need
a device file. For interface cards you only need to ensure that the device
driver for the interface card is part of the kernel configuration. See the section
entitled "Ensuring the Device Driver is Part of the Kernel" at the beginning of
this chapter for more information.
For more information about device files see Chapter 1, "Introduction". Also,
refer to the How HP-UX Works: Concepts for the System Administrator
manual for an indepth discussion of device files, system architecture and kernel
configuration.
14

This section contains the following information:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

The mknod(lM) command syntax and examples.
Viewing device file characteristics.
Disk drive information and examples.
Tape drive information and examples.
Terminal and modem information and examples.
Psuedo terminal information and examples.
Plotter information and examples.
Printer information and examples.
Graphics device information and examples.
• HP-HIL device information and examples.
• GPIO device information and examples.

14-12

Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX Commands

Permissions for Device Files
You must have restricted access permission on all device files that are
associated with mountable file systems, giving read/write permission to the
owner (root) only. This prevents someone from mounting unauthorized
media on your system, and prevents everyone on the system from accidentally
overwriting a file system residing on the device associated with this device file.
For example:

chown root /dev/dsk/cEdls0 /dev/rdsk/cEdls0
chmod 600 /dev/dsk/cEdls0
chmod 600 /dev/rdsk/cEdls0

Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX Commands

14-13

Using the mknod Command
The mknod(lM) command is used to create device files. The mknod(lM)
command has the following syntax:
/etc/mknod

path_name file_type major minor

where:
path_name

Is the pathname of the device file to be created. Select
a name for the device file that identifies the associated
peripheral. The following sections describe the naming
conventions for device files. Use these naming conventions
for consistency on your system. Put all device files into the
/ dev directory (or the appropriate subdirectory); many
commands expect to find device files in / dev and will fail if
the required device file is not there.

file_type

File type is represented by a single character: b (block),
c (character), n ( network) or p (pipe). Refer to the
mknod(lM) man page for information on networking and
pipe file types. Disks need both block and character device
file entries. Any cartridge tape or flexible disk drives that
will have mounted file systems need entries for both block
and character device files. All other devices should have
character device file entries only. Character mode of device
access is also referred to as raw mode.

The major number is an index to the kernel device driver
used to communicate with the peripheral. For devices
needing both a character and a block device file, there
are different device drivers and therefore different major
numbers for block and character device files for the same
peripheral. Major numbers are listed in the / etc/master
file.
mznor

14-14

The minor number specifies the hardware address (location
on the I/O bus) and device specific characteristics. It is
made up of the select code, bus address or port number,
and other driver specific information. It is a 24-bit value
represented in hexadecimal on the command line.
Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX Commands

The following examples show the mknod command.

%mknod /dev/rmt/Omn c 54 OxOe0103 (-- SCSI DDS-format tape drive
%mknod /dev/ac/cEd1_1a b 10 OxOe3001 (-- SCSI optical autochanger
%mknod /dev/crt
c 12 Ox000001 (-- Graphics System Console
If you make a mistake while creating a device file, delete the device file you
want to change and re-create it with mknod.

Viewing the Device File Characteristics
To see device file characteristics, execute an 11 command from the directory
containing your device file. For example, typing:
11 console
14

from the /dev directory will give you output similar to this:

crw--w--w-

1 root

other

o OxOOOOOO

May 20 09:30 console

where the first character in the entry tells you that the device file is a
character (c) device and the next series of characters represent the file's access
permissions. The major and minor numbers are located in the fifth and sixth
fields, respectively (where the size is displayed for a regular file). In this case,
the major number is 0 and the minor number is OxOOOOOO.

Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX Commands

14-15

Disk Drives
There are three kinds of disk drives:
• Hard Disks
• Flexible Disks
• Optical Disks
You can use your hard disk as part of your swap space, part of the HP- UX file
system, or both.
You can use your flexible disk as part of the file system or as miscellaneous
storage space (for example, for backups). Flexible (floppy) disks come in two
sizes: 5.25 inch and 3.5 inch. The 3.5 inch flexible disks are more common with
an HP- UX system than the 5.25, but they are treated in the same manner.
14

You can use your optical disk, standalone or autochanger, as part of the file
system or as secondary storage (for example, backups, archives). Additionally,
the standalone optical disk drive can be used as part of your swap space.
This section contains the following information about disk drives:
•
•
•
•
•
•

Device file location and naming conventions.
Block and character device file requirements and recommendations.
Major number.
Minor number format.
Other information.
Examples of creating device file for the following devices:
o CS80-type Hard Disk Drive
o Amigo-type Hard Disk Drive
o 650/ A Optical Disk Drive
o Optical Library System

14-16

Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX Commands

Table 14-2 lists the supported disk drive types, their kernel device driver name,
block major number, and character major number.
Table 14-2. Kernel Driver & Major Numbers for Disk Drives
Product Type

Disk drives using Command Set 80
and an lIP-IB interface
Disk drives using Amigo protocol and
an HP-IB interface
Disk drives using SCSI interface
Optical disk libraries

Kernel
Driver

Block
Major Number

Character
Major Number

cs80

amigo

SCSI

autoch,
autox

Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX Commands

14-17

Device File Naming Conventions for Disk Drives
Device files for disk drives must reside in the / dev directory. Disk drives
require both character and block device files. Disks use the / dev /rdsk
directory for the character device files and the / dev / dsk directory for the block
device files. SAM uses the following device file naming convention.
Disk device file names are in the following format:
/dev/[rJdsk/[rJc#d#[l#Js#

where:

the first r indicates a raw (character) interface to the disk; the
second r is reserved for future use and should not be used.

c#d

specifies the controller number. The # should be replaced with
a capitalized hexadecimal representation of the select code.

# [l#J

The first # specifies the bus (target) address. The 1 stands for
lun and is followed by the (#) lun number. This is used to
identify specific units in integrated devices.
Optical disk libraries are named somewhat differently. Device
files for optical disks are placed in the / dev /rac or / dev / ac
directories. The first # (above)· is followed by an underscore
and a number that designates the disk, followed by an a for
side a, or a b for side b. For example, /dev/rac/cEd1_1a is a
device file for disk one, side a.

The s# stands for section number. The # here is typically zero,
except when using software disk striping. Refer to the System
Administration Tasks manual for information on software disk
striping.

Additional information about disks can be found in disk(7) in the HP- UX
Reference.

Note

14-18

Label each disk drive with the device file path name.

Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX Commands

Minor Number Format for Disk Drives
The minor number format for disk drives is as follows:

OxScBaUV
where:

This prefix indicates the number is hexadecimal.

This is a two-digit hexadecimal representation of the select
code. The select code is determined by switch settings on the
disk drives interface card (8 bit value).

This is a two-digit hexadecimal representation of the device
bus address (4 bit value).

specifies the unit number for integrated devices.

specifies the volume number (0 for single file systems).

mknod Examples for Disk Drives
CS80-type Hard Disk Drive

If you have a CS80-type hard disk drive at select code 14 using bus address 2,
use the following mknod command lines:

mknod /dev/dsk/cEd2s0 b 0 OxOe0200
mknod /dev/rdsk/cEd2s0 c 4 OxOe0200
If this is an integrated device (hard disk drive with either a flexible disk drive
or a cartridge tape drive), you would also create device files for the other drive.
For example, if you were adding an integrated hard disk and cartridge tape
drive, you would type, in addition to the above, the following two lines (notice
the last two digits are 10 instead of 00 because it is unit 1):

mknod /dev/rct/cEd211s0 c 4 OxOe0210

Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX Commands

14-19

Amigo-type Hard Disk Drive

If you have an Amigo -type hard disk drive at select code 14 using bus address
2, use the following mknod command lines:
mknod /dev/dsk/cEd2s0
mknod /dev/rdsk/cEd2s0

b 2 OxOe0200

c 11 OxOe0200

SCSI-type Hard Disk Drive

If you have an SCSI-type hard disk drive at select code 14 using device (bus)
target address 2, use the following mknod command lines:
mknod /dev/dsk/cEd2s0
mknod /dev/rdsk/cEd2s0
14

b 7 OxOe0200

c 47 OxOe0200

650jA Optical Drive

If you have an optical disk drive, at select code 14, using bus address 1, use the
following mknod command lines:
mknod /dev/dsk/cEd1s0 b 7 OxOe0100
mknod /dev/rdsk/cEd1s0 c 47 OxOe0100

14-20

Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX Commands

Optical Library System

For the Optical Library System, the minor number format changes to address
the many surfaces available for data storage. The minor number for the
Optical Library System has the following format:

OxScBISur
where:

Ox
Sc
B

Sur

specifies
specifies
specifies
specifies

format is in hexadecimal.
the select code of the interface (8 bit value).
the SCSI device (bus) target address (4 bit value).
the surface (16 bit value).

If you have a SCSI optical autochanger at select code 14 and address 3, you
need one device file for the autochanger and 129 device files for the disks and
surfaces. The autochanger device file will follow this format:

mknod /dev/ract/ioctl c 55 OxOe3000
The format for the mknod command lines for one disk, both sides would be as
follows:
mknod
mknod
mknod
mknod

/dev/ac/cEd3_la
/dev/rac/cEd3_la
/dev/ac/cEd3_lb
/dev/rac/cEd3_lb

b
c
b
c

10
55
10
55

OxOe3001
OxOe3001
OxOe3002
OxOe3002

(-(-(-(--

Side
Side
Side
Side

la/disk
la/disk
lb/disk
lb/disk

surface
surface
surface
surface

1
1
2
2

block
character
block
character

You would then have to continue with the mknod commands until you are done.
For thirty-two disks, the mknod command for the thirty-second disk, both sides,
would be:
mknod
mknod
mknod
mknod

/dev/ac/cEd3_32a
/dev/rac/cEd3_32a
/dev/ac/cEd3_32b
/dev/rac/cEd3_32b

b
c
b
c

10
55
10
55

OxOe303f
OxOe303f
OxOe3040
OxOe3040

(-(-(-(--

Side
Side
Side
Side

32a/disk
32a/disk
32b/disk
32b/disk

32
32
32
32

surface
surface
surface
surface

63
63
64
64

block
character
block
character

The command method for creating device files for optical disk libraries is
impractical, since, as shown in the example above, there are 129 mknod
commands to execute (32 disks, 64 surfaces, 2 device files per surface, and 1
ioctl setup). Therefore, use SAM to create the necessary device files for your
optical disk library. If you do not have SAM on your system, use the scripts
that came with your Optical Disk Library to set up your device.

Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX Commands

14-21

Tape Drives
There are three kinds of tape drives:
• 9- track Magnetic Tape
• Cartridge Tape
• DDS-Format Tape (DAT)
This section contains the following information:
•
•
•
•
•
•
14

Device file location and naming conventions.
Block and character device file requirements and recommendations.
Major number.
Minor number format.
Other information.
Examples of creating device file for the following devices:
0 9-track Magnetic Tape
o Cartridge Tape
o DDS-Format Tape (DAT)

DDS-format drives and 9-track magnetic tape drives are logically very similar.
Both belong to the family of streaming tape drives. Most HP- UX commands
that are associated with 9-track tapes, such as backups, can be used without
modification with DDS drives.
9-track magnetic tapes are 1/2 -inch tapes on reels. You can use your magnetic
tape for miscellaneous storage space (for example, backups).
Cartridge tapes, such as HP 9144 and HP 9145, are the 1/4 -inch tapes in
plastic cartridges. Do not confuse this family of devices with DDS drives; they
are quite different. HP-IB cartridge tape drives use the CS80 kernel disk driver.
You can use your cartridge tape for miscellaneous storage space (for example,
for backups).

14-22

Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX Commands

DDS-Format tapes are based on Digital Audio Tape (DAT) technology. DAT
uses an advanced form of helical scan recording to store data on a DDS
cassette, approximately the size of a credit card. The tape drive provides for
high-capacity, unattended backups. Some DDS tape drives can read and/or
write in compressed mode.
A sixty meter (60m) DDS cassettes can hold up to 1.3 gigabytes (1300
megabytes) of uncompressed data. In compressed mode, a 60m DDS cassette
can hold approximately 5.2 gigabytes (5200 megabytes) of data. A ninety
meter (90m) DDS cassettes can hold up to 2.0 gigabytes (2000 megabytes)
of uncompressed data. In compressed mode, a 90m DDS cassette can hold
approximately 8.0 gigabytes (8000 megabytes) of data .

Note

Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX Commands

14-23

Device files for DDS-Format and the 9-track Magnetic tape drives should reside
in the / dev /rmt directory. Device files for cartridge tape drives should reside in
the / dev fret directory.
The following sections (magnetic tape, cartridge tape, and DDS-format tape),
contain the device file naming conventions for each type of tape drive.
All tape drives require only character device files.
Table 14-3 lists the supported tape drives types, their kernel device driver
name, and character major number.
Table 14-3. Kernel Driver and Major Numbers for Tape Drive
Product Type
14

14-24

Kernel
Driver

Character
Major Number

1/4-inch cartridge
tapes using and
HP-IB interface.

cs80

1/2-inch 9-track
open-reel tapes
using and HP-IB
interface.

stape

1/2-inch 9-track
open-reel tapes
using a SCSI
interface.

scsitape

DDS tapes using an
HP-IB interface.

stape

DDS tapes using a
SCSI interface.

scsitape

Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX Commands

Device File Naming Conventions and Minor Number Format for
Tape Drives
9-Track Magnetic Tape Drive Device File Naming Convention

The following naming convention is recommended for magnetic tape devices
because it connects most of the mode flags with the device name:

/dev/[r]mt/[c#d]#[hml][c][n]
where:
r

indicates a raw (character) device

c#d

indicates the controller number (optionally specified by the
system administrator)

is the device number

hml

indicates the density:

• h (high) for 6250 bpi
• m (medium) for 1600 bpi
• 1 (low) for 800 bpi
c

indicates data compression

indicates no rewind on close

For example, /dev/rmt/2mn is raw device 2 at 1600 bpi with no rewind and no
compression.
Additional information about 9-track magnetic tape is available in mt(7} of the
HP-UX Reference.

Note

Label each tape drive with the device file path name.

Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX Commands

14-25

9-Track Magnetic Tape Drive Minor Number Format

For the 9-track magnetic tape drives, the minor number format changes to
address the different recording densities: 800 bpi, 1600 bpi, 6250 bpi, and
compressed 6250 bpi. The minor number format for the 9-track magnetic tape
is as follows:

OxScBaUV

This prefix indicates the number is hexadecimal.

This field is a two-digit hexadecimal representation of the select
code. The select code is determined from the switch settings on the
tape drive's interface card.

This field is a two-digit hexadecimal representation of the bus
address. It is determined from the switch settings on the tape drive.

The single hexadecimal unit number (U) represents a four-bit binary
value. Setting and clearing the bits of this binary value affect the
manner in which the tape drive operates, as indicated in Table 14-4.

The volume number (V) field of the minor number also has special
meaning when creating device files for magnetic tape drives. The
single hexadecimal volume number represents a four- bit binary
value. Setting and clearing the bits of this binary value affect the
manner in which the tape drive operates, as indicated in Table 14-5

14-26

Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX Commands

Table 14-4 indicates the special meanings of each bit in the unit number
portion of the magnetic tape minor number. Bits 6 and 7 select the tape
density, while bits 4 and 5 represent the unit number, and "x"s represent
"don't care":
Table 14·4. Tape Density and Unit Number Bit Settings

Selects

Hex Value

Density = 6250 bpi compressed
(HP 7980XC and HP 7980SX)

Density = 6250 bpi (HP 7978, HP 7980A
and HP 7980S)

Density

= 1600 bpi (All mag tapes)
Density = 800 bpi (HP 7974, opt 800

only)
0

Select Unit 0

Select Unit 1, etc.

Table 14-5 indicates the special meaning each bit has in the volume number of
the magnetic tape minor number:
Table 14·5. Magnetic Tape Operation Bit Settings
Bit

When Clear (0)

When Set (1)

Order

HP- UX 2.0 compatibility mode

Industry Standard mode

Immediate report on (ignored by Immediate report off
HP 7970/7971)

AT&T-style compatibility mode

Berkeley-style compatibility
mode

Rewind on close

No rewind on close

Setting Up Devices Using HP·UX Commands

14·27

If you connected an HP 7978 tape drive to select code 14, HP-IB bus address
to 3, use the following mknod commands:

mknod /dev/rmt/Omn c 9 OxOe0343
mknod /dev/rmt/Oh c 9 OxOe0382
You could access the same drive as a 6250 bpi device using the "Oh" device
and as a 1600 bpi device using the "Omn" name. You could also use the "mt"
command to do various positioning operations on the tape without having to
provide a device name because mt uses the default device /dev/rmt/Omn. Since
tar defaults to /dev/rmt/Om, you may also want to create this file.

14-28

Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX Commands

Cartridge Tape Drive Device File Naming Convention

Cartridge tape device file names have the following format:

/dev/[r]ct/[r]c#d#[l#] [s#]
where:
r

the first r indicates a raw interface to the cartridge tape; the
second r is reserved to indicate that this cartridge tape is on a
remote system.

c#d

specifies the controller number. The # should be replaced with
a capitalized hexadecimal representation of the select code.

# [l#J

The first # specifies the bus (target) address. The 1 stands for
lun and is followed by the (#) lun number. This is used to
identify specific units in integrated devices.

optionally indicates a section number. This is always zero.

Additional information about cartridge tapes is in ct(7} of the HP- UX
Reference.
Cartridge Tape Drive Minor Number Format

The minor number format for cartridge tape drives is as follows:

OxScBaUV
where:

specifies format is in hexadecimal.

specifies the select code of the interface (8 bit value).

specifies the bus address (4 bit value).

specifies the unit number.

specifies the volume number (0 for single file systems).

Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX Commands

14-29

If you have a CS80 cartridge tape drive at select code 14, HP-IB bus address 1,
your mknod command line would be:
mknod /dev/rct/cEdls0 c 4 OxOeOl00

If this is an integrated device (both hard disk and cartridge tape drive in the
same unit), the hard disk drive is unit 0 and the cartridge tape drive is unit 1.
You would create three device files: one block device file for the hard disk, and
one character device file for each unit. For example, if you have a CS80 drive
at select code 14, bus address 1, your mknod command lines would be:
mknod /dev/dsk/cEdl10s0 b 0 OxOeOl00
mknod /dev/rdsk/cEdl0ls0 c 4 OxOeOl00
mknod /dev/rct/cEdl1ls0 c 4 OxOeOll0

14-30

Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX Commands

DDS-Format Tape Drive (OAT) Device File Naming Convention

The following naming convention is recommended for DDS-format tape drives:

Idev/rmt/[c#d]#[mc][n]
where:

c#d

optionally specifies the controller number. The # should be
replaced with the hexadecimal representation (capitalized) of
the select code.

specifies the device number.

mlc

indicate density. The m is standard DDS format density. Use c
to indicate compressed mode.

indicates no rewind on close

Additional information about magnetic tape can be found in mt{7} of the
HP- UX Reference.

Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX Commands

14-31

DDS-Format Tape Drive (OAT) Minor Number Format

Encoded in the minor number of the DDS-Format Tape Drive (DAT) are its
various modes of operation. The minor number for the DDS-Format Drive has
the following format:

OxScBaDO
where:

Ox
Sc
Ba

specifies format is in hexadecimal.
specifies the select code of the interface (8 bit value).
specifies the bus address (8 bit value).
specifies density and partition for SCSI tape drives as shown
below (4 bit value). D is always 4 on HP-IB drives. HP-IB
drives do not support data compression.

On SCSI DDS tape drives, bits 7 and 6 are set to specify
compressed mode; standard DDS density is specified with bit 7
unset and bit 6 set. Bit 5 is reserved and bit 4 selects partition
1 when set, otherwise partition 0 is selected.
DDS Tape Bits 4 - 7 on SCSI Devices
Value being
Set

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Result Hex. Equivalent

Uncompressed\Select Partition 0

0100

Uncompressed\Select Partition 1

0
1

1
1

0
0

Compressed\Select Partition 0

0101
1100

Compressed\Select Partition 1

1101

14-32

Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX Commands

specifies additional operation characteristics as shown in the
following table (4 bit value).
Table 14-6. DDS Tape Operation Bits 0 - 3
Bit

3
2
1

Set(l)

Clear(O)

Disable fixed length records Enable fixed length records
Immediate Report on
Immediate Report off
AT&T-style close
Berkeley-style close

O(lsb) Rewind on close

No rewind on close

Table 14-7. EXAMPLES of Possible Settings
For Example:

Result Hex. Equiv.

Fix record length enabled,
immediate reporting on,
Ber keley sty Ie close,
autorewind

1010

Fix record length disabled,
immediate reporting on,
Berkeley style close,
autorewind

0011

Fix record length disabled,
immediate reporting off,
AT&T-style close,
no rewind

0101

Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX Commands

14-33

Some example mknod commands for SCSI tapes are:

mknod
mknod
mknod
mknod

/dev/rmt/Ohc c 54 OxOe03C3
/dev/rmt/Ohc c 54 OxOe03C2
/dev/rmt/Omn c 54 OxOe0343
/dev/rmt/Om c 54 OxOe0342

IR
IR
IR
IR

on,
on,
on,
on,

Berkeley-close,
Berkeley-close,
Berkeley-close,
Berkeley-close,

no rewind
autorewind
no rewind
autorewind

The mknod examples above show a SCSI DDS-format drive, at select code 14,
with the tape drive's bus address at 3. The density bits are set to compressed
in the first two examples and uncompressed in the second two examples.
Some example mknod commands for HP-IB tapes are:

mknod /dev/rmt/Omn c 9 OxOe0343
mknod /dev/rmt/Om c 9 OxOe0342
14

IR on, Berkeley-close, no rewind
IR on, Berkeley-close, autorewind

The mknod examples above show a HP-IB DDS-format drive, at select code 14,
with the tape drive's bus address at 3.

Note

14-34

To help your users (and yourself) remember the names of the
drive, you should label the drive with the device file path name.

Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX Commands

Terminals and Modems
This section contains the following terminal and modem information:
• Process overview for setting up HP- UX to communicate with terminals and
modems.
• Device file location and naming conventions.
• Block and character device file requirements and recommendations.
• 1VIajor number
• Minor number format.
• Examples of creating device files.
• Other information.
14

Figure 14-1. Terminal and Modem Connections

Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX Commands

14-35

You should already have the terminal and modem physically connected to
your system as in Figure 14-1. If you do not have the terminal and/or modem
connected to your system, refer to Chapter 5, "Installing Terminals and
Modems".
Summary of Steps to Set Up a Terminal or Modem

Use the following procedure to set up a terminal or a modem.
1. Create the device files required. If the terminal uses both dial-in and
dial-out access, you will need three files.
2. Add the necessary getty entries to the / ete/ ini ttab file.
3. Add the necessary entries to the / ete/ttytype file.
14

4. When using the terminal, set the TERM environment variable and execute
the tset command.

Note

If you are on an HP- UX cluster, /dev is a context-dependent
file. This means you must create the device file from the cnode
where the terminal is located.

Device File Naming Conventions

Communication ports (user terminals as well as modems) need to be identified
by one or more device file, depending on the intended use of the port. Device
file naming conventions vary, depending on the device's use. Terminal (tty)
files are required for terminals (hard-wired ports). Ports that receive incoming
signals ("dial in" modems) require a special naming convention, ttyd, for
device files. Ports that transmit signals ("dial out") require both eua and eul
device files.

14-36

Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX Commands

The following list contains RS-232-C driver names associated with several types
of serial connections. The drivers listed must be included in the dfile for the
specified serial connection type.
Device Driver

Connection Type

98626

Series 300 Built-in RS-232-C port and HP 98626A RS-232-C
Interface

98628

HP 98628A Datacomm Interface

98644

HP 98644A Asynchronous Serial Interface

apci

Series 400 Built-in RS-232-C port

98642

HP 98642A 4-Channel Multiplexer Interface or HP 98638A
8-Channel Multiplexer Interface

All serial drivers require a major number of 1.

Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX Commands

14-37

Minor Number Format for Terminals and Modems

The minor number format for terminals and modems is as follows:

OxScPaCX
where:

This indicates the number is hexadecimal.

This is the select code, which is a two-digit hexadecimal
number determined by switches set on the terminal or modem's
interface card.

This is the port address for each port.
This two-digit hexadecimal number is set by switches on the
device. If your terminal (or modem) is connected to an HP
98626 or HP 98644 interface card, the port address is always
00. If you terminal is connected to an HP 98642 interface
card, the port address is 00, 01, 02, or 03. If your terminal (or
modem) is connected to an HP 98638 interface card, the port
address is 00 to 07 for the lower select code or 00 to 03 for
each of its two select codes.

specifies FIFO control. The range is OxO to Oxf. This bit
specifies the trigger level for receive FIFO and transmit limit
for transmit FIFO. See the termio(7) manpage for details.

This is a hexadecimal representation that specifies the
hardware flow control state and access type as shown in the
table that follows.
Bit
3

Value
RTS / CTS hard ware flow control.
OFF, 1 = ON.

o=
2
1
0

14-38

l=direct connect, O=modem
l=CCITT protocol (Europe),
O=Simple protocol (U.S.)
l=dialout modem,
O=dial-in modem

Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX Commands

Table 14-8 shows a general mknod template for ports where xx is a two-digit
line identifier in the device file name:
Table 14-8. General Template for Ports
Device

Notes

ttyxx

hard wired ports (terminals)

ttydxx

dial-in modems

cuaxx

auto dial-out ports
dial-out ports

culxx

Modems require two device files and possibly three. The "dial-in modems"
device file ttydxx and the "dial-out ports" device file cuI xx are required. If
you are using a non-HoneyDanBear uucp, the system dials its connection using
/usr/Iib/diaIit.c, which requires you to create a third modem device file
cuaxx with the same minor number as the cuIxx device file.
Assume that you want to create device files for a modem at select code 20
(decimal 20 = hexadecimal 14), using an HP 98626 card, and associate it with
line 20 (that is, /dev/ttyd20). Because the modem will be used as a dial-in
and dial-out port, the X term of the minor number on the cuI file must be
1, and on the ttyd file must be O. The following mknod command lines are
needed:

mknod
mknod
mknod

/dev/cu120
/dev/cua20
/dev/ttyd20

c
c
c

1 Ox140001
1 Ox140001
1 Ox140000

Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX Commands

14-39

There are now three device files associated with the dial-in and dial-out modem
at select code 20. Similarly, the mknod command lines for an HP 98642 four
port mux with port 0 attached to a modem and terminals attached to ports 1
to 3 are:

mknod
mknod
mknod
mknod
mknod
mknod

/dev/ttydOl c 1 OxOdOOO4
/dev/culOl c 1 OxOdOOOl
/dev/cuaOl c 1 OxOdOOOl
/dev/tty02 c 1 OxOdOl00
/dev/tty03 c 1 OxOd0200
/dev/tty04 c 1 OxOd0300

The following example will set up a direct-connect port for an HP 98642 on
line 13 at select code 13 (13 decimal = hexadecimal d). The minor number
ends with a four since this is a direct-connect port:
14

mknod

/dev/tty13 c 1 OxOd0004

When a terminal is added to the system, you must add entries to the
/etc/ttytype and /etc/inittab files. This allows a user to login from the
terminal.

14-40

Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX Commands

Adding an Entry to the /etc/ttytype File

The / etc/ttytype file is a data base that contains the terminal type of the
terminal associated with each port on the system. It is used by the tset and
login commands. Based on the information in this file, tset will perform
terminal-dependent processing, such as setting erase and kill characters, setting
or resetting delays, and sending sequences needed to properly initialize the
terminal. login uses this file to set the TERM variable.
The / etc/ttytype entries have the form:

modeL number location
where:

modeL number

location

is the product number of the terminal or computer (as
defined in /usr/lib/terminfo). For more information on
the model number to use here, refer to the terminfo(4}
entry in the HP- UX Reference
is the device file associated with the terminal/computer
and contained in the /dev directory (not the full path
name, just the file name).

Here is a sample / etc/ttytype file:

300h
2622
2622
2623
dialup

console
ttyOO
tty01
tty02
ttyd03

#
#
#
#
#

Administrator's system console
Terry's terminal
Susan's terminal
Mary's terminal
Don's dialup modem

If the entry is for a dialup port, the modeLnumber should be dialup. This
causes tset to request the proper terminal type during the login sequence.

Note

If you are on an HP -UX cluster, this file is a context-dependent
file. There must be one subfile for each cluster node.

Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX Commands

14-41

Adding an Entry to the jetcjinittab File

The letc/inittab file is described in Chapter 3, section "System Startup
Functions". For terminals, I etcl ini ttab entries contain the I etcl getty
command. This section discusses entries specific to terminals.
Most I etcl ini ttab entries for terminals have the form:
id:rstate:respawn:/etc/getty -t xxx device_file_name N # comment field

where:

is a unique two-character string. The value of the
two-character string is arbitrary but must be unique for
each entry. It is used to refer to the same entry/process in
other states.

rstate

indicates the getty run-levels. This field typically equals
two, meaning the terminal can be used in run-level two
only.

respawn

Specifies that the command in the command field (such as
getty) is re-invoked once the process terminates (typically,
when a user logs off the system).

letc/getty

This is the command to execute. The fields of the
letc/getty command are described below.

The fourth field, the process field, must contain the I etcl getty command; it
is immediately followed by three parameters for a getty command, as follows:
-t xxx

is the optional time-out option for use with modems.

device_file_name is the file name (tty04)-not the complete path name
(/dev/tty04)-of the terminal's or modem's character
device file. The named file must reside in the I dev
directory.
N

14-42

specifies a speed indicator for getty. A value of H is
common for "hardwired" (9600 baud terminal) lines; a
value of three is common for dial-up (300/1200 baud
modem) lines.

Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX Commands

For more information, refer to the getty (1M) and gettydef (4) entries in the
HP- UX Reference.
On a multi-user system, each terminal connected to the system must have an
entry in /etc/inittab. For example, to add a terminal on /dev/tty04 for
run-level 2 the /etc/inittab is the following:
04:2:respawn:/etc/getty tty04 H #terminal at rob's desk

Note that the id field 04 corresponds to the last two digits of the terminal's
device tile (tty04). ThIs conventIon is often used with "continuous" (respawn)
getty processes that get killed in the single-user run-level but is not required
syntax: any two-character string will suffice. After a user logs out, getty is
"respawned", and the "login:" prompt is redisplayed. Refer to Chapter 3 in
this manual, and to the getty(1M), gettydef (4), and inittab(4) entries in
the HP- UX Reference for further details.

If you are on an HP -UX cluster, this file is a context-dependent file. There
must be one subfile for each cluster node.
You must configure your kernel to support the terminal or modem's interface
card. The interface card kernel drivers to choose from are: 98628, 98642, or
98626. The HP 98644 interface card requires the 98626 kernel device driver.
For example, if your terminal is connected to an HP 98642 M ux Card, you
need kernel driver 98642.

If you haven't reconfigured your kernel to include the new interface card, you
will receive a message on your console similar to:
Unable to access ttyxx

If you don't know what interface your terminal or modem is connected to, or
can't decide which interface to connect it to, read the information for your
peripheral in Installing Peripherals Chapter 5, "Installing Terminals and
Modems".

Setting Up Devices USing HP-UX Commands

14-43

Removing A Terminal

If you remove a remote terminal from your system, you must clean up your
system by performing the following steps:
1. Find the system's name for the terminal. If you have been receiving
messages on your console that are similar to:
Unable to access ttyxx

the system's name for the terminal is the ttyxx name.
If you do not receive the message, determine the name of the remote
terminal by the following method:
a. type cd / dev
b. type Is -1 tty*
14

You will see lines similar to:
crw--w--w-

ryk

axe

1 Ox090004 1991

/dev/ttyp1

If you have only one tty file, that is the terminal you are removing.
If you have several, determine which one to remove by using the
information you used to set up the terminal. Refer to the section "Minor
Number for Ports".
2. Edit the file / etc/ini ttab.
Delete the line that has a field with the words:
id: rstate: respawn: / etc/ getty ttyxx

where ttyxx is the port you identified in Step 1.
3. Notify the ini t process that / etc/ ini tt ab has changed by typing:
telinit q

4. Remove the device file associated with the terminal you removed.

14-44

Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX Commands

Pseudo Terminals
This section contains the following information:
• Process overview for setting up HP- UX to communicate with pseudo
terminals.
• Device file location and naming conventions.
• Block and character device file requirements and recommendations.
• Major number.
• Minor number format.
• Other information.
• Examples of creating device files.
Some applications need a form of software support that enables them to act
as though they are connected to a terminal. This implementation is called a
pseudo terminal. A pseudo terminal is a pair of character devices: a master
device and a slave device.
The pseudo terminal is structured so that output from either process acts as
input to the other. The slave device interacts with the application process. It
provides processes (in this case, user applications) and an interface identical
to that described in termio(7} of the HP- UX Reference. The master device
interacts with the server process controlling the application process. It
interacts through the device as though it were a hardware terminal interface.
The difference between an HP- UX pseudo terminal and the interface described
in tennio is that the latter always has a hardware device behind it-like an
HP 2623 terminal. A slave device has another process manipulating it through
the master half of the pseudo terminal. Anything written on the master device
is given to the slave device as input, and anything written on the slave device is
presented as input on the master device.
According to HP- UX naming conventions, all pseudo terminal devices are
located in the directories /dev/pty (slaves), and /dev/ptym (masters). The
master device file should be called /dev/ptym/ptyXX, and the slave side
/dev/pty/ttyXX, where XX is an identifying letter from p to w, and a
hexadecimal digit. Do not change these naming conventions because some
programs depend on them.
Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX Commands

14-45

For example, /dev/ptyrn/ptypO (master) and /dev/pty/ttypO (slave)
would be the lowest numbered pseudo terminal pair; / dev /ptyrn/ptywf and
/ dev /pty /ttywf would be the highest ordered pair.
All pseudo terminals must be character device files.
The master pseudo terminal device driver must have a major number of 16.
The slave pseudo terminal device driver must have a major number of 17.
The minor number for both master and slave pseudo terminal device files is:
OxOOyyyy

where YYYY is a unique hexadecimal value, in the range of a to npty-1,
where npty is a configurable system parameter. (Refer to "Configuring
Operating System Parameters" in Chapter 6 and to Appendix D in Volume 2
of this manual if you want to read about this parameter.) This value is used to
identify the relationship between master and slave.
U sing the lowest numbered pair, a sample mknod command would be:
mknod /dev/ptyrn/ptypO c 16 OxOOOOOO
mknod /dev/pty/ttypO c 17 OxOOOOOO
These commands would create a master and slave pair called ptypO and ttypO.
The minor numbers, shown above as zeros, must be in the range of a to npty
-1 where npty is a configurable system parameter.
Your application's documentation will tell you how many pseudo terminals
you need. For example, HP Windows/9000 needs three master/slave pairs per
window.
For more information on pseudo terminals, refer to both the termio(5) and
pty(5) sections of the HP- UX Reference.

14-46

Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX Commands

Plotters and Digitizers
This section contains the following plotter and digitizer information:
• Device file location and naming convention.
• Block and character device file requirements and recommendations.
• Major number.
• Minor number format.
• Other information.
• Examples of creating device files.
Device File Naming Convention for Plotters and Digitizers

Plotter and digitizer device files should be located in the / dev directory.
Device file naming conventions use pIt followed by the product number
for plotters and dig followed by the product number for digitizers. If more
than one device with the same product number is present, be certain not to
duplicate their special file names. For example, to differentiate between two
HP 7580 plotters, name the first one plt7580.1 and the second plt7580.2.
You can also use the" .#" prefix to distinguish plotters and digitizers based on
their HP-IB bus address.
The file type for plotters and digitizers is always character.

Note

For HP-HIL plotter and digitizers, refer to the "HP-HIL
Devices" section of this chapter for configuration information.

The device driver required for HP-IB and parallel plotters and digitizers is
hpib (major number 21). For parallel plotters the parallel driver is also

required.

Note

The parallel requires the hpib driver. Both of these drivers
must be part of the kernel configuration for the parallel driver
to operate.

Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX Commands

14-47

The following list contains RS-232-C driver names associated with several types
of serial connections. The drivers listed must be included in the dfile for the
specified serial connection type.

Device Driver

Connection Type

98626

Series 300 Built-in RS-232-C port and HP 98626A RS-232-C
Interface

98628

HP 98628A Datacomm Interface

98644

HP 98644A Asynchronous Serial Interface

apci

Series 400 Built-in RS-232-C port

98642

HP 98642A 4-Channel Multiplexer Interface or HP 98638A
8-Channel Multiplexer Interface

All serial drivers require a major number of l.
Refer to the / etc/master file to determine which driver you need for your
plotter. There is a section in this file with the heading:

* field

1: product #

field 2: driver name.

Look for your plotter model in the first column; the associated driver is listed
in the second column.

14-48

Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX Commands

Minor Number Format for HP-IB Plotters and Digitizers

The minor number for HP-IB plotters and digitizers has the following format:

OxScBaOO
where:

Ox
Sc
Ba
00

specifies format is in hexadecimal.
specifies the select code of the interface (8 bit value).
specifies the HP-IB bus address (4 bit value).
indicates last two hexadecimal digits are both zero (0).

For example, several HP 7580 plotters attached at HP-IB bus addresses 3,
4, and 5 to the same interface at select code 7 would require the following
command lines to create the device files:

mknod /dev/plt7580.1 c 21 Ox070300
mknod /dev/plt7580.2 c 21 Ox070400
mknod /dev/plt7580.3 c 21 Ox070500

Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX Commands

14-49

Minor Number Format for RS-232-C Plotters

The minor number for RS-232-C plotters has the following format:

OxScPaCX
where:

This indicates the number is hexadecimal.

This is the select code, which is a two-digit hexadecimal
number determined by switches set on the terminal or modem's
interface card.

This is the port address for each port.
This two-digit hexadecimal number is set by switches on the
device. If your plotter (or digitizer) is connected to an HP
98626 or HP 98644 interface card, the port address is always
00. If you plotter is connected to an HP 98642 interface
card, the port address is 00, 01, 02, or 03. If your plotter (or
digitizer) is connected to an HP 98638 interface card, the port
address is 00 to 07 for the lower select code or 00 to 03 for
each of its two select codes.

14-50

specifies FIFO control. The range is OxO to Oxf. This bit
specifies the trigger level for receive FIFO and transmit limit
for transmit FIFO. See the termio(7) manpage for details.

Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX Commands

This is a hexadecimal representation that specifies the
hardware flow control state and access type as shown in the
table that follows.
Bit
3

Value
RTS/CTS hardware flow control.
OFF, 1 = ON.

o=
2
1

l=direct connect, O=modem
l=CCITT protocol (Europe),
O=Simple protocol (U.S.)
l=dialout modem,
O=dial-in modem

For example, consider an HP 7550A plotter attached at the built-in RS-232-C
port and an another HP 7550A plotter connected an HP 98628A Datacomm
Interface at select code 20. Use the following command lines to create the
device files for the two plotters:
mknod /dev/plt7580.1 c 1 Ox090004
mknod /dev/plt7580.2 c 1 Ox140004

Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX Commands

14-51

Printers
This section contains the following printer information:
• Device file location and naming convention.
• Block and character device file requirements and recommendations.
• Major number.
• Minor number format.
• Other information.
• Examples of creating device files.
Device File Naming Conventions for Printers
14

Printer device files should be located in the / dev directory Device file naming
conventions use ptr followed by the product number. If more than one device
with the same product number is present, be certain not to duplicate their
special file names. For example, to differentiate between two HP 2567C
printers, name the first one ptr2567C.1 and the second ptr2567C. 2. You
can also use the ".#" prefix to distiquish printers based on their HP-IB bus
address.
The file type for printers is always character.
There are three HP-IB device drivers, one parallel, and five RS-232-C drivers
for printers. The following list contains the device driver name and the
associated major number for HP-IB and parallel devices:
Major
Number

Driver Name

hpib (HP-IB)
ciper (HP-IB)
printer (HP-IB)
parallel

26
7
21

Note

14-52

The parallel requires the hpib driver. Both of these drivers
must be part of the kernel configuration for the parallel driver
to operate.

Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX Commands

Connection Type

98626

Series 300 Built-in RS-232-C port and HP 98626A RS-232-C
Interface

98628

HP 98628A Datacomm Interface

98644

HP 98644A Asynchronous Serial Interface

apci

Series 400 Built-in RS-232-C port

98642

HP 98642A 4-Channel Multiplexer Interface or HP 98638A
8-Channel Multiplexer Interface

All serial drivers require a major number of l.

Refer to the / etc/master file to determine which driver you need for your
printer. There is a section in this file with the heading:

* field

1: product #

field 2: driver name.

Look for your printer model in the first column; the associated driver is listed
in the second column.

Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX Commands

14-53

Minor Number Format for HP-IB Printers

The HP-IB minor number for HP-IB printers has the following format:

OxScBaOM
where:

Ox
Sc
Ba

o
M

specifies format is in hexadecimal.
specifies the select code of the interface (8 bit value).
specifies the HP-IB bus address (4 bit value).
indicates 1 hexadecimal digit with value zero (4 bit value).
indicates mode of operation with the following settings:
Printer Driver Bits

Bit

3
Auto FF
2
Case Fold
1
Overprint

Value

l=NO-EJECT
l=Upper
l=NOCR

l=non-protocol (raw),
0
Cooked/Raw 0= Amigo (cooked) protocol

14-54

Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX Commands

Ciper Driver Bits

Value

Bit
3
Auto FF

l=NO-EJECT

2
Case Fold

O=Upper

1
Overprint

O=NOCR

l=non-protocol (raw),
0
Cooked/Raw

For example, several HP 2563B printers attached at HP-IB bus addresses 3,
4, and 5 to the same interface at select code 7 would require the following
command lines to create the device files:

mknod /dev/ptr2563B.1 c 7 Ox070300
mknod /dev/ptr2563B.2 c 7 Ox070400
mknod /dev/ptr2563b.3 c 7 Ox070500

Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX Commands

14-55

Minor Number Format for RS-232-C Printers

The RS-232-C minor number for RS-232-C printers has the following format:

OxScPaCX
where:

This indicates the number is hexadecimal.

This is the select code, which is a two-digit hexadecimal
number determined by switches set on the terminal or modem's
interface card.

This is the port address for each port.
This two-digit hexadecimal number is set by switches on the
device. If your printer is connected to an HP 98626 or HP
98644 interface card, the port address is always 00. If you
printer is connected to an HP 98642 interface card, the port
address is 00, 01, 02, or 03. If your printer is connected to an
HP 98638 interface card, the port address is 00 to 07 for the
lower select code or 00 to 03 for each of its two select codes.

14-56

specifies FIFO control. The range is OxO to Oxf. This bit
specifies the trigger level for receive FIFO and transmit limit
for transmit FIFO. See the termio(7) manpage for details.

Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX Commands

This is a hexadecimal representation that specifies the
hardware flow control state and access type as shown in the
table that follows.
Bit

Value

RTSjCTS hardware flow control.
O=OFF,1=ON.

l=direct connect, O=modem

l=CCITT protocol (Europe),
O=Simple protocol (U .S.)

l=dialout modem,
O=dial-in modem

For example, consider an HP 2567C printer attached at the built-in RS-232-C
port and another HP 2567C printer connected an HP 98628A Datacomm
Interface at select code 20. Use the following command lines to create the
device files for the two plotters:

mknod /dev/ptr2567C.1 c 1 Ox090004
mknod /dev/ptr2567C.2 c 1 Ox140004
The parallel minor number for parallel printers has the following format:

OxScPoOA
where:

Ox
Sc
Po
000

specifies format is in hexadecimal.
specifies the select code of the interface (8 bit value).
specifies the RS-232-C port number, values 0 - 3 (8 bit value).
indicates value of zero (12 bit value).

An HP 2567C printer, parallel interface, is connected to your system at select
code 23. The mknod command line to create the device file would be:

mknod /dev/ptr2567C c 21 Ox170000

Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX Commands

14-57

Graphics Display Devices
This section contains the following graphic display device information:
• Device file location and naming convention.
• Block and character device file requirements and recommendations.
• Major Number.
• Minor number format.
• Other information.
• Examples of creating device files.

The device files for graphics displays should be located in the / dev directory.
Device file naming conventions use / dev / graphics or / dev / crt for graphic
displays. To address graphic display overlay planes, use the naming
convention of prepending the device file name with the letter "0", for example,
/dev/graphics and /dev/ographics and /dev/crt and /dev/ocrt. If
your graphic display is to be your system console, the naming convention is
/dev/console.
The file type for graphic display devices is always character.
The major number is 12 for graphic display devices.

14-58

Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX Commands

The minor number for graphic devices has the following format:

OxSTXXXX
where:

specifies hexadecimal format.

specifies select code (4 bit value).

specifies the following values (4 bit value) :

Configures automatically to one of the following:
• Low-resolution graphics device at physical address
Ox520000 (if present) .
• High-resolution graphics device at physical address
Ox560000 if low resolution device at Ox520000 not
present.

XXXX

High-resolution graphics device at physical address
Ox560000 (unless there is no low resolution device at
Ox520000, in which case type 1 is invalid).

High- or low-resolution graphics device at the select
code specified by the select code field in the minor
number.

is zero or contains device-specific information as defined in the
appropriate Starbase Device Drivers Library.

Additional information about graphics can be found in graphics(7} of the
HP-UX Reference.

Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX Commands

14-59

HP-HIL Devices
HP-HIL devices include the HP Touch Bezel, keyboards, mouse, digitizers, and
control knobs.
To set up HP-HIL devices, there must be one device file with a major number
23 and for each HP-HIL device a device file with major number 24.
The minor number format is as follows:

OxOOOOBO
where:

specifies hexadecimal format.

0000

specifies 16 bit value of

specifies position on the HP-HIL bus (4 bit value).

specifies 4 bit value of o.

The following mknod commands create the necessary device file with major
number 23 and 24 HP-HIL device files for devices.

mknod /dev/raw_8042 c 23 OxOOOOOO
mknod /dev/hi11 c 24 Ox000010
mknod /dev/hi12 c 24 Ox000020
The HP-HIL kernel driver is not an optional kernel driver so you never need to
configure it into your kernel.
Additional information about the HP-HIL interface can be found in hil(7) of
the HP-UX Reference.

14-60

Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX Commands

GPIO Devices
GPIO devices include HP 98622. This is a protocol used mostly for
instruments.
The gpio driver only operates in character mode.
The major number for gpio is 22.
The minor number format is as follows:

OxScOOOO
where:

specifies hexadecimal format.

specifies the select code (8 bit value).

0000

specifies a 16 bit value of zero.

Assuming you have an HP 98622A GPIO interface card at select code 12,
default select code for interface card, the mknod command to access a device
connected to the device is as follows:

mknod /dev/gpio c 22 OxOCOOOO
You also must verify that your kernel contains the gpio kernel driver, and
configure it if it does not.

Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX Commands

14-61

j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
j
J

A
EliSA Configuration
Introduction to EliSA Board Configuration
This appendix explains how to configure EISA and ISA 110 boards on
Hewlett-Packard Series 400 workstations containing EISA backplanes. ISA
stands for Industry Standard Architecture. EISA stands for Extended Industry
Standard Architecture. ElISA stands for both architectures.

ElISA boards cannot be used until they have been configured with the
eisa_config program. eisa_config has two modes: automatic mode, which
executes automatically each time you reboot the system, and interactive mode,
which you can execute from the command line.

• If you are adding, moving, or removing EISA boards, the automatic mode of
eisa_config can usually configure the boards without any user intervention.
• If you are adding, moving, or removing ISA boards, you must run
eisa_config in interactive mode. ISA boards do not have readable ID
registers and thus cannot be automatically detected by eisa_config.

How to Use this Appendix
This appendix contains the following sections:
• "Introduction to ElISA Board Configuration" provides a conceptual overview
of the two modes of eisa_config. Use this section to understand the use of
eisa_config. It covers the following topics:
o Introduction.
DHow eisa_config works.

EliSA Configuration A-1

• "Configuring EISA Boards Using Automatic Mode" explains how to use
the automatic mode of eisa_config. Use this section to configure HP and
non-HP EISA boards. It covers the following topics:
o Adding an EISA board using SAM (recommended).
o Adding an EISA board using HP- UX commands .
• Adding an HP EISA board
• Adding anon - HP EISA board
o Moving an EISA board.
o Removing an EISA board.
DUsing eisa_config in automatic mode.
• "Configuring ElISA Boards Using Interactive Mode" , explains how to use
the interactive mode of eisa_config, and provides step-by-step instructions
for specific tasks using interactive mode. Use this section to configure ISA
boards, and to change choices for board functions. It covers the following
topics:

DUsing eisa_config in interactive mode.
o Adding an ElISA board.
o Moving an ElISA board.
0 Removing an ElISA board.
o Changing choices for board functions.
o Example interactive eisa_config session.
• "Troubleshooting ElISA Board Configuration", explains how to troubleshoot
ElISA board configuration problems.

Note

A-2

This appendix does not explain how to write a device driver. If
you are writing your own device driver, refer to HP- UX Driver
Development Guide.

EliSA Configuration

Introduction
Both the automatic and interactive modes of the eisa_config program help
you create a conflict-free configuration for ElISA boards.
Each ElISA board in a backplane can use one or more system resources, such
as direct memory access channels, interrupt lines, register addresses, and
memory. However, a given board may be able to use only some of the choices
available for a resource. For example, 11 interrupt lines are available, but a
board may be able to use only lines 3, 5, and 6. Hence, there needs to be a
way to tell the board which resources to use. The eisa_config program can
suggest resource assignments for ISA boards and automatically assign resources
for EISA boards.
ISA Boards

For ISA boards, a set of physical switches or jumpers on the board determines
which resources the board will use, to what address range the board will
respond, and other board-specific options and modes. The board manufacturer
tells you how to set these switches and jumpers. Unfortunately, there are few
conventions for switch and jumper usage among ISA boards, and it is easy to
inadvertently assign the same resource to two different boards by setting a
switch incorrectly. Symptoms of such conflicts vary depending on the type of
board and conflict, and are often difficult to diagnose.
EISA Boards

EISA boards usually do not have physical switches or jumpers for resource
assignment. Instead, each EISA board has a configuration file (cfg file) that
describes how the board can be used and which resources it needs. The
eisa_config program then uses these cfg files to develop a conflict-free
configuration.

EliSA Configuration

A-3

efg Files

All EISA boards have corresponding cfg files. ISA boards used in HP- UX
workstations must also have corresponding cfg files. Using the cfg file,
eisa_config can automatically configure an EISA board. Although it cannot
automatically configure an ISA board, it can tell you how to set the switches or
jumpers on the board so that no resource conflicts occur. However, you should
be aware that some configurations are simply not possible; for instance, two
boards from different manufacturers may both require the same resource. If
this happens, only one of the boards can be used.
The following list describes cfg file considerations:
• Each ElISA board that will be connected to the workstation must have a
cfg file in the / etc/ eisa directory.
• Do not remove the cfg files after eisa_config has been run. These files are
needed every time you reboot the system.
• Do not change the file names of these files.
cfg file names have the following format:
rXXXnnnn.cfg

where:
r

xxx
nnnn

is usually! (or a hex digit).
is a three-letter abbreviation for the board manufacturer's
name.
is four digits. The first three digits represent the product ID
and the fourth is the revision level.

The eisa_config program relies on this file name format to automatically
match a board with its cfg file.

A-4

EliSA Configuration

The cfg files use a specific grammar that describes the following attributes for
each board:
• Board-level information. This includes board ID, manufacturer, ASCII text
that describes the board's capabilities, information on what type of slot the
board can go in, and other attributes.
Each board can also contain lists of board-wide resources, such as I/O
registers, switches, and jumpers, and information on how they should be
initialized.
• Function-level information. A board is made up of a set of one or more
functions, each of which represents one possible use of the board. For
example, a board may have a serial port and a parallel printer port. Each
function has a separate block in the cfg file that specifies the function's
name, type, and the set of choices for how it can be configured.
• Choice-level information. Each function has a set of choices. Each choice
block has a name and a set of attributes. These attributes specify which
resources the choice will use and whether the function is enabled or disabled
with this choice. Each choice also specifies any initialization requirements,
such as high-speed for HP-IB.
When eisa_config adds a board, it selects a choice for each function.
Generally, the first choice for each function is selected (the default). If the
default choice for a function would create a conflict with another board,
eisa_config automatically selects another choice. If the default function
needs to be changed, refer to "Changing Choices for Board Functions Using
Interactive Mode" for selecting a board function.

EliSA Configuration

A-5

How eisa_config Works
The eisa_config program has two modes:
• Automatic mode, which runs automatically each time you boot the system .
• Interactive mode, which you run from the command line.
In either mode, after a conflict-free board configuration has been built, the
configuration is saved in EISA non-volatile memory (NVM). (Non-volatile
memory is located on the system board and is not erased if the computer's
power supply is turned off.) When eisa_config saves a configuration in NVM,
it also writes that configuration to the system configuration information (sci)
file, / etc/ eisa/ system. sci, so that the sci file and NVM are identical.
eisa_config can initialize a configuration from the sci file. You can copy one
configuration to many machines. For details, refer to "Saving the Configuration
and Exiting Using Interactive Mode".
Automatic Mode

Each time you boot the system, eisa_config executes automatically from
/ etc/bcheckrc after the root file system has been mounted, but before any
other file systems or swap areas are in use.
eisa_config compares the current board configuration to the configuration
recorded in NVM. If the current configuration and the NVM configuration
do not match, eisa_config compares the current configuration to the
configuration recorded in / etc/ eisa/ system. sci. In most cases, the current
configuration and one of the recorded configurations match, and the boot
process continues. Refer to "Configuring EISA Boards Using Automatic
Mode".

If the actual and recorded configurations do not match, eisa_config attempts
to generate a new configuration. If it cannot, you still may be able to
generate a correct configuration by using eisa_config interactively. Refer to
"Configuring ElISA Boards Using Interactive Mode".

A-6

EliSA Configuration

Interactive Mode

The interactive mode of eisa_config allows you to add, move, and remove
ISA boards. It also allows you to view information about ElISA boards in the
configuration and to change currently selected choices for functions.
You must use the interactive mode of eisa_config in three cases:
• You need to add, move, or remove an ISA board.
• Automatic mode was unable to generate an error-free board configuration.
Fixing the error may require adding an EISA board interactively or changing
a function choice. The error message will explain how to fix the error.
• You want to change the choice that eisa_config automatically selected for
a given board function (for instance, you may want to specify low-speed for
HP-IB).
Refer to "Configuring ElISA Boards Using Interactive Mode" .

EliSA Configuration

A-7

Adding Device Drivers to the Kernel
The ElISA board device driver must be part of the kernel before you can
run eisa_config. HP supports both HP and non-HP ElISA boards. The
manufacturer of the non-HP board must provide a driver and additional
information to create device files. The eisa driver is required for all (HP and
non-HP) ElISA boards. Additionally, peripheral device drivers must be part
of the kernel before you can access them. Peripheral device drivers and the
board driver can be added at the same time. This saves time by regenerating
the kernel and rebooting your system only once. This section describes the
following tasks:
• Adding HP Drivers to the kernel using SAM
• Adding HP Drivers to the kernel using HP- UX Commands
• Adding Non-HP Drivers to the kernel using HP- UX Commands

Adding HP Drivers to the Kernel Using SAM
To add HP drivers using SAM:
A

1. Ensure that you have superuser capabilities.

2. Ensure you are logged onto the machine to which the EISA board will
physically reside, client or server. See Managing Clusters of HP 9000
Computers for additional cluster information. You can log in either
physically on the correct cluster node or remotely by using the rlogin
command.
3. Warn all users to get off the system. Use cwall in a cluster environment
and wall in a standalone environment.

/etc/cwall or /etc/wall
Shutdown for configuration changes in one minute.
Please log off now .
.. C
See cwall(l) and wall(l) in HP-UX Reference.

A-a

EliSA Configuration

4. Shut down the system and switch to single-user mode with the shutdown
command:
shutdown

See shutdown(lM) in HP- UX Reference.
Wait for the system to switch to single-user mode (you will see a shell
prompt).
5. To add the eisa and peripheral drivers to the kernel using SAM, enter:
sam

For information on using SAM, refer to the System Administration Tasks
manual.
6. Highlight
7. Highlight

and activate the (Open) control button.
and activate the (OK) control button.

A list of drivers, their current status, and their pending status appears.
Current status shows whether a driver is in or out of (not in) the currently
executing kernel. Pending status shows whether a driver will be added (in)
or removed (out) when you next regenerate the kernel.
While you are adding the eisa driver, you can also add any drivers
required by the peripherals at the same time. The peripheral drivers are
specified elsewhere in this manual.
8.

wish to add, highlight the driver name and choose

Ilj9]~I~ffi~~~II from the "Actions" menu.
The "Pending State" column entry for the driver changes to "In".
You must recreate the kernel and install it to implement the change.

EliSA Configuration

A-9

9. Choose

from the "Actions" menu.

10. Activate the (Yes) control button to confirm that you want to reconfigure
the kernel now.
11. Choose one of the following:
• Creat e a new kernel now

This requires a reboot of your system. SAM prompts you to continue.
• Defer kernel creation until later

SAM preserves the request to reconfigure the kernel. If you attempt to
exit SAM before you have reconfigured the kernel, SAM prompts you to
reconfigure the kernel or cancel your reconfiguration request.
• Cancel all kernel modifications

12. Follow the prompts to regenerate and reinstall the new kernel. After SAM
generates a new kernel, choose one of the following actions and activate the
(OK) control button:
• Move the kernel into place and reboot the system now
A

• Move the kernel into place but do not reboot the system
• Exit without moving the kernel into place

There is an option to enable or disable overwriting the kernel configuration
file /etc/conf/dfile.

If you enable overwriting the kernel configuration file, SAM moves
/etc/conf/dfile.SAM to /etc/conf/dfile, and you will lose any
comments you have added to dfile.
If you disable overwriting the kernel configuration file, /etc/conf/dfile
will not represent your current kernel (/hp-ux) when you reboot your
system, but /etc/conf/dfile.SAM will.
We highly recommend the use of /etc/conf/dfile for the kernel
configuration file so that it remains up to date with the executing kernel,
/hp-ux. Some system software depends on /etc/conf/dfile representing
the currently executing kernel.

A-10

EliSA Configuration

If you do not want SAM to overwrite /etc/conf/dfile, because of
comments you want to retain, do the following:

a. Choose the SAM option to disable overwriting the kernel configuration
file.
b. Move the kernel into place (optionally rebooting the system).
c. Copy your comments from /etc/conf/dfile to /etc/conf/dfile.SAM.
Be careful to add only your comments to the file. At this stage, you
want / etc/ conf / dfile. SAM to reflect your current kernel configura.tion .
d. Copy or save /etc/conf/dfile.SAM to /etc/conf/dfile.
The kernel configuration file / etc/ conf / dfile now represents the current
/hp-ux kernel.
13. Exit SAM. Follow the prompts to regenerate and reinstall the kernel. SAM
will prompt you to reboot the system. Answer YES to reboot the system.

EliSA Configuration

A-11

Adding HP Drivers to the Kernel Using HP-UX Commands
The driver you need to add to your kernel configuration file to configure devices
on your ElISA board is the eisa device driver. Follow the instructions given in
Chapter 14, "Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX Commands" for adding a driver
to your kernel using commands.
Where you are instructed to edit the /etc/conf/dfile to add the necessary
device drivers:
• Find the line containing

* DEVICE DRIVERS .

• Below this line, add the eisa driver and the peripheral device driver. If an
asterisk ("*") appears before the driver name, remove the asterisk.

A-12

EliSA Configuration

Adding Non-HP Drivers to the Kernel Using HP-UX Commands
1. Ensure that you have superuser capabilities.
2. Ensure that you are logged onto the machine where the EISA board will
physically reside, client or server. This sets the correct context for creating
the /hp-ux context-dependent file and editing the /etc/conf/dfile
context-dependent kernel configuration file. You can log in at the cluster
node console or remotely log in to the cluster node from another location by
using the rlogin command. See Managing Clusters of HP 9000 Computers,
for additional cluster information.
3. Load the board's drivers into the /etc/conf directory.
4. If you have the object code for the non-HP board driver, skip this step. If
you have only the source code for the non-HP board driver, you need to
compile it with the following steps:
a. Type the following commands. If provided, use the compilation command
supplied by the board manufacturer. non-HP-driver stands for the name
of the driver as supplied by the board manufacturer.
cd /etc/conf
cc -c +M +01 -DKERNEL -D_KERNEL -Dhp9000s800 -D_WSIO \
-I/etc/conf/h -I/etc/conf/machine -I/usr/include/sys \
non-HP-driver. c

This command tells the compiler to look for include files in / etc/ conf /h,
/etc/conf/machine, and /usr/include/sys. The +M option prevents
inline floating point code, which will cause a panic in kernel mode. The
+01 option performs level 1 (local) code optimization; the 0 is the letter
0, not a zero. You can also check / etc/ config .mk for the compile flags
that were used to build your kernel.
b. If the compilation succeeds, /etc/conf should contain a file named
non-HP-driver. o. If the compilation fails, remove the +01 option and try
to compile the source code again.

EliSA Configuration

A-13

5. Add the non-HP drivers to the HP- UX kernel by copying them into a
standard library:
cd /etc/conf
ar -r libusrdrv.a non-HP-driver.o

6. Make a backup copy of the /etc/master file:
cp /etc/master /etc/master.old

The /etc/master file lists all the device drivers.
7. Edit /etc/master to include the drivers. Note that you may need to make
more than one entry for the board driver and device drivers. Find the lines
shown below. The first line indicates the six information fields that must be
supplied for your drivers.
*name

handle

type

mask

blk

char

*
where:
A

name

is the name of this driver in the dfile.

handle

is the name prefixed to the name of the driver entry points.

type

is a bit mask indicating whether the device is character,
block, or both.

mask

is a bit mask specifying the functions performed by the
device.

blk

is the major number if it is a block device.

char

is the major number if it is a character device.

Add a line containing these six fields for each driver. The board
manufacturer should supply the lines you need to add. Refer to master( 4) in
the HP- UX Reference manual.

A-14

EliSA Configuration

Configuring EISA Boards Using Automatic Mode
This section explains how to add, move, or remove an EISA board using the
automatic mode of eisa_config. If you need to add, move, or remove an ISA
board, refer to "Configuring ElISA Boards Using Interactive Mode".
This section includes the following information:
• Using eisa_config in automatic mode.
• Setting switches and jumpers.
• Adding an EISA board using SAM (recommended).
• Adding an EISA board using HP-UX commands.
o Adding an HP EISA board
o Adding anon -HP EISA board
• Moving an EISA board.
• Removing an EISA board.
A

Using eisa_config in Automatic Mode
After you have added, moved, or removed an EISA board and booted your
system, eisa_config executes automatically. It compares the current board
configuration to the configuration recorded in NVM.
1. If the current configuration matches the configuration recorded in NVM,
eisa_config exits without messages, and the boot process continues.

2. If the current configuration does not match the configuration recorded in
NVM, eisa_config checks to see if it matches the configuration saved in
/etc/eisa/system.sci.
a. If the current configuration matches the configuration saved in
/ etc/ eisa/ system. sci, eisa_config initializes from system. sci.
NVM is updated to match the current configuration and
/etc/eisa/system.sci.
Because eisa_config can initialize a configuration from the sci file,
you can copy one configuration to many machines. For details, refer to
"Saving the Configuration and Exiting Using Interactive Mode" .
EliSA Configuration

A-15

b. If the current configuration does not match neither NVM nor
letc/eisa/system.sci, eisa_config tries to generate a new
configuration with all of the boards currently in the backplane.
1.

If a new configuration can be generated, a message is displayed and
the boot process continues. If necessary, eisa_config automatically
reboots the system. NVM and I etcl eisal system. sci are updated to
reflect the new configuration.

For new boards, eisa_config automatically selects choices for board
functions. However, it will not change an existing board's choices.
After the boot process finishes, check letc/eisa/config.log to
see what choices were selected. If any are unacceptable, refer to
"Changing Choices for Board Functions Using Interactive Mode".
ii. If a new configuration cannot be generated, an error message is
displayed and also logged to the file I etcl eisal config. err.
When the system has finished booting, you can fix the error. Fixing
the error may require one or more of the following:
1) Adding the eisa driver to the kernel.
2) Putting the required cfg file into I etcl eisa.
3) Running eisa_config interactively to add a board that had a
resource conflict or to change a choice for a new board. Refer to
"Configuring ElISA Boards Using Interactive Mode".
4) Replacing hardware (if NVM is broken).

For more information about eisa_config configuration problems, refer to
"Troubleshooting ElISA Board Configuration".
If the system cannot proceed because switches may need to be set,
eisa_config will show you what the switches should look like and ask you if
the switches on the boards are correct. If they are not, eisa_config will halt
the system so that you can set the switches if necessary.

A-16

EliSA Configuration

Setting Switches and Jumpers Using Automatic Mode
If you need to set switches or jumpers:
1. Be sure to record the required switch settings (displayed on your screen).

2. After eisa_config halts the system, turn off the power.
3. Set the switches or jumpers.
4. Turn on the power and boot the system.
The following example shows a typical display for required switch settings. The
picture represents the actual switches and jumpers on the board and their
labels (if any).
Slot 2
XYZ Networking Board
Switch Name: I/O Base Address
Switches 1 through 3 select the I/O Base Address,
switch 4 is not applicable.
NOTE: '0££' in the diagram below corresponds to 'OPEN' on board
switches.

De£ault setting
100
1
Required setting
100
1
+-x-+---+---+-x-+on
+---+-x-+-x-+---+o££
1
234

Default
setting

indicates the manufacturer's default setting, if one exists.

Required
setting

indicates the setting required for a conflict-free configuration. 1
means "on" and 0 means "off."

EliSA Configuration

A-17

Adding an EISA Board Using SAM and Automatic Mode
Use this section to add HP-supplied EISA boards. To add a non-HP-supplied
EISA board to your system refer to "Adding an EISA Board Using HP-UX
Commands and Automatic Mode".
To use ElISA boards, you must have the eisa driver configured into the
kernel. This driver is a part of the default HP- UX kernel configuration. To add
an HP EISA board using SAM:
1. Ensure that you have superuser capabilities.

2. Ensure you are logged onto the client or server machine where the EISA
board will physically reside. See Managing Clusters of HP 9000 Computers,
for additional cluster information. You can log in either physically on the
correct cluster node or remotely by using the rlogin command.
3. Ensure that the board's cfg file is in the /etc/eisa directory. If the cfg
file is provided on media with the card, load the board's cfg file from the
supplied media into the / etc/ eisa directory.
A

4. Ensure that the eisa and peripherals device drivers are configured into your
kernel. See "Adding HP Drivers to the Kernel Using SAM".
5. Warn all users to get off the system. Use cwall in a cluster environment
and wall in a standalone environment.

/etc/cwall or /etc/wall
Shutdown for hardware changes in one minute.
Please log off now.
~c

See cwall(l) and wall(l) in HP-UX Reference.
6. Halt the system with the shutdown command:

shutdown -h
See shutdown(lM) in HP- UX Reference.
7. Once the system is halted, turn off the power.

A-18

EliSA Configuration

8. Install the EISA boards. If you are connecting a peripheral device to this
board, connect the device as described elsewhere in this manual and turn it
on.
9. Turn on the computer. The HP- UX kernel boots and eisa_config runs
automatically attempting to create a new configuration.

Adding an EISA Board Using HP-UX Commands and Automatic
Mode
This section describes two ways to add an EISA board to your system. To add
a non-HP-supplied EISA board, use "Adding a Non-HP EISA Board Using
HP- UX Commands and Automatic Mode" below. To add an HP-supplied
EISA board without using SAM for kernel configuration, use "Adding an HP
EISA Board Using HP-UX Commands and Automatic Mode" below.
To use ElISA boards, you must have the eisa driver configured into the
kernel. This driver is a part of the default kernel configuration.
Adding an HP EISA Board Using HP-UX Commands and Automatic Mode
A

To add an HP EISA board:
1. Ensure that you have superuser capabilities.

2. Ensure you are logged onto the client or server machine where the
EISA board will physically reside. See Managing Clusters oj HP 9000
Computers, for additional cluster information. You can log in either
physically on the correct cluster node or remotely by using the rlogin
command.
3. Ensure that the board's cfg file is in the / etc/ eisa directory. If the cfg
file is provided on media with the card, load the board's cfg file into the
/ etc/ eisa directory. See "cfg Files" for cfg file naming conventions.
4. Ensure that the eisa and peripherals drivers are part of the kernel. See
"Adding HP Drivers to the Kernel Using HP- UX Commands".
5. Create the device files for the board and the peripherals with the mknod
command. Refer to mknod(lM) in HP- UX ReJerence and to Chapter 14,
"Setting Up Devices Using HP -UX Commands".

EliSA Configuration

A-19

6. Warn all users to get off the system. Use cwall in a cluster environment
and wall in a standalone environment.

/etc/cwall or /etc/wall
Shutdown for hardware changes in one minute.
Please log off now.
~C

See cwall(l) and wall(1) in HP-UX Reference.
7. Halt the system with the shutdown command:

shutdown -h
See shutdown(lM) in HP- UX Reference.
8. Once the system is shut down, turn off the power.
9. Physically install the EISA boards.
10. Turn on the computer. The HP- UX kernel boots and eisa_config runs
automatically attempting to create a new configuration. Refer to "Using
eisa""config in Automatic Mode".
A

Note

If you are moving a network board, you need to boot the
computer again. Enter:

shutdown -r

A-20

EliSA Configuration

Adding a Non-HP EISA Board Using HP-UX Commands and Automatic Mode

For non-HP-supplied boards, the cfg files and drivers will be shipped on
separate media with the board.
1. Ensure you are logged onto the machine to which the EISA board is
physically residing, client or server. See Managing Clusters of HP 9000
Computers, for additional cluster information. You can log in either
physically on the cluster node in question or remotely by using the rlogin
command.

2. Ensure that you have superuser capabilities.
3. Load the board's cfg file into the / etc/ eisa directory. cfg files should
never be removed from this directory. See "cfg Files" for cf g file naming
conventions.
4. Ensure that the eisa and peripherals drivers are part of the kernel, see
"Adding HP Drivers to the Kernel Using HP- UX Commands".
5. Create the device files for the board and the peripherals with the mknod
command. Refer to mknod(lM) in HP- UX Reference and to Chapter 14,
"Setting Up Devices Using HP-UX Commands".
6. Warn all users to get off the system. Use cwall in a cluster environment
and wall in a standalone environment.

/etc/cwall or /etc/wall
Shutdown for hardware changes in one minute.
Please log off now.
-C
See cwall(l) and wall(l) in HP-UX Reference.
7. Halt the system with the shutdown command:

shutdown -h
See shutdown(lM) in HP- UX Reference.
8. Once the system is shut down, turn off the power.
9. Physically install the EISA boards.

EliSA Configuration

A-21

10. Turn on the computer. The HP- UX kernel boots and eisa_config runs
automatically attempting to create a new configuration. Refer to "Using
eisa"'config in Automatic Mode".

Note

If you are moving a network board, you need to boot the
computer again. Enter:
shutdown -r

A-22

EliSA Configuration

Moving an EISA Board Using Automatic Mode
Follow the steps in this section to move an EISA board from one slot to
another.
1. Ensure that you have superuser capabilities.

2. Remove the old device files for the board with the rm command.
3. Use the mknod command to create a new device file using the new slot
number. Refer to mknod(1M) in HP- UX Reference and to Chapter 14,
"Setting Up Devices Using HP -UX Commands".
For non-HP-supplied boards and peripherals, the board manufacturer
should provide the major number block or character type definition and any
driver-specific minor number information you need to create the device files.
4. Warn all users to get off the system. Use cwall in a cluster environment
and wall in a standalone environment.

/etc/cwall or /etc/wall
Shutdown for hardware changes in one minute.
Please log off now.

See cwall(1) and wall(1) in HP-UX Reference.
5. Halt the system with the shutdown command:

shutdown -h
See shutdown(1M) in HP- UX Reference.
6. Once the system is shut down, turn off the power.
7. Physically move the EISA boards.
8. Turn on the computer. The HP- UX kernel boots and eisa_config runs
automatically attempting to create a new configuration. Refer to "Using
eisa"·config in Automatic Mode".

EliSA Configuration

A-23

If you are moving a network board, you need to boot the
computer again. Enter:

Note

shutdown -r

Removing an EISA Board Using Automatic Mode
Use the steps in this section to remove an EISA board.
1. Ensure that you have superuser capabilities.

2. Warn all users to get off the system. Use cwall in a cluster environment
and wall in a standalone environment.

/etc/cwall or /etc/wall
Shutdown for hardware changes in one minute.
Please log off now.
~c

See cwall(l) and wall(l) in HP-UX Reference.

3. Halt the system with the shutdown command:

shutdown -h
See shutdown(lM) in HP- UX Reference.
4. Once the system is shut down, turn off the power.
5. Physically remove the EISA boards.
6. Turn on the computer. The HP- UX kernel boot and eisa_config runs
automatically attempting to create a new configuration. Refer to "Using
eisa""config in Automatic Mode".
If your system no longer has any EISA or ISA boards, the kernel can be
reconfigured to remove the eisa driver.

A-24

EliSA Configuration

Configuring EliSA Boards Using Interactive Mode
This section explains how to use the eisa_config program interactively.
Use eisa_config interactively only if you meet one or more of the following
conditions:
• You need to add, remove, or move an ISA board. ISA boards do not
have readable ID registers and thus are not automatically recognized by
eisa_config.
• eisa_config exited from automatic mode with an error message requiring
you to change the choice for a function. See "Changing Choices for Board
Functions Using Interactive Mode" .

• You want to change the choice that eisa_config automatically selected for a
function. See "Using eisa"'config in Interactive Mode".
• eisa_config exited from automatic mode with an error message requiring
you to add a board interactively. See "Using eisa "" config in Interactive
Mode" and "Adding an ElISA Board Using Interactive Mode" .

This section includes the following information:
A

• Using eisa_config in interactive mode.
• Adding an ElISA board interactively.
• Moving an ElISA board interactively.
• Removing an ElISA board interactively.
• Changing choices for board functions interactively.
• Example interactive eisa_config session.

EliSA Configuration

A-25

Using eisa_config in Interactive Mode
eisa_config must be run interactively when you need to change the ISA
board configuration in any way, or when you need to change the choice for a
board function.
eisa_config requires the eisa driver for NVM. This driver is a part of the
default HP- UX kernel configuration. If you have removed this driver, you must
add it again when you add other required drivers. Refer to "Adding Device
Drivers to the Kernel" .

Always run eisa_config interactively before physically changing the
configuration.
This section explains how to do the following tasks:
• Starting eisa_config interactively.
• Getting online help.
• Viewing board information.
• Displaying board configuration.
A

• Initializing the configuration.
• Saving the configuration and exiting.
Starting in Interactive Mode

You must be superuser to use eisa_config interactively.
To start the eisa_config program, type the following command:
/ etc/ eisa_config [ -c cfgfile ] [ -n scifile ]

Normally you will use the above command without options. However, two
options are available:
• The - c option allows you to check the specified cf g file for correctness. It
verifies that the file follows the correct grammar and that eisa_config
will be able to use it. This option is useful only for diagnosing errors in a
particular cfg file. You cannot change the configuration with this option.
• The -n option allows you to initialize the ElISA configuration from a
particular sci file instead of from NVM.
A-26

EliSA Configuration

sci files are useful if your site has several identically configured workstations.
You can run eisa_config on one workstation to build an optimal
configuration, use the save command to save it to a new sci file, and copy the
file to the other workstations (as / etc/ eisa/ system. sci).

When you boot the other workstations, eisa_config will run automatically
and initialize the configuration from / etc/ eisa/ system. sci (if the contents of
NVM do not already match the current configuration).
Otherwise, you can run eisa_config interactively on each workstation with
the -n option and specify the new sci file. After starting eisa_config with
the -n option, you must use the save command to write the configuration to
NVM, then reboot so that each workstation will have the new configuration.
When you start eisa_config, you will see a display similar to that in
Figure A -1. The display shows the boards currently configured in each slot,
followed by the EISA: prompt.

HP-UX ElISA CONFIGURATION UTILITY
Type q or quit to leave eisa_conIig.
Type? or help Ior help.

Slot

CFG File

Contents

!HWPC010
!XYZ1401

HP Series 400 EISA System Board
XYZ SCSI Controller
** EMPTY **
XYZ Centronics InterIace

1
2
3
4

!XYZ1702

EMPTY

EISA:

Figure A-1. eisa_config Display

EliSA Configuration A-27

Table A-I lists the basic eisa_config commands. The following sections
provide more detail on these commands and their options.
Table A·1. Basic Commands
Command

Description

add cfgfile sloinum

Adds the specified board to the specified
slot.

cfgfiles

Lists the cfg files currently in / et c/ eisa.

cfgtypes

Lists and explains the types of boards
that have cfg files in / etc/ eisa. For
example, NET is a network board.

change sloinum funciionnum choicenum

Changes the choice used for a given board
function.

comment

Displays any comments or help supplied
by a board manufacturer in the cfg file.

help or ?

Lists and explains eisa_config
commands.

ini t [filename]

Deletes all changes in this session of
eisa_config by initializing the
configuration.

move cursloinum newsloinum

Moves a board from one slot to another.

quit or q

Exits eisa_config.

remove sloinum

Removes a board from the specifed slot.

save [filename]

Saves the current configuration.

show

Displays working configuration. Shows a
list of all slots and whether they are
empty or occupied by a particular board.

A·28

EliSA Configuration

Getting Online Help Using Interactive Mode

Online help is available that lists and explains the eisa_config interactive
commands.
Table A-2 describes the available help commands.
Table A-2. Help Commands

Command Syntax

Description

help or ?

Displays help for all valid eisa_config
commands.

help command

Displays help for a particular
eisa_config command. For instance, to
see help for the add command, type help
add.

Viewing Board Information Using Interactive Mode

You can use comment commands to display any available help and comments
about the ElISA board itself. This help is provided by the board manufacturer
in the cfg file. If the manufacturer did not provide help or comments, you will
get a message saying "No help or comments were supplied."
Note that all of the comment command parameters (except the type of
comment requested) are optional. If you do not specify a particular cfg file or
slot number, you will see any comments available for that type for all of the
boards in the working configuration.
The following list gives examples:
• comment board displays any help and comments available for all of the
currently configured boards.
• comment board 1 displays any help and comments available for the board
currently configured in slot 1.
• comment board! XYZ1401 displays any help and comments available for the
board corresponding to the! XYZ1401. cfg file, even if the board is not part
of the current board configuration.

EliSA Configuration

A-29

Table A-3 describes the available conunent commands.
Table A-3. Comment Commands
Description

Connnand Syntax
comment board [ cfgfile

I sloinum

comment function [ cfgfile

Displays board level help and comments
that describe what the board can be used
for.

]

I sloinum

]

Displays function level help and
comments.

comment choice [ cfgfile

I sloinum

]

Displays choice level help and comments.

comment switch [ cfgfile

I sloinum

]

Displays help and comments for switches
and jumpers.

Displaying Board Configuration Using Interactive Mode

You can display information on your working ElISA configuration and on the
cfg files.

A-30

EliSA Configuration

Table A-4 describes the available display commands.
Table A-4. Display Commands
Command Syntax

Description

show

Shows a list of all the slots and whether
they are empty or occupied by a
particular board.

show slots cfgfile

Shows a list of the slots that can accept
the board corresponding to the cfg file.

show board [ cfgfile

I sloinum

]

Shows a list of basic attributes for the
selected boards, including all functions
and choices. If the board is part of the
working configuration, this command also
indicates the currently selected choice for
each function.
If you do not specify either a cfg file
name or a slot number, information is
displayed for all of the boards in the
system.

show switch [ changed] [ sloinum ]

Shows any switch and jumper settings
(both default and required) for the boards
in the configuration. If you use the
keyword changed, only those switches and
jumpers that have changed since
eisa_config was invoked are displayed.
If you specify a slot number, only switches
and jumpers on the board in that slot are
displayed. Note that you can use all
combinations of the changed and sloinum
parameters.
This command displays a graphical
representation of the switches and
jumpers on the board, and indicates the
default and required settings.

EliSA Configuration

A-31

Table A-5 explains the available cfg file commands.
Table A-5. cfg File Commands

Connnand Syntax

Description

cfgtypes

Lists the types of boards that have cfg
files in the / etc/ eisa directory. For each
board type, also lists the number of
associated cfg files in / etc/ eisa.

cfgfiles [ type]

Lists the cfg files currently in the
/ etc/ eisa directory. If you specify a
board type such as NET, only cfg files of
that type will be displayed.

Initializing the Configuration Using Interactive Mode

If you have made changes in the configuration that are incorrect, you can
delete all changes in this session of eisa_config and return to the original
configuration by using the ini t command.
A

Type the following command:
ini t [filename ]

If you specify an sci file name, the initial configuration is retrieved from that
file. Otherwise, it is retrieved from NVM.
Saving the Configuration and Exiting Using Interactive Mode

To exit eisa_config, type quit or q. If the configuration has changed since
the last time it was saved to NVM, you will be asked if you want to save the
configuration.
When the configuration is saved to NVM, the file /etc/eisa/config.log
is created. This file describes the new configuration and is overwritten each
time you save the configuration by exiting eisa_config or using the save
command. The log file contains information on the boards currently configured
in each slot, the attributes of each board, the currently selected choice for each

A-32

EliSA Configuration

function, and any required switch and jumper settings. You can print this file
for reference.
eisa_config also displays the switch and jumper settings that have changed
in this session before exiting. You must ensure that all switches and jumpers
match what eisa_config has specified before you reboot the system.

You can save the current configuration without exiting by using the
save [filename] command.
This command writes the new configuration to NV1v1 and to
/ etc/ eisa/ system. sci. If the current configuration is not conflict free,
eisa_config notifies you and does not save the configuration.
If you specify a file name, eisa_config does not write the configuration
to NVM. Instead, it creates a new sci file. This is useful if your site has
several identically configured workstations. You can run eisa_config on one
workstation to build an optimal configuration, use the save command to save
it to a new sci file, and then copy the file to each of the other workstations (as
/ etc/ eisa/ system. sci).
When you boot the other workstations, eisa_config will run automatically
and initialize the configuration from / etc/ eisa/ system. sci (if the contents of
NVM do not already match the current configuration).
Otherwise, you can run eisa_config on each workstation with the -n option
and specify the new sci file.

EliSA Configuration

A-33

Setting Switches and Jumpers Using Interactive Mode

When you exit eisa_config or use the show switch changed command, you
see a graphical representation of the switch and jumper settings that have
changed in this session of eisa_config. The file /etc/eisa/config.log also
shows all required switch and jumper settings for each board in your working
configuration.
After you have shut down your system and turned it off, you must set these
switches and jumpers to their required settings. Then reboot the system. The
following example shows a typical display for required switch settings.
Default
setting

indicates the manufacturer's default setting, if one exists.

Required

indicates the setting required for a conflict-free configuration.
1 means "on" and 0 means "off." The picture represents the
actual switches and jumpers on the board and their labels (if
any).

Slot 2
XYZ

Net~orking

S~itch

Name:

Board

I/O Base Address

A
1 through 3 select the I/O Base Address,
4 is not applicable.
NOTE: 'OII' in the diagram belo~ corresponds to 'OPEN' on board

S~itches
s~itch

s~itches.

DeIault setting
100
1
Required setting
100
1
+-x-+---+---+-x-+on
+---+-X-+-X-+---+OII
123
4

A-34

EliSA Configuration

Adding an EliSA Board Using Interactive Mode
To add an ElISA board to your system interactively, follow the steps in this
section.
1. Ensure that you have superuser capabilities.

2. Ensure that the board's cfg file is in the / etc/ eisa directory. If the cfg
file is provided on media with the card, load the board's cfg file into the
/ etc/ eisa directory. See "cfg Files" for cfg file naming conventions.
3. Use the mknod command to create the necessary device files for the board's
driver and the peripherals that will be connected to the board. The device
file supplies information about the major device type (the device driver
number) and device location. The slot number in which you plan to add
a board will be a component of the device file. The manufacturer should
provide the specific information you need to create the device files. Refer
to mknod(lM) in the HP-UX Reference manual.
4. Ensure that the eisa and peripherals drivers are part of the kernel, see
"Adding HP Drivers to the Kernel Using HP- UX Commands".
5. Type the following command:

/etc/eisa_config

The current board configuration will be displayed. Board slots are
numbered from top to bottom starting with "1". Slot "0" is reserved for
the system board.
6. At the EISA: prompt, type the following command:
add cfgfile slotnum

where:
cfgfile

is the name of the cf g file corresponding to the board you
want to add.

slotnum

is the number of the slot in which you want to add the
board.

To see the cfg file name corresponding to each board, use the cfgfiles
command. cfg file names have the following format:

EliSA Configuration

A-35

rXXXnnnn.cfg

where:
r

xxx
nnnn

is usually! (or a hex digit).
is a three-letter abbreviation for the board manufacturer's
name.
is four digits. The first three digits of nnnn represent the
product ID and the fourth is the revision level.

You need to type only the rXXXnnnn portion of the name.
7. After adding all desired boards within eisa_config, exit the enter q to
exit the program.
Before it exits, the program will display the switch and jumper
settings (if any) that have changed during this session of eisa_config.
Settings may have changed on existing boards as well. Refer to the file
/etc/eisa/config.log for a summary of the new configuration, including
the required settings.
A

8. Warn all users to get off the system. Use cwall in a cluster environment
and wall in a standalone environment.
/etc/cwall or /etc/wall
Shutdown for hardware changes in one minute.
Please log off now.
~C

See cwall(l) and wall(l) in HP-UX Reference.
9. Halt the system with the shutdown command:
shutdown -h

See shutdown(IM) in HP-UX Reference.
10. Once the system is shut down, turn off the power.
11. Set any physical switches and jumpers according to eisa_config
requirements. Refer to "Setting Switches and Jumpers Using Interactive
Mode".

A·36

EliSA Configuration

12. Physically add the board. If you are also installing a peripheral device with
this board, connect the device and turn it on.
13. Turn the power on and boot the system. When it boots, the contents of
NVM will match the ElISA boards that are present and you will be able to
use the boards.

EliSA Configuration

A-37

Moving an EliSA Board Using Interactive Mode
To move a currently configured ElISA board, follow the steps in this section.
1. Ensure that you have superuser capabilities.

2. Type the following command:
/etc/eisa_config

3. At the EISA: prompt, type the following command:
move curslotnum newslotnum

where:

curslotnum

is the number of the slot in which the board is currently
installed.

newslotnum

is the number of the slot to which the board is to be
moved.

4. After moving all desired boards within eisa_config, enter q to exit the
program.
A

Before it exits, the program will display the switch and jumper settings
(if any) that have changed during this session of eisa_config. Refer to
the /etc/eisa/config.log file for a summary of the new configuration,
including the required settings.
5. Remove the old device file for the board with the rm command.
6. As superuser, use the mknod command to create a new device file using the
new slot number for the board.
a. For HP-supplied boards, look up instructions on creating device files for
the board in the appropriate interface section of this manual.
b. For non-HP-supplied boards, the board manufacturer should provide the
specific information you need to create the device files.

A-3S

EliSA Configuration

7. Warn all users to get off the system. Use cwall in a cluster environment
and wall in a standalone environment.

/etc/cwall or /etc/wall
Shutdown for hardware changes in one minute.
Please log off now.
~C

See cwall(l) and wall(l) in HP-UX Reference.
8. Halt the system with the shutdown command:

shutdown -h
See shutdown(lM) in HP- UX Reference.
9. Once the system is shut down, turn off the power.
10. Set any physical switches and jumpers according to eisa_config
requirements. Refer to "Setting Switches and Jumpers Using Interactive
Mode".
11. Physically move the boards.
12. Turn the power on and boot the system. When it boots, the contents of
NVM will match the ElISA boards that are present and you will be able to
use the boards.

EliSA Configuration

A-39

Removing an EliSA Board Using Interactive Mode
To remove a currently configured ElISA board, follow the steps in this section.
1. Ensure that you have superuser capabilities.

2. Type the following command:
/etc/eisa_config

3. At the EISA: prompt, type the following command:
remove slotnum

where:
slotnum

is the number of the slot from which you want to remove a
board.

4. After removing all boards desired within eisa_config, enter q to exit the
program.
5. Warn all users to get off the system. Use cwall in a cluster environment
and wall in a standalone environment.
A

/etc/cwall or /etc/wall
Shutdown for hardware changes in one minute.
Please log off now .

..c

See cwall(l) and wall(l) in HP-UX Reference.
6. Halt the system with the shutdown command:
shutdown -h

See shutdown(lM) in HP- UX Reference.
7. Once the system is shut down, turn off the power.
8. Physically remove the boards.
9. Turn the power on and boot the system. When it boots, the contents of
NVM will match the ElISA boards that are present and you will be able to
use the boards.

A-40

EliSA Configuration

Changing Choices for Board Functions Using Interactive Mode
You can use the change command to specify which choice is used for
a particular function on a board (for instance, if eisa_config cannot
automatically generate a new configuration with the currently selected choices).
Note that a board must already be part of the configuration before you can use
the change command on it. When you use the change command to specify a
choice for a particular function, eisa_config will always use that choice. It
will not select a different choice, even to resolve a conflict.
To change which choice is used for a given function, follow these steps.
1. Ensure that you have superuser capabilities.

2. Type the following command:
letc/eisa_config

3. At the EISA: prompt, type the following command:
change slotnum functionnum choicenum

You must specify the slot number, the function number, and the new choice
number for that function. To see function and choice numbers, use the
show board slotnum command. Function numbers have the format Fnum
and choice numbers have the format CHnum.
4. After making all desired changes within eisa_config, enter q to exit the
program.
Before it exits, the program will display the switch and jumper settings
(if any) that have changed during this session of eisa_config. Refer to
the I etcl eisal config .log file for a summary of the new configuration,
including the required settings.
5. Warn all users to get off the system. Use cwall in a cluster environment
and wall in a standalone environment.
letc/cwall or letc/wall
Shutdown for hardware changes in one minute.
Please log off now.

-C
See cwall(l) and wall(l) in HP-UX Reference.
EliSA Configuration

A-41

6. Halt the system with the shutdown command:
shutdown -h

See shutdown(lM) in HP- UX Reference.
7. Once the system is shut down, turn off the power.
8. Set any physical switches and jumpers according to eisa_config
requirements. Refer to "Setting Switches and Jumpers Using Interactive
Mode".
9. Turn the power on and boot the system. When it boots, the contents of
NVM will match the ElISA boards that are present and you will be able to
use the boards.

A-42

EliSA Configuration

Sample Interactive Session
The following example shows a sample eisa_config interactive session.
Starting eisa_config

The user invokes eisa_config. eisa_config begins by displaying the current
board configuration.

letc/eisa_conrig
HP-UX ElISA CONFIGURATION UTILITY
Type q or quit to leave eisa_conrig.
Type? or help ror help on eisa_conrig commands.

Slot

CFG File

Contents

0
1
2

!HWPC010
!XYZ1401

!XYZ1702

HP Series 400 EISA System Board
XYZ SCSI Controller
** EMPTY **
XYZ Centronics Interrace
** EMPTY **

EliSA Configuration

A-43

Displaying efg Files

The user types the cfgfiles command, which displays the cfg files currently
in the /etc/eisa directory. Note that the cfgtypes command lists and
explains each board type. For instance, NET is a network board.

EISA: cfg:files
Filename

Board Type

!HVPC010
!XYZ1401
!XYZ1702
!XYZ1802
!XYZ2276

SYS
MSn
PAR
NET
Vln

Board Name
HP Series 400 EISA System Board
XYZ SCSI Controller
XYZ Centronics Interface
XYZ Net~orking Board
XYZ Video Board

Adding a Board

The user types a show slot command to see in which slots the! XYZ1802 board
can be installed. The user then types the add command to add the board to
slot 2. eisa_config displays the new configuration.

EISA:

sho~

slot !XYZ1802

Valid slots for this board: 2

EISA: add !XYZ1802 2
Added board:
Comments:

A-44

XYZ Net~orking Board
The XYZ Net~orking board is an IEEE 802.3 local area
board for use ~ith t~isted-pair cabling.

Slot

CFG File

Contents

0
1
2
3
4

!HVPC010
!XYZ1401
!XYZ1802
!XYZ1702

HP Series 400 EISA System Board
XYZ SCSI Controller
XYZ Net~orking Board
XYZ Centronics Interface
** EMPTY **

EliSA Configuration

net~orking

Displaying Board Information

The user types a show command to ask for information on the board in slot 2.
eisa_config displays the board's basic attributes and indicates the currently
selected choice for each function.

EISA: show board 2
XYZ Networking Board
CFG file: !XYZ1802.cfg
Slot 2
The XYZ Networking board is an IEEE 802.3 local area networking board for
use with twisted-pair cabling.
Manufacturer .................
ID ...........................
Board type ...................
Board slot type ..............
Readable ID ..................
Skirt ........................
Length .......................

XYZ Computer Corp.
XYZ1802
NET (Network Board)
IS! 8 Bit
No
No
330 millimeters

Function names and possible choices:
StarLAN 10 PC LAB Adapter
Fl: I/O Base Address
CHi: 300h [** current **]
CH2: 340h
CH3: 240h
F2: Loopback Mode
CH1: Normal operation [** current **]
CH2: Test mode
F3: Interrupt Channel (IRQ)
CH1: 3
CH2: 4
CH3: 5 [** current **]
CH4: 7

EliSA Configuration

A·45

Exiting eisa_config

The user exits eisa_config. The configuration has changed, so eisa_config
prompts the user to save the changes and exit, exit without saving changes, or
abort the exit. The user types s to save the changes. eisa_config displays a
reminder about necessary steps after exiting.

EISA: quit
A description or the conriguration was saved in /etc/eisa/conrig.log.
Ir eisa_conrig was run per the instructions or a speciric product
installation manual, rerer to that manual ror specirics on device rile
creation and I/O drivers.
Step 4 may apply ir other cards were arrected.
Otherwise, the rollowing is a list or generally required steps:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)

(5)
(6)

Make any necessary device riles. Ir you have moved a board you
may also need to make new device riles.
Ensure that all appropriate sortware I/O drivers are present
in the kernel.
Shut down the system with the "/etc/shutdown -h" command.
Once the system is shut down, turn the power orr. Then set any
physical switches and jumpers correctly. The switches and jumpers
that have changed since eisa_conrig was invoked are listed below.
The rile /etc/eisa/conrig.log contains a summary or the new
conriguration, including required switch and jumper settings.
Physically add, move, or remove boards as needed.
Turn the power on and boot the system.

Rerer to the "E/ISA Conriguration Documentation" ror speciric instructions.

A-46

EliSA Configuration

Displaying Switch and Jumper Settings

After the user presses the q key to quit, eisa_config displays the
jumper settings that have changed since the program was invoked.
/ etc/ eisa/ conf ig .log also contains this information, along with
of the new configuration. After exiting, the user is returned to the
prompt.

switch and
The file
a summary
HP- UX

Slot 2
XYZ Networking Board
Switch Name: I/O Base Address
Switches 1 through 3 select the I/O Base Address,
switch 4 is not applicable.
NOTE: 'off' in the diagram below corresponds to 'OPEN' on board
switches.
Default setting
100

Required setting
100

+-x-+---+---+-x-+on

+---+-x-+-x-+---+off
123
4

Slot 2
XYZ Networking Board
Switch Name: Loopback Mode
Default

Required

on
off
+---+
x
+---+
x
+---+
x
+---+
x
+---+

3
2
1

Exiting eisa_config.
$

EliSA Configuration

A-47

Troubleshooting E/ISA Board Configuration
This section explains how to diagnose and fix common ElISA board
configuration errors.
As a general rule, look at the system messages using the dmesg command. The
ElISA powerup-specific messages are displayed after the line "EISA Expander
Ini tialized". The ElISA initialization messages are displayed after the line
"EISA Initialization". These messages, causes, and recommended actions
are described in "ElISA Board Power Up Messages".

Added Board Does Not Work
If you added a board and the board does not work, check the following in
order:
1. If you added the board interactively, did you save the new configuration

before exiting eisa_config? If not, you must run eisa_config again,
add the board again, and then save the configuration. See "Saving the
Configuration and Exiting Using Interactive Mode" .
A

2. Did you add the required drivers to the HP-UX kernel? If not, do one of the
following:
a. For HP-supplied boards, see "Adding HP Drivers to the Kernel Using
SAM" or "Adding HP Drivers to the Kernel Using HP- UX Commands".
b. For non-HP-supplied boards, see "Adding Non-HP Drivers to the Kernel
Using HP- UX Commands".
3. Did you create the necessary device files correctly? If not, do one of the
following:
a. For HP-supplied boards, refer to the appropriate section of this manual.
b. For non-HP-supplied boards, refer to the documentation shipped with
your board as well as the appropriate section of this manual.
4. Did you reboot the system after changing the configuration interactively? If
not, reboot the system.

A·48

EliSA Configuration

5. Warn all users to get off the system. Use ewall in a cluster environment
and wall in a standalone environment.

/ete/ewall or fete/wall
Reboot for configuration changes in one minute.
Please log off now.
~c

See cwall(l) and wall(l) in HP- UX Reference.
6. Shut down the system and automatically reboot with the shutdown
command:

shutdown -r
See shutdown(lM) in HP- UX Reference.
7. If you added the board using automatic mode, check
/ ete/ eisa/ eonfig. err for error messages.
8. Ensure that switch and jumper settings match the settings specified in
/ete/eisa/eonfig.log.
A

EliSA Configuration

A·49

Moved Board Does Not Work
If you moved a board and the board does not work, check the following in
order:
1. Did you save the new configuration before exiting interactive eisa_config?

If not, you must run eisa_config again and then save the configuration.
See "Saving the Configuration and Exiting Using Interactive Mode".

2. Did you create the necessary device files correctly? If not, refer to "Moving
an EISA Board Using Automatic Mode" and "Moving an ElISA Board
Using Interactive Mode" .
3. Did you reboot the system after changing the configuration interactively? If
not, reboot the system.
4. Warn all users to get off the system. Use cwall in a cluster environment
and wall in a standalone environment.
/etc/cwall or /etc/wall
Reboot for configuration changes in one minute.
Please log off noliii'.
A

See cwall(l) and wall(l) in HP-UX Reference.
5. Shut down the system and automatically reboot with the shutdown
command:
shutdown -r
See shutdown(lM) in HP- UX Reference.
6. If you moved the board using automatic mode, check
/ etc/ eisa/ config. err for error messages.
7. Ensure that switch and jumper settings match the settings specified in
/etc/eisa/config.log.

A-50

EliSA Configuration

Board Stops Working
If a board that was working suddenly stops working, the kernel may have been
recently modified either manually or with SAM. If so, you will need to relink
the ElISA board drivers to the kernel.

• For HP-supplied boards, see "Adding HP Drivers to the Kernel Using SAM"
or "Adding HP Drivers to the Kernel Using HP- UX Commands".
• For non-HP-supplied boards, see "Adding Non-HP Drivers to the Kernel
Using HP- UX Commands".

Board Configuration Conflicts
ElISA boards use four types of resources: interrupt lines, DMA channels,
register addresses, and memory. If the automatic mode of eisa_config
cannot configure a board due to resource conflicts, you may still be able to
use eisa_config interactively to add a board that had a conflict or to change
choices for a new board. Refer to "Using eisa W config in Interactive Mode" .
If your desired board configuration still causes conflicts, you may not be able to
use certain boards together. Some configurations are simply not possible; for
instance, two boards from different manufacturers may both require the same
resource. If this happens, only one of the boards can be used.

No NVM Driver
If you attempt to use eisa_config and get a message saying that the NVM
driver cannot be used, ensure that the eisa driver has not been removed from
the kernel. If it has been removed, do one of the following:

EliSA Configuration A-51

Two cfg Files Have the Same Name
If you want to load a cfg file into the / etc/ eisa directory that has the same
name as a file in that directory, follow these steps:
1. Load the new cfg file from media into a temporary directory.

2. Rename the cfg file. cfg file names have the following format:
rXXXnnnn.cfg

where:

xxx
nnnn

is usually ! (or a hex digit).
is a three-letter abbreviation for the board manufacturer's
name.
is four digits. The first three digits of nnnn represent the
product ID and the fourth is the revision level.

The first character in the cfg file's old name was probably!. The first
character in the new name can be any hex digit (1 to F). The rest of the
name should remain the same.
A

In the temporary directory, type the following command:
mv oldname newname

3. Move the renamed cfg file to the /etc/eisa directory. Type the following
command:
mv -i newname /etc/eisa

Boards that have duplicate cfg file names must be added using eisa_config
interactively.

A-52

EliSA Configuration

E/ISA Board Power Up Messages
This section contains a listing of ElISA board power up messages, their
potential cause, and action you can take to correct the problem. There
are several messages displayed that are information only. They indicate a
successful operation completed.
Message:

No EEPROM Data -) EISA Card ID: eisa_id

Cause:

For this particular slot, an EISA card IDed itself, but there is
no configuration data in NVM.

Action:

Run eisa_config to update NVM.

Message:

Cannot read EISA card ID

Cause:

Have NVM information saying card exists, but cannot read its
ID.

Action:

If a card is present, then there is a hardware problem. Replace
the card. If a card is not present, ignore the message.

Message:

Board ID: eisa_id inconsistent 'With NVM ID: eisa_id

Cause:

The ID read from the card does match the card ID information
stored in NVM.

Action:

If board has been moved, run eisa_config in automatic mode.
If board has been removed, ignore the message. If this message
persists after running eisa_config and updating NVM,
replace the board.

Message:

Bad eeprom data for board eisa_id

Cause:

An attempt to read the NVM configuration information failed.
This represents a system problem.

Action:

Call your HP representative.

Message:

Error initializing board eisa_id

Cause:

An attempt to initialize the card with the stored NVM
initialization data failed.

Action:

Check cfg file for inaccuracies. Suspect a hardware problem.

EliSA Configuration

A-53

Message:

EISA Board ID: eisa_id ignored
Board not present or driver not configured into kernel.

Cause:

One of the following two situations have occured:
1. An ISA card is present, but not its driver
2. The driver is present, but the card is not.

Since ISA cards do not ID, only the cards driver can verify its
existence. The ID displayed was obtained from NVM, not the
card.

Action:

Ensure the card in installed and verify that the driver is
configured into the kernel.

Message:

EISA Board ID: eisa_ id ignored, driver not conf igured
into kernel

Cause:

A driver could not be found which would accept this card, but
since it is an EISA card, the system found it.

Action:

Ensure that the driver is configured into the kernel.

Message:

EISA Board ID: eisa_id ignored, error initializing board

Cause:

A driver accepted this card, but then indicated a failure to
initialize it correctly.

Action:

This is probably a defective card.

Message:

EISA: eisa_last_attach not called, bad driver in
kernel.

Cause:

If a driver does return correctly from its attach routine, this
will panic the kernel. Assuming that the drivers installed are
working, this message should never appear.

Action:

If you are using a non-HP card and driver, remove both
the card and driver and try again. If error does not recur,
the non-HP driver is bad. If the error recurs, call your HP
representative.

A-54

EliSA Configuration

Message:

EISA WARNING: mapping in system board failed

Cause:

Indicates system problem in creating virtual to physical
mappings of the EISA system board registers. If this message
appears, EISA cards will not be recognized although the
system will boot up (assuming you are not booting from EISA
SCSI, in which case system will not come up).

Action:

Call your HP representative.

Message:

EISA WARNING: mapping in I/O map entries failed

Cause:

A system board resource could not be initialized. If this
message appears, EISA cards will not be recognized although
the system will boot up (assuming you are not booting from
EISA SCSI, in which case system will not come up).

Action:

Call your HP representative.

Message:

sloLnum Slot EISA Expander Initialized: eisa_id

Cause:

This is the message which indicates that the system board
(that is, the bus adapter that sits between the EISA bus and
the host system bus) was initialized properly. It also indicates
how many slots the kernel is configured to recognize.

Action:

None.

Message:

EISA SLOT sloLnum

Cause:

This is a header indicating which slot is currently attempting
to be initialized. If successfully iniatalized, the individual
drivers generally print out their own initialization message. For
example:
EISA SLOT 1: driver_specific_message

Action:

None.

EliSA Configuration

A-55

Message:

Successfully Initialized EISA Boot Device

Cause:

This message indicates that the system recognized a special
case.

If the system boots from EISA SCSI before EISA SCSI
configuration information is stored in NVM, then the PDC
uses "default" configuration data that can conflict with other
EISA cards in the system. To handle this, the system ignores
all cards except the boot EISA SCSI during the first power up
and continues a limited boot.
If eisa_config (run in /etc/bcheckrc) can create a safe
configuration, the new configuration is recorded in NVM and
the system. sci file, and the system is automatically rebooted.
If a safe configuration cannot be created, eisa_config issues
an appropriate message, the system comes up with the other
cards unusable, and you can run eisa_config interactively to
fix the configuration and to reboot manually.
Action:
A

Message:

None.
-- Skipping

Cause:

Indicates that either the slot is empty both physically and
indicated so by NVM (or has an ISA card, but no EEPROM
data), or was skipped because of one of the reasons above and
is preceded by one of the above messages.

Action:

None.

Message:

EISA card id eisa_id in slot sloLnum had fatal error

Cause:

This message indicates that an EISA card asserted the IOCHK
line indicating a fatal error. An expansion card might do this
if there was a parity error on a memory card. (Not all cards
assert IOCHK.)

Action:

Replace the card.

A-56

EliSA Configuration

Messages:

EISA_WARNING: unable to allocate eeprom_geninfo
EISA_WARNING: unable to allocate eeprom_slot_info for slot 0
EISA_WARNING: unable to allocate eeprom_slot_info
EISA WARNING: unable to allocate: func_data
EISA_WARNING: unable to allocate eeprom_cfg_header
EISA WARNING: unable to allocate eeprom
WARNING: unable to map eeprom registers
EISA WARNING: unable to map eeprom

Cause:

All of these indicate a system problem when attempting to
allocate resources necessary for EISA initialization. EISA will
not be initialized, but the system should come up (with the
exception of a boot from an EISA device).

Action:

Call your HP representative.

Message:

WARNING: invalid hardware, eeprom missing

Cause:

The NVM is not responding to an attempt to read it.

Action:

Call your HP representative.

Messages:

Checks error in EISA section of eeprom:
Clearing the EISA section and continuing.

Cause:

A checksum was performed on NVM at power up and it failed.
The only safe course of action is to erase its contents. As
EISA comes up, it will complain that NVM data is missing
for cards which ID themselves. When eisa_config runs from
/etc/bcheckrc, it will automatically generate data for and
reconfigure the EISA cards that are present. ISA cards will
need to be reconfigured using eisa_config in interactive
mode.

Action:

Follow instructions for adding ISA cards.

EliSA Configuration

A-57

B
Series 400 Support Matrix
Introduction
This document summarizes the compatibility of the optional products available
for the Series 400. For detailed support information, consult the HP Apollo
9000 Series 400 Workstation Configuration Guide.
To be supported, a device must be qualified on the computer model being
considered and have software support on the operating system being
considered. This means the device must appear in the appropriate column
under "Hardware Support" and "Earliest Operating System Version". For
software support, the tables show the earliest system version available for the
Series 400. All later versions of the operating system also support the device,
until that device exits its own support life.
The status of configurations "planned" and "under investigation" may change
within 30 days. Contact your HP Sales Representative for current peripheral
support information.
B

Series 400 Support Matrix B-1

Series 400 System Processors
The following table lists several characteristics generic to all variants of each
Series 400 processor Model. The mimimum operating system supported on
each processor type. All later revisions are supported unless a range (e.g. 4.0
=> 6.5) is shown. Not all external card slots listed are standard on all Models.
Some slot capabilities may be optional at extra cost. On SPU s with EISA
slots, those slots are individually useable with ISA cards.

B·2

System Processors

Overall Processor Attributes
SPU Operating Earliest
Model System
Standalone

400dl DOMAIN
400dl HP-UX
4008
4008

DOMAIN

400t
400t
425e
425e

DOMAIN
HP-UX

HP-UX

DOMAIN
HP-UX

4258
4258

DOMAIN

425t
425t

DOMAIN
HP-UX

4338
4338

DOMAIN

HP-UX

Slot Types

Earliest Diskless
Server
n.a.
n.a.

Client

DIO-II

EISA

ISA

VME

10.2+
7.03
10.2+
7.0

None l

None
None

4 Opt.
4 Opt.

None
None

1
1
None
None
4 Opt.
4 Opt.

None
None

10.2+
7.03
10.2+
7.0

10.2+
7.0

10.2+
7.0
10.3+
7.05

10.2+
7.0
10.3+
n.a.

10.3+
7.05

10.2+
7.0
10.3+
7.05
10.3+
7.05

10.3+
7.05
10.3+
7.05

None l

2 Std. 2
2
Std.,2
3 Opt.
None l
None l
None
None
2 Std. 2
2
Std.,2
3 Opt.
None l
None l
2 Std. 2
2
Std.,2
3 Opt.

None
None

4 Opt.
4 Opt.

None
None

4 Opt.
4 Opt.

1
1
4 Opt.
4 Opt.

None
None
None
8 Opt.

1 The sole DIO-II slot is always consumed by the bit-mapped video interface board.
2 One slot consumed in most Models having bit-mapped video boards. Both slots available in Server
configurations. Only DIO-II and DIO-System cards supported in top two slots. A140lA DIO-II
~DIO-I/O downconverter not officially supported due to RFI considerations.

Unlisted Options are either transparent to software (e.g. localization) or are
supported by all software (e.g. RAM).

System Processors 8·3

System Processor Support
Formal
Product
Number

Abbreviated
Product
Description

Type

Min.
Boot
ROM

Earliest Operating
System Supported
DOMAIN

HP-UX

A1421Ao

Model 400s, base SPU

68030

1.0

10.2+

7.03

2.0c

A1421B

Model 425s, base SPU

68040

2.0

10.3+

7.05

T.B.A.

Model 433s, base SPU

68040

T.B.A.

A1630Ao

Model 400t, base SPU

68030

1.0

10.2+

7.03

2.0c

A1630Bo

Model 400dl, Mono VRX

68030

1.0

10.2+

7.03

2.0c

A1630E

Model 425t, base SPU

68040

2.0

10.3+

7.05

T.B.A.

A2000A

Model 400t Mono VRX

HP-UX

1.0

Unsup.

7.03

2.0c

A2001A

Model 400t Color VRX

HP-UX

1.0

Unsup.

7.0

2.0c

A2002A

Model 400t Personal VRX P2

HP-UX

1.0

Unsup.

7.03

2.0c)(

A2010A

Model 400t Mono VRX

Domain

1.0

10.2+

Unsup.

A2011A

Model 400t Color VRX

Domain

1.0

10.2+

Unsup.

A2012A

Model 400t Personal VRX P2

Domain

1.0

10.2+

Unsup.

A2020A

Model 400s, Mono VRX

HP-UX

1.0

Unsup.

7.03

2.0c

A2021A

Model 400s, Color VRX

HP-UX

1.0

Unsup.

7.0

2.0c

A2022A

Model 400s, Personal VRX P3

HP-UX

1.0

Unsup.

7.03

2.0c)(

A2023A

Model 400s, Turbo VRX T2

HP-UX

1.0

Unsup.

7.03

2.0c)(

A2024A

Model 400s, Server

HP-UX

1.0

Unsup.

7.03

2.0c

A2030A

Model 400s, Mono VRX

Domain

1.0

10.2+

Unsup.

A2031A

Model 400s, Color VRX

Domain

1.0

10.2+

Unsup.

A2032A

Model 400S, Personal VRX P3

Domain

1.0

10.2+

Unsup.

A2033A

Model 400s, Server

Domain

1.0

10.2+

Unsup.

A2040A

Model 425t upgrade from 400t

3.01

Unsup.

7.05

T.B.A.

68040

So!tPC

A2041A

Model 425t upgrade from 400t

68040

3.01

10.3+

Unsup.

A2042A

Model 433s upgrade from 400s

68040

3.01

Unsup.

7.05

T.B.A.

A2043A

Model 433s upgrade from 400s

68040

3.01

10.3+

Unsup.

A2044A

Model 425s upgrade from 400s

68040

3.01

Unsup.

7.05

T.B.A.

A2045A

Model 425s upgrade from 400s

68040

3.01

10.3+

Unsup.

T.B.A.

A2046A

Model 433s upgrade from 425s

68040

3.01

Unsup.

7.05

T.B.A.

A2047A

Model 433s upgrade from 425s

68040

3.01

10.3+

Unsup.

A2078A

Model 425t CRX upgrade from 400t
VRX

either

3.01

10.3+

8.0

T.B.A.

8-4

System Processors

System Processor Support (continued)
Formal
Product
Number

Abbreviated
Product
Description

Type

Min.
Boot
ROM

Earliest Operating
System Supported
DOMAIN

HP-UX

SoftPC

A2079A

Model 425t CRX upgrade from 425t
VRX

either

3.01

10.3+

8.0

T.B.A.

A2080A

Model 425t CRX upgrade from 4008
VRX

either

3.01

10.3+

8.0

T.B.A.

A2081A

Model 425t CRX upgrade from 4258
VRX

either

3.01

10.3+

8.0

T.B.A.

A2100A

Model 425t Mono VRX, diskless

HP-UX

2.0

Unsup.

7.05

T.B.A.

A2101A

Model 425t Mono VRX, 200 Mb

HP-UX

2.0

Unsup.

7.05

T.B.A.

A2102A

Model 425t Color VRX, 16-in., diskless

HP-UX

2.0

Unsup.

7.05

T.B.A.

A2103A

Model 425t Color VRX, 19-in., diskless

HP-UX

2.0

Unsup.

7.05

T.B.A.

A2104A

Model 425t Color VRX, 16-in., 200 Mb

HP-UX

2.0

Unsup.

7.05

T.B.A.

A2105A °

Model 425t Color VRX, 19-in., 200 Mb

HP-UX

2.0

Unsup.

7.05

T.B.A.

A2106A °

Model 425t Personal VRX P3

HP-UX

2.0

Unsup.

7.05

T.B.A.

A2108A

Model 425t Mono VRX, diskless

Domain

2.0

10.3+

Unsup.

A2109A °

Model 425t Mono VRX, 200 Mb

Domain

2.0

10.3+

Unsup.

A2110A

Model 425t Color VRX, 16-in., diskless

Domain

2.0

10.3+

Unsup.

A2111A

Model 425t Color VRX, 19-in., diskless

Domain

2.0

10.3+

Unsup.

A2112A °

Model 425t Color VRX, 16-in., 200 Mb

Domain

2.0

10.3+

Unsup.

A2113A o

Model 425t Color VRX, 19-in., 200 Mb

Domain

2.0

10.3+

Unsup.

A2114A o

Model 425t Personal VRX P3

Domain

2.0

10.3+

Unsup.

A2116A

Model 4258 Mono VRX

HP-UX

2.0

Unsup.

7.05

T.B.A.

A2117A

Model 4258 Color VRX, 19-in.

HP-UX

2.0

Unsup.

7.05

T.B.A.

A2118A

Model 4258 Color VRX, 19-in., DIO-II

HP-UX

2.0

Unsup.

7.05

T.B.A.

A2119A

Model 4258 Personal VRX P3

HP-UX

2.0

Unsup.

7.05

T.B.A.

A2120A

Model 4258 Turbo VRX T2

HP-UX

2.0

Unsup.

7.05

T.B.A.

A2121A

Model 4258 Server

HP-UX

2.0

Unsup.

7.05

T.B.A.

A2123A

Model 4258 Mono VRX

Domain

2.0

10.3+

Unsup.

A2124A

Model 4258 Color VRX, 19-in.

Domain

2.0

10.3+

Unsup.

A2125A

Model 4258 Personal VRX P3

Domain

2.0

10.3+

Unsup.

A2126A

Model 4258 Server

Domain

2.0

10.3+

Unsup.

A2130A

Model 425e greyscale EVRX, diskless

HP-UX

3.01

Unsup.

8.0

T.B.A.

System Processors

B-5

System Processor Support (continued)
Formal
Product
Number

Abbreviated
Product
Description

Type

Min.
Boot
ROM

Earliest Operating
System Supported
DOMAIN

HP-UX

SoftPC

A2131A

Model 425e greyscale EVRX, 210 Mb

HP-UX

3.01

Unsup.

8.0

T.B.A.

A2132A

Model 425e greyscale EVRX, 420 Mb

HP-UX

3.01

Unsup.

8.0

T.B.A.

A2134A

Model 425e 1024 Color EVRX, diskless

HP-UX

3.01

Unsup.

8.0

T.B.A.

A2135A

Model 425e 1024 Color EVRX, 210 Mb

HP-UX

3.01

Unsup.

8.0

T.B.A.

A2136A

Model 425e 1024 Color EVRX, 420 Mb

HP-UX

3.01

Unsup.

8.0

T.B.A.

A2139A

Model 425e 1280 Color EVRX, diskless

HP-UX

3.01

Unsup.

8.0

T.B.A.

A2140A

Model 425e 1280 Color EVRX, 210 Mb

HP-UX

3.01

Unsup.

8.0

T.B.A.

A2141A

Model 425e 1280 Color EVRX, 420 Mb

HP-UX

3.01

Unsup.

8.0

T.B.A.

A2145A

Model 425e Grayscale EVRX, diskless

DOMAIN

3.01

10.3+

Unsup.

T.B.A.

A2146A

Model 425e Grayscale EVRX, 210 Mb

DOMAIN

3.01

10.3+

Unsup.

T.B.A.

A2147A

Model 425e Grayscale EVRX, 420 Mb

DOMAIN

3.01

10.3+

Unsup.

T.B.A.

A2149A

Model 425e 1024 Color EVRX, diskless

DOMAIN

3.01

10.3+

Unsup.

T.B.A.

A2150A

Model 425e 1024 Color EVRX, 210 Mb

DOMAIN

3.01

10.3+

Unsup.

T.B.A.

A2151A

Model 425e 1024 Color EVRX, 420 Mb

DOMAIN

3.01

10.3+

Unsup.

T.B.A.

A2154A

Model 425 e 1280 Color EVRX, diskless

DOMAIN

3.01

10.3+

Unsup.

T.B.A.

A2155A

Model 425e 1280 Color EVRX, 210 Mb

DOMAIN

3.01

10.3+

Unsup.

T.B.A.

A2156A

Model 425e 1280 Color EVRX, 420 Mb

DOMAIN

3.01

10.3+

Unsup.

T.B.A.

A2160A o

Model 425t GRX, 210 Mb

HP-UX

3.01

Unsup.

8.0

T.B.A.

A2161A

Model 425t CRX, 210 Mb

HP-UX

3.01

Unsup.

8.0

T.B.A.

A2162A

Model 425t GRX, diskless

HP-UX

3.01

Unsup.

8.0

T.B.A.

A2163A

Model 425t GRX, 420 Mb

HP-UX

3.01

Unsup.

8.0

T.B.A.

A2164A

Model 425t VRX, 420 Mb

HP-UX

3.01

Unsup.

8.0

T.B.A.

A2165A

Model 425t CRX, diskless

HP-UX

3.01

Unsup.

8.0

T.B.A.

A2166A

Model 425t CRX, 420 Mb

HP-UX

3.01

Unsup.

8.0

T.B.A.

A2167 A

Model 425t pVRX P3, 420 Mb

HP-UX

3.01

Unsup.

8.0

T.B.A.

8-6

System Processors

System Processor Support (continued)
Formal
Product
Number

Abbreviated
Product
Description

Type

Min.
Boot
ROM

Earliest Operating
System Supported
DOMAIN

HP-UX

SoftPC

A2170A 0

Model 425

GRX, 210 Mb

DOMAIN

3.01

10.3+

Unsup.

T.B.A.

A2171A 0

Model 425

CRX, 210 Mb

DOMAIN

3.01

10.3+

Unsup.

T.B.A.

A2172A

Model 425

GRX, diskless

DOMAIN

3.01

10.3+

Unsup.

T.B.A.

A2173A

Model 425

GRX, 420 Mb

DOMAIN

3.01

10.3+

Unsup.

T.B.A.

A2174A

Model 425

VRX, 420 Mb

DOMAIN

3.01

10.3+

Unsup.

T.B.A.

A2175A

Model 425

CRX, diskless

DOMAIN

3.01

10.3+

Unsup.

T.B.A.

A2176A

Model 425

CRX, 420 Mb

DOMAIN

3.01

10.3+

Unsup.

T.B.A.

A2177A

Model 425

pVRX P3, 420 Mb

DOMAIN

3.01

10.3+

Unsup.

T.B.A.

A2180A

Model 4258 GRX, 660 Mb

HP-UX

3.01

Unsup.

8.0

T.B.A.

A2181A

Model 4258 GRX, 660 Mb, DIO-II

HP-UX

3.01

Unsup.

8.0

T.B.A.

A2183A

Model 4258 CRX, 660 Mb

HP-UX

3.01

Unsup.

8.0

T.B.A.

A2184A

Model 4258 CRX, 660 Mb, DIO-II

HP-UX

3.01

Unsup.

8.0

T.B.A.

A2185A

Model 4258 CRX, 660 Mb, EISA

HP-UX

3.01

Unsup.

8.0

T.B.A.

A2187A

Model 4258 pVRX P3, 1.3 Gb, DIO-II

HP-UX

3.01

Unsup.

8.0

T.B.A.

A2189A

Model 4258 Server, 1.3 Gb, CD, DIO-II

HP-UX

3.01

Unsup.

8.0

T.B.A.

A2190A

Model 4258 GRX, 660 Mb

DOMAIN

3.01

10.3+

Unsup.

T.B.A.

A2193A

Model 4258 CRX, 660 Mb

DOMAIN

3.01

10.3+

Unsup.

T.B.A.

A2194A

Model 4258 CRX, 660 Mb, EISA

DOMAIN

3.01

10.3+

Unsup.

T.B.A.

A2196A

Model 4258 pVRX P3, 1.3 Gb, EISA

DOMAIN

3.01

10.3+

Unsup.

T.B.A.

A2199A

Model 4258 Server, 1.3 Gb, EISA

DOMAIN

3.01

10.3+

Unsup.

T.B.A.

Model 4338 Mono VRX

HP-UX

T.B.A.

Unsup.

T.B.A.

Model 4338 Color VRX

HP-UX

T.B.A.

Unsup.

T.B.A.

Model 4338 Personal VRX P3

HP-UX

T.B.A.

Unsup.

T.B.A.

Model 4338 Turbo VRX T2

HP-UX

T.B.A.

Unsup.

T.B.A.

Model 4338 Mono VRX

Domain

T.B.A.

Unsup.

T.B.A.

Model 4338 Color VRX

Domain

T.B.A.

Unsup.

T.B.A.

Model 4338 Personal VRX P3

Domain

T.B.A.

Unsup.

System Processors

8-7

System Processor Support (continued)
Formal
Product
Number

Abbreviated
Product
Description

Type

Min.
Boot
ROM

Earliest Operating
System Supported
DOMAIN

HP-UX

SoftPC

Series 400 Options

Option ADA6

Personal VRX PI (98705C§)

DIO-II

1.0

10.2+

7.03

2.0cX

Option ADB6

Personal VRX P2 (98705A)

DIO-II

1.0

10.2+

7.03

2.0cX

Option ADC6

Personal VRX P3 (98705B)

DIO-II

1.0

Unsup.

7.03

2.0cX

Option ADD6

Turbo VRX T1 (98735A)

DIO-II

1.0

Unsup.

7.03

2.0cX

Option ADE6

Turbo VRX T2 (98736A)

DIO-II

1.0

Unsup.

7.03

2.0cX

Option ADF6

Turbo VRX T3 (98736B)

DIO-II

1.0

Unsup.

7.03

2.0cX

Option ADG

Monitor, 19-inch mono. (98774A)

1280

1.0

10.2+

7.03

2.0c

Option ADH6

Monitor, 16-inch color (98789A)

1280

1.0

10.2+

7.03

2.0c

Option ADJ6

Monitor, 19-inch color (98754A)

1280

1.0

10.2+

7.03

2.0c

Option ADK

Mono VRX for Server

DIO-II

1.0

10.2+

7.03

Via O.S.

Option ADL

Color VRX for .3erver

DIO-II

1.0

10.2+

7.0

Via O.S.

Option ADM

Personal VRX P3

DIO-II

1.0

10.2+

Unsup.

Option AD7

Monochrome VRX (A1096A)

DIO-II

1.0

10.2+

7.03

2.0c

Option AD86

Color VRX (A1416A)

DIO-II

1.0

10.2+

7.0

2.0c

Option ALE

Add 25525A 8-bit dfSCSI ilf

EISA

1.0

10.2+

7.03

Via.O.S.

Option ALO

Add 3 DIO-II slots

DIO-II

1.0

7.03

Via O.S.

Option ALI

Add 4 EISA slots

EISA

1.0

10.2+

8.0

Via O.S.

Option AL36

Apollo Token Ring ilf (A-NET-ATR)

ISA

1.0

10.2+

Option AL40

IBM Token Ring ilf (A-NET-ITR)

ISA

1.0

10.2+

Option ALSO

IEEE-488 ilf, std. speed

HP-IB

1.0

7.03

2.0c

Option AL6

1-+3 serial ilf cable (K2292)

RS-232C

1.0

10.2+

7.05

Option AL7

ID Module (46084A)

HP-HIL

NOP

7.03

Via O.S.

Option AL9

Disable ThinLAN, enable AUI

802.3

1.0

10.2+

7.03

Via O.S.

8-8

System Processors

System Processor Support (continued)
Formal
Product
Number

Abbreviated
Product
Description

Type

Min.
Boot
ROM

Earliest Operating
System Supported
DOMAIN

HP-UX

SoftPC

10.2+

3.01

10.3+

8.0

T.B.A.

3.01

Unsup.

8.0

T.B.A.

3.01

10.3+

Unsup.

T.B.A.

seSCSI

3.01

10.3+

8.0

T.B.A.

seSCSI

1.0

7.03

Via O.S.

Add 200 Mbyte into disk

seSCSI

1.0

10.2+

Add 2nd 200/210 Mbyte disk

seSCSI

1.0

10.2+

7.03

Via O.S.

Option AM2

Add 330 Mbyte into disk

seSCSI

1.0

Unsup.e

7.0

Via O.S.

Option AM3

Add 330 Mbyte into disk

seSCSI

1.0

10.2+

Option AM4

Add 660 Mbyte into disk

seSCSI

1.0

Unsup.e

7.0

Via O.S.

Option AMS

Add 660 Mbyte into disk

seSCSI

1.0

10.2+

Option AM6

Add 2nd 660 Mb disk

seSCSI

1.0

Unsup.e

7.0

Via O.S.

Option AM7

Add DDS (4mm DAT) drive

seSCSI

1.0*

10.3+

7.0

Via O.S.

Option AM8

Add CD-ROM drive

IseSCSI

1.0*

Unsup.

7.03

Via O.S.

Option AM9

Add QIC-24 ctg. tape

seSCSI

1.0*

10.2+

Inves.

Unsup.

Option ANB

Add 8 Mbytes RAM (16 total)

SIMM

1.0

10.2+

7.0

2.0c

Option ANC

Add 16 Mbytes RAM (32 total)

SIMM

1.0

10.2+

7.0

2.0c

Option ANE

Add 32 Mbytes RAM (64 total)

SIMM

2.0

10.2+

7.0S

T.B.A.

Option ANF

Add 8 Mbytes RAM (24 total)

SIMM

3.01

10.3+

8.0

T.B.A.

Option ANI

Subs. 32 Mbytes RAM

SIMM

1.0

10.2+

7.0

2.0c

Option AN2

Add 4 Mbytes ECC RAM

ISIMM

1.0

10.2+

7.03

2.0c

Option AMA

Add 2nd A1444A 660 Mb disk

seSCSI

1.0

Option AMB

Add 3.S-in. flexible disk

seSCSI

Option AMP

Subs 1.3Gb for 660Mb

seSCSI

Option AMQ

Subs 1.3Gb for 660Mb

seSCSI

Option AMT

Add 420 Mb into disk

Option AMO

Add 200/210 Mbyte into disk

Option AMI
Option AM2

Option AN4

Add 8 Mbytes ECC RAM

SIMM

1.0

10.2+

7.03

2.0c

Option ANS

Upgrade 8 Mbytes RAM to 16

SIMM

1.0

10.2+

7.0

2.0c

Option AN6

Add 32 Mbytes RAM

SIMM

1.0

10.2+

7.0

2.0c

Option AN8

Add 16 Mbytes RAM

SIMM

1.0

10.2+

7.0

2.0c

Option AN9

Add 128 Kbytes CPU cache

PGA

1.0

10.2+

7.0

2.0c

Notes:

Boot ROM support does not imply support by install/update processes or
availability of software in this media format.
System Processors

B-9

§
6

This Option or product listed for reference, and not currently orderable
as shown.
Nat available on Model 400dl.
The current combination of drive firmware and DOMAIN operating
system software does not provide optimum performance. These
configurations will be fully supported in a future release.
SoftPC supported only within an X-window at this time.

8-10

System Processors

Series 400 Disk Drives
The Series 400 presently supports only 8-bit single-ended (seSCSI)
SCSI-I/SCSI-II and HP-IB disk drives. Only HP- UX supports HP-IB disks,
and then only CS/80 and SS/80 drives. Software driver source is provided for
customers desiring to connect unsupported SCSI devices.
HP-IB AMIGO drives are unsupported by HP- UX. Although the AMIGO
driver is present, many of these older disks fail to function on Series 400 due to
tilning problenls. No HP-FL interface is available for Series 400.
The Min. Boot ROM column indicates the minimum revision of boot code
required to boot an operating system from the device.

Disk Drives

8-11

Series 400 Disk Drive Support
Fo rIll al
Product
NUIllber

Abbreviated
Product
Description

Type

Min.
Boot
ROM

1.0

Models 400t & 425t
only
All except 400dl

A-200EF

200 Mb hard disk &
5 t-inch floppy, external

seSCSI

A-660E

660 Mb external

seSCSI

1.0

A_697°

External disk cluster

seSCSI

Uns.

AADDSFLP 1.2Mb 5 t-inch flex.

seSCSI

Inves.

A1440Ao

200/210 Mbyte internal

seSCSI

A1442A

330 Mbyte internal

A1443A

660 Mbyte internal

A1444A

Hardware
Qualification
and Support

Earliest Operating
SysteIll Supported
DOMAIN

HP-UX

SoftPC

Unsup.

10.2+

Unsup.

All except 400 d 1

10.2+

Unsup.

1.0

400t,425t only

10.2+

7.0+

Via O.S.

seSCSI

1.0

4008,4258,4338 only

10.2+

7.0+

Via O.S.

seSCSI

1.0

4008,4258,4338 only

Unsup.e

7.0+

Via O.S.

660 Mbyte internal

seSCSI

1.0

4008,4258,4338 only

10.2+

Unsup.

Via O.S.

A1448A

CD-ROM drive, internal

seSCSI

1.0

4008,4258,4338 only

10.3+

7.0+

Note

A1968A

Model 750 3 ~-in. flexible

seSCSI

Uns.

[use A2073A]

A1980/81

Series 700 210 Mbyte hard

seSCSI

Uns.

[use A1440A,
A2071A]

A1982/83

Series 700 420 Mbyte hard

seSCSI

Uns.

[use A2072A,
A2072A]

A1984A

Model 720/730 3~-in. flex.

seSCSI

Uns.

[use A2073A]

A1985A

Model 750 CD-ROM, into

seSCSI

Uns.

[use A1448A,
A2074A]

A1988A

Model 750 660 Mbyte into

seSCSI

Uns.

[use A1443/44A]

A1989A

Model 750 1.3 Gb hard, into

seSCSI

Uns.

7.0+

Note

Unsupported

[use A2076A]

A1999A

CD-ROM drive, external

seSCSI

1.0

All except 400dl

A2071A

210 Mbyte hard, internal

seSCSI

3.01

Model 425 e only

10.3+

8.0

T.B.A.

A2072A

420 Mbyte hard, internal

seSCSI

3.01

Model 425e only

10.3+

8.0

T.B.A.

A2073A

3 ~-in. flexible disk

seSCSI

3.01

Model 425e only

10.3+

8.0

T.B.A.

A2074A

CD-ROM drive, internal

seSCSI

3.01

Model 425e only

10.3+

8.0

Note

A2075A

420 Mbyte hard, internal

seSCSI

3.01

Model 425t only

10.3+

8.0

Via O.S.

A2076A

1.3 Gbyte hard, internal

seSCSI

3.01

Models 4258,4338
only

10.3+

8.0

Via O.S.

A2219A

Model 710 210 Mbyte hard

seSCSI

Unsup. Mech. incompatible

Unsup.

A2221A

Model 710 420 Mbyte hard

seSCSI

Unsup. Mech. incompatible

Unsup.

B·12

Disk Drives

10.3+

Series 400 Disk Drive Support (continued)
Formal
Product
Number

Abbreviated
Product
Description

Type

Min.
Boot
ROM

Hardware
Qualification
and Support

Earliest Operating
System Supported
DOMAIN

HP-UX

SoftPC

Unsup. Mech. incompatible

Unsup.

Unsup. Mech. incompatible

Unsup.

Unsup. Mech. incompa ti ble

Unsup.

All except 400 d 1
(DOMAIN is 425s,t
and 433s only)

10.4

7.0+

Via O.S.

AIMS on Series 800
only

Unsup.

1.0

All except 400dl

10.2+

7.0+

Via O.S.

seSCSI

Uns.

All except 400 d l.

lnves.

8.08

Via O.S.

Series 6300 Model 60GB/ A
MO auto changer

seSCSI

Uns.

All except 400dl.

lnves.

8.08

Via O.S.

C1704M

Series 6300 Model 60GB/M
multi-function

seSCSI

Uns.

AIMS on Series 800
only

Unsup.

C1705A

Series 6300 Model
100GB/ A MO autochanger

seSCSI

Uns.

All except 400dl.

lnves.

8.08

Via O.S.

C1705M

Series 6300 Model
100GB/M multi-function

seSCSI

Uns.

AIMS on Series 800
only

Un sup.

Unsup.

C1707A 0

Series 6100 Model 600/ A
CD-ROM, stand-alone

CS/80

1.0

7.0

Note

C2200A

Series 6000 Model 335H,
335Mb hard disk

CS/80

Unsup. Unsupported*

7.0

Via O.S.

C2202A

Series 6000 Model 670XP,
670H+cache

CS/80

Unsup. Unsupported*

Unsup.

C2203A

Series 6000 Model 670H,
670Mb hard disk

CS/80

Unsup. Unsupported*

7.0

Unsup.

C2212A

Series 6000 Model 330/S,
330Mb hard disk

seSCSI

1.0

All except 400dl

Unsup.e

7.0+

Via O.S.

C22l3A

Series 6000 Model 660/S,
660Mb hard disk

seSCSI

1.0

All except 400dl

Unsup.e

7.0+

Via O.S.

Opt.OOl

[see C2290A]

A2223A

Model 710 3 ~-in. flexible

seSCSI

A2224A

Model 710 CD-ROM

seSCSI

A2257-59A

Series 300 internal

seSCSI

C1700A

Series 6300 Model 20GB/A
MO auto changer

seSCSI

Uns.

C1700M

Series 6300 Model 20GB/M
multi-function

seSCSI

Uns.

C1701A

Series 6300 Model 650/ A
ctg. drive

seSCSI

C1703A

Series 6300 Model 10GB/A
MO auto changer

C1704A

All except 400dl,425e

Opt.002,022 [see C229lA]
Opt.003

[see C2292A in Tapes]

Opt.004,024 [see C2293A]
Opt.005

[see C2294A]

Disk Drives

8-13

Series 400 Disk Drive Support (continued)
Formal
Product
Number

Type

Min.
Boot
ROM

Hardware
Qualification
and Support

Earliest Operating
System Supported
DOMAIN

HP-UX

SoftPC

C2212D

Series 6000 Model 330/D
330Mb hard

seSCSI

1.0

All except 400dl

10.2+

Unsup.e

Unsup.

C2213D

Series 6000 Model 660/D
660 Mb hard

seSCSI

1.0

All except 400dl

10.2+

Unsup.e

Unsup.

Opt.AOl

[see C2290Dj

Opt.A02

[see C2291Dj

Opt.005

Abbreviated
Product
Description

[see C2294Aj

C2214B

Series 6000 Model 1350S
(325mm, 1.3 Gbyte hard
disk)

seSCSI

1.0

All except 400 d 1

10.3+

8.0

Via O.S.

C2216T

Series 6000 Model 670SE
(tower, 670 Mbyte hard
disk)

seSCSI

1.0

All except 400 d 1

10.3+

8.0

Via O.S.

C2217T

Series 6000 Model 1350SE
(tower, 1.3 Gbyte hard
disk)

seSCSI

1.0

All except 400dl

10.3+

8.0

Via O.S.

C222029A o /B

Upgrades for C2260-69A

seSCSI

Unsup. Unsupported. Use
C2216/17T

Unsup.

C2220-29M

Upgrades for C2269E/M

mcSCSI

Unsup. Unsupported. Use
C2216/17T

Unsup.

C2249M

420Mb Upgrade for
C2269E/M

mcSCSI

Unsup. Unsupported. Use
C2216/17T

Unsup.

C2251-54

Storage System

HP-FL

NO HP-FL interface
on 400

C2260A

PC Storage Tower w/if

seSCSI,
EISA

Unsupported. Use
C2216/17T

Unsup.

C2261A

PC Storage Tower w/if

seSCSI,
ISA

Unsupported. Use
C2216/17T

Unsup.

C2262A

PC Storage Tower w /if

seSCSI,
MCA

Unsupported. Use
C2216/17T

Unsup.

C2269A

PC Storage Tower w / 0 if

seSCSI

Unsup. Unsupported. Use
C2216/17T

Unsup.

8-14

Disk Drives

Series 400 Disk Drive Support (continued)
Formal
Product
Number

C2269E/M

Abbreviated
Product
Description

Mac Storage Tower w lif

Type

mcSCSI,
MCA

Min.
Boot
ROM

Hardware
Qualification
and Support

Unsupported. Use
C2216/17T

Unsup. Mech. incompatible

Earliest Operating
System Supported
DOMAIN

HP-UX

SoftPC

Unsup.

C2281,82A

Series 800 internal, hard

CS/80

Un sup.

Unsup.

C2290A

332 Mbyte hard disk
upgrade for C2212-14

seSCSI

1.0

All except 400dl

Unsup.e

7.0+

Via O.S.

C2290D

332 Mbyte hard disk
upgrade for C2212-14

seSCSI

1.0

All except 400 d I

10.2+

Unsup.e

Unsup.

C2291A

664 Mbyte hard disk
upgrade for C2212-14

seSCSI

1.0

All except 400dl

Unsup.e

7.0+

Via O.S.

C2291D

664 Mbyte hard disk
upgrade for C2212-14

seSCSI

1.0

All except 400dl

10.2+

Unsup.e

Unsup.

Disk Drives

8-15

Series 400 Disk Drive Support (continued)
Fo rIn a}
Product
NUInber

Abbreviated
Product
Description

Type

Min.
Boot
ROM

Hardware
Qualification
and Support

Earliest Operating
SysteIn Supported
DOMAIN

HP-UX

SoftPC

C2293A

CD-ROM upgrade for
C2212-14

seSCSI

1.0

All except 400 d 1

10.3+

7.0+

Note

C2293T

CD-ROM upgrade for
C2216/17T

seSCSI

1.0

All except 400 d 1

10.3+

8.0

Note

C2294A

MO upgrade for C2212-14

seSCSI

1.0

All except 400dl

10.2+

7.0+

Via O.S.

C2294T

MO upgrade for C2216/17T seSCSI

1.0

All except 400 d 1

10.3+

8.0

Via O.S.

C2295B

1.3 Gbyte hard upgrade for
C2212-14

seSCSI

1.0

All except 400 d I

10.3+

8.0

Via O.S.

C2425/27 J:K 420SA & 1350SA disk
arrays

dfSCSI

No dfSCSI interface
on 400

C2451-53M

MacIntosh add-on disks

mcSCSI

Unsupported

Unsup.

C246063F/R

Series 800/900 subsystems

seSCSI

Unsup. Unsupported

Unsup.

C2470-74S

Series 800/900 SPU add-ons seSCSI

Unsup. Unsupported

Unsup.

C247074F/R

C246xF /R add-ons

seSCSI

Unsup. Unsupported

Unsup.

C2473T

670 Mbyte upgrade for
C2216/17T

seSCSI

1.0

All except 400dl

10.3+

8.0

Via O.S.

C2474T

1.3 G byte upgrade for
C2216/17T

seSCSI

1.0

All except 400dl

10.3+

8.0

Via O.S.

C2481,82A

Series 6000 Model
670SX,1350SX hard disks

dfSCSI

n.a.

No dfSCSI interface
on 400

n.a.

C2491,92A

C2481/82A add-on disks

dfSCSI

n.a.

No dfSCSI interface
on 400

n.a.

D168xA

Hard disks for

Unsup.

B-16

Disk Drives

Vectra

seSCSI

Unsup. Unsupported.

Series 400 Disk Drive Support (continued)
Formal
Product
Number

Abbreviated
Product
Description

Type

Min.
Boot
ROM

Hardware
Qualification
and Support

Earliest Operating
System Supported
DOMAIN

HP-UX

SoftPC

7907 A °

20/20 Mb Fxd/Rern ctg

CS/80

Unsup. Unsupported*

7.0

Via O.S.

7908po

16 Mb Fxd w/ctg tape

CS/80

Unsup. Unsupported*

Unsup.

7911°P/R

28 Mb Fxd w / ctg tape

CS/80

Unsup. Unsupported*

Unsup.

7912° P /R

65 Mb Fxd w/ctg tape

CS/80

Unsup. Unsupported*

Unsup.

7914CTo

132 Mb Fxd w / ctg tape

CS/80

Unsup. Unsupported*

7.0

Via O.S.

7914°p /R

132 Mb Fxd w/ctg tape

CS/80

Unsup. Unsupported*

7.0

Via O.S.

7914TDo

[see 7914R & 7971Aj

7914STo

[see 7914R & 7974Aj

7933Ho

404 Mbyte fixed disk

CS/80

Unsup. Unsupported*

7.0

Via O.S.

7933Xpo

404 Mbyte fixed disk

CS/80

Unsup. Unsupported*

7.0

Via O.S.

7935Ho

404 Mbyte rernv pack

CS/80

Unsup. Unsupported*

7.0

Via O.S.

7935Xpo

404 Mbyte rernv pack

CS/80

Unsup. Unsupported*

7.0

Via O.S.

7936FLo

308 Mbyte fixed disk

HP-FL

7936Ho

308 Mbyte fixed disk

CS/80

Unsup. Unsupported*

7.0

Via O.S.

7936Xpo

308 Mbyte fixed disk

CS/80

Unsup. Unsupported*

Unsup.

7937FLo

571 Mbyte fixed disk

HP-FL

7937Ho

571 Mbyte fixed disk

CS/80

Unsup. Unsupported*

7.0

Via O.S.

7937Xpo

571 Mbyte fixed disk

CS/80

Unsup. Unsupported*

Unsup.

7941° /45°

24/55 Mbyte disk

CS/80

Unsup. Unsupported*

7.0

Via O.S.

7942A °

7941A+9144A pkg.

CS/80

Unsup. Unsupported*

7.0

Via O.S.

7946A °

7945A+9144A pkg.

CS/80

Unsup. Unsupported*

7.0

Via O.S.

7957 A °

80 Mbyte disk

CS/80

Unsup. Unsupported*

7.0

Via O.S.

7957Bo

80 Mbyte disk

CS/80

Unsup. Unsupported*

7.0

Via O.S.

7957So

107 Mbyte disk

seSCSI

Unsup.

7.0+

Via O.S.

7958A °

131 Mbyte disk

CS/80

Unsup. Unsupported*

7.0

Via O.S.

7958Bo

152 Mbyte disk

CS/80

Unsup. Unsupported*

7.0

Via O.S.

7958So

161 Mbyte disk

IseSCSI

Unsup.

7.0+

Via O.S.

Uns.

No FL interface on
400

Unsupported

Disk Drives

B-17

Series 400 Disk Drive Support (continued)
Formal
Product
Number

Abbreviated
Product
Description

Type

Min.
Boot
ROM

Hardware
Qualification
and Support

Earliest Operating
System Supported
DOMAIN

7959B

304 Mbyte disk

CS/80

7959S

323 Mbyte disk

seSCSI

7962Bo

152 Mbyte disk

CS/80

7963Bo

304 Mbyte disk

CS/80

97962Bo

152 Mbyte add-on

97963Bo

Unsup. Unsupported*

HP-UX

SoftPC

7.0

Via O.S.

Unsup.

7.0+

Via O.S.

Unsup. Unsupported*

7.0

Via O.S.

Unsup. Unsupported*

7.0

Via O.S.

CS/80

Unsup. Unsupported*

7.0

Via O.S.

304 Mbyte add-on

CS/80

Unsup. Unsupported*

7.0

Via O.S.

Uns.

Unsupported

9122Co

1.6Mb 3 ~-in. flex.

SS/80

Unsup. All except 400dl,425e

7.0

2.0c

9122°D/S

788Kb 3 ~-in. flex.

SS/80

Unsup. Unsupported*

7.0

Unsup.

9125So

360Kb 5 i-in. flex.

SS/80

Unsup. Unsupported*

Unsup.

9127 A °

360Kb 5 i-in. flex.

SS/80

Unsup. All except 400dl,425e

7.0

2.0c

9133Do

9134D+9122S pkg.

SS/80

Unsup. Unsupported*

Unsup.

9133Ho

9134H+9122S pkg.

SS/80

Unsup. Unsupported*

Unsup.

9133Lo

9134L+9122S pkg.

SS/80

Unsup. Unsupported*

Unsup.

9134Do

14.8 Mbyte disk

SS/80

Unsup. Unsupported*

Unsup.

9134Ho

19.9 Mbyte disk

SS/80

Unsup. Unsupported*

Unsup.

9134Lo

39.9 Mbyte disk

SS/80

Unsup. Unsupported*

Unsup.

9153A °

9154A+9122S pkg.

SS/80

Unsup. Unsupported*

Unsup.

9153Bo

9154B+9122S pkg.

SS/80

Unsup. Unsupported*

Unsup.

9154° A/B

10/20 Mbyte disk

SS/80

Unsup. Unsupported*

Unsup.

9153 O C/M

10-40 Mb Modular

SS/80

Unsup. Unsupported*

7.0

2.0c

9262Bo

Secure 7962B

CS/80

Unsup. Unsupported*

7.0

Via O.S.

9263Bo

Secure 7963B

CS/80

Unsup. Unsupported*

7.0

Via O.S.

97902Bo

152 Mbyte add-on

CS/80

Unsup. Unsupported*

7.0

Via O.S.

97903Bo

304 Mbyte add-on

CS/80

Unsup. Unsupported*

7.0

Via O.S.

Model 345 200 Mb internal

seSCSI

<--

98433D

--+

Supported only as
A1440A

This symbol is used throughout this document to denote discontinued
products listed for reference. DiscontinuedO devices may still be available
as used, refurbished or remanufactured products from HP's Finance and
Remarketing Division. Add an "R" to the product number, e.g. 7935HR.
Cannot be interfaced to Model 425e, which has no HP-IB capability.

B·18 Disk Drives

b
()

DOS programs can access files on a cdfs-mounted filesystem, but may fail
if the uppercase filenames and ";1" version numbers presently reported by
HP- UX are unexpected. A symlink workaround script is available. DOS
programs requiring MicroSoft CD- RO M Extensions will fail.
Requires software patch from GSD.
The current combination of drive firmware and operating system software
does not provide optimum performance.

Disk Drives

B·19

Series 400 Magnetic Tape Drives
The Series 400 presently supports 8-bit single-ended (seSCSI) SCSI, selected
GSD78 and CS/80 (HP-IB) tape drives. Software driver source is provided for
customers desiring to connect unsupported SCSI devices.
All devices listed as type CS/80 employ an HP-IB interface. Devices listed as
GSD78 are HP-IB and employ variants of the 7978A command language. No
AMIGO (HP-IB) command set devices are supported. Additional information
about use of older tape drives on MC680xO HP- UX may be found in the Series
300 Hardware Support Summary.
The Min. Boot ROM column indicates the minimum revision of ROM code
required to boot an install system from the device. Booting HP- UX from SCSI
devices is possible, but HP presently does not deliver software on this media.

8-20

Tape Drives

Series 400 Tape Drive Support
Formal
Product
Number

Abbreviated
Product
Description

Type

Min.
Boot
ROM

Hardware
Qualification
and Support

Earliest Operating
System Supported
DOMAIN

HP-UX

SoftPC

All Models except
400dl,425e

10.2+

No
driver

All except 400dl

10.2+

3rd pty.

Unsup.

A-6250

~-in. 9-trk (LMS)
1600/6250 bpi

seSCSI

AADDESTC

i-in. 9-trk 60Mb QIC-24
ctg., external

seSCSI

A-EX-

8mm 2.3Gb External

seSCSI

unsup.1 All except 400dl

10.2+e

Unsup.

A-XT_o

8mm 2.3Gb Internal

seSCSI

Unsup. Unsupported

Unsup.

A1447A

4mm 1.3Gb DDS (DAT),
internal

seSCSI

1.0*

Model 4008/4338
only

10.3+

7.0+

Via O.S.

A1449A

i-in. 9-trk 60Mb QIC-24
ctg., internal

seSCSI

1.0

Model 4008/4338
only

10.2+

Unsup.Q

Unsup.

A1726A

7980S for Series 800

seSCSI

Unsup. Unsupported

Unsup.

A1990A

Model 750 4mm DDS,
internal

seSCSI

Unsup. Mech. incompatible

Unsup.

A2274A

2.0Gb DDS (DAT), into

Opt.AHP

For Model 425 e

seSCSI

1.0*

Model 425e only.

10.3+

Planned

Via O.S.

Opt.AHQ

For Model 4258

seSCSI

1.0*

Model 4258 only.

10.3+

Planned

Via O.S.

C1511Ao

1.3Gb DDS (DAT), ext.

GSD78

Nap

All except 400dl,425e

7.0

Via O.S.

C1512Ao

1.3Gb DDS (DAT), ext.

seSCSI

1.0*

All except 400dl

Via O.S.

C1520A

4mm 2.0Gb DDS,
stand-alone

seSCSI

1.0*

All except 400dl
Unsup.

C1520B

Series 6400 Model 2000
4mm 2.0Gb DDS,
stand-alone

seSCSI

1.0*

C1521B

Series 6400 Model 2000DC
4mm 2.0Gb DDS,
stand-alone

seSCSI

1.0*

C1590Ao

DDS drive cluster

GSD78

C2212/13

Series 6000 325mm
enclosure

#003

[see C2292A]

#006

[see C2296D]

1.0

10.3+

7.0+

Unsup.

All except 400dl

10.3+

Planned

Via O.S.

All except 400 d 1

Unsup.

Planned

Via O.S.

Unsupported

Unsup.

Tape Drives

B·21

Series 400 Tape Drive Support (continued)
Formal
Product
Number

Abbreviated
Product
Description

Type

Min.
Boot
ROM

Hardware
Qualification
and Support

Earliest Operating
System Supported
DOMAIN

HP-UX

SoftPC

Unsup.

All except 400dl

10.3+

7.0+

Via O.S.

1.0*

All except 400 d I

10.3+

8.0

Via O.S.

seSCSI

1.0

All except 400dl

10.2+

3rd
pty.Q

Unsup.

2.0Gb DDS (DAT) for
C2216/17T

seSCSI

1.0*

All except 400dl

10.3+

Planned

Via O.S.

C2463F/R

DDS for 800/900
tower/rack

seSCS!

Unsup. Unsupported

Unsup.

C2475F/R

DDS for 800/900 SPUs

seSCSI

Unsup. Unsupported

Unsup.

C2224A/M

2.0 Gb DDS for
C226xA/E/M

seSCSI

Unsup. Unsupported. Use
C2294T

C2292A

1.3Gb DDS (DAT) for
C2212-14

seSCSI

1.0*

C2292T

1.3Gb DDS (DAT) for
C2216/17T

seSCSI

C2296DO

i-in. 60Mb QIC-24 ctg.

C2297T

D2034A

i-in QIC-525 for Vectra

seSCSI

Unsup. Unsupported

Unsup.

Unsup.Q

35401AO

i-in. 16-trk 536Mbyte
auto changer

CS/80

Unsup. Unsup. No on 425e

7.0

Via O.S.

7970 0 E

800/1600 bpi

AMIGO

NOP

Unsup. No on 425e

Unsup.

7971Ao

1600 bpi

AMIGO

NOP

Unsup. No on 425e

Unsup.

7974Ao

1600/800 bpi

GSD78

NOP

Unsup. No on 425e

Unsup.

7978° A/B

1600/6250 bpi

GSD78

NOP

Unsup. No on 425e

Unsup.

7979A

1600/800 bpi

GSD78

NOP

All except 400dl,425e

7.0

Via O.S.

7980A H

1600/6250 bpi

GSD78

NOP

4008/4258/4338 only

7.0

Via O.S.

800 bpi NRZI

GSD78

NOP

4008/4258/4338 only

7.0

Via O.S.

GSD78

NOP

4008/4258/4338 only

7.0

Via O.S.

!-inch 9-track

Opt.800
7980XC H

8-22

7980A w / compression

Tape Drives

Series 400 Tape Drive Support (continued)
Formal
Product
Number

Abbreviated
Product
Description

Type

Min.
Boot
ROM

Hardware
Qualification
and Support

Earliest Operating
System Supported
DOMAIN

HP-UX

7979S

1600 cpi PE

seSCSI

1.0*

425e/s/t,433S only

Inves.

7980S

6250 cpi GCR

seSCSI

1.0*

425e/s/t,433S only

10.3+

Inves.

7980SX

7890S w / compression

seSCSI

1.0*

425e/s/t,433S only

Inves.

SoftPC

t-inch ca.rtridge
9144A °

16-tra.ck, 67Mb

CS/80

1.0

All except 400 d 1,425 e

7.0

Via. O.S.

9145A o

16/32-tra.ck, 134Mb

CS/80

1.0

All except 400dl,425e

7.0

Via. O.S.

*
H
()

Boot ROM functionality does not imply install/update process support,
nor availability of software on this media type.
Requires A1401A and 98625B high-speed HP-IB for 6250 GCR or 6250
compressed operation.
Requires OmniBack.
Series 400-compatible QIC/SCSI drivers and QIC-24, QIC-120, QIC-150,
QIC-250 and QIC-525 external drives are available from a third party.
Consult your HP Sales Representative.

Tape Drives

8·23

Series 400 Consoles and Terminals
The Series 400 supports either a bit-map display (w/HP-HIL keyboard)
or serial terminal as console, and some Models are available in a "server"
configuration that omits the bit-map video interface. X-terminals are not
supported as console.
The Series 400 supports only built-in, DIO-II and DIO-System video cards. No
DIO-I/O, EISA or SGC video cards are supported as console devices. Serial
terminal consoles may use the built-in Select Code 9 port, or any supported
RS-232C DIO-I/O or DIO-System card.
The Min. Boot ROM column indicates the minimum revision of code supporting
that device as system console.
See the Graphics section for information on support of console/terminal devices
as graphics peripherals.

8-24

Consoles and Terminals

Series 400 Console and Alpha Terminal Support
Formal
Product
Number

Abbreviated
Product
Description

Type

Min.
Boot
ROM

Hardware
Qualification
and Support

Earliest Operating
System Supported
DOMAIN

HP-UX

SoftPC

[none]

EVRX Grayscale

3.01

As built-in only

10.3+

8.0

Inves.

[none]

EVRX Color 1024

3.01

As built-in only

10.3+

8.0

Inves.

[none]

EVRX Color 1280

3.01

As built-in only

10.3+

8.0

Inves.

Vectra PC

w / Advancelink-2392

termO

1.0

All Models

Unsup.

7.0

Unsup.

A1096A

Monochrome VRX

DIO-II

1.0

All Models except
425e

10.2+

7.03

2.0c

A1097A/B

Monitor: 19-in.,
1280x1024, 72 Hz, for
A1659A

RGB

A1416A

Color VRX

DIO-II

10.2+

7.0

2.0c

A1497A/B

Monitor: 16-in., 1024 X 768,
75 Hz, for EVRX-1024

RGB

{per interface}

A1659A§

CRX, 1280X1024x8

SGC

3.01

As built-in only

10.3+

8.0

T.B.A.

A1924A§

GRX, 1280X1024

SGC

3.01

As built-in only

10.3+

8.0

T.B.A.

2.0c

{per interface}

1.0

All except
400dl,425e

700 Family Alpha-Numeric
Terminals
C1001°

Model 700/92

termO

1.0

All Models

Unsup.

7.0

C1002°

Model 700/94

termO

1.0

All Models

Unsup.

7.0

2.0c

C1003°

Model 700/41

ASCII

1.0*

Unsupported

Unsup.

7.0*

Unsup.

C1004°

Model 700/22

ANSI

1.0*

Unsupported

Unsup.

7.0*

Unsup.

C1006

Model 700/43

ASCII

1.0*

Unsupported

Unsup.

7.0*

Unsup.

C1007

Model 700/44

ANSI/PC

1.0*

All Models

Unsup.

7.0*

2.0c

Consoles and Terminals

8-25

Series 400 Console and Alpha Terminal Support (continued)
ForInal
Product
NUInber

Abbreviated
Product
Description

Min.
Boot
ROM

Type

Hardware
Qualification
and Support

Earliest Operating
SysteIn Supported
DOMAIN

HP-UX

SoftPC

Localized 700/92
CI0I0C

Simplified Chinese

termO

1.0

All Models

Unsup.

7.0

Unsup.

CI0I0Jo

Japanese

termO

1.0

All Models

Unsup.

7.0

Unsup.

CI010K

Korean

termO

1.0

All Models

Unsup.

7.0

Unsup.

C1010To

Traditional Chinese

termO

1.0

All Models

Unsup.

7.0

Unsup.

C1017

Model 700/32

ANSI

1.0*

All Models

Unsup.

7.0*

Unsup.

IHP 700 Family X-teem'n""
C2301 ° A/B Base unit
C2302Ao

Monochrome, 17-in.

IX-l1
X-ll

IAll Mod'l,

All Models

7.0

I Unsup.

10.2+

7.0

Unsup.

10.2+

7.0

Unsup.

10.2+

C2303° A/B VGA color, 14-in.

X-ll

All Models

C2304° A/B Hi-res color, 16-in.

X-ll

All Models

10.2+

7.0

Unsup.

C2305° A/B Grey Scale, 19-in.

X-II

All Models

10.2+

7.0

Unsup.

C2307Bo

X-II

All Models

10.2+

7.0

Unsup.

C2701A/B

Mi Base unit, monochrome X-ll

All Models

10.2+

7.0

Unsup.

C2702B

19Mi X Station,

X-ll

All Models

10.2+

7.0

Unsup.

Color, Japan, 19-in.
HP 700/RX X-stations

monochrome

C2704A

Ci Base unit, 1024 color

X-ll

All Models

10.2+

7.0

Unsup.

C2705A

14 Ci X Station, 1024 color

X-ll

All Models

10.2+

7.0

Unsup.

C2706A

16 Ci X Station, 1024 color

X-II

All Models

10.2+

7.0

Unsup.

C2709A

Ca Base unit, 1280 color

X-II

All Models

10.2+

7.0

Unsup.

C2710A

16Ca X Station, 1280 color X-ll

All Models

10.2+

7.0

Unsup.

C2711A

19Ca X Station, 1280 color X-ll

All Models

10.2+

7.0

Unsup.

8·26 Consoles and Terminals

Series 400 Console and Alpha Terminal Support (continued)
Formal
Product
Number

Abbreviated
Product
Description

Type

Min.
Boot
ROM

Hardware
Qualification
and Support

Earliest Operating
System Supported
DOMAIN

HP-UX

SoftPC

D1187A

19·inch multi.sync monitor

Color

Unsupported

Unsup.

D1188A

15·inch multi· sync monitor

Color

Unsupported

Unsup.

2392A 0

Alphanumeric terminal

termO

1.0

Unsupported

Unsup.

7.0

2.0c

2393A 0

Graphics terminal

termO

1.0

Unsupported

Unsup.

7.0

2.0c

2394A 0

Data entry terminal

termO

1.0

Unsupported

Unsup.

7.0

2.0c

2397 A 0

Color terminal

termO

1.0

Unsupported

Unsup.

7.0

2.0c

1.0

3082B o

Industrial terminal

termO

Unsupported

Unsup.

7.0

Unsup.

35731 0 AlB

512X400(390) 12·in.
monitor, 50/60 Hz for
2393A, 98204B, 98542A
and 98546A

Mono.

No supported ilf

Unsup.

35741 0 AlB

512X400(390) 12·in.
monitor, 50/60 Hz for
2397 A, 98543A

Color

No supported ilf

Unsup.

45711A 0

Portable Plus (as 2622A)

termO

1.0

Unsupported

Unsup.

7.0

Unsup.

45850 0

HP 150·II (as 2623A)

termO

1.0

Unsupported

Unsup.

7.0

Unsup.

9666A 0

Ruggedized 2397 A

termO

1.0

Unsupported

Unsup.

7.0

2.0c

98287 A 0

1024 X 768 X 8 interface for
98700 0 "CX";

DIO.I/O,
MADbus

Unsup. Unsupported

7.0

98542A

512x400Xl video ilf

DIO.Sys.

1.0

Unsupported

7.0

98543A

512x400x4 video ilf

DIO.Sys.

1.0

Unsupported

7.0

98544A 0

1024 x768 X 1 video ilf

DIO·Sys.

1.0

Unsupported

7.0

2.0c

98544B o

1024x768xl video ilf

DIO.Sys.

1.0

Unsupported

7.0

2.0c

98545A 0

1024x768 x4 video ilf

DIO.Sys.

1.0

Unsupported

7.0

2.0c

98546A 0

512x390x2 video ilf

DIO.I/O

1.0

Unsupported

No.

7.0

98547A

1024x768 x6 video ilf

DIO.Sys.

1.0

Unsupported

7.0

2.0c

Consoles and Terminals

8-27

Series 400 Console and Alpha Terminal Support (continued)
Formal
Product
Number

98548A

98549A

Abbreviated
Product
Description

Type

Min.
Boot
ROM

Hardware
Qualification
and Support

Earliest Operating
System Supported
DOMAIN

HP-UX

SojtPC

"MH" 1280 X 1024 X 1 video
iff

DIO-II

1.0

Unsupported

7.0

2.0c

"C+" 1024 X 768 x6 video

DIO-II

1.0

Unsupported

7.0

2.0c

iff
98550A

"CH" 1280x1024 x8 video
iff

DIO-II

1.0

4008/4258/4338
only

7.0

2.0c

98556A

"CHX" Accelerator

DIO-II

1.0

4008/4258/4338
only

7.0

2.0c

98700°

"cx"

MAD bus

98702A§

Personal VRX LGB

10.2+

7.03

2.0c X

98705A

Controller

iff

Unsup. [see 98287 A 0]

DIO-II,
LGB

1.0

Supported on
Models w / avail.
DIO-II slot.

Personal VRX P2

LGB

1.0

[see 98702A]

98705B

Personal VRX P 3

LGB

1.0

[see 98702A]

98705C§

Personal VRX P 1

LGB

1.0

[see 98702A]

98720A

SRX Processor

LGB

1.0

[see 98724/25A]

98724A °

for 98720A SRX

DIO-I/O

1.0

Unsupported

7.0

2.0c

98725A

for 98720A SRX

DIO-Sys.

1.0

Unsupported

7.0

2.0c

98726A

for 98730A TurboSRX

DIO-II

1.0

Unsupported

7.0

2.0c X

98730A

TurboSRX Processor

LGB

1.0

[see 98726A]

98735A

Turbo VRX T1 Processor

G-Bus

1.0

[see 98727/28A]

98727A§

Turbo VRX PDMA

DIO-II

1.0

Supported on
Models w f avail.
DIO-II slot.

Inves.

7.03

2.0c X

Inves.

7.03

2.0c X

LGB Interfaces

interface

98728A§

Turbo VRX VDMA
interface

DIO-II

1.0

Supported on
Models w / avail.
DIO-II slot.

98736A

Turbo VRX T2 Processor

G-Bus

1.0

[see 98727/28A]

98736B

Turbo VRX T3 Processor

G-Bus

1.0

[see 98727 /28A]

B-28

Consoles and Terminals

Series 400 Console and Alpha Terminal Support (continued)
Formal
Product
Number

98751A 0

Abbreviated
Product
Description

Type

Min.
Boot
ROM

Hardware
Qualification
and Support

Earliest Operating
System Supported
DOMAIN

HP-UX

SoftPC

Color

No supported iff

Unsup.

....

19-in. monitor 1280xl024
60 Hz for 98550/720/30

Color

Unsupported

Unsup.

....

19-in. monitor 1024x768 60

Color

No supported iff

Unsup.

....

[see iff]

....

[see iff>

[see iff]

19-in. monitor 1024 X 768 60

Hz
98752A 0

98753A

Hz
98754A

19-in. monitor 1280x1024
60 Hz for A1416A, 98550,
98705/06, 98720/30,
98735/36

Color

All except 400 d 1

98774A

19-in. monitor 1280x1024
72 Hz for A1096A and
A1924A

Mono.

All Models

98785A

16-in. monitor 1024x768 60

Color

No supported iff

Unsup.

Mono.

No supported iff

Unsup.

....

Hz
98786A

17-in. monitor 1024x768 60

Hz
98788A

19-in. monitor 1280x1024
60 Hz for 98548

Mono.

Unsupported

Unsup.

....

98789A

16-in. monitor 1280xl024
60 Hz for A1416A, 98550,
98705/06, 98720/30,
98735/36

Color

All except 400 d I

[see iff]

....

*
§
X
a
~
T

Although the Boot ROM supports non-HP terminal commands, key
system tools such as install, update and sam presently require an HP
termO console.
This component product number is listed for reference and is not
separately orderable at present.
SoftPC supported only within an X-window at this time.
SoftPC support on the 700/44 terminal is limited to alpha-numerics.
Product not supported if purchased separately. Some revisions are
incompatible with Series 700.
HP- UX 8.0 includes a complete terminfo database that allows software
written for the curses(2) library to function with a wide variety of
termtypes. Some HP- UX administrative software requires HP termO
command set support in the device.

Consoles and Terminals

B·29

Series 400 Human Interface
The Series 400 directly supports only HP-HIL devices for human interface.
Supported serial terminals may locally support additional classes of devices.
The Min. Boot ROM column indicates the minimum revision of ROM code
supporting that device as boot conbtrol and system console keyboard.
See the Graphics section for information on support of human interface devices
as graphics peripherals.
Series 400 Human Interface Support
Formal
Product
Number

Abbreviated
Product
Description

Type

Min.
Boot
ROM

Hardware
Qualification
and Support

Earliest Operating
System Supported
DOMAIN

HP-UX

SoftPC

Serial

All Models

10.2+

Unsup.

DOMAIN

Serial

1.0

All Models

10.2+

A1099A/B

HP- UX (46021 ITF)

HP-HIL

1.0

All Models

7.0

2.0c

A2205A

C1429A PC-101 keyboard
kit

Opt. ABA

U.S. English

HP-HIL

1.0

All Models

8.0t

Inves.

Opt. ABD

German

HP-HIL

1.0

All Models

8.0t

Inves.

C1027A

Keyboard, 700/44
AT/2-style (aka C1408A,
see 98016A)

MITF-5

1.0

All Models, however
only C1027 A Option
ABA has been tested

7.0

Unsup.

C1429A

Keyboard, AT /2-style (see
A2205A)

HP-HIL

1.0

All Models

8.0t

Unsup.

K1388

8 knob Dial Set

Serial

Under investigation

10.2+

Unsup.

All Models

10.2+

7.0E£i

2.0

A-LPFK-

32- button pad

A1098A

Keyboard/local kits

K1410

Mouse, 3-button

Quad.

NOP

K1422

Spaceball XYZ, 8-button

Serial

{see SPTL-2003}

Summagraphics tablets
K1424

Bit Pad Two

Serial

Vendor supported

10.2+

Unsup.

K1432

B-size tablet

Serial

Vendor supported

10.2+

Unsup.

Quad.

NOP

Under investigation

10.2+

Unsup.E£i

Unsup.
Unsup.

Trackballs
K1434

3-button Marconi RB2

K1435

3-button !tac

Quad.

NOP

Vendor supported

M1309A

3-button

HP-HIL

NOP

All Models

SPTL-2003

Spaceball XYZ, 8-button

Serial

8-30

Human Interface

Vendor supported

10.2+

Unsup.E!)

Unsup.

7.0

2.0c

10.2+

8.0

Unsup.

Series 400 Human Interface Support (continued)
Formal
Product
Number

35723A

Abbreviated
Product
Description

Type

Min.
Boot
ROM

12-inch touch bezel

HP-HIL

Hardware
Qualification
and Support

Earliest Operating
System Supported
DOMAIN

HP-UX

Unsupported

7.0

SoftPC

45911 0 AIC

llXll-in. ta.blet

HP-HIL

NOP

All Models

7.0

46021A

Keyboard, "ITF"

HP-HIL

1.0

All Models

7.0

46060A

Mouse, 2 button

HP-HIL

NOP

All Models

7.0

2.0c

46060B

Mouse, 3 button

HP-HIL

NOP

All Models

7.0

2.0c

HP-HIL Extensions
46080A

204m

HP-HIL

NOP

All Models

7.0

2.0c

46081A

204m with audio

HP-HIL

NOP

All Models

10.2+01

7.0

2.0c

46082A

15m w/RGB & audio

HP-HIL

NOP

All Models

7.0

2.0c

46082B

30m w/RGB & audio

HP-HIL

NOP

All Models

7.0

2.0c

46083A

I-Knob dial set

HP-HIL

NOP

Unsupported

7.0

46084A

ID Module

HP-HIL

NOP

All Models

7.0

2.0c

46085A

9-Knob dials set

HP-HIL

NOP

All Models

7.0

2.0c

46086A

32-button pad

HP-HIL

NOP

All Models

7.0

2.0c

46087

Digitizer, A-size

HP-HIL

NOP

All Models

7.0

46090C

Digitizer, A-size

HP-HIL

NOP

All Models

7.0

46088

Digitizer, B-size

HP-HIL

NOP

All Models

7.0

46091C

Digitizer, B-size

HP-HIL

NOP

All Models

7.0

46094A

Adaptor, quadrature

HP-HIL

NOP

All Models

7.0

2.0c

46095A 0

Mouse, 3- button (Repla.ced
by K1410)

Quad.

NOP

All Models

Unsup.

7.0E£)

2.0c

Human Interface

8·31

Series 400 Human Interface Support (continued)
Formal
Product
Number

Abbreviated
Product
Description

SketchPro

7060A 0

11 x11 tablet

Type

Min.
Boot
ROM

Hardware
Qualification
and Support

RS232C

Unsupported

{support via
terminal}

Earliest Operating
System Supported
DOMAIN

HP-UX

SoftPC

Unsup.

7.0

2.0c

7.0

Unsup.

Barcode Readers
9291SA 0

For HP 2390-series
terminals and HP 150 PCs

MITF12

929l6A 0

For HP 9000 workstations
and HP ISO-II PCs

HP-HIL

NOP

929l7A

For HP 700 family
terminals

MITF-S

{support via
terminal}

980l6A§

MITF-S keyboard adaptor

HP-HIL

1.0

All Models

98203C

Large Keyboard

HP-HIL

All Models

Unsup. Unsupported

Notes:

t
EB
a

Right [Ctrl] key and CapsLock LED not functional on systems prior to
8.0 nor in ITE or in Windex on any systems.
Requires 46094A HIL / Quadrature adaptor.
Supported limited to audio port only.
"Special"; consult factory for availability.

B-32

Human Interface

Series 400 Text Printers
This table refers only to simple text printing capability of the printer. Refer
to the Series 400 Graphics Device Support table (next) for information
on support of vector/raster printing. SoftPC applications are usually
device-dependent. Also, unless they support HP-PCL, they may require that
the printer be switch-configured for IBM/Epson emulation.
The Series 400 officially supports Centronics parallel, RS-232C serial printers
and rernote network spooling. HP- UX also supports simple and CIPER HP-IB
printers. The AMIGO HP-IB driver is present in HP- UX has not been tested
on Series 400. Direct LAN printer support is under investigation.
Legend: cps - characters per second, Ipm - lines per minute, ppm - pages per
minute

Text Printers

8-33

Series 400 Text Printer Support
Formal
Product
Number

Abbreviated
Product
Description

Type

DOMAIN

HP-UX

SojtPC

10.3+

Per
Appl.

Models 4008,4258,4338
only

10.3+

Per
Appl.

Par.

Models 4008,4258,4338
only

10.3+

Per
Appl.

La8erJet support kit

A1905A

La8erJet support kit (parallel) ISA

A1904A

La8erJet support

C1200A

Asian System Printer
Serial interface

Earliest Operating
System Supported

Models 4008,4258,4338
only

A1904A

Hardware
Qualification
and Support

RS232

APCL

All Models

Unsup.

7.0

via O.S.

RS232

All Models

Unsup.

7.0

via O.S.
via O.S.

APCL

All Models

Unsup.

7.0

#lAA

Parallel interface

Par.

Unsupported

Unsup.

#lA8

IEEE-488 interface

HP-IB

All except 400dl,425e

Unsup.

7.0

via O.S.

Serial interface

RS232

All Models

PaintJet XL, B-size color

PCL

C1202A

Asian Serial Printer

#lA9
C1602A

Unsup.

7.0

via O.S.

w/C1608A

7.0

Via O.S.

inkjet
Opt. lAX

Serial/parallel interface

Par.

All except 400 d I

SRIO.2+

Inves.

Via O.S.

Opt.1AX

Serial/parallel interface

RS232

All except 400 d 1

SRIO.2+

7.0

Via O.S.

Opt.1A8

IEEE-488/serial interface

HP-IB

All except 400dl,425e

7.0

Via O.S.

C1608A

HP-GL/2 cartridge

HP-GL/2

All Models

SRIO.2+

7.0

Via O.S.

C2007 A

La8erJet IIP+, 4ppm

PCL4

All Models

10.3+

Via O.S.

Parallel interface

Par.

All Models

10.3+

Via O.S.

Serial interface

RS232

All Models

10.3+

Via O.S.

C2071x

Network interfaces for
La8erJet II, lID and IIID

XIO

Under investigation

Inves.

C2088A

PCL-5 cartridge for La8erJet
lIP

Font slot

All Models

10.3+

8.0

C2113A

De8kWriterC (QuickDraw)

Apple

No interface

No driver

No
driver

8-34

Text Printers

Via O.S.

Series 400 Text Printer Support (continued)
Formal
Product
Number

Abbreviated
Product
Description

Type

Hardware
Qualification
and Support

Earliest Operating
System Supported

DOMAIN
C2114A

DeskJet SOOC, 300 dpi, color

PCL3

C27S3/S4A

Model FIOO Page Printer

seSCSI

Unsupported

C2l06A

DeskJet SOO, 300 dpi, A-size

Serial
Par.

HP-UX

SoftPC

Per
Appl.
No driver

No
driver

All Models

8.0

Via O.S.

All except 400dl

8.0

Via O.S.

HCD-MMP

(Genicom) impact

RS232

Unsupported

SRlO.2+

Unsup.

K1626

"PTR-2l06" PostScript, 6ppm

RS232

Vendor Supported

SRlO.2+

Unsup.

K1627

"PTR-211S" PostScript, lSppm RS232

Vendor Supported

SRlO.2+

Unsup.

Phasor Ps

K2l32

Tek

RS232

Vendor supported

SRlO.2+

Unsup.

LP26°SPE

LP /26 PostScript

ISA

Unsupported

SRIO.2+

Unsup.

LP26°-S

LP /26 PostScript

RS232

Unsupported

SRIO.2+

Unsup.

Par.

Unsupported

SRIO.2+

Unsup.

Unsup.
Unsup.

LP80010

LP 800 PostScript

Par.

Unsupported

SRIO.2+

Unsup.

222SA

ThinkJet, ISO cps, 6.5-in.

HP-IB

Unsupported

7.0

2.0c

2225C/P

ThinkJet

Par.

Unsupported

Unsup.

2225D

ThinkJet

Serial

Unsupported

Unsup.

2227A

QuietJet Plus, 192 cps, 14-in. Serial

Unsupported

7.0

2.0c

Par.

Unsupported

Unsup.

2227B

QuietJet Plus, 14-in.

HP-IB

Unsupported

7.0

2.0c

2228A

QuietJet,8-in.

Serial

Unsupported

7.0

2.0c

Par.

Unsupported

Unsup.

2235A/C

RuggedWriter, 480 cps, 14-in. Serial

Unsupported

7.0

2.0c

Unsupported

Unsup.

Par.

Text Printers

B-35

Series 400 Text Printer Support (continued)
Formal
Product
Number

2235B/D

2276Ao

2277Ao

RuggedWriter

DeskJet, 300 dpi, A-size

DeskJet Plus, 300 dpi, A-size

Type

Hardware
Qualification
and Support

Earliest Operating
System Supported
DOMAIN

HP-UX

SoftPC

HP-IE

Unsupported

7.0

2.0c

Serial

Unsupported

7.0

2.0c

Serial

All Models

Unsup.

7.0

2.0c

Par.

All except 400 d I

Unsup.

8.0

2.0c

Serial

All Models

Unsup.

7.0

2.0c

Par.

All except 400 d 1

Unsup.

8.0

2.0c

2562C

300 lpm impact, 16-in.

PCL

Unsupported

Unsup.

7.0

Via O.S.

2563

300 lpm impact, 16-in.

PCL

Unsupported

Unsup.

7.0

Via O.S.

2564

600 lpm impact, 16-in.

PCL

Unsupported

Unsup.

7.0

Via O.S.

2565Ao

600 lpm impact, 18-in.

PCL

All Models

Unsup.

7.0

Via O.S.

2566

900 lpm impact, 18-in.

PCL

All Models

Unsup.

7.0

Via O.S.
Via O.S.

PCL

All Models

Unsup.

7.0

#046

CIPER (aka #290,850)

HP-IE

Unsupported

7.0

Via O.S.

#046

Simple (aka #200)

HP-IE

Unsupported

7.0

Via O.S.

#049

RS-232C interface

RS232

All Models

Unsup.

7.0

Via O.S.

#050

RS-422 Interface

422

Unsupported

Unsup.

2567

Abbreviated
Product
Description

1200 lpm impact, 18-in.

#053

Parallel Interface

Par.

Unsupported

Unsup.

2603Ao

45 cps daisywheel

RS232

Unsupported

Unsup.

2684°

Laser Jet /2000 printer

PCL

Unsupported

Unsup.

7.0

2.0c

26843A

Serial interface

RS232

Unsupported

Unsup.

7.0

2.0c

26843B

Parallel interface

Par.

Unsupported

Unsup.

RS232

Unsupported

Unsup.

7.0

2.0c

Par.

Unsupported

Unsup.

RS232

Unsupported

Unsup.

7.0

2.0c

Par.

Unsupported

Unsup.

Unsup.
2.0c

2686Ao

2686Do

LaserJet, 8 ppm

LaserJet 500

2932Ao

200 cps impact

RS232

Unsupported

Unsup.

7.0

2933Ao

200 cps "Factory Printer"

RS232

Unsupported

Unsup.

7.0

2.0c

RS232

Unsupported

Unsup.

7.0

2.0c

HP-IE

Unsupported

7.0

2.0c

2934Ao
#046

8·36

200 cps "Office Printer"
HP-IB interface

Text Printers

Series 400 Text Printer Support (continued)
Formal
Product
Number

Abbreviated
Product
Description

Type

All Models

SRIO.2+

8.0

Font slot

All Models

SRIO.2+

8.0

peL

All Models

SRIO.2+

7.0

Parallel interface

Par.

All except 400dl

SRIO.2+

8.0

2.0c

Serial interface

RS232

All Models

SRIO.2+

7.0

2.0c

Font slot

33439Q

PostScript cartridge for
LaserJet-IID, -lIP, -III, -lID
and IIIP

33440A a

LaserJet-II,8 ppm single

33459A

33471A 0

33481A

SoftPC

HP-UX

PostScript cartridge for
LaserJet-IID, -lIP and -III

33449A

Earliest Operating
System Supported
DOMAIN

33439p o

33447 A 0

Hardware
Qualification
and Support

LaserJet-IID, 8 ppm double

2.0c

peL

All Models

SRIO.2+

7.0

2.0c

Parallel interface

Par.

All except 400dl

SRIO.2+

8.0

2.0c

Serial interface

RS232

All Models

SRIO.2+

7.0

2.0c

LaserJet-III, 8 ppm single

peL

All Models

SRIO.2+

7.0

2.0c

Parallel interface

Par.

All except 400 d 1

SRIO.2+

8.0

2.0c

Serial interface

RS232

All Models

SRIO.2+

7.0

2.0c

peL

All Models

SRIO.2+

8.0

Via O.S.

Parallel interface

Par.

All except 400dl

SRIO.2+

8.0

Via O.S.

Serial interface

RS232

All Models

SRIO.2+

8.0

Via O.S.

PCL-4

All Models

SRIO.2+

7.0

2.0c

Parallel interface

Par.

All except 400dl

SRIO.2+

8.0

2.0c

Serial interface

RS232

All Models

SRIO.2+

7.0

2.0c

LaserJet-IIID,8 ppm double

LaserJet-IIP,4 ppm single

LaserJet-IIIP,4 ppm single

PCL-5

All Models

Inv.

8.0

Inv.

Parallel interface

Par.

All Models

Inv.

8.0

Inv.

Serial interface

RS232

All Models

Inv.

8.0

Inv.

Text Printers

B-37

Series 400 Text Printer Support (continued)
Formal
Product
Number

Abbreviated
Product
Description

Type

Hardware
Qualification
and Support

Earliest Operating
System Supported
DOMAIN

HP-UX

SoftPC

LaserJet-IIIsi, 17 ppm double

33491A

HP Printer Command
Language

PCL-5

{see below}

A1906A

Planned

Per
Appl.

33494B/C

Adobe PostScript

{see below}

A1906A

Planned

Per
Appl.

33494B/C

PostScript autoswitching

C2058x

{see below}

A1906A

Planned

Unsup.

Parallel interface

Par.

All Models

A1905/6A

Planned

Serial interface

RS232

All Models

A1904A

Planned

Network interface

PC-LAN

Under Investigation

Inves.

per O.S.

Unsup.

7.0

2.0c

7.0

2.0c

8.0

2.0c

PaintJet color graphics

3630A

PCL

All Models

#001

Serial interface

RS232

All Models

#002

IEEE-488 interface

HP-IB

All except 400 d 1,425 e

#002

Parallel interface

Par.

All except 400 d 1

Asian Workstation, PCL

HP-IB

All except 400d1,425e

7.0

Via O.S.

Serial interface

RS232

All Models

7.0

Via O.S.

160 cps impact

HP-IB

Unsupported

7.0

Via O.S.

480 lpm thermal

HP-IB

Unsupported

7.0

Via O.S.

41063Ao
#040
82906A

9876Ao

Notes:

PostScript printers (e.g. LaserJet with PostScript cartridge) are
supported only for printing of PostScript output/files. No plaintext- or
PeL-to-PostScript capability is supported yet. See the Graphics section
for information on support of printers as graphics peripherals.

8-38

Text Printers

Series 400 Graphics Devices
In general, the graphics libraries rely on the Starbase device handlers for
support.
For some devices, separate rows document hardware and software support.
This is because software support is principally dependent on command set
(device personality) and hardware support is dependent on the physical
interface.
For printers, this table refers only to the graphics capability. If a
graphics-capable HP printer is not listed here, it is probably not even
supported as a text printer. Refer to the Series 400 Text Printer Support table
(previous) for information on support of text printing.
No PostScript device handlers are presently provided for HP- UX. DOS
applications are usually device-dependent. Also, unless they support HP-PCL,
DOS may require that the printer be switch-configured for IBM/Epson
emulation.

Graphics 8-39

Series 400 Graphics Device Support
Formal
Product
Number

Abbreviated
Product
Description

Hardware
Qualification
and Support

Earliest Operating
System Supported
DOMAIN

HP-UX

{none}

EVRX Grayscale

As built-in only

10.3+

8.0

{none}

EVRX Color 1024x768

As built-in only

10.3+

8.0

{none}

EVRX Color 1280 X 1024

As built-in only

10.3+

8.0

A-LPFK

32-button pad

Serial

All Models

10.2+,GPR

Unsup.

AI096A

Monochrome VRX board

DIO-II

All Models

10.2+

7.03, X , Starbase

AI097A

Monitor: 19-in., 1280Xl024, 72
Hz, for A1659A

Color

{per interface}

A1416A

Color VRX board

DIO-II

All except 400 d I

10.2+

7.0, X , Starbase

A1497A/B

Monitor: 16-in., 1280xl024, 72
Hz, for A1659A

Color

{per interface}

A1659A

CRX 1280xl024x8

SGC

As built-in only

10.3+

8.0

A1924A

GRX 1280xl024

SGC

As built-in only

A2269-72A

Series 700 CRX Upgrades

SGC

Unsupported

CGP

CP300 (Tek 4693DX)

Par.*

CGPI0AT

CP300 (Tek 4693DX)

CGP9-AT

CP300 (Tek 4693DX)

C1200A

Asian System Printer

C1202A

Asian Serial Printer

Serial interface

Type

10.3+

8.0

Unsup.

All except 400 d I

10.2+, cpscr

ISA

All except 400dl

10.2+, cpscr

ISA

All except 400 d I

10.2+,cpscr

APCL

All Models

Unsup.

7.0, pcltrans

Unsup.

7.0, pcltrans

RS232

All Models

APCL

IAll Models

Unsup.

7.0, pcltrans

#IAA

Parallel interface

Par.

Unsupported

Unsup.

#IA8

IEEE-488 interface

HP-IB

All HP-IB Models

Unsup.

7.0, pcltrans

Serial interface

RS232

All Models

Unsup.

7.0, pcltrans

C1600Ao

7600 Model 240D plotter

HP-GL/2

Unsup.

7.0, Starbase

C1601A

7600 Model 240E plotter

HP-GL/2

Unsup.

#IA9

8-40

IEEE-488 interface

HP-IB

All HP-IB Models

Serial interface

RS232

Unsupported

Parallel interface

par.

Unsupported

Graphics

7.0, Starbase

Series 400 Graphics Device Support (continued)
Formal
Product
Number

C1602A

Abbreviated
Product
Description

PaintJet XL, B-size color

Hardware
Qualification
and Support

Type

PCL

Earliest Operating
System Supported
DOMAIN

HP-UX

w/C1608A

7.0, pcltrans

inkjet
Opt.1AX

Serial/paraJlel interface

Par.

All except 400 d I

10.2+

Inves.

Opt.1AX

Serial/ parallel interface

RS232

All Models

10.2+

7.0, pcltrans

Opt.1A8

IEEE-488/serial interface

HP-IB

All HP-IB Models

7.0, pcltrans

C1608A

HP-GL/2 cartridge

HP-GL/2

All Models

10.2+

7.0, Starbase

No interface

No driver

10.2+

7.0, Starbase,

C1613A

PaintWriter (QuickDraw)

Apple

C1620A

Series 7600 Model 355, E-size
color electrostatic
plotter/printer

HP-GL/2
PCL

C1625A,
C1629A

C1627A,
C1631A

pcltrans

IEEE-488 Interface

HP-IB

All HP-IB Models

Serial Interface

RS232

Unsupported

Parallel Interface

Par.

All except 400 d I

Series 7600 Model 250, D-size
monochrome electrostatic
plotter/printer

HP-GL/2,
PCL

HP-IB

All HP-IB Models

RS232

Unsupported

Parallel Interface

Par.

Unsupported

HP-GL/2,
PCL

HP-IB

Serial Interface

RS232

Parallel Interface

Par.

7.0, Starbase,

pcltrans

IEEE-488 Interface

10.2+
10.2+

Serial Interface

Series 7600 Model 255, E-size
monochrome electrostatic
plotter/printer

10.2+
7.0, Starbase,

10.2+

pcltrans

All HP-IE Model.

Unsupported

IUnsupported

10.2+

Graphics

8-41

Series 400 Graphics Device Support (continued)
ForInal
Product
NUInber

C1633A

Abbreviated
Product
Description

Type

Hardware
Qualification
and Support

Earliest Operating
SysteIn Supported
DOMAIN

HP-UX

DesignJet inkjet plotter
Vector language

HP-GL/2

All Models

Raster language

HP-RTL

All Models

Serial interface

RS232

All Models

Parallel interface

Par.

All Models

C1642A

HP-IB interface

MIO

All Models

C2059A

Novell Netware ilf

MIO

Unsupported

Unsup.

C1662A

Paint Writer XL (QuickDraw) Apple

No interface

No driver

C1742A

LaserJet FAX

RS232,
Par.

Unsupported

No driver

Cl750A§

ScanJet lIC

mcSCSI

Via Third Party

3rd Pty

LaserJet lIP+ printer

PCL4

{per interface}

10.3+

Parallel interface

Par.

All Models

10.3+

Serial interface

RS232

All Models

10.3+

C2088A

PCL-5 cartridge for LaserJet
lIP, includes HP-GL/2

Font slot

All Models

C2106A

Deskjet 500, 300 dpi A-size

C2007 A

C2113A
C2114A

8-42

8.0,cadplt2

RS232

All Models

Unsup.

Par.

All except 400 d 1

Unsup.

Planned

DeskWriterc (QuickDraw)

Apple

No interface

No driver

DeskJet 500C, 300 dpi, color

PCL3

All Models

Parallel interface

Par.

All Models

Serial interface

RS232

All Models

Graphics

Planned

Series 400 Graphics Device Support (continued)
Formal
Product
Number

Abbreviated
Product
Description

Type

Hardware
Qualification
and Support

Earliest Operating
System Supported
DOMAIN

HP-UX

C2301 ° AlB X-terminal base unit

X-l1

All Models

Planned

7.0

C2302Ao

X-l1

All Models

Planned

7.0
7.0
7.0

Monochrome X-terminal, 17-in.

C2303° AlB VGA color X-terminal, 14-in.

X-II

All Models

Planned

C2304° AlB Hi-res color X-terminal, 16-in.

X-l1

All Models

Planned

C230So AlB Grap Scale X-terminal, 19-in.

X-l1

All Models

Planned

7.0

C2307Bo

X-l1

All Models

Planned

7.0

Color X-terminal, Japan, 19-in.

700/RX X Stations
C2701A/B

Mi base unit, monochrome

X-l1

All Models

10.2+

7.0

C2702B

19Mi X Station, monochrome

X-l1

All Models

10.2+

7.0

C2704A

Ci Base unit, med-res color

X-II

All Models

10.2+

7.0

C270SA

14 Ci X Station, med-res color

X-l1

All Models

10.2+

7.0

C2706A

16 Ci X Station, med-res color

X-l1

All Models

10.2+

7.0

C2709A

Ca Base unit, hi-res color

X-l1

All Models

10.2+

7.0

C2710A

16Ca Base unit, hi-res color

X-l1

All Models

10.2+

7.0

C2711A

19Ca Base unit, hi-res color

X-l1

All Models

HCD-MMP

(Genicom) impact

RS232

Unsupported

K1388

8 knob Dial Set

Serial

All Models

10.2+,GPR

Unsup.

K1410

Mouse,3-button

Quad.

All Models

10.2+,GPR

7.0, X , Starbase

Unsup.

K1422

Spaceball XYZ, 8-button

K1424

Summagraphics Bit Pad

K1432

Summagraphics B-tablet

Two

10.2+

7.0

10.2+,cpscr

Unsup.

Serial

{see: SPTL-2003}

Serial

Vendor supported

10.2+,GPR

Serial

Vendor supported

10.2+,GPR

Unsup.

K1434

3B Trackball, Marconi RB2

Quad.

All Models

10.2+,GPR

Unsup.

K143S

3B Trackball, Itac

Quad.

Vendor supported

10.2+,GPR

Unsup.

Graphics

B·43

Series 400 Graphics Device Support (continued)
ForInal
Product
NUInber

Abbreviated
Product
Description

Type

Earliest Operating
System Supported

Hardware
Qualification
and Support

DOMAIN

HP-UX

K1603

Shinko CHC-33S, 200 dpi color

Par.

Vendor supported

Vendor sup.

Unsup.

K1604

Shinko CHC-336, 200 dpi color,
HP-GL, CGI/CGM

Vendor supported

Vendor sup.

Unsup.

Parallel interface

Par.

Vendor supported

Vendor sup.

Unsup.

Serial interface

RS232

Vendor supported

Vendor sup.

Unsup.

K160S

Shinko CHC-34S, 300 dpi color

Par.

Vendor supported

Vendor sup.

Unsup.

K1606

Shinko CHC-64SB, 300 dpi
color

Par.

Vendor supported

Vendor sup.

Unsup.

LP26-SPE

LP /26 PostScript

Par.

Unsupported

10.2+,GPR

Unsup.

LP26-S

LP /26 PostScript

RS232

Unsupported

10.2+,GPR

Unsup.

LP80010

LP 800 PostScript

10.2+,GPR

Unsup.

7.0, X , Starbase

\(da

Unsupported

Serial interface

RS232

Unsupported

Parallel iff

Par.

Unsupported

HP-HIL

All Models

M1309A

3-button trackball

SPTL-2003

Spaceball XYZ, 8-button

Serial

Vendor supported

Vendor sup.

222SA

ThinkJet, ISO cps, 6.S-in.

HP-IB

Unsupported

Unsup.

7.0, pcltrans

222SC/P

ThinkJet

Par.

Unsupported

Unsup.

222SD

ThinkJet

Serial

Unsupported

Unsup.

7.0, pcltrans

2227A

QuietJet Plus, 192 cps, 14-in. Serial

7.0, pcltrans

2227B

QuietJet Plus, 14-in.

2228A

QuietJet, 8-in.

223SA/C

223SB/D

Unsupported

Unsup.

Par.

Unsupported

Unsup.

HP-IB

Unsupported

Unsup.

7.0, pcltrans

Serial

Unsupported

Unsup.

Par.

Unsupported

Unsup.

Unsupported

Unsup.

7.0, pcltrans

Par.

Unsupported

Unsup.

HP-IB

Unsupported

Unsup.

7.0, pcltrans

Serial

Unsupported

Unsup.

7.0, pcltrans
7.0, pcltrans

RuggedWriter, 480 cps, 14-in. Serial

RuggedWriter

7.0, pcltrans

Unsup.

2276A o

DeskJet, 300 dpi, A-size

Serial

All Models

Unsup.

Par.

AH except 400dl

Unsup.

Planned

2277 A °

DeskJet Plus, 300 dpi, A-size

Serial

All Models

Unsup.

7.0, pcltrans

Unsup.

Planned

8-44

Graphics

IPar.

AH except 400 d I

Series 400 Graphics Device Support (continued)
Abbreviated
Product
Description

Formal
Product
Number

Type

Hardware
Qualification
and Support

Earliest Operating
System Supported
DOMAIN

HP-UX

2393A 0

Graphics terminal, termO

RS232

Unsupported

Unsup.

7.0, Starbase

2397 A 0

Color terminal, termO

RS232

Unsupported

Unsup.

7.0, Starbase

2562C

300 lpm impact, 16-in.

PCL

Unsupported

Unsup.

7.0, pc/trans

2563

300 lpm impact, 16-in.

PCL

Unsupported

Unsup.

7.0, pc/trans

2564

600 [pm impact, 16-in.

PCL

Unsupported

Unsup.

7.0, pc/trans

2565A 0

600 lpm impact, 18-in.

PCL

All Models

Unsup.

7.0, pc/trans

2566

900 lpm impact, 18-in.

PCL

All Models

Unsup.

7.0, pcitrans

2567

1200 lpm impact, 18-in.

PCL

All Models

Unsup.

7.0, pc/trans

CIPER ilf (aka #290,850)

HP-IB

Unsupported

Unsup.

7.0, pcitrans

#046
#046

Simple protocol (aka #200)

HP-IB

Unsupported

Unsup.

7.0, pc/trans

#049

RS232 interface

RS232

All Models

Unsup.

7.0, pcitrans

#050

RS-422 Interface

422

Unsupported

Unsup.

#053

Parallel Interface

Par.

Unsupported

Unsup.

PCL

Unsupported

Unsup.

7.0, pc/trans

26843A

Serial interface

RS232

Unsupported

Unsup.

7.0, pc/trans

26843B

Parallel interface

Par.

Unsupported
Unsup.

7.0, pcitrans

Unsup.

7.0, pc/trans

7.0, pcitrans

2684

LaserJet/2000 printer

2686A 0

LaserJet, 8 ppm

RS232

Unsupported

Par.

Unsupported

2686D o

LaserJet 500

RS232

Unsupported

Par.

Unsupported

RS232

Unsupported

Unsup.

I
2932A 0

200 cps impact

2933A 0

200 cps "Factory Printer"

RS232

Unsupported

Unsup.

7.0, pcitrans

2934A 0

200 cps "Office Printer"

RS232

Unsupported

Unsup;

7.0, pcitrans

HP-IB

Unsupported

Unmp.

7.0, pc/trans

#046

HP-IB interface

Graphics

8-45

Series 400 Graphics Device Support (continued)
Formal
Product
Number

Type

Hardware
Qualification
and Support

Earliest Operating
System Supported
DOMAIN

HP-UX

10.2+,GPR

Unsup.

7.0, pcltrans

33439P /Q

Post Script cartridge for
LaserJet-IID, -lIP and -III

Font slot

All Models

33440A 0

LaserJet-II, 8 ppm single

PCL

Unsupported

Parallel interface

Par.

All except 400 d 1

10.2+

8.0 pcltrans

Serial interface

RS232

All Models

10.2+

7.0, pcltrans

33447 A 0

33449A

33459A

334 71A 0

33481A

Abbreviated
Product
Description

33491A

33494B

C2058x

B·46

LaserJet-IID, 8 ppm double

PCL

All Models

Inves.

7.0, pcltrans

Parallel interface

Par.

All except 400 d I

10.2+

8.0 pcltrans

Serial interface

RS232

All Models

10.2+

7.0, pcltrans

PCL

All Models

Inves.

7.0, pcltrans

Parallel interface

Par.

All except 400 d 1

10.2+

8.0 pcltrans

Serial interface

RS232

All Models

10.2+

7.0, pcltrans

PCL

All Models

8.0 pcltrans

Parallel interface

Par.

All except 400 d I

8.0 pcltrans

Serial interface

RS232

All Models

8.0 pcltrans

LaserJet-III, 8 ppm single

LaserJet-IIID,8 ppm double

LaserJet-IIP, 4 ppm single

7.0, pcltrans

PCL-4

All Models

Parallel interface

Par.

All except 400 d 1

10.2+

8.0 pcltrans

Serial interface

RS232

All Models

10.2+

7.0, pcltrans

LaserJet-IIIP, 4 ppm single

w/33439P

PCL-5

All Models

Inv.

8.0

Parallel interface

Par.

All Models

Inv.

8.0

Serial interface

RS232

All Models

Inv.

8.0

HP Printer Command
Language

PCL-5

{see below}

10.2+

Planned

HP-GL/2

{see below}

10.2+

Planned

Adobe PostScript

{see below}

10.2+

Planned

Parallel interface

Par.

All Models

10.2+

Planned

Serial interface

RS232

All Models

10.2+

Planned

Network interface

PC-LAN

Under Investigation

Inves.

LaserJet-IIIsi, 17 ppm double

Graphics

Series 400 Graphics Device Support (continued)
Formal
Product
Number

Abbreviated
Product
Description

Type

Hardware
Qualification
and Support

Earliest Operating
System Supported
DOMAIN

35723A

12-inch touch bezel

HP-HIL

Unsupported

3630A

PaintJet color graphics

HP-UX

pcltrans

PCL

All Models

Unsup.

7.0,

#001

Serial interface

RS232

All Models

Unsup.

7.0,

pcltrans

#002

IEEE-488 interface

HP-IB

All HP-IB Models

Unsup.

7.0,

pcltrans

#002

Parallel interface

Par.

All except 400 d 1

Unsup.

8.0,

pc/trans

Asian Workstation, PCL

HP-IB

All HP-IB Models

Unsup.

7.0,

pcltrans

Serial interface

RS232

All Models

Unsup.

7.0,

pcltrans

HP\1150-II termO terminal

RS232

Unsupported

Unsup.

7.0, Star base

45911 A/C

11 x11-in. tablet

HP-HIL

All Models

Unsup.

7.0, Starbase

46060A

Mouse, 2 button

HP-HIL

All Models

Unsup.

7.0, X , Starbase

46060B

Mouse, 3 button

HP-HIL

All Models

Unsup.

7.0, X , Starbase

46083A

I-Knob dial set

HP-HIL

Unsupported

46085A

9-Knob dials set

HP-HIL

All Models

Unsup.

7.0, Starbase

Unsup.

7.0, Starbase

41063A 0
#040
45850 0
0

46086A

32-button pad

HP-HIL

All Models

46087

Digitizer, A-size

HP-HIL

All Models

Unsup.

7.0, Starbase

46090C

Digitizer, A-size

HP-HIL

All Models

Unsup.

7.0, Starbase

46088

Digitizer, B-size

HP-HIL

All Models

Unsup.

7.0, Starbase

46091C

Digitizer, B-size

HP-HIL

All Models

Unsup.

7.0, Starbase

46094A

Quadrature adaptor

HP-HIL

All Models

Unsup.

7.0, X , Starbase

46095A 0

3-button mouse

HP-HIL

{see K1410}

Graphics

8-47

Series 400 Graphics Device Support (continued)
Formal
Product
Number

Abbreviated
Product
DescriptiQn

Type

Hardware
Qualification
and Support

Earliest Operating
System Supported

DOMAIN

SketchPro 11 x11-in. tablet

RS232

Unsupported

Unsup.

7440A

ColorPro 8-pen A-size plotter

HP-GL

Per interface

Unsup.

7.0, Starbase

#001

Serial interface

RS232

All Models

Unsup.

7.0, Starbase

#002

IEEE-488 interface

HP-IB

All HP-IB Models

7.0, Starbase

7440Bx

ColorPro (HP-IB only)

HP-GL

All HP-IB Models

Unsup.

7.0, Starbase

7475A

B-size, 6-pen plotter

HP-GL

Per interface

Unsup.

7.0, Starbase

Unsup.

7.0, Starbase

#001

Serial interface

RS232

All Models

#002

IEEE-488 interface

HP-IB

All HP-IB Models

7475Bx

(HP-IB only)

HP-GL

Unsup.

7.0, Starbase

7550A 0

B-size, 8-peri plotter

HP-GL

Unsup.

7.0, Starbase

Serial interface

RS232

All Models

IEEE-488 interface

HP-IB

All HP-IB Models

7550B

B-size, 8-pen plotter

HP-GL

#005

Eavesdrop serial iff

RS232

#005

IEEE-488 interface

HP-IB

#006

Single serial iff

RS232

#006

Parallel interface

7570A

17570A

HP-UX

7060A 0

7575A

7.0, Starbase
No

7.0, Starbase

Unsup.

Planned

Unsup.

Planned

All HP-IB Models

Planned

Under investigation

Inves.

Par.

Under investigation

Inves.

HP-GL

All Models

Unsup.

7.0, Starbase

Serial interface

RS232

All Models

Unsup.

7.0, Starbase

IEEE-488 Interface

HP-IB

All HP-IB Models

7.0, Starbase

HP-GL

Unsup.

7.0, Starbase

HP-GL

Unsup.

7.0, Starbase

Unsup.

7.0, Starbase

DraftPro C/D-size, 8-pen pltr

DraftPro DXL A .. D-size,

All Models

8-pen plotter
7576A

17570A

DraftPro EXL A .. E-size,
8-pen plotter
Serial interface

RS232

All Models
All HP-IB Models

IEEE-488 interface

HP-IB

7.0, Starbase

7580B

D-size, 8-pen plotter

HP-GL

Unsup.

7.0, Starbase

7585B

E-size, 8-pen plotter

HP-GL

Unsup.

7.0, Starbase

7586B

E-size, 8-pen, roll-feed

HP-GL

Unsup.

7.0, Starbase

8-48

Serial interface

RS232

Unsupported

Unsup.

7.0, Starbase

IEEE-488 interface

HP-IB

Unsupported

7.0, Starbase

Graphics

Series 400 Graphics Device Support (continued)
Abbreviated
Product
Description

ForInal
Product
NUInber

7595A 0

DrajtMaster E-size, 8-pen

Type

Hardware
Qualification
and Support

Earliest Operating
SysteIn Supported
DOMAIN

HP-UX

HP-GL

Unsup.

7.0, Starbase

HP-GL

Unsup.

7.0, Starbase

plotter
7596A 0

DrajtMaster E-size, 8-pen,
roll-feed

7595B/C

Serial interface

RS232

All Models

IEEE-488 interface

HP-IB

All HP-IB
ModelModels

Drajtmaster SX E-size, 8-pen

7.0, Starbase
No

7.0, Starbase

HP-GL/2

10.2+

7.0, Starbase

HP-GL/2

10.2+

7.0, Starbase

10.2+

7.0, Starbase

10.2+

7.0, Starbase

10.2+

7.0, Starbase

Unsup.

plotter
7596B/C

7599A/B

82906A 0

Drajtmaster RX E-size,
8-pen, roll-feed
Serial interface

RS232

All Models

IEEE-488 interface

HP-IB

All HP-IB Models

DrajtM aster MX E-size,
8-pen, roll-feed, spooled

HP-GL/2

Serial interface

RS232

All Models

IEEE-488 interface

HP-IB

All HP-IB Models

HP-IB

Unsupported

160 cps impa<;t
Monochrome Scanners

9190A 0

ScanJet, SCL

Par.

Unsupported

9195A

ScanJet Plus, SCL

Par.

All except 400dl

9666A 0

Inves.

7.0t5

Unsupported

Unsup.

7.0, Starbase

Ruggedized 2397 A

RS232

98287 A 0

1024x768x8 M.A.D.bus

DIO-I/O

Unsupported

Unsup.

98542A

512x400xl video iff

DIO-Sys.

Unsupported

7.0, X , Starbase

98543A

512x400x4 video iff

DIO-Sys.

Unsupported

7.0, X , Starbase

98544A 0

1024x768x1 video iff

DIO-Sys.

Unsupported

7.0, X , Starbase

98544B

1024x768x1 video iff

DIO-Sys.

Unsupported

7.0, X , Starbase

98545A 0

1024x768x4 video iff

DIO-Sys.

Unsupported

7.0, X , Starbase

98546A

512X390X2 compat. iff

DIO-I/O

Unsupported

Unsup.

98547A

1024x768x6 video iff

DIO-Sys.

Unsupported

7.0, X , Starbase

Graphics

B-49

Series 400 Graphics Device Support (continued)
Formal
Product
Number

Abbreviated
Product
Description

Type

Hardware
Qualification
and Support

Earliest Operating
System Supported

DOMAIN

HP-UX

98548A

"MH" 1280x1024x1 video iff

DIO-II

Unsupported

7.0, X , Starbase

98549A

"C+" 1024 X 768 x6 video iff

DIO-II

Unsupported

7.0, X , Starbase

98550A

"CH" 1280x1024x8 video iff

DIO-II

400S/425S/433S
only

7.0, X , Starbase

98556A

"CHX" Accelerator

DIO-II

400S/425S/433S
only

7.0, Starbase

98700°

"cx"

Controller

M.A.D.

Unsupported

Unsup.

98702A§

Personal VRX LGB iff

DIO-II

All except
400dl,425e

Inves.

7.03, X , PHIGS,
Starbase

98705A

Personal VRX P2 processor

LGB

All except 400dl

Inves.

7.03, X , PHIGS,
Starbase

98705B

Personal VRX P3 processor

LGB

All except 400dl

Inves.

7.03, X , PHIGS,
Starbase

98705C§

Personal VRX P1 processor

LGB

All except 400dl

Inves.

7.03, X , PHIGS,
Starbase

98720A

SRX Processor

LGB

Unsupported

7.0, X , Starbase

98724Ao

98720A SRX LGB interface

DIO-I/O

Unsupported

7.0, X , Starbase

98725A

98720A SRX LGB interface

DIO-Sys.

Unsupported

7.0, X , Starbase

98726A

98730A TurboSRX LGB iff

DIO-II

Unsupported

7.0, X , Starbase

98727A§

Turbo VRX PDMA iff

DIO-II

400S/425S/433S
only

Inves.

7.03, X , PHIGS,
Starbase

98728A§

Turbo VRX VDMA iff

DIO-II

400S/425S/433S
only

Inves.

7.03, X , PHIGS,
Starbase

98730A

TurboSRX Processor

LGB

Unsupported

7.0, X , Starbase

98735A

Turbo VRX T1 Processor

G-Bus

400S/425S/433S
only

Inves.

7.03, X , PHIGS,
Starbase

98736A

Turbo VRX T2 Processor

G-Bus

400S/425S/433S
only

Inves.

7.03, X , PHIGS,
Starbase

98736B

Turbo VRX T3 Processor

G-Bus

400S/425S/433S
only

Inves.

7.03, X , PHIGS,
Starbase

9876Ao

480 lpm thermal

HP-IB

Unsupported

Unsup.

B-50

Graphics

Notes:

*
cadplt2

ITE
No handler

No path

pcltrans

§
screenpr

Via SBL

The CP-300 (Tektronix 4693DX) is incompatible with the
built-in parallel interface. The "KIT-CENT-CP" ISA card is not
currently supported.
The cadplt2 HP-GL/2 device handler emits the correct PCL-5
instruction to place this device in HP-GL/2 mode, but does not
place the device back in PCL mode upon completion.
The device also has graphics support in the ITE (Internal
Terminal Emulator, non-window) mode.
No native device handler (driver) software available for this
device (as a graphics device). Basic I/O may be possible under
HP- UX. A user-written handler may also be possible.
In this graphics library there is presently no native handler for
this device, nor a transparent path to the Starbase handler,
nor a Gescape to such handlers, nor any way to create a
Starbase bitmap file. Only local X windows are supported (no
X -terminals).
Devices supported by pcltrans are also supported by screenpr.
Other than for screen-copies, output to this device requires
generating a Starbase bitmap file, and then translating that
file to HP Printer Command Language with the pcltrans(l)
command. Both monochrome and color printing are supported.
A Gescape is required to create a Starbase bitmap file from
HP-GKS.
Product number listed for reference, orderable only as part of
supporting graphics processor.
Output to this device is limited to capturing a copy of an image
appearing on the video screen. Resolution is therefore limited
by the CRT. The screenpr(l) command line may also appear in
the hardcopy output unless clipping options are specified .. Both
monochrome and color printing are supported.
I/O operations are transparently supported, and use the
Starbase library device handler for this device.

Graphics

B-51

Untested

The Starbase handler for this device is present in Series 700
HP- UX, but has not been tested and the device is not considered
supported. In the case of peL raster printers, neither pcltrans
(GKS and Starbase) nor screenpr have been tested with this
device on Series 700 HP -UX.
Basic I/O is possible, but no library or application support is
provided or planned for the 9195A.

8-52

Graphics

Series 400 Datacomm Devices
This table covers external devices and does not include interface cards, which
are covered in the Series 400 Interface and Plug-In Accessory Support table,
next.
The Min. Boot ROM column indicates the minimum revision of boot code
required to boot an operating system from or through the device.
Transp. means that the device is transparent to software.
Series 400 Datacomm Device Support
Formal
Product
Number

Abbreviated
Product
Description

Type

Min.
Boot
ROM

Hardware
Qualification
and Support

Earliest Operating
System Supported
DOMAIN

HP-UX

SoftPC

Unsup.

Transp. Vendor
supported

10.2+

Unsup.

Via O.S.

LAN

Transp. Vendor
supported

10.2+

Unsup.

Via O.S.

K1097

"ETH-RPTR-2C" AMR-9C LAN
Multiport repeater; 2 AUI/f

Transp. Vendor
supported

10.2+

Unsup.

Via O.S.

K1098

"ETH-RPTR-9C" AMR-9C
Multiport repeater; 8 ENC,
1 AUI/f

LAN

Tevice Name

Path Name

Port
Number

Minor
Number

HP-HIL Devices
~vice

Name

Path Name

File
Type

Major
Number

Minor
Numbel'

Power
Req.

Bus
Address

8-75

Copy these work sheets as many times as you need for the devices on your
system.

B-76

Mass Storage Devices
Device Name

Pat.h Name

File
Type

Major
Number

Minor
Number

Bus
Address

Slot.
Nbr

Printers
Device Name

Path Name

File
Type

Major
Number

Minor
Number

Port #/
Bus
Address

8·77

Copy these work sheets as many times as you need for the devices on your
system.

8-78

Plotters
Device Name

Path Name

File
Type

Major
Number

Port #/
Bus
Address

Minor
Number

Terminals and Modems
Device Name

Port
Number

Path Name

Minor
Number

HP-HIL Devices
)evice Name

Path Name

File
Type

Major
Number

Minor
Number

Power
Req.

Bus
Address

8-79

Index

Index
1
13279B Color Monitor, 11-31

2
2225A ThinkJet Printer, 9-2
2227 A QuietJ et Plus Printer 9-7
2227B QuietJ et Plus Printer: 9-7
2228B QuietJ et Printer, 9-7
2563B Printer, 9-14
2564B Printer, 9-14
2566B Printer, 9-14
2684A/D/P LaserJet 2000 Printer, 9-21
2686A/D LaserJ et Printer, 9-28
2932A Printer, 9-41
2934A Printer, 9-41

3
33440A LaserJet-II Printer, 9-28
33447A LaserJet-IID Printer, 9-28
35723A HP-HIL Touch Bezel, 13-7
3630A PaintJ et Printer, 9-46
4

45911A HP-HIL Graphics Tablet, 13-7
45911C HP-HIL Graphics Tablet, 13-7
46020 HP-HIL Keyboard, 13-8
46021 HP-HIL Keyboard, 13-8
46060A HP-HIL Two-Button Mouse ,
13-8
46060B HP-HIL Three-Button Mouse ,
13-8

46080A HP-HIL Extension Module
13-8
'
46081A HP-HIL Extension/Speaker
Module, 13-8
46082A HP-HIL Remote Extension
Module, 13-8
46082B HP-HIL Remote Extension
Module, 13-8
46083A HP-HIL Rotary Control Knob,
13-8
46084A HP-HIL ID Module, 13-9
46085A HP-HIL Control Dials Module,
13-9
46086A HP-HIL Button Box, 13-9
46087/88A Digitizers, 11-24
46087 A HP-HIL Digitizer, 13-9
46088A HP-HIL Digitizer, 13-9
46089A Cursor, 11-24
46089A HP-HIL Cursor, 13-9
46094A HP-HIL Quadrature Port, 13-10
4-Channel Multiplexer
98642A, 5-2, 5-12
4-Channel Multiplexer Interface
98642A, 2-50

5
50961A SRM Interface, 2-46

6
650/ A optical drive
example mknod command, 14-20

Index-1

Index

7907 A Disk Drive, 7-22
7911 Disk/Tape Drive, 7-27
7912 Disk/Tape Drive, 7-27
7914 Disk/Tape Drive, 7-27
7933 Disk Drive, 7-35
7935 Disk Drive, 7-35
7936H Disk Drive, 7-35
7937H Disk Drive, 7-35
7941A Disk/Tape Drive, 7-40
7942A Disk/Tape Drive, 7-40
7945A Disk/Tape Drive, 7-40
7946A Disk/Tape Drive, 7-40
7957 A Disk Drive, 7-46
7957B Disk Drive, 7-46
7957S SCSI Disk Drive, 7-51
7958A Disk Drive, 7-46
7958B Disk Drive, 7-46
7958S SCSI Disk Drive, 7-51
7959B Disk Drive, 7-46
7959S SCSI Disk Drive, 7-51
7962B Disk Drive, 7-46
7963B Disk Drive, 7-46
7974A Tape Drive, 7-97
7978A Tape Drive, 7-103
7978B Tape Drive, 7-103
7979A Tape Drive, 7-109
7980A Tape Drive, 7-109
7980XC Tape Drive, 7-109

8
8-Channel
98638A,
8-Channel
98638A,

Multiplexer
5-2, 5-12
Multiplexer Interface
2-55

9111A Graphics Tablet, 11-18
9121D Flexible Disk Drive, 7-56
9121S Flexible Disk Drive, 7-56
9122C Flexible Disk Drive, 7-56
Index-2

9122D Flexible Disk Drive, 7-56
9122S Flexible Disk Drive, 7-56
9125S Flexible Disk Drive, 7-56
9127 A Flexible Disk Drive, 7-56
9133D Disk Drive, 7-63
9133H Disk Drive, 7-63
9133L Disk Drive, 7-63
9134D Disk Drive, 7-63
9134H Disk Drive, 7-63
9134L Disk Drive, 7-63
9144A Tape Drive, 7-92
9145A Tape Drive, 7-92
9153A Disk Drive, 7-71
9154A Disk Drive, 7-71
92916A HP-HIL Bar Code Reader,
13-10
98248A Floating-Point Accelerator,
2-84
98248B Floating-Point Accelerator, 2-88
98265A Small Computer Systems
Interface (SCSI), 2-19
98287 A Graphics Display Controller
Interface, 11-52
98546A Display Compatibility Interface,
2-4
98548/49/50A High Resolution Graphics
Interface, 11-33
98556A 2D Graphics Accelerator, 11-42
98562-66530 Human (System) Interface
Board, 2-74
98568A Backplane Expander, 4-24
98570A Backplane Expander, 4-1, 4-24
98577 A VMEbus Expander, 4-24
98620B DMA Controller Card, 2-96
98622A GPIO Interface, 2-9
98624A HP-IB Interface, 2-14
98625A HP-IB Disk Interface, 2-23
98625B HP-IB Disk Interface, 2-29
98626A RS-232-C Interface, 2-35
98627 A Color Output Interface, 11-25

Index

98628A Datacomm Interface, 2-41, 5-2,
5-12
98629A SRM Interface, 2-46
98635A Floating Point Math Card, 2-93
98638A 8-Channel Multiplexer, 5-2,
5-12
98638A 8-Channel Multiplexer Interface,
2-55
98642A 4-Channel Multiplexer, 5-2,
5-12
98642A 4-Channel Multiplexer Interface,
2-50
98643A Local Area Network (LAN)
Interface, 2-64
98644A Asynchronous Serial Interface,
2-68
98700 Graphics Display Controller,
11-52
98720A SRX Graphics Display
Controller, 11-65
98724A/25A Local Graphics Bus
Interface, 11-59
98726A Interface, 11-70
98730A TurboSRX Graphics Display
Controller, 11-74
9-track magnetic tape
device file format, 14-25
9-track magnetic tape drive
device file example, 14-28
minor number format, 14-26
mknod command example, 14-28

A
adding
a network-based printer, 10-3
device drivers to kernel using SAM,
A-9
EISA boards in automatic mode,
A-15
ElISA boards in interactive mode,
A-35

EISA boards using HP-UX commands,
A-19
EISA boards using SAM, A-18
ISA boards, A-35
adding a peripheral
overview, 1-5
Amigo-type hard disk drive
example mknod command, 14-20
Asynchronous Serial Interface
98644A, 2-68
automatic mode, A-I, A-6, A-15
adding EISA boards, A-15
moving boards, A-23
removing boards, A-24
using, A-15

B
Backplane Expander, 4-1
98568A, 4-24
98570A, 4-24
backup kernel for a cluster client, 14-7
block device, 1-7
block device file, 14-14
built-in device, 1-1
built-in HP-IB, 1-25
bus address, 1-7

C
CI511A HP-IB DDS-Format Drive,
7-118
C1512A SCSI DDS-Format Drive, 7-123
C1520B SCSI DDS-Format Drive, 7-128
C1521B SCSI DDS-Format Drive, 7-128
C1701A 650GB Optical Disk Drive,
7-17
C1701C 650GB Optical Disk Drive,
7-17
C2200 HP-IB Disk Drive, 7-79
C2203A HP-IB Disk Drive, 7-79
C2213A Mass Storage System, 7-85
C2214B Mass Storage System, 7-85
Index-3

Index

C2216T Mass Storage System, 7-85
C2217T Mass Storage System, 7-85
cartridge tape drive
device file example, 14-30
device file format, 14-29
minor number format, 14-29
mknod command example, 14-30
CD-ROM drive
Model 600/ A HP-IB, 7-2
CD-ROM Drive
A1999A Model 700/S, 7-8
cfg files, A-3, A-4, A-13
checking for correctness, A-26
displaying information on, A-32
format, A-4
grammar, A-5
cfgfiles command, A-32
cfgtypes command, A-32
changing choices for board functions,
A-41
character device, 1-7
character device file, 14-14
choices
changing, A-41
definition of, A-5
cluster
backup kernel for a client, 14-7
booting client from backup kernel,
14-11
booting server from backup kernel,
14-10
configuring kernel, 14-7
dfile requirement, 14-6
Color Output Interface
HP 98627 A, 11-25
command
add, A-35
cfgfiles, A-32
cfgtypes, A-32
comment, A-29
display, A-31
Index-4

eisa_config, A-26
help, A-29
init, A-32
mknod, 1-7, A-19
move, A-38
quit, A-32
remove, A-40
save, A-33
show, A-31
shutdown, 14-8
tset, 14-36
comment command, A-29
compiling drivers, A-13
conf.c, 14-7
config
running, 14-7
config.mk, 14-7
configuration
displaying information, A-30
initializing, A-32
kernel, A-19
log file, A-32
saving, A-33
troubleshooting, A-48
configuration description file, 14-6
conflicts, resolving with change, A-41
creating device files, 14-12
creating new sci files, A-33
CS80-type hard disk drive
example mknod command, 14-19
D

Datacomm Interface
98628A, 2-41, 5-2, 5-12
daugher boards
cards, 2-19
DDS-Format Drive
HP-IB C1511A, 7-118
SCSI C1512A, 7-123
SCSI C1520B, 7-128
SCSI C1521B, 7-128

Index

DDS-format tape drive
device file format, 14-31
DDS format tape drive
device file example, 14-32
minor number format, 14-32
mknod command example, 14-32
/ dev / console, 1-8
device driver, 1-5, 1-7
ensuring it is part of kernel, 14-2
list of drivers, 14-2
device drivers
adding to kernel using SAM, A-9
removing from kernel using SAM,
A-9
device file, 1-7
cartridge tape drive, 14-29
/ dev / console, 1-8
/ dev /kmem, 1-8
/dev/mem, 1-8
/dev/null, 1-8
/dev/root, 1-8
/ dev /rroot, 1-8
/dev /swap, 1-8
/dev/systty, 1-8
/dev/tty, 1-8
naming conventions, 1-8
device file characteristics
viewing, 14-15
device file, creating, A-19, A-21, A-23
device filename, 14-14
device files
650/ A optical drive, 14-20
9-track magnetic tape drive, 14-25
Amigo-type hard disk drive, 14-20
creating, 14-12
CS80-type hard disk drive, 14-19
DDS-format tape drive, 14-31
disks, 14-18
graphics display devices, 14-58
plotters and digitizers, 14-47
pseudo terminals, 14-45

SCSI-type hard disk drive, 14-20
terminals and modems, 14-35
device file type, 14-14
device guidelines
SCSI, 1-27
device information, 1-7
device type, 1-7
/ dev /kmem, 1-8
/dev/mem, 1-8
/dev/null, 1-8
/dev/pty, 14-45
/ dev / ptym, 14-45
/ dev /root, 1-8
/ dev /rroot, 1-8
/ dev /swap, 1-8
/dev/systty, 1-8
/dev/tty, 1-8
dfile, 14-6
creating, 14-6
in a cluster, 14-6
running config on, 14-7
directory
/etc/conf, A-13
/etc/eisa, A-4
disk
minor number format, 14-19
disk drive
7907A, 7-22
7933, 7-35
7935, 7-35
7936H, 7-35
7937H, 7-35
7957A, 7-46
7957B, 7-46
7958A, 7-46
7958B, 7-46
7959B, 7-46
7962B, 7-46
7963B, 7-46
9133D, 7-63
9133H, 7-63
Index-5

Index

9133L, 7-63
9134D, 7-63
9134H, 7-63
9134L, 7-63
9153A, 7-71
9154A, 7-71
Flexible 9121D, 7-56
Flexible 9121S, 7-56
Flexible 9122C, 7-56
Flexible 9122D, 7-56
Flexible 9122S, 7-56
Flexible 9125S, 7-56
Flexible 9127 A, 7-56
HP-IB C2200, 7-79
HP-IB C2203A, 7-79
SCSI 7957S, 7-51
SCSI 7958S, 7-51
SCSI 7959S, 7-51
disk drive types, 14-16
disks
device driver name, 14-17
device filenames, 14-18
device file permissions, 14-13
major numbers, 14-17
Disk/Tape Drive
7911, 7-27
7912, 7-27
7914, 7-27
7941A, 7-40
7942A, 7-40
7945A, 7-40
7946A, 7-40
display command, A-31
Display Compatibility Interface
98546A, 2-4
displaying
board configuration, A-30
cfg file information, A-32
DMA Controller Card
98620B, 2-96
drivers
Index-6

adding to /etc/master, A-14
compiling, A-13
list of, 1-8
NVM, A-18
E

E /ISA boards, A-1
adding in interactive mode, A-35
changing choices for board functions,
A-41
choices, A-5
displaying configuration, A-30
function definition, A-5
moving in interactive mode, A-38
removing in interactive mode, A-40
resources, A-5
setting switches and jumpers, A-34
troubleshooting configuration, A-48
EISA boards, A-1, A-3
adding in automatic mode, A-15
adding in interactive mode, A-35
adding using HP-UX commands,
A-19
adding using SAM, A-18
changing choices for board functions,
A-41
choices, A-5
function definition, A-5
moving in automatic mode, A-23
removing in automatic mode, A-24
resources, A-5
troubleshooting configuration, A-48
eisa_ config
adding boards in interactive mode,
A-35
adding EISA boards in automatic
mode, A-15
adding EISA boards using HP-UX
commands, A-19
adding EISA boards using SAM, A-18
automatic mode, A-1, A-6, A-15

Index

changing choices for board functions,
A-41
command syntax, A-26
concepts, A-3
-c option, A-26
displaying configuration, A-30
example session, A-43
exiting, A-32
initializing configuration, A-32
interactive mode, A-7, A-26
log file, A-32
moving boards in automatic mode,
A-23
moving boards in interactive mode,
A-38
-n option, A-26
online help, A-29
removing boards in automatic mode,
A-24
removing boards in interactive mode,
A-40
saving configuration, A-33
starting, A-26
troubleshooting, A-48
embedded device, 1-1
errors in configuration, A-48
/etc/conf/dfile, 1-7
kernel configuration file, 1-5
/etc/conf directory, A-13
/etc/eisa/config.err file, A-16
/etc/eisa/ config.log file, A-32
/etc/eisa directory, A-4
/etc/eisa/system.sci file, A-6
/etc/inittab
entry format, 14-42
example, 14-42
/etc/master file, 1-7, 1-8, A-14
adding drivers, A-14
/etc/ttytype
entry format, 14-41
example, 14-41

example eisa_config session, A-43
exiting eisa_config, A-32
Expander, 4-1
expanders, 4-24
F
file

cfg, A-3, A-4, A-13
conf.c, 14-7
config.mk, 14-7
/ dev / dsk, 14-14
/dev/rdsk, 14-14
dfile, 14-6
/etc/conf/dfile, 1-7, 14-2
/etc/eisa/config.err, A-16
/etc/eisa/config.log, A-32
/etc/eisa/system.sci, A-6
/etc/inittab, 14-36, 14-42
/etc/master, 1-7, 1-8, A-14
/etc/ttytype, 14-36, 14-41
kernel configuration, 1-5
sci, A-6
/SYSBCKUP, 14-7
Floating-Point Accelerator
98248A, 2-84
98248B, 2-88
Floating Point Math Card
98635A, 2-93
function, definition of, A-5

G
getty
entries in for terminals and modems,
14-36
GPIO devices, 14-61
device driver, 14-61
device file example, 14-61
device files, 14-61
major number, 14-61
minor number format, 14-61
mknod command example, 14-61
Index-7

Index

GPIO Interface
98622A, 2-9
grammar, cfg files, A-5
graphics dispaly devices
device file type, 14-58
graphics display devices, 14-58
device file location, 14-58
device files, 14-58
major number, 14-58
minor number format, 14-59
graphics table
HP 9111A, 11-18
graphics terminals, 5-2
guidelines for HP-IB interfaces, 1-23
H

hardware address, 14-14
determining, 1-5
general, 1-5
help command, A-29
HP 2563/64/66/67C Impact Printers,
9-60
HP 33449A LaserJet III Printer, 9-34
HP 33459A LaserJ et IIID Printer, 9-34
HP 33491A Laser Jet IIIsi Printer, 9-34
HP 45911A/C Graphics Tablet, 11-23
HP 7575/76A DraftPro DXL/EXL
Plotters, 11-6
HP 98702A Graphics Address and Data
Bus Interface, 11-79
HP 98705A/B/C Graphics Display
Controllers, 11-84
HP 98735-66580 Physical DMA Interface,
11-90
HP 98735-66581 Virtual DMA Interface,
11-96, 11-101
HP 98735A/36A/36B Graphics Display
Controllers, 11-102
HP A1416A High Resolution Color
Graphics Interface, 11-46

Index-8

HP C1600A/01A 7600 Series Models
240D and 240E Plotters, 11-4
HP C1602A PaintJet XL Printer, 9-52
HP C1620A Series 7600 Model 355
Electrostatic Plotter, 11-5
HP C1625A/27 A Series 7600 Models
250 and 255 Plotters, 11-6
HP-HIL
35723A Touch Bezel, 13-7
45911A Graphics Tablet, 13-7
45911C Graphics Tablet, 13-7
46020 Keyboard, 13-8
46021 Keyboard, 13-8
46060A Two-Button Mouse, 13-8
46060B Three-Button Mouse, 13-8
46080A Extension Module, 13-8
46081A Extension/Speaker Module,
13-8
46082A Remote Extension Module,
13-8
46082B Remote Extension Module,
13-8
46083A Rotary Control Knob, 13-8
46084A ID Module, 13-9
46085A Control Dials Module, 13-9
46086A Button Box, 13-9
46087 A Digitizer, 13-9
46088A Digitizer, 13-9
46089A Cursor, 13-9
46094A Quadrature Port, 13-10
92916A Bar Code Reader, 13-10
described, 13-2
limitations, 13-3
HP-HIL devices, 14-60
device file example, 14-60
device files, 14-60
major number, 14-60
minor number format, 14-60
mknod command example, 14-60
HP-IB device guidelines, 1-23
HP-IB Disk Interface

Index

98625A, 2-23
98625B, 2-29
HP-IB Interface
98624A, 2-14
HP-UX set up
for devices, 14-1
Human (System) Interface Board
98562-66530, 2-74

init command, A-32
initializing configuration, A-32
Installing Memory
Model 320, 4-4
Model 330, 4-8
Model 350, 4-12
integrated device
disk drive, 14-19
interactive mode, A-I, A-7, A-25
adding E/ISA boards, A-35
moving E/ISA boards, A-38
removing E/ISA boards, A-40
using, A-26
internal HP-IB, 1-25
ISA boards, A-I, A-3
adding, A-35
changing choices for board functions,
A-41
choices, A-5
configuring, A-25
function definition, A-5
moving, A-38
removing, A-40
resources, A-5
setting switches and jumpers, A-34
switches and jumpers, A-3
troubleshooting configuration, A-48

J
jumpers, A-3
setting, A-17, A-34

kernel
backup copy (/SYSBCKUP), 14-7
backup kernel for cluster client, 14-7
configuring, A-19
device drivers list, 14-2
reconfiguring to add/remove device
drivers using SAM, A-9
kernel configuration file, 1-5

LAN (Local Area Network) Interface
98643A, 2-64
line printer spooler system
adding a network-based printer, 10-3
adding printers, 10-4
Local Area Network (LAN) Interface
98643A, 2-64
log file, A-32

M
major number, 1-8, 14-14
manual organization, 1-2
Mass Storage System
C2213A, 7-85
C2214B, 7-85
C2216T, 7-85
C2217T, 7-85
master device
pseudo terminal, 14-45
memory
adding to your system, 4-1
Memory Configuration Wheel, 4-5
memory, non-volatile, A-6
minor number, 1-8, 14-14
minor number examples
plotters and digitizers, 14-49
minor number format
disk drive, 14-19
plotters and digitizers, 14-49

Index-9

Index

miscellaneous device class, 1-8
mknod
examples, 14-15
syntax and parameters, 14-14
mknod command, 1-7, A-19
mknod command examples
plotters and digitizers, 14-49
mknod example, disk drive, 14-19
mode
single-user, 14-8
Model 100GB/ A Optical Disk Library
System, 7-13
Model 100GB/C Optical Disk Library
System, 7-13
Model 1350SE
C2217T, 7-85
Model 20GB / A Optical Disk Library
System, 7-13
Model 20GB/C Optical Disk Library
System, 7-13
Model 320
Installing Memory, 4-4
Model 330
Installing Memory, 4-8
Model 350
Installing Memory, 4-12
Model 600/ A HP-IB CD-ROM Drive,
7-2
Model 60GB / A Optical Disk Library
System, 7-13
Model 60GB/C Optical Disk Library
System, 7-13
Model 660S
C2213A, 7-85
C2214B, 7-85
C2216T, 7-85
Model 700/S CD-ROM Drive, 7-8
move command, A-38
moving
boards in automatic mode, A-23
boards in interactive mode, A-38
Index-10

ISA boards, A-38
N

naming conventions
device file, 1-8
network-based printer, 10-3
non-volatile memory (NVM), A-6
driver for, A-18

o
online help, eisa_config, A-29
optical disk drive
C1701A 650GB, 7-17
C1701C 650GB, 7-17
Optical Disk Library System
Model 100GB/A, 7-13
Model 100GB/C, 7-13
Model 20GB/A, 7-13
Model 20GB/C, 7-13
Model 60GB/A, 7-13
Model 60GB/C, 7-13
optical library system
example mknod command, 14-21
minor number format, 14-21
options, eisa_config, A-26
organization
manual, 1-2
overVIew
adding a peripheral, 1-5
p

peripheral
overview of adding, 1-5
third party, 1-27
peripherals
adding a network-based printer, 10-3
making device files, A-35
permissions, device file, 14-13
plotters and digitizers
device driver name, 14-47
device files, 14-47

Index

major number, 14-47
minor number examples, 14-49
minor number format, 14-49
mknod command examples, 14-49
port number, 1-7
printers
device driver name, 14-52, 14-53
device file example, 14-55
device files, 14-52
device file type, 14-52
major numbers, 14-52
minor number format, 14-53
mknod command example, 14-55
parallel minor number format, 14-57
RS-232-C minor number format,
14-56
problems with configuration, A-48
program
/etc/config, 14-7
pseudo terminal
definition, 14-45
device file, 14-45
device file example, 14-46
master device, 14-45
mknod command example, 14-46
slave device, 14-45
pseudo terminals
adding process overview, 14-45
Q

quit command, A-32
quitting eisa_config, A-32

R
raw mode, 14-14
remove command, A-40
removmg
boards in automatic mode, A-24
boards in interactive mode, A-40
device drivers from kernel using SAM,
A-9

resolving conflicts with change, A-41
RS-232-C Interface
98626A, 2-35
running config, 14-7
S

SAM
adding EISA boards, A-18
overview of adding a peripheral, 1-5
reconfiguring the kernel to add/remove
device drivers, A-9
save command, A-33
saving configuration, A-32, A-33
sci files, A-6
creating new, A-33
SCSI device guidelines, 1-27
SCSI (Small Computer Systems
Interface)
98265A, 2-19
SCSI-type hard disk drive
example mknod command, 14-20
select code, 1-7
setting switches and jumpers, A-17,
A-34
show command, A-31
shutdown command, 14-8
single-user mode
required to configure kernel, 14-8
slave device
pseudo terminal, 14-45
slots, displaying information, A-31
Small Computer Systems Interface
(SCSI)
98265A, 2-19
special files, 1-7
SRM Interface
50961A, 2-46
98629A, 2-46
starting eisa_config, A-26
switches, A-3
setting, A-17, A-34
Index-11

Index

/SYSBCKUP, 14-7

T
TABLES
Device Drivers, 14-2
Tape Drive
7974A, 7-97
7978A, 7-103
7978B, 7-103
7979A, 7-109
7980A, 7-109
7980XC, 7-109
9144A, 7-92
9145A, 7-92
tape drives
device driver, 14-24
maj or number, 14-24
supported, 14-24
types, 14-22
Tape drives
DDS format, 7-128

Index-12

terminals
graphics, 5-2
removing, 14-44
terminals and modems
adding process overview, 14-35
device driver name, 14-43
device file example, 14-39
device file types, 14-35
major number, 14-37
minor number, 14-38
mknod example, 14-39
third party peripheral, 1-27
troubleshooting, A-48

u
using this manual, 1-3
V

VMEbus Expander
98577 A, 4-24

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.3
Linearized                      : No
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 4.2.1-c043 52.372728, 2009/01/18-15:56:37
Producer                        : Adobe Acrobat 9.13 Paper Capture Plug-in
Modify Date                     : 2009:08:13 19:52:12-07:00
Create Date                     : 2009:08:13 19:52:12-07:00
Metadata Date                   : 2009:08:13 19:52:12-07:00
Format                          : application/pdf
Document ID                     : uuid:b2b84f94-ff9f-491c-add3-460fd57b530b
Instance ID                     : uuid:6bd3221a-11c2-4f60-802f-8f91f8ac10d3
Page Layout                     : SinglePage
Page Mode                       : UseNone
Page Count                      : 760

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

B1864 90011_HP UX_Installing_Peripherials_Aug92 90011 HP UX Installing Peripherials Aug92

B1864-90011_HP-UX_Installing_Peripherials_Aug92 B1864-90011_HP-UX_Installing_Peripherials_Aug92

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation